Larsen Bay Fire O&M

22651 83rd Ave.
South
Kent, Washington 98032
Phone (206) 381-3090
Fax (206) 381-3490
AIDEA/AEA
Power System Upgrade
Larsen Bay, AK.
Job #1002-14
Ecaro Clean Agent

Fire Suppression system
Operation and Maintenance Manual

5/30/14
Submitted By:
Westfire Coastal, Inc.
22651 83rd Avenue South
Kent, Washington
(206) 381-3090
O&M Table of Contents

5/30/14
1.0
Operations & Maintenance Manuals

1.1
1.2
2.0
Control Panel
2.1
3.0
Ecaro clean agent

Ecaro storage cylinders
Ecaro nozzles
Warning signs
Impulse valve kit
Impulse valve
Impulse release module
Shop Drawing
5.1
6.0
Mini monitor module

Control module
Releasing module
Addressable photo-electric smoke detector
Addressable heat detector
Detector base
Manual release station
Abort station
Flame detector
W.P. strobe
Horn / Strobe
Battery
Clean Agent Equipment

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
5.0
Cheetah XI 50 addressable control panel
Field / Addressable Devices

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
4.0
Control Panel O&M

Ecaro O&M
AS-Built Shop Drawing
Calculations
6.1
6.2
6.3
NAC-1 Voltage drop

NAC-2 Voltage drop
Clean agent flow calculation
Product Manual
Cheetah Xi 50
P/N: 10-071
Addressable Fire Suppression

Control System
Manual P/N: 06-369
Rev. No: 0, 3/07
FIKE
INTRODUCTION
World Headquarters
704 South 10th Street
P.O. Box 610
Blue Springs, Missouri 64013
U.S.A.
Phone: (800) 979-FIKE (3453)
(816)229-3405
Fax:
(816)229-0314
Copyright Information
Warranties
This document may not be reproduced, in whole

or in part, by any means without the prior express
written permission of the copyright owner. All Fike
documentation and hardware are copyrighted with
all rights reserved.
Fike provides a one-year limited manufacturer's

warranty on this product. The standard warranty
is printed in each Marketing Price List.
All
warranty returns must be returned from an
authorized Fike Distributor.
Contact Fike's
Marketing Department for further warranty
information. Fike maintains a repair department
that is available to repair and return existing
electronic components or exchange/purchase
previously repaired inventory component (advance
replacement). All returns must be approved prior
to return. A Material Return Authorization (MRA)
number should be indicated on the box of the item
being returned. Contact the appropriate Regional
Sales Manager for further information regarding
Return Material Procedures.
Fike is a registered trademark of Fike.

Disclaimers
The information contained in this manual is as
accurate as possible. Fike does not guarantee
that this manual is technically correct, complete, or
free from writing problems or that this product is
free from minor flaws.
In accordance with our policy of continuing product
and system improvement, Fike reserves the right
to change designs or specifications without
obligation and without further notice.
Fike cannot be held liable for any damages

resulting from the use or misuse of this product.
Reader Responses
Fike encourages input from our distributors and
end users on how we can improve this manual
and even the product itself. Please direct all calls
of this nature to Fikes Systems Sales Department
at (800)-979-FIKE (3453), option 21.
Any communication
property of Fike.
UL S2203
FM 3029134
Limitation of Liability
received
becomes
the
Quality Notice
Fike has maintained ISO 9001 certification since
1996. Prior to shipment, we thoroughly test our
products and review our documentation to assure
the highest quality in all respects.
Cheetah Xi 50 Product Manual

Manual P/N: 06-369
-iRev. 0, 3/07
INTRODUCTION
FIKE
Warnings, Cautions, Notes and Tips
The following cautions and warnings appear in this manual. Be certain to read all of
the following warning and cautions before attempting to install or use this device.
Personal injury or accidental release of the suppression system may result if these
warnings and cautions are not followed!
Warning Symbol This symbol is used in this manual to warn of possible injury or
death from improper use or application of the product under noted conditions.
Caution Symbol This symbol warns of possible personal injury or equipment

damage under noted conditions. Follow all safety standards of professional practice
and the recommendations in this manual. Using equipment in ways other than
described in this manual can present serious safety hazards or cause equipment
damage.
Notes This symbol indicates the message is important, but is not of a Warning or
Caution category. These notes can be of great benefit to the user and should be
read.
Tips Tips provide advice that may save time during a procedure, or help to clarify
an issue. Tips may include additional reference.
-iiRev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N: 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
Title
Page
1.0
PREFACE ............................................................................................................................................... 1
2.0
SYSTEM OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................. 3
3.0
EQUIPMENT/PRODUCTS...................................................................................................................... 7
4.0
SYSTEM DESIGN................................................................................................................................. 32
5.0
OPERATION ......................................................................................................................................... 35
6.0
INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................................... 54
7.0
CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................................................ 77
8.0
SERVICE............................................................................................................................................... 95
APPENDIX 1 - BATTERY CALCULATION FORM....................................................................................... 119

"SYSTEM OPERATION POSTING" ............................................................................................................. 121
APPENDIX 3 CHEETAH XI 50 MENU STRUCTURE................................................................................ 123
APPENDIX 4 PRE-DISCHARGE AND ABORT TYPES............................................................................ 124
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
-iiiRev. 0, 3/07
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FIKE
LIST OF EXHIBITS
Exhibit 2-1 Cheetah Xi 50 Block Diagram ............................................................................................................. 3
Exhibit 3-1 Cheetah Xi 50 Control ....................................................................................................................... 11
Exhibit 3-2 Cheetah Xi 50 Controller .................................................................................................................... 12
Exhibit 3-3 Cheetah Xi 50 Terminal Block Locations........................................................................................... 12
Exhibit 3-4 Terminal P1 ....................................................................................................................................... 13
Exhibit 3-6 Terminal P3-P5.................................................................................................................................. 14
Exhibit 3-9 Terminal P8 and P9 ........................................................................................................................... 17
Exhibit 3-10 NAC Circuit Field Wiring Resistance ............................................................................................... 17
Exhibit 3-11 DACT ............................................................................................................................................... 18
Exhibit 3-12 DACT Programmer .......................................................................................................................... 18
Exhibit 3-13 Remote Display ............................................................................................................................... 19
Exhibit 3-14 Zone Annunciator ............................................................................................................................ 19
Exhibit 3-15 Ethernet Module .............................................................................................................................. 20
Exhibit 3-16 Multi-Interface Module ..................................................................................................................... 20
Exhibit 3-17 VESDA Open Protocol HLI.............................................................................................................. 20
Exhibit 3-18 LED Graphic .................................................................................................................................... 21
Exhibit 3-19 Ethernet Micore ............................................................................................................................... 21
Exhibit 3-20 Photo Sensor ................................................................................................................................... 22
Exhibit 3-21 Ion Sensor ....................................................................................................................................... 22
Exhibit 3-22 Photo/Heat Sensor .......................................................................................................................... 23
Exhibit 3-23 Thermal Sensor ............................................................................................................................... 23
Exhibit 3-24 Sensor Bases, 6 & 4 ..................................................................................................................... 24
Exhibit 3-25 Sounder Base .................................................................................................................................. 24
Exhibit 3-26 Relay Base ...................................................................................................................................... 24
Exhibit 3-27 Module Cover, 4 ............................................................................................................................. 25
Exhibit 3-28 Mini & 4 Input Modules................................................................................................................... 25
Exhibit 3-29 Input Module Functions ................................................................................................................... 25
Exhibit 3-30 Addressable Pull Station ................................................................................................................. 26
Exhibit 3-31 Supervised Control Module ............................................................................................................. 26
Exhibit 3-32 Solenoid Series Impedance............................................................................................................. 26
Exhibit 3-33 MasterBox Interface ........................................................................................................................ 26
Exhibit 3-34 Relay Module................................................................................................................................... 27
Exhibit 3-35 Releasing Control Module ............................................................................................................... 27
Exhibit 3-36 DUCT Sensor .................................................................................................................................. 28
Exhibit 3-37 IR Remote Tool................................................................................................................................ 29
Exhibit 3-38 DB9 Communication Cable ............................................................................................................. 30
Exhibit 3-39 USB Interface Cable ........................................................................................................................ 30
Exhibit 3-40 USB Communication Cable.............................................................................................................. 30
Exhibit 3-41 Batteries........................................................................................................................................... 31
Exhibit 3-42 33 AH Battery Enclosure ................................................................................................................. 31
Exhibit 3-43 75 AH Battery Enclosure ................................................................................................................. 31
Exhibit 5-1 Cheetah Xi 50 Display ....................................................................................................................... 35
Exhibit 5-2 System Status Display....................................................................................................................... 35
Exhibit 5-3 System Event Display........................................................................................................................ 35
Exhibit 5-4 Top Level Menu ................................................................................................................................. 35
Exhibit 5-5 Function Switch Display .................................................................................................................... 39
Exhibit 5-6 Password Menu ................................................................................................................................. 40
Exhibit 5-7 Reset Display..................................................................................................................................... 41
Exhibit 5-8 System Status Display....................................................................................................................... 41
Exhibit 5-9 Alarm Display..................................................................................................................................... 41
Exhibit 5-10 Trouble Display................................................................................................................................ 42
-ivRev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N: 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Exhibit 5-11 Supervisory Display .........................................................................................................................43

Exhibit 5-12 Pre-Discharge Display .....................................................................................................................43
Exhibit 5-13 Abort Display....................................................................................................................................44
Exhibit 5-14 Release Display ...............................................................................................................................44
Exhibit 5-15 Pre-Alarm Display ............................................................................................................................45
Exhibit 5-16 Process Display ...............................................................................................................................45
Exhibit 5-17 Zone Disable Display .......................................................................................................................46
Exhibit 5-18 Walktest Display ..............................................................................................................................46
Exhibit 5-19 Drill Display ......................................................................................................................................48
Exhibit 5-20 History menu ....................................................................................................................................49
Exhibit 5-21 Alarm History Menu .........................................................................................................................49
Exhibit 5-22 Supervisory History Menu................................................................................................................49
Exhibit 5-23 Trouble History Menu.......................................................................................................................49
Exhibit 5-24 Events History Menu........................................................................................................................49
Exhibit 5-25 Zone History Menu...........................................................................................................................49
Exhibit 5-26 Erase History Menu .........................................................................................................................50
Exhibit 5-27 Erase History Confirm......................................................................................................................50
Exhibit 5-28 Maintenance Menu ..........................................................................................................................50
Exhibit 5-29 Device Read Menu ..........................................................................................................................50
Exhibit 5-30 Device Address Menu......................................................................................................................50
Exhibit 5-31 Device Address Process Menu........................................................................................................50
Exhibit 5-32 Device Address/New Device Menu..................................................................................................50
Exhibit 5-33 Device Address/Changed Menu ......................................................................................................50
Exhibit 5-34 Device Replace Menu......................................................................................................................51
Exhibit 5-35 Device Replace/Source Menu .........................................................................................................51
Exhibit 5-36 Device Replace/Read Menu ............................................................................................................51
Exhibit 5-37 Device Replace/Write Menu ............................................................................................................51
Exhibit 5-38 Device Replace/Source Menu .........................................................................................................51
Exhibit 6-1 Enclosure Specifications....................................................................................................................56
Exhibit 6-2 33AH Enclosure Dimension ...............................................................................................................57
Exhibit 6-3 75AH Enclosure Dimension ...............................................................................................................58
Exhibit 6-4.1 Power Limited /Non Power Limited Wiring w/Relays Connected to Non Power Limited Sources .59
Exhibit 6-4.2 Power Limited /Non Power Limited Wiring w/Relays Connected to Power Limited Sources .........60
Exhibit 6-5 General Wire Specifications...............................................................................................................60
Exhibit 6-6 AC to Transformer Wiring ..................................................................................................................61
Exhibit 6-7 Main Controller and DACT.................................................................................................................62
Exhibit 6-8 AC and Battery Wiring .......................................................................................................................63
Exhibit 6-9 Cheetah Xi 50 Controller Wiring ........................................................................................................64
Exhibit 6-10 Wiring P2 Relays .............................................................................................................................65
Exhibit 6-11 RS232 Wiring (P3-P5) .....................................................................................................................65
Exhibit 6-12 RS485 Peripheral Bus Wiring (P6) ..................................................................................................66
Exhibit 6-13 Auxiliary Power Wiring (P7) .............................................................................................................67
Exhibit 6-14 Class B (Style 4) ..............................................................................................................................68
Exhibit 6-15 Class A (Style 6) ..............................................................................................................................68
Exhibit 6-16 Sensor Base Wiring .........................................................................................................................68
Exhibit 6-17 Survivability From Attack by Fire Wiring Options.............................................................................69
Exhibit 6-18 Mini Monitor Module Wiring .............................................................................................................70
Exhibit 6-19 Monitor Module Wiring-Class B .......................................................................................................70
Exhibit 6-20 Monitor Module Wiring-Class A .......................................................................................................70
Exhibit 6-21 Addressable Pull Station Wiring.......................................................................................................70
Exhibit 6-22 SCM Class B Wiring ........................................................................................................................71
Exhibit 6-23 SCM Class A Wiring ........................................................................................................................71
Exhibit 6-24 Pre-Action Solenoid Wiring ..............................................................................................................71
Exhibit 6-25 Auxiliary Masterbox Wiring ..............................................................................................................71
Exhibit 6-26 Relay Module Wiring........................................................................................................................72
Exhibit 6-27 RCM Module with ARM Wiring ........................................................................................................72
Exhibit 6-28 RCM Module with 24V Solenoid Wiring...........................................................................................72
Exhibit 6-29 RCM Module with two 12V Solenoid Wiring ....................................................................................72
Exhibit 6-30 NAC Circuit Wiring (P8-P9)..............................................................................................................73
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
-vRev. 0, 3/07
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FIKE
Exhibit 6-31 IR Communication Display .............................................................................................................. 75

Exhibit 7-1 90.23 (UL 864)................................................................................................................................... 77
Exhibit 7-2 Top Level Menu ................................................................................................................................. 83
Exhibit 7-3 Configuration Menu 1 ........................................................................................................................ 83
Exhibit 7-4 Alarm/Release Features Menu.......................................................................................................... 83
Exhibit 7-5 Device Config Menu .......................................................................................................................... 83
Exhibit 7-6 Delete Device Menu .......................................................................................................................... 84
Exhibit 7-7 Read/Write/Enable/Disable Menu ..................................................................................................... 84
Exhibit 7-8 Configuration Check Menu ................................................................................................................ 84
Exhibit 7-9 Release Features Menu .................................................................................................................... 84
Exhibit 7-10 NAC Config Menu............................................................................................................................ 85
Exhibit 7-11 NAC Functions Menu ...................................................................................................................... 85
Exhibit 7-12 NAC Zone Assigns Menu ................................................................................................................ 85
Exhibit 7-13 SLC Menu........................................................................................................................................ 85
Exhibit 7-14 Learn Menu...................................................................................................................................... 85
Exhibit 7-15 Learn New Screen ........................................................................................................................... 86
Exhibit 7-16 Learn All Screen .............................................................................................................................. 86
Exhibit 7-17 Config Menu 2 ................................................................................................................................. 86
Exhibit 7-18 Time Menu....................................................................................................................................... 86
Exhibit 7-19 Silence Menu ................................................................................................................................... 86
Exhibit 7-20 Power Menu..................................................................................................................................... 87
Exhibit 7-21 Daytime Sensitivity Menu ................................................................................................................ 87
Exhibit 7-22 Daytime Sens. Range Menu............................................................................................................ 87
Exhibit 7-23 Holidays Menu ................................................................................................................................. 87
Exhibit 7-24 Zone Menu....................................................................................................................................... 87
Exhibit 7-25 Configuration Menu 3 ...................................................................................................................... 88
Exhibit 7-26 Peripheral Menu ............................................................................................................................. 88
Exhibit 7-27 Peripherals Menu............................................................................................................................. 88
Exhibit 7-28 Configuration Menu ......................................................................................................................... 88
Exhibit 7-29 Command Set Menu........................................................................................................................ 89
Exhibit 7-30 Walktest ........................................................................................................................................... 89
Exhibit 7-31 Ground Fault Menu.......................................................................................................................... 89
Exhibit 7-32 Abort Menu ...................................................................................................................................... 89
Exhibit 7-33 Sensitivity Change Menu................................................................................................................. 89
Exhibit 7-35 AC Delay Menu................................................................................................................................ 90
Exhibit 7-36 VESDA Configuration Menu ............................................................................................................ 90
Exhibit 7-37 VESDA Alarm Menu ........................................................................................................................ 90
Exhibit 7-38 VESDA Sector Menu ....................................................................................................................... 90
Exhibit 7-39 Loop/Addr for Vesda Menu.............................................................................................................. 91
Exhibit 7-40 VESDA Release Menu .................................................................................................................... 91
Exhibit 7-41 Relay 1 and Relay 2 Menu .............................................................................................................. 91
Exhibit 7-42 Relay Function Menu...................................................................................................................... 91
Exhibit 7-43 Relay Zone Assign Menu ............................................................................................................... 92
Exhibit 7-44 Configuration 5 Menu ...................................................................................................................... 92
Exhibit 7-45 Panel Logo Menu............................................................................................................................. 92
Exhibit 7-46 Auto Address Screen....................................................................................................................... 92
Exhibit 7-47 Dialer Configuration Menu............................................................................................................... 92
Exhibit 7-48 Configure Network Menu................................................................................................................. 92
Exhibit 7-49 Network Panel ID Menu................................................................................................................... 93
Exhibit 7-50 Network Module Config Menu ......................................................................................................... 93
Exhibit 7-51 Network Zones Menu ...................................................................................................................... 93
Exhibit 7-52 Switch Menu .................................................................................................................................... 93
Exhibit 7-52 IP ADRress ...................................................................................................................................... 94
Exhibit 7-55 Member IP Supervision ................................................................................................................... 94
Exhibit 7-56 Member IP Supervision Timeout ..................................................................................................... 94
Exhibit 8-1 Diagnostic Menu 1 ............................................................................................................................. 96
Exhibit 8-2 Device Diagnostic Menu.................................................................................................................... 96
-viRev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N: 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Exhibit 8-3 Device LED & LOC Diagnostic Menu ................................................................................................96

Exhibit 8-4 Device S/N Diagnostic Menu .............................................................................................................97
Exhibit 8-5 Value 1 Diagnostic Screen.................................................................................................................97
Exhibit 8-6 Value 2 Diagnostic Screen.................................................................................................................98
Exhibit 8-7 Board Comm Diagnostic Menu ..........................................................................................................98
Exhibit 8-8 CRC Diagnostic Menu .......................................................................................................................99
Exhibit 8-9 Diagnostic Menu 2 .............................................................................................................................99
Exhibit 8-10 Keypad Diagnostics Menu ...............................................................................................................99
Exhibit 8-11 VESDA 1 Diagnostics Menu ..........................................................................................................100
Exhibit 8-12 VESDA 2 Diagnostics Menu ..........................................................................................................100
Exhibit 8-13 Peripheral Diagnostics Menu .........................................................................................................100
Exhibit 8-14 Buzzer Operation Menu .................................................................................................................101
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
-viiRev. 0, 3/07
FIKE
PREFACE
1.0 PREFACE
1.1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL
The manual is intended for those individuals who
are responsible for the design, installation and/or
maintenance of the Fike Cheetah Xi 50
Addressable Control System. Others such as
architects, engineers, sales and marketing
personnel, etc. will find the information useful as
well. It also allows those parties responsible for
verifying the system design to determine if the
design parameters have been met.
1.3
1.2 PRODUCT SUPPORT

If you have a question or encounter a problem not
covered in this manual, you should first try to
contact the distributor that installed the protection
system. Fike has a worldwide distribution network.
Each distributor sells, installs, and services Fike
equipment. Look on the inside of the door, left
side, there should be a sticker with an indication of
the distributor who sold the system. If you can not
locate the distributor, please call Fike Customer
Service for locating your nearest distributor, or go
to our web-site at www.fike.com. If you are unable
to contact your installing distributor or you simply
do not know who installed the system you can
contact Fike Product Support at (800) 979-FIKE
(3453) Option 21, Monday through Friday, 8:00 AM
to 4:30 PM CST.
REVISION HISTORY
Document Title: Cheetah Xi 50 Addressable Fire Alarm System Product Manual

Document Reorder Number: 06-369
Revision
Section
Date
Reason for Change
All Sections
3/2007
Initial Release
1.4
TERMS USED IN THIS MANUAL
Term
Description
Abort State
Symbol for ohm. Unit of resistance.

(Abort Yellow LED ON, Piezo pulsing) The Abort occurs when an input circuit
configured for abort operation has been activated while an alarm condition is present.
The abort state is a non-latching event and is intended for preventing a suppression
zone from advancing to the release state.
AC Normal State
(AC Normal Green LED ON) The system is in the AC Normal state when appropriate
AC power is being applied to the system.
Alarm State
(Alarm Red LED ON, Piezo pulsing) The alarm occurs when an input circuit
configured for alarm operation (typically a detector or contact device) has been
activated. The alarm state is a latching event in the Cheetah Xi 50. The operator will
be required to RESET the Cheetah Xi 50 in order for the panel to exit/clear the alarm
state.
Class A wiring
Input circuits capable of transmitting an alarm signal during a single open or a nonsimultaneous single ground fault on a circuit conductor shall be designated as Style D
or Class A. Similarly, output circuits capable of activating during a single open or a
non-simultaneous ground fault on a circuit conductor shall be designated as Style Z or
Class A. Commonly referred to as redundant or 4-wire connection.
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 1 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
PREFACE
FIKE
Term
Description
Class B wiring
Input circuits incapable of transmitting an alarm signal beyond the location of the fault
condition (listed for Class A wiring above) shall be designated as Style B or Class B.
Similarly, output circuits incapable of operating beyond the location of the fault
condition shall be designated as Style Y or Class B. This manual refers to 2-wire
connections as Class B wiring.
Initiating Device
A system component that originates transmission of a change-of-state condition, such

as in a smoke detector, manual fire alarm box, or supervisory switch. This manual
interchanges the terms initiating device and input device.
Initiating Device
Circuit
A circuit to which automatic or manual initiating devices are connected where the
signal received does not identify the individual device operated. This manual
interchanges the terms initiating device circuit and input circuit.
Normal State
(Trouble Yellow LED OFF) The system is in the normal state when the power supply
and all circuits are configured properly, connected, and responding properly. The
system remains in normal state until a trouble condition occurs.
Notification
Appliance
A fire alarm system component such as a bell, horn, speaker, light, or textual display
that provides audible, tactile, or visible output, or any combination thereof. The
device notifies building occupants of system status. This manual interchanges the
terms notification and audible appliance.
Notification
Appliance Circuit
A circuit or path directly connected to a notification appliance(s). This manual

interchanges the terms notification appliance circuit and audible circuit or NAC.
Non
Limited
A circuit designation given for wiring purposes. The amount of current flowing
through the circuit is unlimited vs. being limited, or power-limited. AC power and
Battery wiring is Non Power-limited.
Power-
Power-Limited
A circuit designation given for wiring purposes. The amount of current flowing
through the circuit is limited (typically by fuse) vs. being unlimited, or non-powerlimited. The addressable loops and output circuits are power-limited. The circuit has
a maximum power that flows through it or it current limits and opens the circuit.
Pre-Discharge
State
(Pre-Discharge Red LED ON, Piezo pulsing) Pre-Discharge occurs when an input
circuit configured for alarm operation has been activated and the Suppression PreDischarge type is satisfied. The Pre-Discharge state is a latching event in the
Cheetah Xi 50. The operator will be required to RESET the Cheetah Xi 50 in order for
the panel to exit/clear the Pre-Discharge state.
Release State
(Release Red LED ON, Piezo pulsing) Release occurs when an input circuit
configured for manual release operation has been activated or the Pre-Discharge
automatic countdown has expired with no Abort input active. The release state is a
latching event in the Cheetah Xi 50. The operator will be required to RESET the
Cheetah Xi 50 in order for the panel to exit/clear the release state.
Supervisory
State
(Supervisory Yellow LED ON, Piezo Warble) The supervisory state occurs upon
activation of a supervisory input circuit. The supervisory state is non-latching and will
follow the status of the supervisory input contact.
Trouble State
(Trouble Yellow LED ON, Piezo Constant) The trouble state occurs upon any
detectable condition which could impair system operation including connection
problems, ground faults, hardware problems, power problems, or configuration
problems. Certain trouble conditions are latching; others allow the system to reset
upon trouble condition removal. Depending upon the type of trouble condition, the
system may or may not remain operational. When the system is in trouble state, it is
not in the normal state.
Page 2 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N: 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2.0 SYSTEM OVERVIEW

2.1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
The Fike Cheetah Xi 50 (P/N 10-071) is a state of

the art, true addressable peer-to-peer fire
suppression control system. It provides the latest
technology in detection communication with
extensive programmability in one cost effective
system.
Its intelligence has every device
communicating as a peer on the signaling line
circuit. This intelligence provides speed with
response times between a manual pull station to
notification appliance as little as one-quarter
second.
Its flexibility provides you the freedom to attach

the devices you require for your specific
installation. The Cheetah Xi 50 has one signaling
line circuit capable of communicating to 50
addressable devices.
Audible
Alarm Signals
FIRE
Smoke & Thermal

Detectors
Audible and Visual

Alarm Signals
HVAC & Equipment
Shutdown
Waterflow & Sprinkler

Supervisory
Sprinkler
Preaction
Clean Agent,
CO2, or Watermist
Release
Manual Pull
Station
or Manual
Release and
Abort Stations
Peripheral
Annunciation
LED
Graphic
Exhibit 2-1 Cheetah Xi 50 Block Diagram
2.2
LISTINGS AND APPROVALS

Approval Agency
File Number
Underwriters Laboratories
S2203
Type:
Local, Remote Station, Central Station PPU
Service Type:
A-Automatic Fire Alarm, M-Manual Fire Alarm, Releasing Device
Service, WF-Water-flow alarm, SS-Sprinkler Supervisory Service,
DACT
Type Signaling: Non-coded
Factory Mutual (FM)
3029134
California State Fire Marshall (CSFM)
planned
City of New York (MEA)
planned
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 3 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2.3
FIKE
AGENCY STANDARDS AND COMPLIANCE
This Fire Alarm Control Panel complies with the following NFPA, and UL standards:
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code
UL 864 Standard for Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
UL 2017 General Purpose Signaling Devices and Systems
The installer should also be familiar with the following documents and standards:
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Codes:
NFPA 12 Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 12A Halon Fire Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 15 Water Spray Fixed Systems
NFPA 16 Deluge, Foam-water and Foam-water Spray Systems
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)
NFPA 70, Article 300 Wiring Methods
NFPA 70, Article 760 Fire Protective Signaling Systems
NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code
NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
NFPA 110 Emergency Standby Power Systems
NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Extinguishing Systems
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standards:
UL 38
UL 217
UL 228
UL 268
UL 268A
UL 346
UL 464
UL 521
UL 1481
UL 1638
UL 1971
Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes

Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station
Door Closers Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications
Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
Audible Signaling Appliances
Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
Visual Signaling Appliances
Visual Signaling Appliances
Factory Mutual (FM) Standards:

FMRC 1011 and 1012 Deluge and Pre-Action Sprinkler Systems
Applicable Local and State Building Codes
Requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction
2.4
RELATED DOCUMENTATION
To obtain a complete understanding of the specific

features of the Cheetah Xi 50 or to become
familiar with related functions in general, refer to
Document Title
the documentation listed below. Please reference

the most current version or the version noted on
the label located on the product.
Part Number
Revision No, Date
06-186
06-182
06-231
06-229
06-344
06-158
3, 09/06
3, 07/05
1, 10/04
2, 07/05
1, 07/05
2, 12/06
Compatible Notification Appliances and Releasing Dev.

Remote Display Unit
LED Graphic and Zone Annunciators
Masterbox Supervisor
Series Solenoid Resistor/Diode
VESDA High Level Interface
Page 4 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N: 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
2.5
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
CHEETAH XI 50 FEATURES
GENERAL
SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT
Two 24V DC, Class A or B, 1.75A NAC

(audible) circuits on main board with
integrated synchronization
Address devices with Infrared (IR) tool, similar

to remote control device, non-listed see pg 77
2 configurable relays and one Trouble relay
253 user defined zones
One
addressable
loop,
capable
communicating to a maximum of
addressable devices
80 character, backlit LCD display
NFPA style 4, 6 or 7
Real time clock
True peer-to-peer digital protocol for extremely

fast and reliable communications
3200 event history buffer
Device learn/auto-program function
Critical process monitoring
Automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment
One-person Walktest capability
Automatic holiday sensitivity adjustment
Disable by zone (or address with password)
New Acclimate operation for sensors
Drill function at panel and 14 button remote
Provides solenoid releasing operation
IR Tool provides ability to read sensitivity

levels or perform remote test of device
Alarm verification
Easy to add/remove devices
Devices contain multi-color LED for quick

reference of device status
Diagnostic menus
Local piezo with distinct event tones
Sensors provide early warning pre-alarm

detection and can also provide a summing
feature (up to 8 sensors), non-listed pg 75
10 Status LEDs to easily identify system

status
Sounder or Relay Bases fully programmable
Optional Remote LED can be added to a

sensor base, programmable for any device,
zone/state
Available with and without integral SERIAL,

Point ID DACT interface
Supports up to 31 peripheral devices such as

Remote Display and LED Graphic
of
50
ENCLOSURE
POWER
24V DC power supply rated for 2A during

Normal Standby, 5.25A in Alarm. The power
is shared between all outputs circuits and to
include the control panel
Steel Enclosure 22.10 high by 14.35 wide by

3.25 deep (Back-box dimensions)
Enclosure is equipped with a 0.50 wide lip to

facilitate flush mounting
Removable door for ease in installation
Operation from 120VAC/ 60 Hz or 240VAC

50 /60Hz
Two enclosure options available: with or

without deadfront cover
Two 24V DC, 1.75A continuous auxiliary

power outputs
Available in Red or Grey
Supports up to 75 AH of batteries
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 5 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
FIKE
EQUIPMENT/PRODUCTS
3.0 EQUIPMENT/PRODUCTS
3.1
SYSTEM MODULES
The following system modules are available for the Cheetah Xi 50 control System:
Part Number
10-071-c-p
or
10-071-c-p-d
10-2622
10-2623-c
or
10-2623-c-d
Description
Cheetah Xi 50 System, includes Controller, Enclosure, and Transformer
c: (R=Red, G=Grey) p: (1=120V, 2= 240V ) d=deadfront
Cheetah Xi 50 System Controller (included with 10-071-c-p and d)
Enclosure c: (R=Red, G=Grey; included with 10-071-c-p and -d) d=deadfront
10-2628-c
Deadfront, 50 Point Panel; c: (R=Red, G=Grey)
02-10881
Transformer, 120VAC primary; (included with 1 option)
02-10882
Transformer, 240VAC primary; (included with 2 option
10-2528
BOSCH DACT Model D9068, 5 zone with Serial interface-for mntg. Internal
10-2476
BOSCH DACT Model D9602, 5 zone with Serial interface-w/enclosure
10-2321
FIKE Remote Display
10-2373
Zone Annunciator
10-11x
LED Graphic
10-2627
Ethernet Module (non-listed, see pg 77)
10-2583
Multi-Interface Module (non-listed, see pg 77)
68-023
VESDA Open Protocol High Level Interface (HLI)
26-031
Ethernet Interface Micore (non-listed, see pg 77)
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 7 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
EQUIPMENT / PRODUCTS
3.2
FIKE
ADDRESSABLE DEVICES
3.2.1
Standard Devices (for Style 4 or 6 wiring)
Part Number
Description
63-1052
Photoelectric Sensor
67-033
Ionization Sensor
63-1053
Photo/135F Heat Combination Sensor
60-1039
Intelligent Heat Detector, 135-190F (57-88C) Fixed Temp./ Rate of Rise
63-1054
Sensor Base, 6
63-1055
Sensor Base, 4
63-1064
Sounder Base, 6
63-1063
Relay Base, 6
55-045
MMM - Mini Monitor Module
55-041
MM Monitor Module, 4
20-1063
APS - Addressable Pull Station
55-042
SCM Supervised Control Module
10-2360
Series Solenoid Diode/Resistor
10-2413
Masterbox Interface
55-043
RM Relay Module
55-052
RCM Release Control Module
63-1057
Photo DUCT sensor
63-1056
DUCT Detector Housing with relays (isolator base)
02-3721
Sampling Tube, Duct Detector, 1.5
02-3722
02-3723
02-3724
3.2.2
Note: new installation requires

both pieces to be ordered.
Isolator Devices (required for Style 7 wiring- base AND head if applicable )
Note: Maximum of 50 NON-isolator devices between two Isolator devices if true style 7 is not required.
Part Number
Description
63-1058
Photo Sensor with Isolator (ED-PI)
67-034
Ionization Sensor with Isolator (ED-II)
63-1059
Photo/135 F Heat Combination Sensor with Isolator (ED-PTI)
60-1040
Intelligent Heat Det., 135-190F (57-88C) Fixed Temp./ Rate of Rise with Isolator (ED-TI)
63-1060
Sensor Base, 6 with Isolator (EBFI)
63-1061
Sensor Base, 4 with Isolator (EBI)
55-050
MMM Mini Monitor Module with Isolator (EM-1MMI)
55-046
MM Monitor Module, 4 with Isolator (EM-1SMI)
20-1064
PSMM Pull Station Monitor Module with Isolator (EM-1PI)
55-047
SCM Supervised Control Module with Isolator (EM-1SRI)
55-048
RM Relay Module with Isolator (EM-1RI)
55-053
RCM Release Control Module with Isolator (EM-1RMI)
63-1062
Photo DUCT sensor with Isolator (ED-PDI)
Page 8 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N: 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
3.3
EQUIPMENT/PRODUCTS
PROGRAMMING/CONFIGURATION EQUIPMENT
The following parts are used for configuration, testing, and or diagnostics of the Cheetah Xi 50:
Part Number
Description
55-051
Infrared (IR) Tool Remote Control for Programming/Testing Devices

(non-Listed, see page 77)
06-327
C-Linx Software
10-2629
Interface cable, USB/A Male to USB/B Male for ALL configurations
10-1874A
Interface Cable for C-Linx Software (DB9 to RJ11) Optional for

direct peripheral configuration at LED Graphic and Zone Annunciator
10-1874B
USB to DB9 Converter (p/n 02-11139) with 10-1874A interface cable

Provides ability to use USB serial port on laptop (USB-DB9-RJ11)
with 10-1874A cable (optional for direct peripheral config only)
10-2477
3.4
DACT Programmer
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
Refer to Compatible Notification Appliances and Releasing Devices manual part number 06-186.
3.5
FACTORY MUTUAL APPROVED SOLENOIDS
Refer to Compatible Notification Appliances and Releasing Devices manual part number 06-186.
3.6
BATTERIES AND BATTERY ENCLOSURES

Part Number
Description
10-2626
12 AH Battery Assembly w/ wiring assembly
10-2190-2
18 AH Battery Assembly w/ wiring assembly
10-2192
Wiring Assembly for 7AH, 12AH and 18AH Batteries (wire only)
10-2517
Wire Assembly with Battery EOL
02-2018
Battery, 12V, 7AH (requires 2 each)
02-11725
Battery, 12V, 12 AH (Requires 2 each)
02-2820
02-3468
A02-0252
02-4206
10-2154-R
33AH Battery Enclosure, Red, no batteries
10-2154-G
33AH Battery Enclosure, Grey, no batteries
10-2236-R
75AH Battery Enclosure, Red, no batteries
10-2236-G
75AH Battery Enclosure, Grey, no batteries
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 9 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
3.7
FIKE
SPARE PARTS
Part Number
Description
02-4035
Hardware Kit, #6 lock washers and hex nuts (30 each)
02-10788
Standoff kit, 5/8 M/F, 4 each required for DACT (10 each supplied)
02-4009
Standoff, 2 M/F, for Cheetah Xi 50, 4 each required (1 each supplied)
02-11751
Standoff, 2 F/F, for Cheetah Xi 50, 1 each required (1 each supplied)
02-11127
Terminal Block, 4 position for P1 Power
02-11823
Key lock with cam
02-4983
Panel Key Only (without cam)
02-10881
Transformer, 120VAC
02-10882
Transformer, 240 VAC
02-4040
Battery, Lithium Coin Cell, 3V
02-11259
Monitor & Control Module EOL Assembly, 39K
10-2530
14K Series Resistor, for Monitor Module Short Circuit detection
10-2570
Audible output circuit EOL assembly, 1.2K
02-4174
Fuse, 15 Amp, Mini-Auto, Fast Acting (For F1 & F2) (Littlefuse p/n 297015)
02-11412
Fuse, 4 Amp, Mini-Auto, Fast Acting (For F3-5) (Littlefuse p/n 297004)
02-4981
End Of Line Relay System Sensor EOLR-1
02-2519
10-2570
Termination Resistor, 100 ohm (for RS485 circuit)

End of Line Resistor, 1.2 K (for NAC 1 & 2)
02-11723
Bezel
Touch-Up Paint (Not available from Fike)
Red-Sherwin Williams - #F63VXR9951-4343 Polane
2.8T Plus Polyurethane Enamel
Grey-Sherwin Williams - #F63VXA9975 Polane
T Plus Polyurethane
Page 10 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N: 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
3.8
EQUIPMENT/PRODUCTS
SPECIFICATIONS SYSTEM MODULES
3.8.1 Environmental:
All electronics are rated 32 - 120F (0 - 49C) 93% relative humidity.
3.8.2 Primary Input AC Power:

120 VAC, 60 Hertz, 2.22 Amps, 225 VA (Transformer 02-10881)
240 VAC, 50/60 Hertz, 1.45 Amps, 348 VA (Transformer 02-10882)
System AC line power must originate from a dedicated circuit at the
main building power distribution center. This wiring is non power
limited. The circuit breaker shall be equipped with a lockout
mechanism and be clearly labeled as a Fire Protection Control
Circuit.
3.8.3 Cheetah Xi 50 Control System, 10-071-c-p

(-d)
The enclosure is available in a red (-r) or grey (-g) color
option. There are two different power options available
120VAC (-1) or 240VAC (-2). It comes with a rectangle
opening in the door for the viewing window of the LCD. The
10-071-c-p comes with the back-box, door, Cheetah Xi 50
controller, transformer, and mounting hardware. The 10-071c-p-d comes with everything listed above and includes the
deadfront.
See the installation section for complete
dimensional specifications on the enclosure. The enclosure,
10-2623-c (-d)if ordered separately, accommodates space for
the Controller, Transformer and optional 10-2528 DACT, and
a 7AH, 12AH or 18AH battery pack.
The door is easily removable, via two screws, from the
enclosure during installation. Mounting Method:
Surface:
Using four teardrop shaped mounting
holes on back of panel
12.5 horizontal centers
Exhibit 3-1 Cheetah Xi 50 Control System
19.2 vertical centers

Flush:
Using two through holes on each side.

Back Box has a .50" wide front lip to
facilitate flush mounting.
Dimensions:
Backbox:
22.1" (H) x 14 .35" (W) x 3.25" (D)
Door:
Deadfront:
23" (H) x 15.3" (W) x 1.50" (D)

20.35" (H) x 14.13" (W) x 1.25" (D)
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 11 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
FIKE
CHEETAH XI 50 CONTROLLER, 10-2622:

The Cheetah Xi 50 Controller contains the power supply,
microprocessors, hardware interface, Display, and
keypad. The controllers internal power supply provides
2 Amps Normal Standby Current / 5.25 Amps Alarm
Current.
Power consumption of the controller itself is 0.116 amps
at 24VDC in the normal standby mode.
Control Board is 11 long x 8 tall x 3 deep; (1.0 lbs).
Exhibit 3-2 Cheetah Xi 50 Controller
The following are the specifications for the 10-2622 controller listed in order of terminal block designation (P):
P2
P10
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P1
Exhibit 3-3 Cheetah Xi 50 Terminal Block Locations
Page 12 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N: 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
EQUIPMENT/PRODUCTS
P1 - Power Supply Input

Exhibit 3-4 Terminal P1
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
NOMINAL RANGE
SPECIFICATION DETAILS
AC Transformer
secondary
Non-power-limited
Fused by F1, 15A field replaceable fuse

P/N 02-4174
Supervised
Wiring 16AWG minimum, THHN
24 VOLT AC
Secondary
Term. 1 & 2
(same for both
120VAC and
240VAC xfrmr)
Terminal block accepts 12 AWG16 AWG

Sealed lead-acid batteries only.
75 amp-hour maximum.
BATTERY
Term. 3 & 4
+ -
Standby Battery
24VDC nominal
Non-power-limited
Supervised
Maximum supply current: 12 amps/ 27VDC

Fused by F2, 15A field replaceable fuse,
P/N 02-4174
Maximum charge current: 4 amps/ 27Vdc
Batteries larger than 18 AH shall be
mounted in external enclosure and the
following qualifications apply:
Wire Gauge shall be 14 AWG minimum.
Maximum wire length shall not exceed 10
feet.
CAUTION: It is critical that AC is applied to the left terminals of P1 and NOT the right
terminals (battery) 3 and 4. Damage to the controller could occur if not followed see
Section 6.3
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 13 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
FIKE
P2 Relays:
DESCRIPTION
WIRING
SPDT Form C relay contact
Common
Term. 1 C
DC operation: 5 amps @30VDC (pf=.35)
AC operation: 0.5 amps @120VAC (pf=.35)
Normally Closed *See below
Term. 2 NC
Common (system) operation
Default as Alarm Common (system) operation
Normally Open
Term. 3 NO
but can be configurable
Common
Term. 4 C
Normally Closed *See below
Term. 5 NC
Default as Supervisory but can be
Normally Open
Term. 6 NO
configurable
Common
Term. 7 C
*See below
Normally Open
Term. 8 NO
Normally Energized relay, contacts shown
with power applied and no troubles
Normally Closed
Term. 9 NC
*May be connected to power-limited or non power-limited sources. All connections to terminal block shall be
either power limited or non-power limited, not both.
TROUBLE
RELAY 2
RELAY 1
TERMINAL
P3 P5 USB & RS232 Interface

Circuits:
Exhibit 3-6 Terminal P3-P5
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
WIRING
P3
Computer
Interface
USB
Power Limited
Supervised
P4
VESDA HLI
P/N 68-023
RS232
Cable 02-3053
Power Limited
Supervised
P5
Peripherals
RS232
Power Limited
Supervised
Page 14 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
The PC is required to run C-Linx Software
Version 3.0.0.0 (P/N 06-327). Not intended
for continuous connection - Configuration and
data retrieval only. DO NOT CONNECT THE
PC IF A GROUND FAULT IS PRESENT.
Also used for C-Linx connection
programming RS485 Peripheral Devices.
for
50 Feet Maximum (the HLI includes the 14

RS232 Cable, 02-3053).
HLI must be
powered from Cheetah Xi 50 Aux. power
output.
Intelligently links Vision Systems VESDA
detectors (by zone #) to the Cheetah Xi 50
(each a unique zone #, 0-255). Does NOT
require loop address.
Currently not used.

Manual P/N: 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
EQUIPMENT/PRODUCTS
P6 24V AUX Out and

RS485 Peripheral Interface:
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
WIRING
Two separate circuits rated 24VDC, 1.75A

maximum each, Regulated. (28V max)
24V
AUXILIARY
OUTPUTS
Continuous
24VDC Power
Output
Power Limited
Supervised
Fused by F3-4 for short circuit, 4A field

replaceable fuse P/N 02-11412
Used to power Control Modules, Remote
Display, Graphics, etc.
+ -
4000 feet , 31 devices maximum, 9600 bps

5VDC, 1mA
RS485
Maximum wire impedance

Maximum capacitance 0.05uF
PER
PERIPHERAL
INTERFACE
+ SHLD
DACT
+ -
Power Limited
Field
Peripherals
Supervised
Drain-Chassis
DACT
Belden 9841 or
equivalent. For
plenum applications
use Belden 82841,
82842, or 89841.
No t-tapping
110
ohms,
100 termination is required on the last device

supplied with the remote device (02-2519)
Typical voltage will be varying between 01VDC. It should never be a constant voltage or
0VDC.
Peripheral Device must be configured as
Supervised, if 2-way operation is required
(using Reset, Silence, Acknowledge from
Remote Display)
Field Peripherals include:
Fike Remote Display
Zone Annunciator
LED Graphic
Multi-Interface Module
Ethernet Module
Note: The standard Cheetah Xi 50 Control Panel has a total power capability of 5.25A.
Use Battery Calculation software in C-Linx Software or the form in Appendix 1 to determine
proper system design.
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 15 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
FIKE
P7 Signaling Line Circuit (SLC):

TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
WIRING
Supports up to 50 addressable devices
(only those listed in this manual)
Supports Class B, Style 4 or
Class A, Style 6 or Class A, Style 7* (using
isolator devices)
50mA maximum, 28VDC maximum
P7
+ - SHLD ++ --
Addressable
Loop 1
Power Limited
Supervised
Maximum Resistance = 70 ohms

( 35 ohms per leg )
Maximum Capacitance = .60 uf
12,000 ft. max distance from panel to last
device. (total line length, tested using 14
AWG)
Terminal block accepts 12 AWG 24 AWG
*When installing the addressable loop in a
Style 7 format, the first and last addressable
isolator device wiring to the control panel
shall be mounted within conduit, within the
same room, and no more than 20 feet from
the fire alarm panel enclosure.
Note: Shielded cable is NOT REQUIRED but should be used for electrically noisy environments.
Page 16 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N: 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
EQUIPMENT/PRODUCTS
P8-P9 Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC):

Exhibit 3-9 Terminal P8 and P9
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
WIRING
Regulated 24VDC, 1.75.0 Amps maximum
(Continuous output, 28V max.)
Supports Class B, Style Y using 1.2K End Of
Line (EOL) resistor, P/N 10-2570; OR Class A,
Style Z using redundant wiring.
Always active during DRILL
Power Limited
P8
+ - SHLD ++ --
Notification
Appliance
Circuit 1
Can
be
programmed
for
automatic
Synchronization protocols from System Sensor
or Gentex. When selected, both circuits must
use the same protocol. When silenced, just the
horn portion of the device will silence (strobes
remain flashing).
Supervised
No t-tapping
Maximum # of synchronized devices is limited

to the amount of current for the circuit (1.75
amps).
Power Limited
P9
+ - SHLD ++ --
Notification
Appliance
Circuit 2
Supervised
Same as noted in NAC1 above
No t-tapping
The NAC circuit field wiring resistance is limited by the amount of anticipated load. Many local authorities
require a voltage drop calculation be performed to demonstrate the lowest voltage present at the last device.
The designer shall determine the resistance of the wire specified and distance for the installation needs.
From this information, they can determine the total resistance for the circuit. The following chart provides
the maximum field wiring resistance for total device current that can also be used as a tool:
Max Current (Amps)
Audible Max s
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.8
1.0
1.5
2.0
24
12
4.8
4.0
3.0
2.4
1.6
1.2
Exhibit 3-10 NAC Circuit Field Wiring Resistance

Further details on Notification Appliances may be found in the Compatible Notification Appliances and
Releasing Devices Manual P/N 06-186.
P10 Fike use only

P11 Fike use only
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 17 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
FIKE
3.8.4 DACT, 5 ZONE WITH SERIAL INTERFACE, 10-2528

or 10-2476 same DACT with Enclosure
The Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT) provides
interface with Central Station or Remote Station monitoring
systems. It is available with 5 contact zones of connection OR the
intelligent serial point id interface. The Contact ID format is the
preferred reporting format. It provides a four digit account code
followed by a three digit event code, a two digit group number, and
a three digit contact number, all of which are used to provide
specific point identification. This dialer can also provide an SIA or
4/2 Pulse reporting format. The Fike 10-2528 is a BOSCH model
D9068. The Fike 10-2476 is a BOSCH D9602. DACT must be
purchased from Fike for proper Point ID functionality.
4 long x 6-1/2 tall x 1 deep; 0.32 lb.
Exhibit 3-11 DACT
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
+/-
24VDC
A/B
RS485
NOMINAL RANGE
10.2 28VDC
Connect to Cheetah Xi 50 24VDC Aux.

power.
Pulls 150mA Standby; 190mA Alarm
Connect to the Cheetah Xi 50 P6, DACT
positions + and A wires to -; B wires to +
Compatible Receivers ()
Report
Format
Radionics
D6500
Sur-gard
SG-SLR
Osborne/Hoffman
Quick Alert Model II
SIA 300
SIA 110
Contact ID
Radionics
D6600
4/2
Ademco
Silent Knight
SK9000
Refer to document 45386C, D9068 Operation and Installation Guide for more details.
3.8.5 DACT PROGRAMMER P/N 10-2477

This Programmer is necessary for configuring the 102528 and 10-2476 Dialer shown above. Reference
D9068 Operation & Installation Guide, Bosch document
45386D or D9602 Reference Guide, Bosch document
45387D respectively.
6.2 wide x 4.2 tall x 1.4 deep;
Exhibit 3-12 DACT Programmer
Page 18 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N: 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
EQUIPMENT/PRODUCTS
3.8.6 FIKE REMOTE LCD DISPLAY, 10-2321

This module provides information about the host Cheetah Xi
50 System in a remote location. It receives the intelligent
DataStream from the RS485 output of the Cheetah Xi 50. It
also provides the capability to operate up to 8 programmable
buttons (Rest, Silence, Acknowledge, etc). Each button may
be labeled using Avery label 6467 or 5418. It also has an
internal piezo to provide instant audible notification of status
change. Security to the unit is available via the standard Fike
key. It mounts to a 5 gang masonry box (Raco 694). The
unit can be surface or flush mounted. See Remote LCD
Display manual 06-182 for more details.
Exhibit 3-13 Remote Display
Approx. 9-7/32 long x 3-3/4 high x 2 deep; Weight 2 lbs.

TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
P1
24VDC power
P2/P3
RS485 In/Out
WIRING
Non Power
limited
Unsupervised
Power limited
Supervised
Each Fike Remote Display pulls 25mA during
normal standby and 105mA during alarm.
Belden 9841 or equivalent, 4000 maximum
cable distance. For plenum applications use
Belden 82841, 82842, or 89841.
Maximum of 31 devices with last device on
network terminated with 100 ohm resistor (022519).
3.8.7 FIKE ZONE ANNUNCIATOR, 10-2373

The Zone Annunciator provides instant visual status of up to
10 zones of fire protection. Each zone has a red Alarm LED
and yellow Trouble/Supervisory LED. Each LED is individually
programmable for zone(s) and state(s). Each LED can be
labeled using Avery label 6467 or 5418. It is intended to be
powered via the Cheetah Xi 50 panel 24VDC auxiliary power.
It communicates with the main control panel via RS485
communication. The annunciator provides the capability to
remotely reset, silence, and acknowledge the main control
panel. Security to the unit is available via the standard Fike
key. It mounts to a 5 gang masonry box (Raco 694). The unit
can then be surface or flush mounted. See LED Graphic and
Zone Annunciator manual 06-231 for more details.
Exhibit 3-14 Zone Annunciator
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
WIRING
P1
24VDC power
Non Power
limited
Unsupervised
Each Zone Annunciator pulls 34mA during normal

standby and 83mA during alarm.
Power limited
Supervised
Belden 9841 or equivalent, 4000 maximum cable

distance. For plenum applications use Belden 82841,
82842, or 89841.
Maximum of 31 devices with last device on network
terminated with 100 ohm resistor (02-2519).
P2
UL S2203
FM 3029134
RS485 In/Out

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 19 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
FIKE
3.8.8 ETHERNET MODULE, 10-2627 (NON-LISTED SEE

PAGE 77)
The Ethernet Module provides the ability to network Multiple
Cheetah Xi 50 panels via Ethernet/IP. This module is connected to
the Cheetah Xi 50 via the peripheral connections at P6 and will be
configured as a peripheral device. In order to utilize the remote
monitoring capability, a network ID must be assigned to each panel
for identification purposes. This module connects to the Panel at
P6 PER + and and also requires 24 volts DC from the panel to P1
+ and on the Ethernet module. P3 is for the Ethernet connection
to the module. See the 06-388 Ethernet Module manual for more
details.
Exhibit 3-15 Ethernet Module
3.8.9 MULTI-INTERFACE MODULE, 10-2583 (NONLISTED SEE PAGE 77)

This Module provides the ability to have printer interface capability
via Serial or Parallel. It also provides the ability to connect the
Cheetah Xi 50 to the network of the Cheetah Classic. This module
is connected to the Cheetah Xi 50 via the peripheral connections at
P6 and will be configured as a peripheral device. It connects to the
interface module at P1 Peripheral Buss. The module also requires
24 volts DC to P1 Power input + and -from the panel. The Serial
and parallel printer ports are DB25 connections. When using the
Keltron printer it requires a 2 wire connection to the Printer + and
and a connection of the DB25 to P2. When using the Epson
Printer, it supplies its own power with 120 volts AC and connected
to the module at P3. See the 06-367 Multi-Interface manual for
more details.
Exhibit 3-16 Multi-Interface Module
3.8.10 FIKE / VESDA HIGH LEVEL INTERFACE

(HLI), 68-023
The Fike VESDA Open Protocol High Level Interface (HLI) is
a custom device that will transmit all Vision System
VESDAnet LaserPLUS detector information intelligently from
the VESDAnet into the Fike control panel. The HLI is
connected to the Cheetah Xi 50 at P4 (within 50) and must
be powered from the Cheetah Xi 50 24V continuous Auxiliary
output. The HLI is mounted in a 12 long x 6 tall x 4 deep
gray enclosure (the electronics are mounted on the cover.
The HLI can be located at any point on the VESDAnet (within
4000 of the other VESDA devices in the loop). See the 06158 VESDA HLI manual for more details.
Exhibit 3-17 VESDA Open Protocol HLI
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
WIRING
P1
24VDC power
Non Power
limited
Unsupervised
The HLI pulls 190mA during normal standby and alarm.
P2
VESDAnet
RS485 In/Out
Power limited
Supervised
Belden 9841 or equivalent, 4000 maximum cable

distance. For plenum applications use Belden 82841,
82842, or 89841.
Maximum of 255 detectors
P3
RS232
Power limited
Supervised
Intelligent serial data provided from the VESDAnet to

Cheetah Xi 50 terminal P4 using supplied cable (023053 four conductor cable). Must be within 50.
Page 20 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N: 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
EQUIPMENT/PRODUCTS
3.8.11 ADDRESSABLE LED GRAPHIC, 10-11X

The LED Graphic is a custom made display that provides a
specific building layout pictorial with the actual fire alarm
devices indicated with a color status LED (red, green,
yellow or orange). When an event occurs, the intelligent
data will be transferred via the RS485 output to the graphic
and the specific device or zone LED will light as
programmed.
Exhibit 3-18 LED Graphic
TERMINAL
DESCRIPTION
P1
24VDC power
P2
RS485 In/Out
WIRING
Power limited
Unsupervised
Power limited
Supervised
Each GDB256 pulls 43mA during normal
standby and 74mA during alarm.
Belden 9841 or equivalent, 4000 maximum
cable distance. For plenum applications use
Belden 82841, 82842, or 89841.
Maximum of 31 devices with last device on
network terminated with 100 ohm resistor
(02-2519).
3.8.12 ETHERNET INTERFACE / MICORE, P/N 26-031 (NON-LISTED, SEE PG 77)

The Cheetah Xi 50 Micore device provides the ability to
translate the Cheetah Xi 50 intelligent data from the P6
RS485 output to an Ethernet connection. The Micore must
not be used in conjunction with other UL listed peripherals
on P6. The customer can then view Cheetah Xi 50 system
status and history from any local network connection. The
Micore can also be assigned to e-mail and File Transfer
Protocol (FTP) events to a specific computer that is
running Commandview software to display the events on a
custom graphic display. Each Micore is shipped with an
evaluation version of SitePro 10 Screens max. (views)
8 addresses max. - Each address is 128 digital points
2 e-mails max (as a function from the Micore and
receive all events)
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Exhibit 3-19 Ethernet Micore
Page 21 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
3.9
FIKE
SPECIFICATIONS ADDRESSABLE DEVICES
All electronics are rated 32 - 120F (0 - 49C), 10- 93% relative humidity, unless otherwise noted. Each
addressable device requires a normal operating voltage 15 to 30VDC (supplied by the SLC).
3.9.1
PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE SENSOR, 63-1052

PHOTOELECTRIC WITH ISOLATOR, 63-1058
The photo sensor provides peer-to-peer digital protocol for reliable fast
communications. The sensor includes a tri-color LED for instant indication of
device status. An Acclimate feature is defaulted ON to provide optimum fire
detection response. This feature allows sensors to respond to the particular
environment. Its operating parameters are maintained within non-volatile
RAM in the sensor. The sensors should be spaced at 30apart for smooth
ceiling/low airflow as per NFPA.
Dual Alarms (night and day sensitivity) with threshold settings between 1.3
3.6%/ft.
Dual Pre-Alarms with threshold setting between 0.5-3.6%/ft.
Configurable for Acclimate, Alarm Verification, and Drift Compensation.
Timebased groups may be assigned for switching sensitivity levels between
Day and Night levels during different times of the day and Holidays. The
isolator version provides complete short circuit isolation for NFPA Style 7
wiring if used with an isolator base.
Standby Current: 0.250mA
Alarm Current: 2mA max.
Weight: 5.2 oz (147g)
Height: 2.1 (51mm) installed in base
Diameter: 4.1 (104mm)
3.9.2
Exhibit 3-20 Photo Sensor
IONIZATION SENSOR, 67-033

IONIZATION SENSOR WITH ISOLATOR, 67-034
The ion sensor provides peer-to-peer digital protocol for reliable fast
communications. The sensor includes a tri-color LED for instant indication of
device status. An Acclimate feature is defaulted ON to provide optimum fire
detection response. This feature allows sensors to respond to the particular
environment. Its operating parameters are maintained within non-volatile
RAM in the sensor. The sensors should be spaced at 30apart for smooth
ceiling/low airflow as per NFPA.
Dual Alarms (night and day sensitivity) with threshold settings between 10040 uAmps MIC. Dual Pre-Alarms with threshold setting between 100-40
uAmps MIC.
Configurable for Acclimate, Alarm Verification, Drift
Compensation, and Summing. Time based groups may be assigned for
switching sensitivity levels between Day and Night levels during different
times of the day and Holidays. The isolator version provides complete short
circuit isolation for NFPA Style 7 wiring if used with an isolator base.
Alarm Current: 4.4mA max.
Exhibit 3-21 Ion Sensor
Note: The Ion sensor has an approved airflow rating of

1200 fpm maximum.
Page 22 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N: 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
EQUIPMENT/PRODUCTS
3.9.3 PHOTO/HEAT COMBINATION SENSOR, 63-1053

PHOTO/HEAT SENSOR WITH ISOLATOR, 63-1059
The photo/heat sensor provides peer-to-peer digital protocol for reliable
fast communications. The sensor includes a tri-color LED for instant
indication of device status. The photoelectric with thermal sensor
provides ability to alarm from either/ both different types of detection.
Dual electronic thermistors add 135 F fixed temperature thermal sensing
(alarm only) to the standard photoelectronic sensor (capable of separate
Supervisory or single Alarm combined with heat). In most cases, the
photoelectric sensing should activate the sensor first. If the heat sensor
begins to sense a change it incorporates a flame-enhancement feature
that will speed the photo-sensing response time. The isolator version
provides complete short circuit isolation for NFPA Style 7 wiring if used
with an isolator base. The sensors should be spaced at 30 apart for
smooth ceiling/low airflow as per NFPA.
Temperature Range: 32 - 100F (0 - 38C)
Exhibit 3-22 Photo/Heat Sensor
3.9.4 HEAT SENSOR, 60-1039

HEAT SENSOR WITH ISOLATOR, 60-1040
The intelligent heat sensor provides peer-to-peer digital protocol for reliable
fast communications. The sensor includes a tri-color LED for instant
indication of device status. The spot-type heat sensor is designed to be
programmable for a set point range of 135F to 174F for ordinary detection
or 175F to 190F for intermediate detection. Detectors in the ordinary range
may be programmed for either fixed temperature or 15F rate of rise
operation (Rate with Fixed temp). The detection set point is software
programmable in single degree increments from 135-190F. The heat sensor
identification looks like the photo sensor from a distance. The difference is
noted by looking at the side view; the photo sensor has a screen covering the
opening, the heat sensor has a thermistor that can be seen in the center of
the chamber. The isolator version provides complete short circuit isolation for
NFPA Style 7 wiring if used with an isolator base.
Exhibit 3-23 Thermal Sensor
The sensors should be spaced as per NFPA at 50apart for alarm set points
of 135F to 155F or 175F to 190F; or 15 apart for alarm set points of 156F
to 174F.
Installation Temperature: -4 F to 100 F (-20 C to 38C); 135F-174F set point

-4 F to 150F (-20C to 38C); 175F-190F set point
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 23 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
FIKE
3.9.5 SENSOR BASES, 63-1054 = 6.1; 63-1055 = 4

SENSOR BASES WITH ISOLATOR, 63-1060 = 6.1, 63-1061 = 4
The 63-1054, 6 inch sensor base will mount directly to 3 1/2 inch
and 4 inch octagon boxes, 4 inch square boxes (with or without
plaster rings) and single gang boxes. This base is approximately
2 inches larger than the sensor, providing a contouring effect and
covering junction box. It is to be used with any of the Cheetah Xi
50 sensors.
The 63-1055, 4 inch sensor base will mount to 3 inch octagon
boxes, 4 inch square boxes with plaster rings, and European
boxes with 50, 60, and 70 mm screw spacing. This base is
approximately the same size as the sensor head. It is to be used
with any of the Cheetah Xi 50 sensors.
The base connects from the SLC + to terminal 1 of the base; SLC
to terminal 3 of the base. The base also facilitates a method for
connection of a Remote LED between terminals 4 (+) and 3 (-).
The Remote LED receives its operating current from the SLC.
The maximum total current to be pulled from each SLC is 300mA
(total for loop devices and remote LED devices). The isolator
version provides complete short circuit isolation for NFPA Style 7
wiring if used with an isolator sensor head. The isolator version
provides segregation of the + terminal on the base; terminal 1 for
incoming and terminal 2 is provided for an outgoing.
Exhibit 3-24 Sensor Bases, 6 & 4
Terminal blocks accept a 12-18 AWG wire (0.9 3.25mm2)
3.9.6 SOUNDER BASE, 6, 63-1064

The sounder base provides the ability to notify occupants near the
detection device(s). The base includes a local 85db sounder that
can be activated upon the specific sensor alarm. It is designed to
follow the Remote LED programming for the sensor attached to
the base thus can be configured for 8 different sounds and/or
states. This base requires separate 24VDC auxiliary power from
the main control panel.
Exhibit 3-25 Sounder Base
3.9.7 RELAY BASE, 6, 63-1063

The relay base provides a local dry contact relay output that
activates as programmed for the device remote LED function
thus can be configured for 8 different states. This base does
NOT require separate 24VDC auxiliary power from the main
control panel. It obtains its necessary power from the SLC.
(1 Form C relay rated 2A@30VDC; 0.5A@125VAC)
Exhibit 3-26 Relay Base

Page 24 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N: 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
EQUIPMENT/PRODUCTS
3.9.8 MODULE COVER, 4 SQUARE

Each 4 Square addressable device is shipped with a
module cover and two self-tap mounting screws. This cover
has a vertical IR opening to provide access with the IR Tool
and visual access to the status LED.
Exhibit 3-27 Module Cover, 4
3.9.9 INPUT MODULES

The Cheetah Xi 50 input modules provide peer-to-peer digital
protocol for reliable fast communications. The module includes a
tri-color LED for instant indication of device status.
The
addressable input module provides a fire alarm dry contact device
direct connection to the Cheetah Xi 50 intelligent addressable
loop. Each module may be assigned to single zone, range of
zones or up to four individual zones. Any number of UL listed
contact closure devices may be used. Maximum wire resistance
between module and EOL device is 100 ohms. The Mini and 4
square version both allow short circuit detection if an additional
series resistor (14K, p/n 10-2530) is installed at each contact.
The input module is available in three versions:
Initiating Device Circuit (IDC) Max wire resistance:
IDC End of Line (EOL) resistor for Class B wiring:
100
39K
55-045 Mini Monitor Module

55-050 Mini Monitor Module with Isolator
2.75" x 1.75" miniature module for mounting in a small junction
box behind a monitoring device. This device will monitor a Class
B wired input device using the 39K ohm end of line resistor. The
isolator version provides complete short circuit isolation for NFPA
Style 7 wiring. This module provides 6.5 pigtail wire leads and is
intended to be wired and mounted without rigid connections made
inside a standard electrical box.
Standby Current: 0.485mA Alarm Current: 2.0mA max.
1.31H x 2.73W x 0.61D (33mm H x 69mm W x 15mm D)
55-041 4" Square Monitor Module

55-046 4Square Monitor Module with Isolator
Mounted with cover plate (see exhibit 3-27) on a 4" square
junction box. This device will monitor a Class B OR Class A
wired input device. Class B wiring requires the use of a 39K
ohm end of line resistor. The isolator version provides
complete short circuit isolation for NFPA Style 7 wiring.
Standby Current: 0.485mA Alarm Current: 2.0mA max.
4.17H x 4.26W x 1.22D (106mmH x 108mmW x
31mmD)
Exhibit 3-28 Mini & 4 Input Modules
NO Only
Detect
Manual Alarm
Reset
Waterflow
Drill
Supervisory
Supervisory
Latching
Zone Disable
Silence
Predischarge
Man Release
Abort
NO/NC
Process
Exhibit 3-29 Input Module Functions
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 25 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
FIKE
20-1063 Addressable Pull Station (APS)

20-1064 Addressable Pull Station with Isolator
The addressable pull station has all of the same addressable
input module electronics inside the pull station for one
complete addressable pull station. Activation of the pull
station is accomplished by pushing in and pulling down as
instructed. The module contains hardware key used for
resetting the device after activation. To reset, unlock with
the key then open the station. Return the internal toggle
switch to normal, then re-close and re-lock the station.
3.9.10
SUPERVISED CONTROL MODULE, 55-042

SCM WITH ISOLATOR, 55-047
The Supervised Control Module provides peer-to-peer digital

protocol for reliable fast communications. The module includes
a tri-color LED for instant indication of device status. The
Supervised Control Module (SCM) provides building notification
appliance circuits (NAC) an intelligent interface to the Cheetah
Xi 50 addressable loop. It also has the capability of operating
solenoids rated up to 2 amps @ 24V DC. May operate NACs,
solenoids, or Masterbox but not multiple at the same time.
Mounts on a 4" x 4 x 2 1/8 junction box with cover shown in
Exhibit 3-27.
NAC circuit Max wire resistance:
100
NAC circuit EOL resistor for Class B wiring:
39K
Exhibit 3-30 Addressable Pull Station
Exhibit 3-31 Supervised Control Module
10-2360 Solenoid Series Impedance

Each 55-042/047 can control one solenoid each (2 amps
maximum).
The 10-2360 Solenoid Series Impedance
device must be used when connecting a solenoid to the
SCM.
Compatible Releasing Solenoids (see 06-186,
Factory Mutual Approved Groups A-G):
Viking
See 06-186
Skinner 73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2
Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2
Skinner 71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2
Exhibit 3-32 Solenoid Series Impedance
ASCO
T8210A107
ASCO
R8210A107
ASCO
8210A107
ASCO
8210G207
10-2413 Masterbox Interface

The Masterbox interface provides the ability to activate on a
Local Energy Type Auxiliary Fire Alarm System (as noted
by NFPA 72). This module will operate with 1500 of 18
AWG wire for a trip coil rated at 14.5 ohms to the SCM.
This part is supplied with a metal plate and the circuit board
with mounting hardware. The plate mounts to a 2 gang
switch box (RACO 680 or equivalent). Configure the
Control module for Non-Silenceable, NO Walktest or Drill.
10-500 ohm trip coil, 2 Amps, 27.6VDC maximum.
Page 26 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N: 06-369
Exhibit 3-33 MasterBox Interface

UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
EQUIPMENT/PRODUCTS
3.9.11 RELAY MODULE, 55-043

RELAY MODULE WITH ISOLATOR, 55-048
The RM provides building dry contact output interface via the
intelligent addressable loop.
Two configurable (single
operation) relay Form C contacts rated for 2 Amps @ 30V DC,
0.5a @120VAC.
It contains a wide range of operating modes including multizone operation, up to 4 different states and multi-state
programming. Operating parameters are maintained in nonvolatile RAM for quick and reliable response to emergency
conditions.
Mounts on a 4 x 4 x 2 1/8 junction box with the cover shown
in Exhibit 3-30.
Max wire resistance, dry contact input:
100
Dry contact ratings:
3A@30VDC resistive, non-coded
0.9A@70.7VAC resistive, noncoded
Exhibit 3-34 Relay Module
3.9.12 RELEASING CONTROL MODULE, 55-052

RELEASING CONTROL WITH ISOLATOR, 55-053
The RCM provides an interface between the Suppression System
Solenoid or Fike Agent Release Module(s)/ARM and the intelligent
addressable loop. This module requires 24VDC continuous output
power from Panel Terminal P6 to power the selected releasing
device(s). The module provides two different output connections of
which ONLY ONE can be used per module (Solenoid or Agent
Release Module).
It contains a wide range of operating modes including multi-zone
operation, up to 4 different states and multi-state programming.
Operating parameters are maintained in non-volatile RAM for quick
and reliable response to emergency conditions.
Mounts on a 4 x 4 x 2 1/8 junction box with the cover shown in
Exhibit 3-30.
Listed as a Special Application Output for Extinguishing System
Activation
Max wire resistance, Solenoid output:
5
Max wire resistance, Agent Release output:
35
Max current to output:
2A@24VDC
Exhibit 3-35 Releasing Control

Module
Refer to the Releasing Control Module and 06-106 ARM Installation

Instructions for proper connections to the ARM(s).
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 27 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
FIKE
3.9.13 DUCT SENSOR

P/N 63-1057 Sensor
P/N 63-1062 Sensor with Isolator
P/N 63-1056 DUCT Housing (includes base w/Isolator)
If installing a new DUCT sensor, both parts will be required
on the purchase order. The DUCT housing contains a
circuit board that provides connection to a remote LED
(output follows head LED) and also provides a relay contact
output that is programmable to activate with the DUCT
detector OR as programmed.
Unlike similar DUCT
sensors, separate 24VDC is NOT required (note accessory
device(s) current add in the total available loop current of
300mA). Four different lengths of sampling tube are
available for penetrating into the DUCT:
02-3721 1.5
02-3722 3.0
02-3723 5.0
02-3724 10.0
Refer to NFPA 90A and the applicable code.

Terminal wire acceptance:
14 - 18 AWG
14.5H x 5W x 4D (368mm H x 127mm W x 102mm D)
Page 28 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N: 06-369
Exhibit 3-36 DUCT Sensor
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
EQUIPMENT/PRODUCTS
3.10 SPECIFICATIONS PROGRAMMING/CONFIGURATION EQUIPMENT
3.10.1
IR REMOTE TOOL, P/N 55-051

(NON-LISTED, SEE PAGE 77)
The hand-held configuration tool is a remote control that

is designed to communicate with the panel and other
devices through any selected device on the loop. It can
read device information such as type, loop, address and
sensitivity. It can also write device information such as
loop, address, branch and service date and initiate
device test. It features a 16-character liquid crystal
display and a 17-button keypad.
Features of the IR Remote Tool:
Operates with 2 AA Batteries
Communicates bi-directionally with any device
Easily configure devices by setting the loop and

address
Quickly read sensitivity levels
Easily test or reconfigure photo and ion

detectors in the sub-floor, as well as duct
detectors
Specifications
Immediately record the date serviced
Dimensions:
Instantly perform a remote test of any sensor or

module
Effortlessly complete a Walktest as required
Access and test hard-to-reach sensor or

module through any device
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Exhibit 3-37 IR Remote Tool
1.3 H x 2.2 W x 7.7 L
Communication Range: Up to 30 ft.

Up to 24 ft. with dust cover on device
Battery Life : 168 hours typical usage
(alkaline batteries recommended)
(2 AA batteries, not included )
Operating Temperature Range:
32 122 F
Operating Humidity Range: 10% - 90% RH

Non-condensing
Page 29 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
3.10.2
FIKE
C-LINX SOFTWARE, 06-327
The C-Linx Software provides a computer

interface to the Cheetah Xi 50 controller. It
provides the designer the tools to design a system
in their office and then load the configuration at the
installation. It also provides the ability to retrieve,
save and print the configuration and history of
events from the control panel.
3.10.3
INTERFACE CABLE, DB9RJ11, 10-1874A
The 10-1874A is a communication cable that

consists of a RJ11 jack, serial cable, and a RJ11/DB9 connector (wired Fike specific). It should
be used when connecting the C-Linx Software to
the Cheetah Xi 50 using a computer with a DB9
serial (com) port.
This is ONLY used for
peripheral devices for direct programming.
3.10.4
Exhibit 3-38 DB9 Communication Cable
INTERFACE CABLE, USB TO

RJ11, 10-1874B
This cable consists of a USB-to-RS232 (DB9)

converter (Fike p/n 02-11139) and also includes
the 10-1874A cable. It should be used when
connecting the C-Linx Software to the Cheetah Xi
50 using a computer with a USB connector instead
of a DB9 serial (com) port. This is only used for
peripheral devices for direct programming.
3.10.5
Exhibit 3-39 USB Interface Cable
INTERFACE CABLE, USB/A

MALE TO USB/B MALE ,
10-2629
This cable consists of a 2.0.0 USB/A Male-toUSB/B Male. It should be used when connecting
the C-Linx Software to the Cheetah Xi 50 using a
computer with a USB connector instead of a DB9
serial (com) port. The Cable should be a
maximum of 10 feet / 3 Meters in length. The USB
A is to be connected to the PC and the USB B is
to be connected to P3 of the panel
Page 30 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
Exhibit 3-40 USB Communication Cable

Manual P/N: 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
EQUIPMENT/PRODUCTS
3.11 SPECIFICATIONS BATTERIES AND BATTERY ENCLOSURES

Batteries are required for alarm systems for maintaining emergency back-up power. Two each 12V batteries
are required and are to be wired in series for maintaining a 24VDC back-up. Most systems require at least a
24 hour standby current with 5 minutes alarm current for determining minimum battery size. Refer to
Appendix 1 for Battery Calculation form for determining required battery size for system. The 10-2626
consists of 2 each 12AH, 12VDC batteries with a wiring harness. The 10-2190-b consists of 2 each 7 AH or
18 AH, 12VDC batteries with a wiring harness.
3.11.1 BATTERY ASSEMBLIES

P/N 10-2626
12AH Battery
assembly
P/N 10-2190-b
b: 1 = 7 AH, 2 = 18 AH Battery set

with wiring assembly
P/N 10-2192
Wiring assembly only for 7 AH 12

AH and 18 AH batteries
P/N 10-2517
set
with
wire
Exhibit 3-41 Batteries
Wire Assembly with Battery EOL

for use if batteries give fault but
load test good.
3.11.2 BATTERIES
P/N 02-3468
33 AH Battery, Requires 2 each
P/N A02-0252
P/N 02-4206
3.11.3 BATTERY ENCLOSURES

The 33 AH and 75 AH batteries do not fit in the
CHEETAH XI 50 panel enclosure therefore separate
enclosures are required. Interconnecting cables shall
be in installed in conduit.
Exhibit 3-42 33 AH Battery Enclosure
10-2154-c 33 AH Battery enclosure (no batt.)

c = R (Red) or G (Grey)
The 33 AH Enclosure is a heavy gauge metal enclosure
21w x 11h x 5d and is large enough to house two
each 33 AH batteries. Conduit knockouts are provided
to provide entry of battery wiring. The box lid is
installed onto the back-box using the 4 mounting
screws provided.
10-2236-c 75 AH Battery enclosure (no batt.) c = R
(Red) or G (Grey)
The 75 AH Enclosure is a heavy gauge metal enclosure
26 1/4w x 14h x 7d and is large enough to house two
each 75 AH batteries. Conduit knockouts are provided
to provide entry of battery wiring. The box lid is
installed onto the back-box using the 4 mounting
screws provided
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Exhibit 3-43 75 AH Battery Enclosure

.
Page 31 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
FIKE
DESIGN
4.0 SYSTEM DESIGN

Fire Alarm systems must be designed per applicable codes and other requirements imposed by the Authority
Having Jurisdiction. The following steps should be used a guideline:
4.1
BASIC SYSTEM LAYOUT
Evaluate all areas to be protected and determine

logical areas (zone) where detection and
notification are required:
The P2 Relays for Supervisory, Alarm and

Trouble may be used for system wide
applications.
Note that the Alarm and
Supervisory Relays are configurable for other
functions whereas the Trouble Relay is fixed in
its configuration.
Input devices will be assigned to these zones

to cause the zone to enter a specific state
such as Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory,
Process, Pre-Alarm, etc.
The RM relays may be used to configure for a

specific state in one or more zones and may
be installed on the addressable loop closer to
the equipment being controlled.
Output devices will be configured to activate

when a specific zone(s) is in a specific state
such as Alarm, Trouble, Pre-Discharge,
Release, Supervisory etc.
Determine Ancillary devices desired to meet

specification requirements:
An optional DACT p/n 10-2528 (for Central
Station and Remote Station monitoring) can be
installed in the upper center of the enclosure
and powered through terminal P6.
It
communicates with the Cheetah Xi 50 via P6
DACT RS485 connection.
Determine location of Control Panel:

Easily accessible and readily visible
On a flat wall free from vibration
In a clean and dry environment
Not outdoors or in a harsh environment
Determine the type and location of every detection
device:
Detector spacing is determined to the area
protected and the associated code.
Make note of the total quantities of each
device.
Determine the type and location of each input
device such as Manual Alarms, Supervisory,
contact Detection, Process, Pre-Alarm, etc.:
These devices require contact monitoring
modules.
Determine the total quantity of each device
and the number of modules needed.
Determine the type and location of notification
devices:
Type and location of devices must meet local
code.
Each circuit of notification devices may either
be connected to the two on-board, P8 and P9,
circuits or connected to an SCM via the
addressable loop. The SCM has the ability to
provide a modulated output.
All notification circuits may support up to 1.75
Amps of current to the devices.
Determine how many contact controls will be used
for shutdown and interfacing. This will determine
how many relays will be needed:
UL S2203
FM 3029134
The Cheetah Xi 50 will support a total of 50

A Remote Display p/n 10-2321 provides system
status on an LCD display in areas other than just
on the main panel.
The LED Graphic p/n 10-111x and Zone
Annunciator p/n 10-2373 devices are available
to provide instant visual system status at a
remote location.
The VESDA HLI p/n 68-023 can be used to
intelligently interface VESDA air sampling
detectors.
Ethernet Module p/n 10-2627 (non-listed see
page 77) can be used to monitor/be a member
of a network of Cheetah Xi 50 panels
Multi-Interface Module 10-2583 (non-listed see
page 77) can be used for Printer interface
capability using either serial or parallel printers.
Can also be used to network to Cheetah
Classic.
The Micore device p/n 26-031 (non-listed see
page 77) provides the ability to translate the
Cheetah Xi 50 data into an Ethernet connection.
This Ethernet connection then allows the
customer to view the Cheetah Xi 50 system
status and history from any local network
connection. The Micore can also be assigned to
e-mail and File Transfer Protocol (FTP) events
to a specific computer that is running software to
display the events on a custom graphic display.

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 33 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
DESIGN
4.2
FIKE
CONFIGURE THE SYSTEM
4.5
Using the construction drawings and the

information determined in the previous
section, create a configuration file using CLinx software or use the auto-configure mode
to attach to the devices.
COMPLETE INSTALLATION
DRAWINGS
Using Construction Drawings from the
installation create Fire alarm installation
drawings. Place all Fire alarm control system
components showing location, equipment list,
zoning, wiring, system riser wiring, and
sequence of operation.
Using C-Linx Software, check for configuration

errors.
Save the configuration file.
4.6
4.3
COMPLETE BATTERY
CALCULATIONS
Using C-Linx software, load the configuration

file then complete battery calculations or use
Appendix 1 to complete manual battery
calculations. If more power or battery back-up
is required, field expanders or the may be
required.
4.4
COMPLETE DOCUMENTS
WITH AS-BUILT
INFORMATION
After the installation is complete, revise the
drawings, configuration, battery calculations,
etc. to match the final as-built/as-installed
system.
REVIEW INSTALLATION
REQUIREMENTS
Review installation requirements to determine
if system can be installed within system
requirements and meet specifications.
Plan circuit division and routing for all field
wiring, including type and size of wire to be
used.
Complete voltage drop calculations, if
required, or determine worst case wire
resistance determination for circuit.
Page 34 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
OPERATION
5.0 OPERATION
This section defines the system operation pertaining to the front panel controls, display, defining the operational
states, test modes and general panel operation.
5.1
DISPLAY
The LCD Display contains 4 Rows of 20

Characters.
This display provides status
information and other user interface information.
There are three main displays for the Cheetah Xi
50 system:
System Status (time/date)
System Event (if events are present)
Function Switches (config/diagnose.)
System Status displays a standard message on
the first line of the display. The second line is
defaulted to Fike Corporation, but can be edited.
The third line is the current time and date. The
fourth line is the number of Alarm, Supervisory,
and Trouble events present on the system. This
display is present when no events are present at
the control system.
When an event occurs on the protection system,
the display adds the System Event display. The
top line shows the description of the event. The
2nd line displays the custom message for the
device/circuit that caused the event. Press F1 to
toggle to display Panel-Loop-Address of event.
Press F2 to toggle for an extra 40 characters of
device custom message. Press ESCAPE to switch
back to the System Status menu or view the
Function Switch Menu. Press Step All to go back
to the System Events.
CH E
F
08 :
AL :
E
I
0
0
T
K
0
0
AH X i
5 0
V 3
E CORPORA T I
: 0 0 A
0 3 / 0 1 /
0
SU : 0 0 0
T R
.
O
2
:
0 0
N
0 0 7
0 0 0
Exhibit 5-1 Cheetah Xi 50 Display
A L AR
CU S T OM
H H : MM : S
E V EN T
Exhibit 5-2 System Status Display
Exhibit 5-4 Top Level
UL S2203
FM 3029134
T
F 1 - C
F 2 - H
F 3 - D
OP
L E V E L
ON F I G F 4 IS T RY
F 5 I AG
F 6 -
M T Y P E
# 1
ME S SAGE
L - ADR
S A MM / D D / Y Y Y Y
X X X X OF
Y Y Y Y
Exhibit 5-3 System Event Display
MENU
P A S SWR D
MA I N T
I R C OMM

Manual P/N: 06-369
Menu
Page 35 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
OPERATION
5.2
FIKE
STATUS LEDS
5.2.1 AC POWER
5.2.6 PRE-DISCHARGE
The AC POWER LED is Green. It illuminates

steady when proper AC power is present. This
LED turns off when AC power is removed or is too
low for proper AC operation.
The PRE-DISCHARGE LED is Red. It flashes

when the panel enters the Pre-Discharge State. It
illuminates steady after Acknowledge or Silence is
initiated. This LED remains ON until the panel is
Reset.
5.2.2 ALARM
The ALARM LED is Red. It flashes when the
panel enters the Alarm State. It illuminates steady
after Acknowledge or Silence is initiated. This
LED remains ON (alarms are latching events) until
the panel is Reset.
5.2.7 RELEASE
The RELEASE LED is Red. It flashes when the
panel enters the Release State. It illuminates
steady after Acknowledge or Silence is initiated.
This LED remains ON until the panel is Reset.
5.2.3 TROUBLE
5.2.8 DISABLE
The TROUBLE LED is Yellow. It flashes when the

panel enters the Trouble State or if a Zone or
device is Disabled. It illuminates steady after
Acknowledge or Silence is initiated. This LED
turns off if the Trouble condition clears and no
other trouble events are present.
The DISABLED LED is Yellow. It illuminates

steady when any zone is disabled. This LED turns
off when panel is reset. It indicates all inputs in
the zone disabled will not operate. Note: a
Supervisory and Trouble is also created when the
zone is disabled.
5.2.4 SUPERVISORY
5.2.9 ABORT
The SUPERVISORY LED is Yellow. It flashes

when the panel enters the Supervisory State or if a
Zone or device is Disabled. It illuminates steady
LED turns off if the Supervisory condition clears
and no other supervisory events are present.
The ABORT LED is Yellow. It flashes when the

panel enters the Abort State. It illuminates steady
LED turns off if the Abort condition clears and no
other abort events are present.
5.2.5 SILENCE
The SILENCE LED is Yellow. It illuminates steady
when the panel is silenced by pressing the
SILENCE button (or remotely silenced). This
LED turns off when the panel is reset. This LED
indicates Notification Appliance Circuits that are
programmed as Silenceable have been manually
SILENCED. (Note: NFPA 72 requires that a
silenced panel resound every 24 hours).
Page 36 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
5.2.10 GROUND FAULT

The GROUND FAULT LED is Yellow. It illuminates
steady when a system ground fault trouble is
present on the system. This LED turns off when
the ground fault is removed or the panel is Reset.

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
5.3
OPERATION
KEYPAD
The Cheetah Xi 50 has a 3,200 event history

buffer. This buffer continuously cycles in new
information, replacing the oldest information. A
1,000 event alarm history is held storing just the
alarm events within that same 3,200 event buffer.
There is a maximum of 1,000 alarms between
reset in order to keep the first alarm events (PreAlarms are not recorded once an alarm is
recorded from an address). The three oval STEP
buttons just to the left of the LCD are accessible
with the enclosure door closed. These buttons
provide the capability to step through these current
events.
Note: Each history or diagnostic

screen has a 100 second time-out.
When a specific menu or screen is
selected, a timer will begin. Each
button press restarts the timer.
After 100 seconds of no user interaction, the
display will revert back to the System Event Menu
or System Status Display. The switches have a 5
minute timeout. Pressing a switch changes the
display to the switch function pressed and keeps
that display for up to 5 minutes, followed by the
100 second timeout.
5.3.1 STEP ALARM

Press to step through the current ALARM events on the display (in forward rotation).
5.3.2 STEP SUPERV

Press to step through the current SUPERVisory events on the display (in forward rotation).
5.3.3 STEP ALL

Press to step through the all current events on the display. Note: Then press F5 to
display the entire 3200 event history display. F5 acts as a toggle between current events
and entire history.
The four red buttons below the rectangle display on the keypad may be accessed with the enclosure front
door opened.
5.3.4 DRILL
Press to activate outputs assigned for Drill Function in the configuration. Press RESET to
clear the Drill activation.
5.3.5 ACKNOWLEDGE
Press to acknowledge an Alarm, Trouble or Supervisory State. Deactivates local piezo
without silencing active outputs. Creates Acknowledge event in the history.
5.3.6 SILENCE
Press to Silence any notification appliance circuits that are sounding and programmed as
silenceable outputs. Also deactivates local piezo. Creates Silence Function event for
all loops. NFPA requires a panel that has been silenced for 24 hours to resound (which
UL requires that it also re-send to the DACT). Some local authorities require this sooner.
The Cheetah Xi 50 has a configurable option for resound from 0-24 hours with 24 hours
programmed as the default.
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 37 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
OPERATION
FIKE
5.3.7 RESET
Press to restore system to Normal. Deactivates control functions, flashes LEDs and
momentarily interrupts resettable auxiliary power. Clears any latching event. If events are
still present, they will immediately restore.
5.3.8
NAVIGATION (+, >, -, <)
These buttons are used for data entry during maintenance and configuration.
The <> arrows are used to move about in the configuration displays. The +/buttons will increment or decrement the value at the cursor when in a
configuration display. They can also be used when cycling through the event
history. The Step Alarm button only cycles forward in events. These buttons
allow you to go forward and backward through the events.
5.3.9 ESCAPE
Toggles from System Event display (if events are present) to System Status (time/date) to
Function Switches Menu. If in a menu, this button EXITS the current menu and returns to
the previous menu screen.
Page 38 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
OPERATION
5.3.10 FUNCTION BUTTONS

The function buttons F1, F2 ,F3, F4, F5 and F6
are used to navigate the menu system during
maintenance and configuration of the system.
If an event is present and the display is in the
SYSTEM EVENTS mode, pressing the F1
button will display the EVENT SOURCE
information for an addressable device type
event.
Event source consists of PNLxxx
LOOPxxx ADDRxxx information.
Thus
indicating the panel number, SLC loop number
and the specific address that caused the event.
5.3.10.1
Pressing F2 will show the extra 40 characters of

custom message for the device (toggles on each
press). If the ESCAPE button is pressed, the display will
toggle to the FUNCTION SWITCHES display:
TOP
L E V E L MENU
F 1 - C O N F I G F 4 - P A S SWR D
F 2 - H IS T RY
F 5 - MA I N T
F 3 - D I AG
F 6 - I R C OMM
Exhibit 5-5 Function Switch Display
F1
5.3.10.4 F4
CONFIG (Configuration)
Press this
button to enter the Configuration menus in
the Cheetah Xi 50. (or displays EVENT
SOURCE if in the SYSTEM EVENTS
mode)
5.3.10.2
F2
HISTRY (History) Pressing this

button will display the HISTORY
MENU screen. From this screen
you
can
select
Alarm,
Supervisory, Trouble, Events,
Zone, and Erase functions. If one
of these are selected the history
messages are displayed in the
sequential order they occurred.
Other states such as Drill and
Walktest are available only in the
Event history.
5.3.10.3
F3
DIAG (Diagnostics) Press this button to

cycle through two diagnostic displays. See
the Troubleshooting section of this manual
for more details. (Requires level 2 or higher
password)
5.3.11
PASSWRD (Password) Press this

button to enter the Password
selection menu. A password has to
be entered to be able to configure the
panel.
Each Cheetah Xi 50 is
shipped with a default Level 3
Password (PW). This password is
announced at the Fike Cheetah Xi
50 training class.
5.3.10.5
F5
MAINT (Maintenance) Press this

button to enter the Maintenance
screen. This allows you to do
Walktest, Device Address, Device
Replace and Buzzer.
5.3.10.6
F6
IR_COMM (IR Communication)

The IR tool is recommended for use
in system set-up and service. It is
recommended
that
the
IR
communication be enabled only
during these times and disabled
during normal operation. The system
devices will pull 50% more power
with the IR communication enabled.
Level
3/Distributor
password
required.
Escape
Toggles from System Event display(if events are present) to System Status (time/date)
to Function Switches Menu. If in a menu, this button EXITS the current menu and returns
to the previous menu screen. If in the System Status Menu, pressing ESCAPE takes you
back to event #1.
5.3.12
Enter
Saves and enters the current configuration settings. Use Navigation buttons to change
variables at the blinking cursor position.
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 39 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
OPERATION
5.4
FIKE
SYSTEM OPERATIONAL
OVERVIEW
The Cheetah Xi 50 is an Addressable Fire Alarm

system.
Most connections are made to an
addressable smoke sensor, input or output module.
The Cheetah Xi 50 addressable loop can contain up
to 50 devices, any combination. Each device is
supervised by a unique loop-address, 1-50. The
device address as shipped from Fike is Loop 0,
Address 0 and is changed/programmed into the
device using the IR Tool, Hand-Held Programmer,
panel auto-address, or C-Linx software.
The operation of the Cheetah Xi 50 Control System
is based upon a Zone and State Relationship. All
devices, Input or Output, must be assigned to at
least one Zone. A zone is defined as a specific area
of protection or hazard to protect. There are 253
software zones available on the Cheetah Xi 50. A
state is defined as a status which describes a
specific operation of the fire alarm system. Input
devices can be assigned to up to four individual
zones, two individual zones and a range of zones, or
two zone ranges (only one zone is typical). The
panel zone is Zone 254 (for troubles such as AC
Power, Battery, NAC supervision, or any other main
panel trouble). Zone 254 is also and ANY ZONE
selection that CAN be disabled. Zone 255 is an ANY
ZONE selection that CAN NOT be disabled. Output
devices may be configured for any zone (Z255) or
maximum zones in action table (3 x 32 = 96 different
zones).
Each one of the addressable devices is intelligent
and maintains its own operating configuration. The
devices use the Cyber-loop to transmit and receive
status information with one another and the control
panel (the control panel appends zone information to
the event and also holds the custom message
information).
The control panel sends this
information from Cyber-loop to Cyber-loop and
transmits data to on-board and peripheral devices.
The control panel also performs supervision of
devices and user communication/interface.
When an input is activated, it is configured to cause
its associated zone(s) to enter an operational State.
Any Detection device will cause their associated
Zone(s) to enter the Alarm State (or Supervisory if
programmed). All other input devices must be
configured for a specific type of input State, which will
cause its associated Zone(s) to enter that
Operational State.
Output devices are then
configured to activate when their associated zone(s)
enter into the configured State(s).
5.5
PASSWORDS
The Cheetah Xi 50 provides 4 different levels of

security:
Level
1
2
3
4
Type
CUSTOMER
Created
Function
Keylock
Button access
Date/time
MAINTENANCE C-Linx
View Config
Diagnostics
Cheetah Xi Configuration
DISTRIBUTOR 50
Change lev 3
Cheetah Xi Factory Init.
FACTORY
50
Create level 3
Each Cheetah Xi 50 is shipped with a default Level 3

Password (PW). This password is announced at the
Fike Cheetah Xi 50 training class. Once a successful
password is entered on the control panel, the user
has the ability to perform the functions noted. The
Password Menu can be accessed from the Top Level
Menu. The levels are also noted on the Appendix 3
Menu Structure. They can be changed only by a
certified technician with a proper password. Press
F4 from the Top level Menu to access the password
menu (once a successful password is entered, press
ESCAPE to use menus):
EN T ER
P A S SWO R D
_ _ _ _ < - - - X X XX
ACCE S S :
DEN I ED
CODE :
X X X X
Exhibit 5-6 Password Menu
Line 2
4 digit password. Use the <>

buttons to move the cursor and
the +/- buttons (cycles through 09) to enter a password.
Note:
Successful
Level
3/Distributor password provides
the ability to change the default
password (by changing the righthanded 4 digit number, XXXX). If
this is changed and then
unknown, call Fike with the 4-digit
CODE displayed on line 4.
Line 3
Displays
the
access
level
(Denied, Level 2(A-H), Sys
Admin, Factory) allowed with the
password that has been entered.
Line 4
Random 4 digit code that changes

periodically.
Example: MMM configured for Supervisory Input for

Zone 3. When activated will cause any Output
configured for Supervisory Zone 3 to turn ON.
Page 40 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
5.6
OPERATION
SYSTEM RESET/POWER UP
When appropriate power is applied to the Cheetah Xi

50 system, it performs a POWER UP RESET (long
reset). The control panel sends a BROADCAST
ADDRESS message to the devices and requests their
response.
If the RESET button is pressed, or if a Reset is
transmitted from an input module or peripheral, the
control panel provides a Reset and displays the
following screen for 4 seconds:
R E CORD N EW D E V I C E
ME S SAGE S
F ROM R E S E T ?
NO
Exhibit 5-7 Reset Display
If no button is pressed, the control panel performs a
RESET but does not display the new device
messages. All latched events are cleared from the
panel and the loops are restarted.
If the ACKNOWLEDGE button is pressed, the NO
changes to YES and a reset is still performed and all
NEW DEVICE messages are displayed. All latched
events are cleared from the panel and the panel
returns to the Normal State. If events are still present,
the events are re-reported.
ALWAYS PERFORM A LONG RESET
WITH YES IF THE LOOP WIRING OR
DEVICES ARE CHANGED ON A
SYSTEM.
5.7
NORMAL STATE
The only LED illuminated on the Front Panel is the

AC POWER for the Normal State.
The display will show the "System Status Display"
which consists of the standard Cheetah Xi 50
message on the top line; user editable second line
(Fike Corporation default); time and date on the third
line; and total Alarms (AL), Supervisories (SU), and
Troubles (TR) on the fourth line.
CHE
F
0 8 :
A L :
E T AH
I KE C
0 0 : 0 0
0 0 0
S
Exhibit 5-8
X I
5 0
V 3 . 0 0
ORPORA T I ON
A
0 3 / 0 1 / 2 0 0 7
U : 0 0 0
T R : 0 0 0
System Status Display
While in the Normal State the control panel will listen

to the loops of devices. The panel sends a command
to the loops every 8 seconds to request device
status. If the device is missing it will report the
DEVICE MISSING trouble within 1 minute. Likewise,
if a new device is present on the system and not in
the configuration, a DEVICE NOT IN CONFIG trouble
UL S2203
FM 3029134
will be reported. The addressable devices will

communicate their status to the loop of devices
providing a very fast response to an alarm event.
The panel passes this information between loops
and constantly monitors the status. Addressable
devices that are powered normal and being
supervised by the panel will blink their green LED
every 5 seconds.
5.8 ALARM / WATERFLOW STATE

The Alarm State may be activated by Sensors,
Manual Alarms (Pull Station), or any input
configured for Detection. Upon Waterflow input
the system will also enter the Alarm State. When
an input device is active, it will turn on its RED
LED steady to indicate the activated status. It will
light its REMOTE LED as programmed, if
connected.
The ALARM LED flashes and panel piezo pulses.
The Alarm LED illuminates steady and piezo turns
OFF after ACKNOWLEDGE or SILENCE buttons
are pressed.
Any output circuit/module
programmed for the Alarm State will be ON until
Silenced (if programmed as Silenceable). The
alarm history events are limited to 1000 after the
1st alarm (to save the first alarms). Once an alarm
is recorded on an address, further pre-alarms are
not logged in history until the panel is reset.
The Alarm State is a latching event and will
require panel reset to clear the event and return
the panel to the Normal State.
A L ARM T Y P E
# 1
CU S T OM ME S S AG E
L - ADR
H H : MM : S S A MM / D D / Y Y Y Y
EV EN T
X X X X OF
Y Y Y Y
Exhibit 5-9 Alarm Display
Line 1
Alarm or Waterflow Event
Line 2
Device Custom Message
Line 3
Time and Date of Event
Line 4
This event is number XXXX for the

total YYYY current events
NOTE: The Waterflow is optional

for defaulted to Silenceable,
similar to any other audible. To
make a Waterflow event NONSilenceable (C-Linx V2.0 and higher), use the
Control Module and program the output priority to
Activate on Specific Device (the Waterflow input
Loop-Address) then select the output pattern set 1
and select output pattern as Custom Defined.
Select the Custom Defined box and change the
priority to NON-Silenceable.

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 41 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
OPERATION
FIKE
5.9 SUMMING ALARM STATE (NONLISTED, SEE PAGE 77)
5.11 TROUBLE STATE
The Summing Alarm State may be activated by

Sensors. When a sensor is active with a summing
alarm, it will turn on its RED LED steady to indicate
the activated status. It will light its REMOTE LED as
programmed, if connected.
The Trouble State may be caused by a system,

circuit or device supervision trouble. It can also be
activated by an input module programmed for
Trouble, a Pre-Alarm input(s), or Walktest
activation. Upon entering the Trouble State the
following occurs:
The ALARM LED flashes and panel piezo pulses.

The Alarm LED illuminates steady and piezo turns off
after ACKNOWLEDGE or SILENCE buttons are
pressed. Any output circuit/module programmed for
the Summing Alarm State will be ON until Silenced (if
programmed as Silenceable). The Z255 Alarm will
also be active.
The Summing Alarm State is a latching event and
will require panel reset to clear the event and return
the panel to the Normal State. The display is similar
to Alarm state, except noted as Alarm Type #2.
Stop: The system does not allow more
than one alarm per device. The C-Linx
(V3.00 and higher) device configuration
Summing Alarm tab provides the ability
to program the output type for the
summing alarm event. If it needs to participate in
Predischarge, select Alarm. If it is NOT to participate
in
Predischarge,
select
Summing
Alarm,
Supervisory, PreAlarm1 or 2.
5.10 ALARM VERIFICATION

STATE
When a sensor programmed for alarm verification
exceeds its alarm threshold, it broadcasts the Alarm
Verification state. Any output device programmed for
alarm verification in that same zone would operate.
If the sensor is still above the alarm threshold at the
end of the verification period, it will broadcast the
alarm (alarm verification state will then be OFF). No
panel LEDs or piezo operate during this state. An
event is recorded in the event buffer.
Page 42 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
The TROUBLE LED flashes and panel piezo is

steady. The Trouble LED illuminates steady and
piezo off after ACKNOWLEDGE or SILENCE
buttons are pressed. If the trouble is caused by an
addressable device, the device LED will blink
YELLOW approximately every second. Any output
circuit/module programmed for the Trouble State
in the zone that is in Trouble will be ON until
Silenced (if programmed as Silenceable). The P2
System Trouble Relay will activate (this relay is
normally energized and will de-energize).
The Trouble state is generally non-latching,
excluding LOOP CLASS A OPEN, LOOP
SHORT, and DRIFT TROUBLE troubles which
are latching. Once the trouble is restored, the
panel will return to normal if no other events are
present. The latching troubles noted require reset
of the panel to clear the fault once it is corrected.
When a trouble event occurs it will display similar
to Exhibit 5-10 for 100 seconds then switch to the
System Status Display if the event clears and no
buttons are pressed.
GENERA L
T ROUB L E
L - ADR
EV EN T
X X X X OF
Y Y Y Y
Exhibit 5-10 Trouble Display
Line 1
Trouble Event
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4


Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
OPERATION
5.12 SUPERVISORY STATE
5.13 PRE-DISCHARGE STATE
The Supervisory State may be activated by any input

configured for Supervisory.
These inputs are
typically connected to Sprinkler system Tamper, or
Low Air Pressure (or suppression low pressure
switch) input contacts.
The Pre-Discharge State may be activated by

Sensors, Manual Releases (Manual Release with
Countdown or Manual Release), or any input
configured for Detection (or VESDA). Each input
device is configured for a Pre-Discharge type
(defined in Appendix 4).
SUPERV LED flashes and panel piezo warbles (on &

off pattern). LED illuminates steady and piezo off
after ACKNOWLEDGE or SILENCE buttons are
pressed. When an input device is active, it will turn
on its RED LED steady to indicate the activated
status. Any output circuit/module programmed for the
Supervisory State in the zone that is in Supervisory
will be ON until Silenced (if programmed as
Silenceable). The P2 System Supervisory Relay will
activate (this relay is normally energized and will deenergize).
Supervisory inputs may be configured for latching or
non-latching. If configured for latching, the panel will
require reset to restore the system to normal. If
configured for non-latching, once the Supervisory is
restored, the panel will return to normal if no other
events are present. When a supervisory event
occurs it will display similar to Exhibit 5-11. If all
events are restored, it will display for 100 seconds
then switch to the System Status Display if the event
clears and no buttons are pressed.
The Pre-Discharge LED flashes and panel piezo

pulses.
The Pre-Discharge LED illuminates
steady
and
piezo
turns
OFF
after
ACKNOWLEDGE or SILENCE buttons are
pressed. Any output circuit/module programmed
for the Pre-Discharge State will be ON until
Silenced (if programmed as Silenceable). If from
a detection device, it begins the Automatic
countdown
as
configured
in
the
zone
configuration, if selected in the devices
suppression configuration. If from an input type
Pre-Discharge, it begins the Manual countdown as
configured in the zone configuration, if selected in
the devices suppression configuration.
The Pre-Discharge State is a latching event and
will require panel reset to clear the event and
return the panel to the Normal State.
ZONE
X X X RE L EAS E
I N
NNN S ECONDS
Z ON E X X X C U S T OM MS G
Exhibit 5-12 Pre-Discharge Display
S
CU
HH
E V
UP ERV I SORY
I NPU T
S T OM ME S S AG E
L - ADR
: MM : S S A MM / D D / Y Y Y Y
EN T
X X X X OF
Y Y Y Y
Exhibit 5-11 Supervisory Display
Line 1
Supervisory Event
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4

Line 1
Zone xxx (1-254) is in a PreDischarge state
Line 2
The
Pre-Discharge
time
is
displayed and it will countdown as it
approaches release (at 0 seconds)
Line 3
Custom message assigned for the

zone in the Pre-Discharge state.
Note: When a Zone Disable is

active, it also automatically creates
a Supervisory and Trouble in the
disabled zone.
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 43 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
OPERATION
FIKE
5.14 ABORT STATE
5.15 RELEASE STATE
The Abort State may be activated by any input

configured for Abort. An abort is considered a
trouble (invalid) until an alarm occurs on the system.
Each Cheetah Xi 50 must be configured for one of
several different abort types. Reference Appendix 4
of this manual for available Abort Types and their
operation. Upon an Abort input the system will enter
the Abort State. When an input device is active, it
will turn on its RED LED steady to indicate the
activated status. It will light its REMOTE LED as
programmed, if connected.
The Release State will be activated upon

successful completion of the Pre-Discharge state
(after countdowns AND with no abort present).
The ABORT LED flashes and panel piezo pulses a

unique sound. The Abort LED illuminates steady
and piezo turns OFF after ACKNOWLEDGE or
SILENCE buttons are pressed.
Any output
circuit/module programmed for the Abort State will be
ON until Silenced (if programmed as Silenceable).
The Abort State is a non-latching event. Once an
abort is restored to normal, the panel may go back to
Pre-Discharge or immediately release depending on
the countdown time left and the abort type selected.
Note: Manual Release/Pre-Discharge input will override an abort input and cause the immediate
advancement to the release state or manual cd.
ABOR T AC T I V E
L - ADR
E V EN T
X X X X OF
Y Y Y Y
Exhibit 5-13 Abort Display
Line 1
The Abort input is active. If no alarms

are present, this event is preceded by
Invalid Abort Active event.
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4

Page 44 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
The RELEASE LED flashes and panel piezo

pulses. The Release LED illuminates steady and
piezo turns OFF after ACKNOWLEDGE or
SILENCE buttons are pressed.
Any output
circuit/module programmed for the Release State
will be ON until Silenced (if programmed as
Silenceable).
The Release State is a latching event and will
require panel reset to clear the event and return
the panel to the Normal State.
ZONE
X X X
0 0 0
S
ZONE X X X
A L : 0 01
SU
Exhibit 5-14
RE L EAS E
I N
ECONDS
C U S T OM MS G
:0 0 0
T R : 0 0 0
Release Display
Line 1
Zone xxx (1-253) is in a PreDischarge state
Line 2
The Pre-Discharge time has reached

0 and no aborts are held. The
system has advanced to release.
Line 3
Custom message assigned for the

zone in the Pre-Discharge state.
Line 4
Identification of the number of

Alarms, Supervisories, and Troubles
on the system.

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
OPERATION
The remaining STATES do not have a dedicated

LED but will provide an input/output relationship:
5.16 PRE-ALARM STATE
5.17 PROCESS STATE
There are two levels of Pre-Alarms that may be

configured, Pre-Alarm #1 and Pre-Alarm #2. These
are used for performing an early warning of a fire
alarm.
As smoke increases in a hazard, the
obscuration of the photo-electric sensor rises. Zero
%/ft obscuration is a completely clean environment.
As the smoke amount rises, the obscuration
percentage rises, up to 4%/ft (UL smoke box test
maximum alarm level recognized). Pre-Alarm #1
should be set for the lowest level of obscuration
percentage desired for notification. Pre-Alarm #2
should be set slightly higher as the obscuration rises.
The alarm level is then set at the 3rd level up in the
obscuration percentage. The C-Linx Software forces
these separated levels and does not allow them to
overlap.
The Process State may be activated by any input

configured for Process. These inputs are typically
connected to non-alarm system contacts used for
process management or security functions.
Pre-Alarms may be independently enabled/disabled

in configuration of each sensor. If Pre-Alarms are
enabled in a sensor, and the Pre-Alarm level is
exceeded the panel will log the Pre-Alarm1 or 2 state
and any output circuit/module programmed for the
respective Pre-Alarm State and Zone will be ON until
Silenced (if programmed as Silenceable).
The
Trouble LED flashes until acknowledged or silenced
(but the trouble output are not activated) There is
also no Pre-Alarm communication with the DACT.
Pre-Alarms are non-latching. Once the obscuration
level lowers below the Pre-Alarm level, the panel will
return to normal if no other events are present. When
a Pre-Alarm event occurs it will display similar to
Exhibit 5-15. If all events are restored, it will display
for 100 seconds then switch to the System Status
Display if no buttons are pressed.
PRE - A
CU S T OM ME
H H : MM : S S A
E V EN T
X X X
Exhibit 5-15
L ARM # 1
S SAGE
L - ADR
MM / D D / Y Y Y Y
X OF
Y Y Y Y
Pre-Alarm Display
Line 1
Pre-Alarm Event
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
This event is number XXXX for the total

YYYY current events
When a Process event occurs the panel backlight

will turn on and an event will be recorded in the
history. No Panel LED will illuminate, nor will the
piezo sound. When an input device is active, it will
turn on its RED LED steady to indicate the
activated status. Any output module programmed
for the Process State will be ON until Silenced (if
programmed as Silenceable).
Process events are non-latching.
Once the
Process contact is restored, the panel will return to
normal if no other events are present. When a
Process event occurs it will display similar to
Exhibit 5-16. If all events are restored, it will
display for 100 seconds then switch to the System
Status Display if no buttons are pressed.
PROCE S
CU S T OM ME
H H : MM : S S A
EV EN T
X X X
Exhibit 5-16
S
I NPU T
S SAGE
L - ADR
MM / D D / Y Y Y Y
X OF
Y Y Y Y
Process Display
Line 1
Process Event
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4

The device LED will blink its LED Red in a slow pulse
for Pre-Alarm #1. It will change to a fast blink for
Pre-Alarm #2.
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 45 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
OPERATION
FIKE
5.18 ZONE DISABLE STATE

The Zone Disable State may be activated by any
input configured for Zone Disable. Disabling a zone
from the C-Linx Software or by the main panel
menus will operate in the same manner.
When a Zone Disable event occurs the panel will
enter the Trouble state and Supervisory (as
previously described). With the zone disabled, inputs
in the disabled zone do not operate, therefore output
in that same zone will not receive a command to
operate (unless from a different zone that is not
disabled).
The Zone Disable event is non-latching. Once the
Zone Disable contact is restored or the zone is reenabled, the panel will return to normal if no other
events are present. When a zone disable event
occurs it will display similar to Exhibit 5-17. If all
events are restored, it will display for 100 seconds
then switch to the System Status Display if no
buttons are pressed.
Z
C U
H H
E V
ON E D I S A B L E D :
0 0 1
ST OM ME S S
ZONE
0 0 1
: MM : S S A MM / D D / Y Y Y Y
EN T
X X X X OF
Y Y Y Y
Exhibit 5-17 Zone Disable Display
Line 1
Zone Disabled State with Zone #
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
This event is number XXXX for the total

YYYY current events
5.19 WALKTEST STATE

Walktest is a means to test a system without
unneeded disturbance to building occupants.
NOTE: Intelligent Sensors are the only
devices that respond to a Walktest
command in V1.03. V1.30 and above
allows Sensors AND Addressable
inputs to respond to Walktest.
The devices are each individually programmed to
Walktest with smoke (default) OR with IR. Sensors
indicate that they are in the TEST ALARM status by
blinking their LEDs Green then Red when tested.
Sensor LEDs will turn off (back to green only, every 5
seconds) when alarm level clears.
devices, which are enabled for Walktest, will

respond during this mode:
CM: Configured to respond to Walktest
RM: Configured to NOT respond to Walktest
NAC1 & NAC2: Configured to respond to Walktest
RELAYS: Trouble activated, otherwise not
responsive.
Walktest can be accomplished in two ways:
IR tool- initiated at the device/by device (IR
Communication must be enabled at panel). If
Test Modes-Test Alarm is entered on the device,
it is in a test mode status. If configured for
Walktest with IR, it will present a Walktest state
to the outputs. If configured for Walktest with
Smoke, it will be ready to test with smoke to
create the Walktest state for the outputs.
Panel Menu - system (via panel) All input
devices are put in a test alarm status and can
then be tested with smoke.
Each input
programmed for Walktest with IR, will
immediately show a Walktest Alarm event.
1. Press Escape to bring up TOP LEVEL
MENU. Press F4 Password. Enter Password.
2.
3. Press F4 WALKTEST to get to the Walktest

screen (exhibit 5-18). The cursor will be at the
bottom line for the timeout which can be
changed with the +/- button from 1-4 hours from
last activation/event/keypress.
4. Press ENTER to begin Walktest mode 1
Buzzer ON (the local piezo will also sound with
the activation of the alarm events).
5. Press ENTER again to begin Walktest mode
2 Buzzer OFF (the local piezo will be silent
with the activation of the alarm events).
S E L E C T WA L K T E
NOT AC T I
EN T ER TO S T
T I MEOU T :
1
H
MOD E
S
V
A
O
T : MOD E
E
R T
UR ( S )
BU Z Z ER
O N
MOD E
2
BU Z Z ER OF F
Exhibit 5-18 Walktest Display
The Walktest functions as a toggle mode, it is either

On or Off. While On, the system goes into trouble
and accepts normal sensor alarm events and
responds by recording the events (Walktest active) in
history and activating chosen output devices for a
duration of 4 second (continuous). Only Output
Page 46 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
Press Escape. Press F5 MAINT

Manual P/N 06-369
Local and Remote Display will display

pertinent information - Walktest active,
time and date of event.
A Device may only be activated once
during a Walktest mode.
Walktest
timeout is selectable for 1 to 4 hours.
This timer restarts upon any event or
press of button. If no events or buttons
are pressed for selected time, the system
will reset itself back to normal operation.
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
OPERATION
The remainder of the Cheetah Xi 50 Operations is basic operation details and is arranged in alphabetical
order for ease in location:
5.20 ACCLIMATE
5.23 CITY TIE/MASTERBOX
A new feature incorporated into the Cheetah Xi 50

addressable devices is the Acclimate.
The
acclimate feature allows the photo sensor to adjust
to the environment ambient noise levels on a short
term basis (1 hour). The Photo, Photo/Heat, Ion,
and Photo Duct sensors all have the capability of the
acclimate feature.
This feature is enabled by
default. It is internal to these devices and allows
them to become accustomed to the environment.
A Master Box is a municipal fire alarm box (street

box that sends an alarm to the public fire service
communications center) that can also be operated
by a remote means. If using a master box with an
Auxiliary Fire Alarm System, a Supervised Control
Module (55-042) and a 10-2413 Masterbox
Supervisor module will be required.
When
configuring for Masterbox, the circuit should be
programmed for any alarm event. The activation
should be steady state (no pulsing), nonsilenceable, and no Walktest or drill.
5.21 AC TROUBLE DELAY

Central and Remote Supervising Station Systems
require the use of a Digital Alarm Communicator
Transmitter (DACT), 10-2528 or 10-2254 Reverse
Polarity Module.
These modules transmit all
information from the panel output, to the Supervising
Station. Since Loss of AC is non-critical and
secondary power is available, Supervising Stations
typically need not see immediate AC power low
troubles. AC power loss trouble will not immediately
be sent to the dialer for AC power low or loss
Trouble, if it is the only fault. The communication will
wait the programmed amount of time. The Cheetah
Xi 50 controller is programmable for a 0-30 hour (in
1 hour increments) AC trouble delay. The piezo and
the display of the event do not follow the delay of the
relay and are immediately annunciated if the AC
trouble is the only trouble.
5.22 ALARM VERIFICATION

Sensors can be individually configured for an alarm
verification delay. The delay consists of extra time
to confirm that the device is still in alarm. When a
sensor is configured for Alarm Verification, it will first
report Alarm Verification ON at the first sense of the
alarm level being exceeded. The actual alarm event
is not broadcast until the Alarm verification time has
expired AND the sensitivity level is still above the
alarm threshold.
Alarm Verification cannot be
implemented with systems using cross zone or count
zone operation for releasing service.
UL S2203
FM 3029134
5.24 CLASS A OPERATION

The Addressable Loop, Input Monitor Modules,
Supervised Control Module and the two on-board
Audible Loops (A1 & A2) can all be configured for
Class B, two wire, or Class A, four wire wiring.
The redundant wiring provided with Class A wiring
provides added security that events can still be
recognized with a single wire break. When Class
A wiring is utilized, Configure the circuit for Class
A wiring, no t-tap wiring is allowed, the return leg
from the last device must be located in a separate
conduit as the main leg. The control panel is
constantly supervising all wiring. Once an Open
Fault is recorded on one of the inside legs of
wiring,
the
panel
immediately
transfers
communication to the redundant leg of Class A
wiring.
5.25 DAYLIGHT SAVINGS

Control panels with Version 3.00 and higher
firmware operate as follows: Beginning in 2007,
Daylight Saving Time will start on the second
Sunday in March, and change back to standard
time on the first Sunday in November.
Daylight Saving Time -- for the U.S. and its
territories -- is NOT observed in Hawaii, American
Samoa, Guam, Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands, the
Eastern Time Zone portion of the State of Indiana,
and by most of Arizona (with the exception of the
Navajo Indian Reservation in Arizona). The control
panel will automatically change the time
forward/backward at the appropriate times if
daylight savings is selected, YES. The control
panel will not change the time if the daylight
savings is selected NO.

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 47 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
OPERATION
FIKE
5.26 DAY/NIGHT/HOLIDAY
SCHEDULE
If smoke sensors are located in a hazard area that is
much more active during typical operation hours,
and quiet during off hours, it may be optimum to
utilize the Day/Night/Holiday Schedule. This option
provides the ability to have two separate alarm
thresholds; one less sensitive alarm threshold during
operational hours, one more sensitive alarm
threshold during non-operational hours. Each input
sensor has two alarm sensitivity thresholds. Night
Alarm Level is always used on all sensors. Day
Alarm Level is only used if Day/Night /Holiday
Schedule
are
selected.
If Day/Night/Holiday is selected as active, the On
and Off times must be configured and the holidays
need also be configured.
The panel can be
configured for twenty holiday dates which must be
maintenanced yearly. On non-holiday dates, a start
time (hour AM/PM and minute) and stop time are
configured for alarm sensitivity changes. Sensors
enabled for this will change to Night Alarm Level
when the start time is reached and revert back to
Day Alarm Level when the stop time is exceeded.
On holidays, the system will remain at Night Alarm
Level.
Note: the Acclimate feature is not used when
day/night thresholds are used.
5.27 DEVICE LED OPERATION

The following are the responses expected from the
device LED:
Normal
Green every 5 seconds
Pre-Alarm1
Red, slow
Pre-Alarm2
Red, fast
Alarm/Sum
Red, steady
Trouble, Open
Yellow, slow
Trouble, Short
Yellow, fast
Trouble, General Yellow, steady
Test Alarm
Red/Green
Note: Red/Green may also show on a Relay
Module to indicate status of the Feedback input
and the Output relay status (one is active and
the other is normal).
5.28 DIAGNOSTICS
There are seven diagnostic screens available. Refer
to Servicing section for a full description on this
operation.
Page 48 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
5.29 DRIFT COMPENSATION

The Cheetah Xi 50 intelligent Eclipse sensors
perform a drift compensation routine.
Drift
compensation is a feature that allows the sensor
to be accustomed to the environment and helps
ensure that dust and dirt do not cause false alarms
on a sensor. As dust/dirt is accumulated in the
sensor chamber, the sensor will gradually adjust
for this increase. This routine is performed on a
long-term basis, where the acclimate feature is
performed on a short term basis.
5.30 DRILL ACTION

Fire Alarm Drill inputs are frequently needed to
perform a practice fire alarm drill/building
evacuation test or for the Fire Department to
evacuate a building. The Drill State can be
activated from the main panel Drill button, an
addressable input Monitor Module configured for
Drill, or the Remote Display can invoke a Drill
Input.
When a Drill event occurs the panel backlight will
turn on and an event will be recorded in the
history. No Panel LED will illuminate but the piezo
will warble. When an input device is active, it will
turn on its RED LED steady to indicate the
activated status. Any output module programmed
for the Drill State will be ON until Silenced (if
programmed as Silenceable).
Drill events are latching. The control panel must
be reset to return the system to Normal status.
When a drill event occurs it will display similar to
Exhibit 5-18.
I
C
H
E
N
U
H
V
P
S
:
E
U T AC T I
T OM ME S
MM : S S A
N T
X X X X
Exhibit 5-19
V E :
DR
SAGE
L
MM / D D /
OF
Y Y
Drill Display
I
Y
Y
L L
ADR
Y YY
Y
Line 1
Drill Event
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4

Drill Rules:
CM: Configurable for Drill
RM: Disabled by C-Linx
NAC1 & 2: Configurable for Drill
RELAYS: Disabled

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
OPERATION
5.31 FLAME ENHANCE (NONLISTED, SEE PAGE 77)

The Photo/Heat sensor provides a new flame
enhance operation that will provide a faster
response than a conventional photo/heat device. If
the device senses an increase in obscuration AND
an increase in temperature it will speed its alarm
response calculations. Also, if the temperature rise
is greater than 3 C AND there is greater than 1%/ft
obscuration detected it will also speed the alarm
response calculations.
5.32 HISTORY
There is a 3,200 event history buffer in the
CHEETAH XI 50 Control Panel. The buffer is
continuously cycling. The first record/event in, will
be first out (upon exceeding 3,200 events). The only
exception to this rotating buffer is when an Alarm
event occurs. Since the first alarm event is critical
for identification of fire initiation, the buffer will keep
the first alarm event and then STOP after the next
999 events are recorded.
The event buffers can be viewed in the following
different methods:
Step Alarm Current Alarm events only
Step Super Current Supervisory events only
Step All All current events displayed
Old History (F5) Old History events (pre-reset, all
3200). Toggles between all and current. Press Step
all to display and event, then press F5 to toggle
between CURRENT and OLD history.
The Step and +/- buttons each display current
events. Current events are those that have taken
place since the last Reset of the panel. Old History
will display the entire 3,200 event history buffer
including those previous to the reset. This history is
battery backed. If power is removed from the
system, the history is still saved (held by the lithium
coin cell battery).
History can also be viewed by the following
H I S TOR
F 1 - A L ARM
F 2 - S U P E RV
F 3 - T ROUB L
Exhibit 5-20
Y MENU
F 4 - E V EN T S
F 5 - ZONE
F 6 - ERAS E
History menu
ALARM
A L ARM T Y P E
# 1
CU S T OM ME S S AG E X - X X X
1 2 : 24 : 4 4 P
02 / 0 5 / 20 0 7
E V EN T
0 0 1 OF
0 0 0 1
Exhibit 5-21 Alarm History Menu
+/-
SUPERVISORY
S UP ERV
CU S T OM
1 2 : 24 : 4
E V EN T
Exhibit 5-22
+/-
I SORY
I NPU T
ME S SAGE X - X XX
4 P
02 / 0 5 / 20 0 7
0 0 1 OF
0 0 0 1
Supervisory History Menu
Use the + and on the Keypad to

scroll through all Supervisory events in
the history buffer. Use F1 and F2 to
further locate device event.
TROUBLE
GENERA L
T ROUB L E
CU S T OM ME S S AG E X - X X X
1 2 : 24 : 4 4 P
02 / 0 5 / 20 0 7
E V EN T
0 0 1 OF
0 0 0 1
Exhibit 5-23 Trouble History Menu
+/-
Use the + and on the Keypad to scroll

through all Trouble events in the history
buffer.
EVENTS
P OWE R
CU S T OM M
0 1 : 0 0 : 0 0
E V EN T
0
Exhibit 5-24
+/-
- UP RE S E T
SG PANE L 0 0 1
P
0 1 / 0 1 / 20 0 7
0 1 OF
0 0 0 4
Events History Menu
Use the + and on the Keypad to scroll

through all events in the history buffer.
Use F1 and F2 to further locate device
event. Use F5 to toggle to the OLD
history.
ZONE
T
C
1
Z
RO
US
2 :
ON
+/-
UL S2203
FM 3029134

scroll through all Alarm events in the
history buffer. Use F1 and F2 to
further locate device event.

Manual P/N: 06-369
UB L E AC T
ZONE
00 1
T OM ME S S AG E X - X X X
24 : 4 4 P
02 / 0 5 / 20 0 7
E E V
0 0 0 1 OF
0 0 05
Exhibit 5-25 Zone History Menu
scroll through all Zone events in
the history buffer
Page 49 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
OPERATION
FIKE
ERASE
5.33.2
This menu requires prior entry of a successful Level

3 (Distributor) password.
To access the Device Address menus, press F2,

from the Maintenance Menu:
TO
P R E S S E N T ER
E R A SE
H I S T O RY
Exhibit 5-26 Erase History Menu

Enter
If you Press Enter on the Keypad a

screen will appear to the one below.
This will erase current history as
well as All History for the panel.
* * ERAS I NG * *
* * H I ST O R Y * *
Exhibit 5-27 Erase History Confirm
Use C-Linx Software to obtain viewing of the
complete 3200 event history buffer.
5.33 MAINT - MAINTENANCE

To access the Maintenance menu, press F5, from
the Function Switches/Top Level Menu:
MA I N T ENANCE MENU
F 1 - DE V RD
F 4 - WA L K T S
F 2 - D E V A DR
F 5 - B U ZZ E R
F 3 - DE V RP L
F 6 Exhibit 5-28 Maintenance Menu
5.33.1 DEV RD DEVICE READ

To access the Device Read menu, press F1, from
the Maintenance Menu:
MO
A T
LO
T Y
Line 3
Line 4
S T RE C E N T D E V I CE
T ACHED TO PANE L
OP : 1
AD D R E S S : NN N
P E : X X X X X X X X X X X
Exhibit 5-29 Device Read Menu
Displays
the
most
recent
ADDRESS of the device seen
attached to the loop. To read a
device address, either add it to the
loop while this menu is displayed, or
temporarily remove and replace the
device for it to read the address.
The Device type of the address that
is most recently identified in line 3.
Page 50 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
DEV ADR - DEVICE ADDRESS
S E L EC T A D D R E S S
LOOP : 1
ADDRE S S : 0 0 1
P R E S S E N T E R T O S T A RT
Exhibit 5-30 Device Address Menu
Line 2
Use the <> buttons to move the

cursor under the Address range and
the +/- buttons to the desired device
(1-50)
Line 4
Press the enter Button and a screen

will step you through device replace
(see below).
Note: This menu allows you to

change the ADDRESS of a
device.
Once ENTER is
pressed, the panel needs to
see a NEW DEVICE record for
the device. Either add it to the loop at this time or
remove and replace the single device. This menu
does not alter the configuration or the panel
supervision, those functions will still be required to
be completed for appropriate operation and
supervision.
CONNE
ADDRE
PRE S S
COMP L
Exhibit 5-31
CT
DE V I CE
TO
S SAB L E
LOOP
E NT E R W H E N
E T E
Device Address Process Menu
This menu will prompt the user to connect the new

device (or temporarily remove and replace the
desire device to address to the loop):
C O N N E CT
DE V I CE
TO
ADDRE S SAB L E
LOOP
* N EW D E V I C E *
* D E T E CT E D*
Exhibit 5-32 Device Address/New Device Menu
The panel has detected that a new device
message was recorded and is ready for the user
to press ENTER to record the device with the new
address (the panel will auto-increment the address
number after each successful address write):
LOOP : 1
A D D R E S S : N NN
DE V I CE ADDR CHANGE
C O M PL E T E D
E N T E R F O R NE X T D E V I C
Exhibit 5-33 Device Address/Changed Menu

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
5.33.3
OPERATION
DEVICE REPLACE
If a sensor type (device with base/head) device

needs replacement, with a successful Password
Level 2 or higher this menu can be used to replace a
device. To access the Device Replace menu, press
F3, from the Maintenance Menu:
S E L E C T A D D R E SS
LOOP : 1
A D D R E SS : 0 0 1
T Y P E :
P H OT O S E N S OR
Exhibit 5-34 Device Replace Menu
Line 2
Use the <> buttons to move the

cursor under the Address field and
the +/- buttons to the desired device
(1-50) to replace.
Line 4
Press the enter Button and a screen

will step you through device
replace. The panel will read the
configuration from the copy that the
panel has (if it contains a checksum
loaded by C-Linx) and then load it
to the new device when replaced.
This menu will replace the existing
serial number information for the
device. Once ENTER is pressed to
start, wait for the process to
complete before going to other
menus.
Note: This menu allows you to
replace
a
device.
The
replacement device MUST be the
same type of device. Testing of
the
changed
device
is
recommended after replacement.
When this menu is invoked, the panel will retrieve

the configuration and store that configuration:
S E L E C T A D D R E SS
LOOP : 1
A D D R E SS : 0 0 1
T Y P E :
P H OT O S E N S OR
Exhibit 5-35 Device Replace/Source Menu
R E T R I E V I N G C O N FI G
F R O M D E V I CE
> > > > >> > > > > > > >> < <
P L E A S E WA I T
Exhibit 5-36 Device Replace/Read Menu
and then prompt to replace the device.
UL S2203
FM 3029134
The panel will then send the same configuration

from the old device to the new one:
CON F I G UR I NG
N EW D E V I C E
> > > > >> > > > > > > >> < <
P L E A S E WA I T
Exhibit 5-37 Device Replace/Write Menu
The panel will record the DEVICE REPLACE OK
(or FAIL is if there was a failure) event and display
COMPLETED on the bottom line, then allow
replacement of another device:
R E P L A C E S U C C E ED ED
LOOP : 1
A D D R E SS : 0 0 1
T Y P E :
P H OT O S E N S OR
EN T ER FOR NE X T DE V IC
Exhibit 5-38 Device Replace/Source Menu
The panel will perform a reset and log a CONFIG
CHANGE TIMEOUT record at the conclusion of
the device replacement. If there is no button entry
within 100 seconds.
5.34 NETWORK OPERATION

Multiple Cheetah Xi 50 panels can be networked
together to provide one/multiple points for entire
system status using a 10-2627 Ethernet module
(non UL, see page 71) on each controller. (see
also manual 06-388 Ethernet Module).
The monitoring panel on the network will receive,
display, and log all events across the network,
including the custom message information (2nd line
of display). Each panel on the network must be
configured:
Network ID 1-128
Network IDs to Supervise (First only)
Custom message 20 Characters
Wiring style 4 or 7
Network location - first/middle/last device
Switch Transmit status - global/local
(Reset/Silence/Acknowledge/Drill)
Switch Receive status individual
selection
(Reset/Silence/Acknowledge/Drill)
In Config menu 6 the IP information will also be
required to utilize the Ethernet Monitoring
IP ADR Source IP 000.000.000.000
Destination IP 000.000.000.000
IP SUP Network ID 1-128
At IP Address 000.000.000.000
IP TIM 1-255 minutes
Network events are transmitted by zone and state.
All states except Predischarge and Abort are
communicated across the network. The event is
displayed exactly the same on all panels. Only the

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 51 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
OPERATION
FIKE
F1 locate details the panel location. The first 20

characters of the custom message for the device are
transmitted
across
the
network
to
main
CONTROLLERS only. The peripheral devices do
NOT receive custom message information unless
the event comes from the panel where the
peripheral is connected.
If the panel is configured to respond to the zone
event that is transmitted, it will respond by activating
the local piezo, appropriate LED, output devices for
that zone, and forward the event via the DACT to the
supervising station. Press F1 to locate the panel,
loop, and address that created the event. The
monitoring panel connected to the supervising
station must have all networked zones enabled in
order to transmit to the supervising station.
If the panel is NOT configured to responds to the
zone event that is transmitted, it will respond by
logging the event in history and displaying it on the
display.
Network information is transmitted to the Dialer
ADEMCO contact ID as :
Area = Panel id 1-99 (limited to two digits, so
Serial Dialer interface is limited to 99 panels)
Point =
loop 1, addr 1-254 displays as 001 to 254
loop 4, addr 237 254 displays as 999
5.35 PERIPHERAL BUSS

The P6 terminal provides an RS485 peripheral buss
for communication to several approved devices that
can be supervised by the control panel and or listen
to the peripheral buss. V2.00 Firmware and higher
provided the ability to allow a networked system to
respond to ONE single graphic micro (panel number
is also included in the information). The following is
all transmitted on the peripheral buss. Zone status,
Panel Status i.e. panel LED, panel piezo, number of
states in every zone, address device status. This is
also transmitted out on the P5 232 port.
Page 52 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
5.36 POSITIVE ALARM SEQUENCE

This feature is enabled or disabled for all sensors
present on the panel. When enabled, the alarm
signal from an automatic fire detection device shall
be acknowledged at the remote keypad (or input
module) within 15 seconds of annunciation in
order to initiate the alarm investigation phase. The
annunciation to this point consists of only the
Cheetah Xi 50 local piezo alarm and the event
message on the remote display. If an alarm signal
is not acknowledged within 15 seconds, all
notification circuits assigned to the same zone as
the initiating device will be activated immediately.
Trained personnel have up to 180 seconds during
the alarm investigation phase to evaluate the fire
condition and reset the panel. If the panel is not
reset during this investigation phase, all
notification circuits assigned to the same zone as
the initiating device will be activated upon
expiration of the investigation phase.
If a second automatic fire detector is actuated
during the alarm investigation phase, or any other
initiating device (such as manual alarm station) is
actuated, all notification circuits assigned to the
same zone as the initiating device will be activated
immediately.
A means has been provided to bypass this feature
without re-configuring the panel. An input module
configured with the PAS INHIBIT function will
disable this feature temporarily while the module is
activated and produce a trouble event. The
module must be returned to its normal status to reenable the positive alarm sequence feature. This
will clear the trouble event from the module
actuation.
5.37 RELAY BASE

The relay base provides an unsupervised dry
contact output near the detection device(s). The
base includes a local form C relay that can be
activated for ANY or MULTIPLE states or zone
activation. If default programming is used, the
relay will follow the Remote LED programming for
the sensor.

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
OPERATION
5.38 SILENCE INHIBIT

Certain jurisdictions require a silence inhibit timer.
This feature requires that the panel not allow
silencing for one minute following the first alarm
event. If this is configured to be ENABLED, the
SILENCE button on the Display (or other Silence
input) will not silence the panel for one minute
following the receipt of the first alarm event.
5.39 SILENCE REMINDER

Certain jurisdictions require a silence reminder. This
feature requires that the panel produce a momentary
pulse from the panel piezo/buzzer following the
silencing of outputs. If this is configured to be
ENABLED, the momentary piezo pulse is second
long every 14 seconds on a silenced panel.
5.40 SOUNDER BASE

The sounder base provides the ability to notify
occupants near the detection device(s). The base
includes a local 85db sounder that can be activated
in a slow, fast, continuous, or temporal output for
ANY or MULTIPLE states or zone activation. If
default programming is used, the sounder will follow
the Remote LED programming for the sensor. This
base requires separate 24VDC auxiliary power from
the main control panel (pulling 7mA standby; 35mA
alarm current).
5.41 STATE COUNTERS

The Cheetah Xi 50 can count states to create an
activation of an output. The state counters are
created from Eclipse addressable devices ONLY.
i.e. If zone 1 has several alarms, the output can be
programmed to activated upon receipt of 2 alarms
total.
(VESDA does not participate in State
Counters).
5.42 SUMMING (NON-LISTED,

SEE PAGE 77)
The Cheetah Xi 50 photo, photo/heat, photo/duct
and ion sensors are capable of providing an
accumulating percentage for groups of devices.
This accumulating percentage can activate an
alarm from the same types of devices where
there may not possibly be enough obscuration to
cause an individual sensor alarm. To set up this
operation, a single sensor is selected as a
SUMMER. The Summer can look at information
from 8 photo (or ion, same type as summer and
same loop as summer - can include the summer)
sensors called the SUMMEE(s). The Summer will
total the obscuration percentages received from
each Summee defined. The Summer can be set
to alarm from 1-10%/ft (programmable in 0.5%/ft.
increments). Each Summee has configuration
settings for defining the level of obscuration to be
transmitted to the Summer (0.5 4%/ft in 0.1%/ft
increments. Summing groups can overlap and
there is no limitation on the number of Summers.
This operation can be very beneficial to detect a
fire early. As a fire builds, the smoke will rise and
typically accumulate in several sensors.
It
typically takes longer for an individual sensor to
reach the alarm level. If several sensors are rising
in obscuration detected, the alarm can be detected
faster and notification can be accomplished in a
prompt manner.
Example:
Photo Sensor SUMMER, Loop 1
address 5. This device is configured to Sum the
following devices which are physically located
near one another in the hazard:
Loop 1,
addresses 10,11,12,13,14,15,16, and 17. It is
programmed for a Summing threshold of 4%/ft.
Each Summee (addresses noted previous) is
configured for the obscuration to be transmitted to
the Summee at 0.5%/ft, 0.6%/ft, 0.7%/ft (up to 8
levels). When the Summer obtains a SUM of the
obscurations that are >= 4%/ft it reports a
SUMMING ALARM event to the system.
Note: The summee obscuration levels are sent as
it rises and falls in obscuration. The Summer will
look at the most current values sent from the
Summees to calculate the SUM for the SUMMING
ALARM.
Stop: The system does not allow
more than one alarm per device. The
C-Linx (V3.00 and higher) device
configuration Summing Alarm tab
provides the ability to program the
output type for the summing alarm event. If it
needs to participate in Predischarge, select Alarm.
If it is NOT to participate in Predischarge, select
Summing Alarm, Supervisory, PreAlarm1 or 2.
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 53 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
FIKE
INSTALLATION
6.0 INSTALLATION
System installation is independent of whether the modules were ordered separately or as part of a complete
Cheetah Xi 50 system. For optional modules not used, skip the instructions detailing their installation. Proper
system installation requires following steps 1-9 in order:
1. Install Enclosure(s)
2. Pull Field wiring segregating Power Limited from Non-Power Limited. Validate within specifications.
3. Install transformer and Wire AC to transformer.
4. Install Optional Electronics onto main controller.
5. Install Controller and electronics into Back-box.
6. Connect AC and batteries to controller and Power up. Validate all work properly. Power Down.
7. Connect Field wiring.
8. Power up with devices connected.
9. Configure System Autoprogram or Engineered configuration
6.1
INSTALL ENCLOSURE(S)
6.1.1 Cheetah Xi 50 Enclosure

The mounting location for the control panel
enclosure is very important. Vibration, dust,
moisture, electromagnetic interference, and radio
frequency interference are all types of problems
that could adversely effect the successful
operation of the equipment. Choose a mounting
location that is free from environmental problems.
Refer to the Specifications, for the exact
temperature ratings of the equipment. Do not
install in an environment that exceeds these
temperature ranges. The Cheetah Xi 50 System
enclosure is not fire rated.
The control panel should be installed so the
viewing window is approximately 60 above the
floor. The back-box can be surface or flush
mounted as desired. For surface mounting, utilize
the four tear-drop openings in the back of the
box. For flush mounting, cut the opening in the
wall to fit the back-box and secure the box in place
by utilizing the through holes located on the sides
of the box.
Determine the maximum number of conductors
needed from the design. Wire is to be routed to
the control panel through back-box via knock-out
openings. Conduit knock-outs are provided for two
distinct conduit sizes. Removing just the inside
hole creates a one-half inch (1/2) opening.
Removing the entire opening provides a threequarter inch (3/4) opening.
UL S2203
FM 3029134
Unless otherwise detailed in this manual, or in

other documents relating to this control panel, the
technician shall utilize published standards and
references such as NFPA 70 National Electrical
Code, NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code, NFPA
2001 Standard for Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing
Systems, and others, which may be relevant to the
Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
The enclosure accommodates the controller,
Optional modules and either a 12AH or 18AH
battery pack.
Dimensions are 22.10 tall x 15.31" wide x

3.25" deep including a .50" wide front lip for
flush mounting.
Mount using tear-drop shaped holes at 12.5"

horizontal centers and 20.2" vertical centers
OR thru holes located on side of box. See
Exhibit 6-1.
The door is easily removable via two screws.

If door is removed, re-secure grounding wire
to both door and back box to ensure full
ground connection.

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 55 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
INSTALLATION
FIKE
Exhibit 6-1 Enclosure Specifications
Page 56 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
INSTALLATION
6.1.2 Optional 33AH Battery Enclosure, 10-2154-C

The 10-2154 33AH battery enclosure should be
installed within 10' of the main system enclosure.
Mounting Methods:
P/N: 10-2154-C (C = color)

R = Red
G = Grey
Surface:
Use tear-drop openings in back of

back-box
Flush:
Use tear-drop openings in back of

back-box and 3/16 dia. thru holes,
2 each side for secure installation.
This method provides a lip
around back-box and removable
door.
11 High x 21 Wide x 5 Deep with attached door.

17 lbs. empty
Tinnerman Nuts
Typ. 4 Plcs.
1 1/8 x 7/8 Knockouts

Typ. 6 Places
20"
11"
15"
10"
11"
5"
5"
R
21"
20"
16.5"
1 38"
10"
Back View
Tear Drop location for Mounting
Exhibit 6-2 33AH Enclosure Dimension
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 57 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
INSTALLATION
FIKE
6.1.3 Optional 75AH Battery Enclosure, 10-2236-C

The 10-2236 75AH battery enclosure should be
installed within 20' of the main system enclosure.
Mounting Methods:
Surface: Use diameter thru holes, 4 each
in back of enclosure
P/N: 10-2236-C (C = color)

R = Red
G = Grey
14 High x 26 1/4 Wide x 7 Deep with door
47 lbs. empty
Flush:
Use diameter thru holes, 4 each

in back of enclosure and recess into
wall for secure installation.
Exhibit 6-3 75AH Enclosure Dimension
Page 58 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
6.2
INSTALLATION
PULL FIELD WIRING SEGREGATE POWER LIMITED FROM

NON-POWER LIMITED
6.2.1 Power Limited Requirements

Route all field wiring through the appropriate
conduit knockouts, then to the appropriate circuit
terminals. Provide adequate wire length to allow
strain relief. Cheetah Xi 50 terminal strips accept
a single wire from 14 to 18 AWG.
Non-power limited wiring shall be limited to the left

side of the enclosure. The following are nonpower limited connections:
1. P1 input power connections
2. Any Non-power limited wiring connected to
the P2.
3. DACT connections can not use the same
enclosure entry point as non power-limited
relay connections.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
TRANSFORMER
EA RTH
G RO UN D
Exhibit 6-4.1 Power Limited /Non Power Limited Wiring Segregation with Relays Connected to Non
Power Limited Sources
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 59 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
INSTALLATION
FIKE
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
TRANSFORMER
EA R TH
GROUND
Exhibit 6-4.2 Power Limited /Non Power Limited Wiring Segregation with Relays Connected to Power
Limited Sources
6.2.2 Wire Selection

When planning the type of wire to be used, refer to
National Electrical Code and NFPA 70. The
following guidelines may be used to select the wire
size. Stranded wire must be tinned per NFPA 70
and local requirements.
Uncoated
Copper
Coated
Copper
AWG
Strands
Diameter
(Ohms
per 1000')
(Ohms per
1000')
18
0.040"
7.77
8.08
18
0.046"
7.95
8.45
16
0.051"
4.89
5.08
16
0.058"
4.99
5.29
14
0.064"
3.07
3.19
14
0.073"
3.14
2.26
Exhibit 6-5 General Wire Specifications

Completely review the Specification section for
planning the appropriate wiring for the Signaling
Line Circuit (SLC).
2. Verify no stray voltages exist on any field wiring

prior to device installation.
3. Verify each conductor is free from shorts
between all other conductors and chassis.
4. Measure wire resistance with a short across
the circuit at a point furthest from circuit start.
This is typically across EOL for Class B and at
the panel for Class A.
Install field devices per individual device wiring
diagrams.
CAUTION:
The Cheetah Xi 50
field devices contain static sensitive
components. Handle the electronics
by the edges only and avoid touching
the integrated components. Keep the electronics
in the protective static bags it was shipped in until
time for installation. Always ground yourself with a
proper wrist strap before handling the module(s).
If the installer is properly grounded at all times,
damage due to static discharge will not occur. If
the module requires repair or return to Fike, it
must be shipped in an anti-static bag.
After pulling the wire into the enclosure:

1.
Verify wire for ground-fault absence and

acceptable readings according specifications
prior to connecting the circuits.
Page 60 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
CAUTION: Field devices shall not

be connected if using meggar or any
means that applies voltages in
excess of device ratings (to prevent
damage to the devices).
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
6.3
INSTALLATION
INSTALL TRANSFORMER AND WIRE AC TO TRANSFORMER
Complete wiring with AC power off

and locked-out
F2
F1 AC 15A
24V AC BATTERY
Secondary
+ -
Ensure the power is compatible with

transformer assembly (120VAC or 240VAC).
BATTERIES
the
Route AC ground (chassis) and connect to the

open press stud in the enclosure back-box,
securing with a hex-nut and washer. Install the
transformer(s) into the back-box, onto the four
press-studs. Secure in place with four 6-32 hex
nuts and washers. Route the AC hot and neutral
and ground (chassis) wires into the enclosure and
connect to the transformer Primary as shown.
This is a step-down transformer. Double check
the voltage output to make sure that it is
approximately 24VAC.
F3
GND
EARTH
GROUND
TRANSFORMER
The AC line power must originate from a

dedicated circuit at the main building power
distribution center. The circuit breaker shall be
equipped with a lockout mechanism and be clearly
labeled as a "Fire Protection Control Circuit".
Route the power to the system through the
dedicated grounded metallic conduit.
F2 BATT 15A
Exhibit 6-6 AC to Transformer Wiring

NOTE: Transformer Primary (H1 and H2)
and secondary (X1 and X2) connections.
Never swap transformer by connecting
main AC to X1 and X2. doing so will
make it a step up transformer and will
damage the controller.
NOTE: The transformer input should
never be connected to the Battery input.
Reversing the AC and Battery input will
damage the controller.
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 61 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
INSTALLATION
6.4
FIKE
INSTALL CONTROLLER
(AND DACT IF USED) INTO
BACK-BOX
DACT
If the 10-2528 DACT is used, install it under the
main controller before the controller is secure in
the back-box. Install the four 5/8 M/F standoffs
onto the threaded press studs located at the top
Center of the controller back box. Secure the
module to the standoffs by threading the four #6
lock washers. Connect the field wiring as noted in
section 6.6.4
CONTROLLER
Thread the four 2 male/female standoffs into the
back box pre-threaded press studs at each corner
of the controller.
Thread the one 2
Female/Female standoff into the back box center
pre-threaded press studs below the of the four 5/8
standoffs for the DACT. The middle standoff is for
support only and is not attached to the controller.
Install main controller into back box onto the
standoffs. Secure only to the four outside corner
standoffs using a hex nut at each.
Exhibit 6-7 Main Controller and DACT
Page 62 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
CONNECT AC AND BATTERIES TO CONTROLLER AND POWER

UP. VALIDATE WORKING.
POWER DOWN
With the breaker locked out, complete the field wiring

from the transformer to the main control board as shown.
Turn on the breaker and power the control panel with AC
power. Connect the battery power as shown. Power up
controller without field wiring attached to validate that it
powers appropriately and optional modules are installed
appropriately.
Validate that all display LEDs and
devices are functioning as normal with no devices
connected. Follow these steps to power down; first
removing the batteries (DC power) then transferring the
breaker (AC).
JTAG
24V
NC NO
PC
USB
SW20
VESDA
PERIPHERAL
P10
P2
P3
P4
AUX#1
F3 4A
P5
AUX#2 F4 4A
C NC NO C NC NO C
RELAY 1 RELAY 2 TROUBLE
24V
24V
+
+
DACT
PER
6.5
INSTALLATION
P6
-++
ADDR
LOOP
+
P7
--
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
++
NAC
#1
+
P8
--
F1 AC 15A
++
NAC
#2
+
P9
F2 BATT 15A
24V AC BATTERY
Secondary
+ GND
TRANSFORMER
10-2615 REV
02-11544 REV
+
BATTERY #1
12 VDC
+
BATTERY #2
12 VDC
7AH TO 18AH
7AH TO 18AH
(33AH TO 75AH SEPERATE ENCLOSURE REQUIRED)
(33AH TO 75AH SEPERATE ENCLOSURE REQUIRED)
Exhibit 6-8 AC and Battery Wiring
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 63 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
INSTALLATION
6.6
FIKE
CONNECT FIELD WIRING
Using each individual field module installation

instruction, attach devices to the field wiring.
Following will be general wiring diagrams for each
module. The actual installation instruction will also
contain device specification information that
should also be validated. Attach field wiring to the
control panel as shown.
Refer to the
Equipment/Products section for specific wiring
limitations and circuit requirement specifications.
PC
USB
JTAG
24V
C NC NO
RELAY 2
C NC NO
TROUBLE
SW20
VESDA
PERIPHERAL
P10
P2
P3
P4
AUX#1
F3 4A
P5
AUX#2 F4 4A
C NC NO
RELAY 1
Caution
Most
all
wiring
connections to the main Cheetah Xi
50 control board are made with nonremovable terminal blocks. To install
the wiring, you should remove power to the control
board prior to making connections the terminal
blocks on the control board. Once wiring is
installed into the terminal block, power may be
reapplied to control board to verify system
operation. Attaching the wire while the terminal
block is still connected into the board may damage
the control board or field devices.
24V
+
24V +
PER
+
POWER LIMITED
24VDC AUXILIARY
OUTPUTS
P6
+
-++
- +
+
- -
+
+
- +
+
- -
- -
- -
P7
-++
NAC
#1
-
F1
P8
F2
-- -+-
-- -+-
1.2K EOL
1.75A MAXIMUM
-- -+-
-- -+-
1.2K EOL
1.75A MAXIMUM
--
F3
F1 AC 15A
++
NAC
#2
-
F4
F2 BATT 15A
P9
24V AC BATTERY
Secondary
+ -
F5
GND
F6
10-2615 REV
02-11544 REV
Exhibit 6-9 Cheetah Xi 50 Controller Wiring
Page 64 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
INSTALLATION
6.6.1 GENERAL RELAY WIRING (P2)

Three individual relays which activate on system
status. The Trouble Relay is normally energized
with power to allow it to change state when power
is missing.
Contacts are shown with power
applied and no Troubles present. The circuit
board provides labeling for the three form C relays
where C=common; NC=normally closed; and
NO=normally open.
Monitoring connections
typically connect to common and then either NC or
NO depending on the type of supervision required.
6.6.2
24V
C
NC NO
RELAY 1
PC USB CONNECTION (P3)
The USB jack is for C-Linx using a USB cable as

shown in section 3.10.5. The connection port is
used for configuring the panel and Fike
peripherals. This connection is power limited.
C
NC NO
TR O U BLE
P2
Exhibit 6-10 Wiring P2 Relays

10-2629
C om m . C able
C -Linx
02-3053
VE SD A cable
N O T U SE D
PC
USB
6.6.3
C
NC NO
R ELA Y 2
S W 20
VESDA
P E R IP H E R AL
RS232 WIRING (P4-P5)
Two RS232 jacks are available to allow intelligent

devices to link into the Cheetah Xi 50 controller.
P4 is for VESDA HLI using a provided 14 serial
cable. P5 is currently not used. Both 232 ports
are permanent connections and shall be limited to
the same room only. These connections are
power limited.
UL S2203
FM 3029134
P3

Manual P/N: 06-369
P4
P5
Exhibit 6-11 RS232 Wiring (P3-P5)
Page 65 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
INSTALLATION
FIKE
6.6.4 RS485 PERIPHERAL BUS WIRING (P6)

Note: DACT A terminal wires to Cheetah Xi 50 P6- terminal; DACT B terminal wires to Cheetah Xi 50 P6 +
terminal. Peripheral + wires to other device/panel +; Peripheral wires to other device/panel -. No t-tapping.
Refer to document 45386C, D9068 Operation and Installation Guide for more details about the DACT.
All RS485 circuits are supervised and power limited.
Note: These devices also require 24VDC power from the panel also.
OPTIONAL DACT
B
A
POWER LIMITED AND SUPERVISED

PC
USB
JTAG
24V
VESDA
PERIPHERAL
P2
P3
P4
AUX#1
F3 4A
P5
RS485 4,000 feet max. 31 devices,

any combination.
Power Limited.
P7, Aux Power also required at each.
AUX#2 F4 4A
C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO
RELAY 1 RELAY 2 TROUBLE
SW20
P10
+
+
24V
PER
Insulate
24V
DACT
SHLD
+ P3
SHLD
-
P2
Remote
Display
P2
Graphic
Annunciator
4 3+
21+
P2
Zone
Annunciator
100 ohm term.

4 3+
21+
P6
-++
ADDR
LOOP
+
P7
--
F1
++
NAC
#1
+
P8
F2
--
F1 AC 15A
F3
F4
F5
F6
++
NAC
#2
+
P9
F2 BATT 15A
24V AC BATTERY
Secondary
+ -
GND
10-2615 REV
02-11544 REV 3
Exhibit 6-12 RS485 Peripheral Bus Wiring (P6)
Page 66 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
INSTALLATION
-
24V
6.6.5 AUXILIARY POWER WIRING (P6)
24V
PER
DACT
P6
The Cheetah Xi 50 main controller has two power limited

24VDC Non-resettable power outputs (4 upper contacts on
P6). This power output is used for addressable output
modules, graphic annunciators, remote displays, etc. Each is
rated at 1.75 amps maximum.
Exhibit 6-13 Auxiliary Power Wiring (P7)
6.6.6 SLC WIRING (P7)

Reference Equipment specification section for field wiring
limitations. Be aware of surrounding environment when
installing the addressable loop, looking for possible sources of
electrical interference. All SLC wiring should be segregated
from such sources for optimum operation. Conduit and
shielded cable help prevent electrical interferences from being
induced
If shielded cable is used, install the outgoing drain wire at the
panel. Connect it through and insulate at each junction box
and leave unconnected and insulated at the last device.
This wiring is supervised and power limited.
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
If using a High voltage device

to verify ground isolation of
loop wiring, do not expose
devices or modules to the high voltage.
Damage to the devices will occur.
Page 67 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
INSTALLATION
LE
D
INSULATE. LEAVE DRAIN OPEN (NO CONNECTION) AT LAST DEVICE.

CONNECT DRAIN WIRE THROUGH AT JUNCTION BOXES
--
(-) DET #1
++
DET #2
+
-
LE
D
LE
D
14 13 12 11 10
21
TOP
P7
NFPA defines Class B, Style 4

shall provide alarm receipt during a
single ground and to signal each
trouble. It is a method where a
single pair of wires can be used for
supervision and will support ttapping (Sensor #3 is T-Tapped off
Sensor #2 as shown in Exhibit 614). In the event of a single wire
break the communication to
devices after the break is lost.
ADDRESS
LOOP
(-)
(+)
OPTIONAL REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
Exhibit 6-14 Class B (Style 4)
CLASS A STYLE 6
(--)
(++)
(-)
--
TOP
LE
D
LE
D
12 3 4
P7
10 11 12 13 14
++
ADDRESS
LOOP
NFPA defines Class A, Style 6

shall provide alarm receipt during a
single open and/or ground and to
signal each trouble. It is a method
where two pair of wires are used
and will NOT support t-tapping. In
the event of a single wire break the
communication to devices after the
break continue.
(+)
(-)
(+)
6.6.6.3
EOL
39K
02-11259
(+)
6.6.6.2
DET #3
CLASS B STYLE 4
6.6.6.1
FIKE
Exhibit 6-15 Class A (Style 6)
CLASS A STYLE 7
Class A, Style 7 is the same as

Class A, Style 6 with the addition
that an alarm is still received when
a short circuit is present on the
loop. This method requires an
isolator head and base on each
addressable point. If style 7 is not
required, maximum of 50 devices
between two isolator type devices.
OTHER ADDRESSABLE DEVICES

OR OPTIONAL CLASS A RETURN
TO FACP
(+)
6.6.6.4 SENSOR BASE

WIRING
Page 68 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
FACP
D
LE
The base indicates the ability to

attach a Remote LED.
The
maximum current to be pulled from
this connection shall be 6.5mA as
described in the System Sensor
installation instruction for these
bases. The addressable loop is
limited to a maximum of 300 mA
total for addressable devices plus
Remote LED devices. If using
isolator base, the Loop + is
separated between terminal 1 (in)
and terminal 2 (out).
SHIELD
STRIP GAGE
(-)
OTHER ADDRESSABLE DEVICES

OR OPTIONAL CLASS A RETURN
TO FACP
Exhibit 6-16 Sensor Base Wiring

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
39K
EOL
02-11259
FIKE
INSTALLATION
6.6.6.5 SURVIVABILITY FROM

ATTACK BY FIRE
In order to comply with the "Survivability From
Attack by Fire" requirements in NFPA 72, the
following wiring considerations should be
addressed:
1) If all notification appliances connected to a
single addressable loop service only one zone of
operation, then no additional wiring requirements
apply
2) If the fire alarm system is installed in a sprinkler
protected building, then no additional wiring
requirements apply
3) If items 1 or 2 do not apply to the installation,
then the addressable loop shall be installed in a
Style 7 format using isolator modules OR the
addressable loop section of wiring servicing the
control module shall be installed using either 2
hour fire rated cable, or the cable shall be run in a
2 hour fire rated enclosure. Refer to Wiring
Options 1 & 2.
-++
(NO CONNECTION) AT LAST DEVICE.
BOXES INSULATE. LEAVE DRAIN OPEN
CONNECT DRAIN WIRE THROUGH AT JUNCTION
DET #2
(-)
LE
D
DET #1
DET #3
* INSTALLED IN A SPRINKLERED BUILDING

* INSTALLED IN A 2 HOUR FIRE RATED ENCLOSURE, OR
* 2 HOUR FIRE RATED, OR
LE
D
P7
LE
D
39K
EOL
24V TO NEXT DEVICE OR FACP
24V FROM PREVIOUS

DEVICE OR FACP
+
+
+
-
+
+
-
10
WIRING OPTION #1
11 12 13 14
TOP
(+)
LOOP
ADDRESS
TO NEXT DEVICE


SLC AND 24V CABLING
(--)
--
(++)
(-)
++
-++
+
+
-
LE
+
-
LE
D
+
+
-
10 11 12 13 14
TOP
LOOP
ADDRESS
P7
39K
EOL
24V FROM PREVIOUS

DEVICE OR FACP
(+)
SLC AND 24V CABLING
WIRING OPTION #2
Exhibit 6-17 Survivability From Attack by Fire Wiring Options
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 69 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
INSTALLATION
MINI MONITOR MODULE

WIRING (55-045/55-050)
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
(-)
SLC
TO NEXT
DEVICE
(+)
VIOLET
(+)
If monitoring a NC contact (Process Management

only), the contact is wired in series with the 39K
EOL (02-11259).
YELLOW
BLACK
SLC
FRO M PAN EL O R
PR EVIO US DEVICE
RED
The Mini Monitor Module can monitor dry contacts

(wired Class B, Style B initiating) for input to the
control system. It can be wired to Normally Open
(NO) contact as shown in Exhibit 6-18. To monitor
the wiring for a short circuit condition, the
installation requires a 14K (10-2530) resistor in
series with each NO contact.
RED
6.6.6.6
FIKE
(P/N 02-11259)
39K
EO L
Exhibit 6-18 Mini Monitor Module Wiring
MONITOR MODULE (4)

WIRING (55-041/55-046)
TOP
9
8
EOL
39K
SLC FROM PREVIOUS

DEVICE OR FACP
SLC TO NEXT
DEVICE OR FACP
14 13 12 11 10
The Monitor Module can monitor dry contacts

(wired Class B, Style B OR Class A, Style D
initiating) for input to the control system. It can be
wired to Normally Open (NO) contact as shown in
Exhibits 6-19 & 20. To monitor the wiring for a
short circuit condition, the installation requires a
14K (10-2530) resistor in series with each NO
contact.
6.6.6.7
LOOP
ADDRESS
Exhibit 6-19 Monitor Module Wiring-Class B
If monitoring a NC (Process Management only)

contact(s), the contact is wired in series with the
39K EOL (02-11259).
SLC FROM PREVIOUS

DEVICE OR FACP
SLC TO NEXT
DEVICE OR FACP
14 13 12 11 10
TOP
7
LOOP
6.6.6.8
ADDRESSABLE PULL
STATION WIRING (20-1063/
20-1064)
The 20-1063 is an intelligent dual stage pull

station. It includes the mini monitor module
electronics internally to monitor the status of the
mechanical pull station.
ADDRESS
Exhibit 6-20 Monitor Module Wiring-Class A

ADDRESSABLE LOOP +
FROM PREVIOUS
DEVICE
-
+ ADDRESSABLE LOOP
TO NEXT
- DEVICE
1
-
2
+
3
-
4
+
NOTE: Wiring terminal polarity is

opposite from the rest of the
devices. Loop + is terminal 2 Loop
is terminal 1
Exhibit 6-21 Addressable Pull Station Wiring
Page 70 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
INSTALLATION
6.6.6.9 SUPERVISED CONTROL

MODULE WIRING (55042/55-047)
TOP
14 13 12 11 10
(P/N 02-11259)
EOL
39K
The SCM provides the ability to activate

Notification Appliances via the SLC. The
NAC can be wired Class B, Style Y as
24V FROM PREVIOUS
DEVICE OR FACP
shown in Exhibit 6-22 OR Class A, Style Z
as shown in Exhibit 6-23.
The SCM
intelligently monitors the 24V power input.
No end-of-line relay is required for
Exhibit 6-22 SCM Class B Wiring
supervision of 24V power. Refer to each module
installation instructions for a complete description
of wiring.
1
2
3
8
7
SLC TO NEXT
DEVICE OR FACP
SLC FROM PREVIOUS

DEVICE OR FACP
LOOP
ADDRESS
TOP
SLC TO NEXT
DEVICE OR FACP
24VDC IN
SLC FROM PREVIOUS

DEVICE OR FACP
9
7
The SCM provides the ability to control Sprinkler

solenoids via the SLC. The 10-2360 series
diode/resistor is required to be wired in series
with the solenoid as shown in exhibit 6-24.
24VDC OUT
14 13 12 11 10
6.6.6.10 PRE-ACTION SOLENOID

INTERFACE
LOOP
ADDRESS
Exhibit 6-23 SCM Class A Wiring
6.6.6.11 AUXILIARY MASTERBOX

INTERFACE
1
2
3
24V FROM PREVIOUS

DEVICE OR FACP
+
+
SLC FROM PREVIOUS

DEVICE OR FACP
SLC TO NEXT
DEVICE OR FACP
SOLENOID
TOP
Program the output module for continuous output

with any alarm, non-silenceable, no Walktest or
drill operation. For proper operation, place SW1
on the 10-2413 to the 10-100 position.
Supervised for open, short, and ground fault
conditions. Rated for 14.5 ohm coil, 4 ohms total
field wiring, power limited.
FIELD INSTALLABLE 10-2360

14 13 12 11 10
The SCM provides the ability to control a

MasterBox solenoid via the SLC. The 10-2413 is
required to interface to this device and wired as
shown in exhibit 6-25.
LOOP
ADDRESS
Exhibit 6-24 Pre-Action Solenoid Wiring
SIG+ SIG- SOL- SOL+
12
11
SLC FROM PREVIOUS

DEVICE OR FACP
2
3
SLC TO NEXT
DEVICE OR FACP
0V +24V
Exhibit 6-25 Auxiliary Masterbox Wiring
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 71 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
INSTALLATION
FIKE
6.6.6.12 RELAY MODULE WIRING

(55-043/55-048)
SLC FROM PREVIOUS
DEVICE OR FACP
SLC TO NEXT
DEVICE OR FACP
NO
C
NC
NO
C
NC
UNSUPERVISED DRY CONTACT

INPUT
9
7
RELAY RELAY
CONTACT CONTACT
#1 #2
TOP
14 13 12 11 10
LOOP
ADDRESS
Exhibit 6-26 Relay Module Wiring
2.7K EOL
10-2316
The RM provides the ability to send system

status to fire system control and monitoring
equipment via the SLC. It contains 2 form C
dry contact outputs that both activate for the
programmed
zone/state.
Monitoring
equipment is typically either tied through the
Common (C) and Normally Open (NO) OR C
and Normally Closed (NC). It also provides
an input contact that can be monitored for
feedback to the module.
FIRST ARM
TOP
+
-
24V FROM PREVIOUS DEVICE OR FACP
SLC FRO
SLC TO N
LAST
ARM
(UP TO 6)
7
LOOP
ADDRESS
RELEASING MODULE
ARM OPERATION
Exhibit 6-27 RCM Module with ARM Wiring
24V
SOLENOID
SLC FROM PREVIOUS DEVICE OR FACP

SLC TO NEXT DEVICE OR FACP
TOP
14 13 12 11 10
7
Also Refer to the Releasing Control Module

and ARM Installation Instructions for proper
connections to the ARM(s).
The RCM provides the ability to activate the Fike

Agent Release Module(s) or Solenoid for listed
agent release. The RCM requires 24VDC power
from Panel Terminal P7 and the SLC wiring for
proper operation. Exhibit 6-27 shows the proper
wiring to the Fike ARM. The RCM can activate
up to 6 ARMs maximum. This method of wiring
requires a 2.7K ohm end-of-line resistor (102316). Exhibit 6-28 shows the proper wiring for a
single 24V solenoid. If two solenoid valves are
required for suppression operation (dual master
CO2 or Micromist), Exhibit 6-29 shows proper
wiring for 2 each 12VDC valves.
GCA
GCA
(55-
14 13 12 11 10
6.6.6.13 RELEASE CONTROL

MODULE WIRING
052/55-053)
LOOP
ADDRESS
RELEASING MODULE
24V SOLENOID OPERATION
Exhibit 6-28 RCM Module with 24V Solenoid Wiring
12V
SOLENOID
SLC FROM PREVIOUS DEVICE OR FACP

SLC TO NEXT DEVICE OR FACP
14 13 12 11 10
TOP
12V
SOLENOID
7
LOOP
ADDRESS
RELEASING MODULE
12V SOLENOID OPERATION
Exhibit 6-29 RCM Module with two 12V Solenoid Wiring
Page 72 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
INSTALLATION
6.6.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE

CIRCUIT WIRING (P8, P9)
P8 and P9 are two separate NACs that
provide the ability to control building
Notification Appliances wired either Class
B, Style Y OR Class A, Style Z as shown
in Exhibit 6-30.
The circuit can be
configured to use the Gentex Commander
Series or System Sensor Spectralert
Series. Both circuits must use the same
manufacturer sync pulse if this is used. It
provides
the
sync
command
to
blink/sound
devices
simultaneously
without
requiring
purchase
and
installation of a separate sync module.
Wiring is supervised and power limited.
Note: The built-in synchronization
protocol is only compatible with
the System Sensor Spectralert or
Gentex Commander Series.
P8 or P9
-++
NAC
#1
-
P8
CLASS "A" WIRING

STYLE "Z"
P8 or P9
-++
NAC
#2
P9
Note: If the Synch is programmed on the

circuit is programmed Silenceable, the
horns will silence but strobes remain
flashing.
1.2K EOL
(P/N 10-2570)
2.0A MAXIMUM
CLASS "B" WIRING

STYLE "Y"
Exhibit 6-30 NAC Circuit Wiring (P8-P9)
Note: The Circuits are either ON or OFF

and can not be configured for modulation
patterns at different states.
Note: Not optimum to install a bell on
the NAC circuit if programmed for Synch
operation.
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 73 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
INSTALLATION
6.7
FIKE
POWER UP WITH
DEVICES CONNECTED
Apply power to the system with field wiring

connected (Apply AC followed by DC). Validate
that all devices begin to function appropriately
and wiring is connected properly.
6.8
Caution Immediately power down the

system (DC followed by AC) if the display
shows improper characters, you smell smoke,
or if you see sparks. Each of these conditions
indicates improper connections or malfunction
of components.
After power is removed,
investigate for source of malfunction by
investigating connections in the area of the
malfunction.
CONFIGURE SYSTEM
There are many different methods that can be

chosen to complete the installation. The two
most common choices would be to AUTO
PROGRAM or ENGINEERED CONFIGURE.
Any combination of these two methods may also
successfully accomplish matching the field
devices to the installation configuration
requirements.
Section 7 is devoted to
configuration and provides more of the specific
details of the configuration.
6.8.1 AUTO PROGRAM
6.8.2 ENGINEERED CONFIGURE

This method is most useful if the installation has many
hazards and defined customer message information.
In this arrangement, the Engineer has designed the
configuration for the system using C-Linx software
along with the design drawings for the installation.
Once the panel is powered, the installer shall go to
each device and change the address to match the
design prints using the IR Tool. The installer shall
then connect C-Linx and send the Engineered
Configuration to the panel.
This method is most useful when the installation

is simple with very few different hazards. Once
the panel is powered with the field devices
connected, allow it to recognize each address
turn on Auto Address and then Learn Devices
(procedure to perform is located in the
Configuration section). Note: since each device
holds its own program the operation will be as it
was previously configured or programmed to the
default programming as shipped. Defaults and
other configuration options are noted in the
Configuration section of this manual.
Tip Each SLC device can be

addressed prior to the installation by
using any 24VDC power supply
attached to the device SLC wiring
terminals (observing proper polarity).
Use the Cheetah Xi 50 configuration menus or

C-Linx to modify the configuration as needed.
CAUTION: This method of configuration
requires all devices to be connected and
properly wired upon power-up of the
SLC. Validate that ALL devices were
recognized by checking the design
drawings while performing the testing of
the system. If any device was missed,
add it into the configuration.
Page 74 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
INSTALLATION
6.8.2.1
ADDRESSING DEVICES USING

THE IR TOOL (55-051), NON
LISTED, SEE PG 77
By default the IR communication is disabled on the

Cheetah Xi 50 loops. The user must first enable the
IR communication to allow the tool the ability to
communicate with the devices. Press F6 from the
Function Switch Menu to view the IR communication
display (as described in the Operation section):
SELECT KEY
DESELECT KEY
SCROLL UP KEY
SCROLL DOWN KEY
ESCAPE KEY
POWER BUTTON
ENTER KEY
I R C OMMU N I C A T I O N
LOO P 1 : D I S
PWR
Exhibit 6-31 IR Communication Display

Line 2-3
IR Communication status by loop.

Enable only one loop at a time.
Use the +/- buttons to toggle the
ENAble/DISable status. Disable the
IR when complete or Reset the
control panel (turns IR back
OFF).
The IR Tool has many uses with the Cheetah Xi 50

Consult the individual
Installation and Maintenance Instructions for a
complete description of its operation.
Note: The IR Tool can also assign

device addresses for other devices on
the same addressable loop by pointing
at any one device. In order to do this,
the user must know the original loop and
address of the specific device (Choose
target).
UL S2203
FM 3029134
1. Press the PWR (Power) Button on the IR

Tool to apply power to the display.
2. Aim the IR beam at the device being
addressed and press the SELECT button.
The LED on the device should change to
blinking green.
3. The display will then indicate 1. WRITE
LOOP/ADR. Press the ENTER button.
4. Use the number buttons to type in the
desired Loop and Address number for the
device. (Loops = 001; Addresses = 00150)
5. Point the IR beam at the device being
addressed and press the ENTER button.
6. If addressing devices sequentially, press
the button to increment to the next
address number. Press the DESELECT
button to move from the previous device,
then press SELECT to move to the next
device. Press ENTER to save it to the
next address displayed.

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 75 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
FIKE
CONFIGURATION
7.0 CONFIGURATION
NOTICE TO USERS, INSTALLERS, AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION, AND OTHER INVOLVED PARTIES
This product incorporates field-programmable software, in order for the product to comply with the requirements in the Standard for
Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, UL 864, certain programming features or options must be limited to specific
values or not used at all as indicted below.
Settings permitted in UL
Program feature or option
Permitted in UL 864?(Y/N)
Possible settings
26-031 Micore, pg. 7, 21, 33
Yes, but not listed
Use or Dont use
Dont use
55-051 IR Tool, pg. 26, 68
Yes, but not listed
Use or Dont use
Dont use
Summing, pg. 41, 53
Not tested or listed
Summing or Not Summing
Dont use
Flame Enhance, pg. 48
Not tested or listed
Use or Dont use
Dont use
Abort Types 5 & 6 pg. 124
No
Types 1-6
Use types 1-4
10-2627 Ethernet Module pg. 21,
Yes, but not listed
Use or Dont Use
Dont Use
35
10-2583 Multi-Interface Module
Yes, but not listed
Use or Dont Use
Dont Use
pg. 21, 35
Exhibit 7-1 90.23 (UL 864)

The CHEETAH XI 50 Control Panel may be configured from the front panel keypad or by using C-Linx.
However, not ALL features are available from the panel keypad.
12. Allow the Reset with Learn all to complete
7.1 C-LINX SOFTWARE
at the conclusion of the Reset.
All configuration variables can be assigned by
using C-Linx software. This software provides the
designer the capability to provide a PreEngineered design. The user can review the
construction plans to assign the zones. The
configuration can also be set to identify the exact
device circuit operation desired along with the
custom message information.
7.2
CONTROL PANEL AUTOCONFIGURE
With a successful level 3, Distributor password

entered, the distributor can perform an AutoAddress and Auto-Learn (more detail in 7.5) of
new or all devices on the system:
ENTER PASSWORD
1. Press ESCAPE until you see TOP LEVEL
MENU
2. Press F4 Password.
3. Enter the Distributor Password.
4. Press ESCAPE.
AUTO ADDRESS
5. Press F1 CONFIG. Continue to Press F6
until CONFIG 5 is obtained.
6. Press F2 AUTO A for Auto Address.
7. Press + or to Enable Auto Address next
to loop 1 and then use the arrows and +/button to select the start and stop
addresses.
AUTO LEARN SUPERVISION
8. Press ESCAPE several times back to
CONFIG 1 menu.
9. Press F4 LEARN
10. Press + to display LEARN ALL DEVICES.
11. Press ENTER.
UL S2203
FM 3029134
7.3
DEVICE CONFIGURATIONS
The following are the configuration options

available for the Cheetah Xi 50 addressable
devices. Default items are noted in Bold face
font. Refer to the Operations section for details on
operation or definitions of terms.
7.3.1 PHOTO SENSOR

Common
Custom Message: L-ADR PHOTO DETECT
Where L = Loop # of device (1)
ADR = Address of device (1-50)
60 character custom message
Zone: 1 (4 zones are available, 1-253) 4 discrete
zones, 2 ranges, or 1 range and 2 discrete zones
Pre-Discharge Type: Alarm Only, 1st Cross Zone,
2nd Cross Zone, Count Zone, Single Device
Release, or Non Abortable Release
Alarm Verification: not Enabled/Enabled
(0-60 seconds in 1 second increments)
Sensitivity
Pre-Alarm1 & 2: not Enabled/Enabled (0.5%/ft
4.0 %/ft in 0.1 %/ft increments, forces PreAlarm 2 to be set equal or higher than PreAlarm 1)
Alarm: High 2.0%, Low 2.5%, (1.3%/ft 3.6%/ft
available window, forces High to be equal or
lower obscuration number than Low)
Acclimate or Day/Night
Alarm or Supervisory
Drift Compensation: Warning 80%, Trouble 100%

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 77 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
CONFIGURATION
FIKE
(Available at 50-100% in 1% increments,

trouble forced to be higher % than warning)
Walktest with Smoke / Walktest with IR
Device Summing, non-listed see page 77
Broadcast: Enabled/Disabled (8 levels available
to be broadcast 0.5 4.0 in 0.1%/ft
increments)
Summing: Disabled
(Available to sum 8 total addresses with a
sum of 1.0-10.0%/ft in 0.5% increments)
Remote LED
Remote LED: none/follow head/ independent;
Red, Green, Amber LED; if independent
operation select single activation state, blink
pattern, and single address or up to 3 zone
response.
Note Custom messages and loop/addresses are
stored in the Cheetah Xi 50 control panel all other
configuration options are downloaded to the
device and held by the device (both maintain the
loop/address information).
7.3.2 PHOTO/HEAT SENSOR

Common
Custom Message: L-ADR PHO/HT DETECT
zones, 2 ranges, or 1 range and 2 discrete
zones
Alarm Verification: not Enabled/Enabled
(0-60 seconds in 1 second increments)
Sensitivity
Flame Enhance, non-listed page 75: ON/OFF
Page 78 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

increments)
Summing: Disabled
Remote LED
response.
7.3.3 ION SENSOR

Common
Custom Message: L-ADR ION DETECT
zones
Alarm Verification: not Enabled/Enabled (0-60
seconds in 1 second increments)
Sensitivity
Pre-Alarm1 & 2: not Enabled/Enabled (100 40
M in 5M increments, forces Pre-Alarm 2 to be
set equal or higher than Pre-Alarm 1)
Alarm: 65M, 100-40M in 5M increments, Day/Night
Smolder Enhance ON/OFF
increments)
Summing: Disabled
Remote LED
response.

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
CONFIGURATION
7.3.4 HEAT SENSOR

Common
Custom Message: L-ADR HEAT DETECT
zones
Sensitivity
PreAlarm1 & 2: not Enabled/Enabled (135F
190F in 5F increments, forces Pre-Alarm 2
to be set equal or higher than Pre-Alarm 1)
Alarm or Supervisory- Refer to NFPA 90A and
the applicable code.
(Available at 50-100% in 1% increments, trouble
forced to be higher % than warning)
increments)
Summing: Disabled
(Available to sum 8 addresses with a sum of 1.010.0%/ft in 0.5% increments)
Remote LED
Alarm: 135F 190F in 5F increments, Day/Night

Fixed Temperature or Rate of Rise
Alarm only
Walktest with Heat / Walktest with IR
Remote LED

response.

response.
7.3.6 MONITOR/MINI-MONITOR
MODULE
7.3.5 DUCT SENSOR

Common
Custom Message: L-ADR DUCT DETECT
zones
st
Pre-Discharge Type: Alarm Only, 1 Cross Zone,

Sensitivity
UL S2203
FM 3029134
Custom Message: L-ADR INPUT MANALARM

Or L-ADR MINI MANALARM
zones
Input Function: Manual Alarm, see other
selections below
Operation: Latching or Non-Latching
Either
Non-Latch Only
Pre-Alarm1 Reset
Pre-Alarm2 Silence
Supervisory Acknowledge
Trouble
Watermist
Process
Zone Disable
Abort
PAS Inhibit
Watermist

Manual P/N: 06-369
Latch
ManAlarm
Detection
Predisch
Man Rel
Waterflow
Drill
Page 79 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
CONFIGURATION
FIKE
Contact: Normally Open (NO)/Normally Closed

(NC)
Drill
Output Pattern:
Drill Disabled,
Continuous, Slow, Fast, Temporal
ON
NO/NC
Process
Waterflow
Pre-Alarm1
Pre-Alarm2
Trouble
Drill
Silence
Acknowledge
Zone Disable
PAS Inhibit
No Short detection / Short Detection
Output Silenceable / Output Non-Silenceable
Class A Latching, Class A Auto-Restore, Class B

(Note:
Class A Auto-Restore requires
Latching and No Short Detection. Wiring is
class B only for Mini Monitor Module)
Relay: Not Monitored, Monitored by dry contact,

Independent dry contact
7.3.7 ADDRESSABLE PULL STATION
Activation State: Alarm, Summing Alarm, Test

Alarm, Alarm Verification ON, Pre-Alarm1,
Pre-Alarm2, Supervisory, Trouble, Open
Circuit Trouble, Short Circuit Trouble, Low
Power Trouble, Maintenance Trouble,
Process
NO Only
Detection
Manual Alarm
Reset
Supervisory
Man Release
Pre-Discharge
Abort
Watermist
Custom Message L-ADR PULL STATION

zones, 2 ranges, or 1 range and 2 discrete zones
Input Function: Manual Alarm
Positive
Alarm
Disabled/Enabled
Sequencing
(PAS):
7.3.9 RELAY MODULE

Custom Message: L-ADR RELAY MODULE
Zone: 1 (zone where trouble will be present, 4
zones available, 1-254)
PAS: Disabled/Enabled
Action Type: Zone 1-255 (255 is ANY zone), ON,

Any of 3 zones, All of 3 zones, Specific
device, Multiple conditions
State counter: 1-16
Relay State: ON / OFF / Timed
Drill: Disabled
7.3.8 SUPERVISED CONTROL MODULE

Custom Message: L-ADR OUTPUT MODULE
Zone: 1 (zone where trouble will be present, 4
zones available, 1-254)
Activation State: Alarm, Summing Alarm, Test
Alarm, Alarm Verification ON, Pre-Alarm1,
Pre-Alarm2, Supervisory, Trouble, Open
Circuit Trouble, Short Circuit Trouble, Low
Power Trouble, Maintenance Trouble,
Process
Action Type: Any of 3 zones 1-255 (255 is ANY
zone), All of 3 zones, Specific Device,
Multiple conditions
State Counter: 1-16
Output Pattern: ON Continuous, Slow, Fast,
Temporal, OFF, Walktest
Walktest: Zone 1, ON Continuous
Page 80 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
7.4
CONFIGURATION
MAIN BOARD CONFIGURATIONS
The Main controller has configurable options for

zones with custom messages, time-base functions,
optional modules, two Notification Appliance Circuits
(NAC), and other miscellaneous options.
Note: This section also holds
information for the addressable
loop devices such as the address
numbers to supervise, custom
message, and zone numbers for
each address.
7.4.3
MISCELLANEOUS
AC Trouble Delay: 0-12 hours

Abort Type: 1-6, types 5&6 are not listed-pg 75
Loop Wiring Style: 4, 6 or 7
Transformer: 120VAC/240VAC
Main Battery: Supervised/Not Supervised
Unsilence Time: 0-31 Hours (24Hour default)
Silence Reminder: Enabled / Disabled
7.4.1
Silence Inhibit : Enabled / Disabled
ZONES
Zones: 1-253
Positive Alarm Sequence: Enabled / Disabled
Zone Type: Alarm or Suppression

Status: Enabled/Disabled
Relay 1 & 2: All states and zone configurable.

Defaulted to Relay 1 Alarm Zone 255; Relay 2
Trouble Zone 255
Custom Message: 20 Character user defined
7.4.4
TIME FUNCTIONS
Daytime sensitivities start/stop time
CUSTOM MESS ZONE ZZZ

(where ZZZ = zone number)
Days of the week that use daytime sensitivity

Use Daylight savings option
7.4.2
OUTPUTS
Holidays (20) where it stays with night-time

sensitivity
NAC1 &2:
Sync Protocol: No, Gentex, System Sensor
Walktest Enabled / Walktest Disabled
All NAC circuits have the same programming
options:
State: Alarm, Pre-Alarm, Supervisory, Trouble,
Process, Pre-Disch, Release
Enabled / Disabled
Silence / Non-silence
Zone 1-255
Note: Zone 254 is an ANY zone selection that
CAN be disabled. Zone 255 is an ANY zone
selection that can not be disabled.
Drill Enabled / Drill disabled
UL S2203
FM 3029134
7.4.5
PERIPHERALS
Option to supervise or not up to 31 peripherals

Select peripheral address: 2-32
Peripheral type: DACT, Remote Display, Zone
Annunciator, LED graphic, Multi-Interface
Module (not listed), Ethernet Module (not
listed)
Source: Command Set has two settings Panel and
USB connector. Panel is to use C-Linx to
Configure the Panel and devices and USB
Connector
to
Configure
connected
Peripherals.
Command Set: There are settings that need to be
set to ensure that the peripherals
communicate correctly with the Panel
1. EVAX On/Off If you have a voice
evacuation is attached to the RS232 port
on the panel this needs to be set to ON
position and OFF if no EVAX is
connected. For maximum peripheral buss
speed this selection should remain OFF
(factory default setting) when an EVAX is
not present.
EVAX is currently not
available on Cheetah Xi 50, leave OFF.

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 81 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
CONFIGURATION
FIKE
2. Status STD/EXP This command contains

status for alarm, supervisory, trouble and all
the other states. Peripheral devices that
have firmware version before 3.00 should
set this variable to STD, which is the original
Cheetah Xi format. The EXP selection
refers to an Expanded format of the 1.2
command. Peripheral devices with the new
3.00 firmware will use this command. The
EXP speeds up operation of the peripheral
bus and is the factory default setting.
3. History transmit Compact/Verbose.
The
selection VERBOSE all history messages
are transmitted.
With the selection
COMPACT a message filter with in the
panel is used to prevent transmission of
certain history record events, including the
NEW DEVICE history messages. This is
done so that the peripherals do not display
messages that are not required COMPACT
is the factory default
7.5
DEFAULTS
Option to change the default device configurations

for placing a new device in C-Linx.
Custom Messages Addressable Devices,
Peripheral Devices, and Air Sampling Devices
Level 2 Passwords ability to add up to 8 (1-H)
different level 2 Passwords (0001-9999)
4. History Packing ON/OFF The variable

HISTORY PACKING refers to how many
history records are transmitted back-to-back
with minimum time in between. The
selection OFF means that history messages
are sent one at a time. The selection ON
means that up to 50 history events are sent
back-to-back. This technique will speed up
the transmission of large amounts of history
data.
5. History Message STD/EXP The variable
HISTORY MESSAGE refers to what kind of
data is packed into the history command.
The STD, or standard, selection means data
is packed as with previous versions Cheetah
Xi (factory default). The EXP, or expanded,
selection means that both lines 1 and 2 of
the history data as shown on the LCD of the
panel is packed into the history command.
Page 82 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
CONFIGURATION
7.6
PANEL CONFIGURATION MENUS
As noted in the previous sections, the Cheetah Xi 50

control panel and devices have many configuration
options that need to be setup for desired operation
of the system. The C-Linx Software will allow you to
configure all of these options. The control panel
provides a menu structure to allow the certified
technician the ability to modify some of the main
configuration options.
The Operations section
describes the menus/navigation and Appendix 3
documents the menu structure. This section will
detail each Configuration menu and the editable
fields in each display shown in shaded font.
T
F 1 - C
F 2 - H
F 3 - D
OP
L E V E L MENU
O N F I G F 4 - P A S SWR D
I S T O RY F 5 - M A I N T
I AG
F 6 - I R C O MM
Exhibit 7-2 Top Level Menu
7.6.1
CONFIG
C
F
F
F
O
1
2
3
N
-
F I GURA T I ON MENU
1
DE V I CE
F 4 - L EARN
NAC
F 5 S L C
F 6 - MENU
2
Exhibit 7-3 Configuration Menu 1
7.6.2
Line 1
Loop Address: Position the cursor

under any of these fields and use the
+/- buttons to change to a different loop
number or address number. Device
type for the address shown is then
displayed (if connected). The device
type field is not editable, but will change
for each device type found on the loop.
Line 2
Function of the device type shown and

contact type (NO/NC). i.e. the input
module can have several different
function assignments (see section 7.3.5
to determine the possible function
assignments).
The output can be
programmed for All of 3 zones, Any of 3
zones, Rows Anded, and Select Device
(Loop/Address on 4th line). If this field is
changed, you MUST press the ENTER
button to successfully change the
configuration at the device.
The
asterisk will blink and then go away.
Wait for the asterisk to go away.
Line 3
Displays
the
custom
message
configured for this address.
These
fields can be edited with the +/- buttons
since they cycle through all available
ASCII characters.
Line 4
Zone settings for this loop-address

selected. Position the cursor under the
zone number field and use the +/buttons to change the zone number to a
different zone if desired. Add multiple
zones by moving the cursor to the 2nd4th zone number field; use the +/- button
to change or add the zone number.
Output modules have a pattern field at
the end of this line (P:X; where x is
0 = OFF
F = FAST
1 = ON
T = TEMPORAL
S = SLOW
W = WALKTEST)
DEVICE CONFIG
To access the Device configuration menus, press

F1, from the Device Configuration Menu 1:
F 1 - A L ARM F EA T URE S
F 2 - RE L EAS E
F EA T URE S
F 3 - C O NF I GU R A T I O N C H K
Exhibit 7-4 Alarm/Release Features Menu
From the Device Configuration sub-menu, press F1
to enter the Alarm features for the device
configuration or F2 for Suppression release device
configuration.
7.6.2.1
L
F
C
Z
U
U
O
A
N
S
N
ALARM FEATURES
DR : DE V
T Y P E
C : * F UNC T I ON - - - - NO
T OM ME S S AG E
E : NNN NNN NNN NNN
Exhibit 7-5 Device Config Menu
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
If this field is changed, you MUST press

the ENTER button to successfully
change the configuration at the device.
The asterisk will blink and then go
away. Wait for the asterisk to go
away.
Page 83 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
CONFIGURATION
7.6.2.2
FIKE
DELETE DEVICE
To access the Delete Device menu, press F1, from

the Device Configuration; Alarm Features Menu:
L - ADR : DE V
T Y P E
PRE S S EN T ER TO
DE L E T E DE V I CE
Exhibit 7-6 Delete Device Menu
7.6.2.4
CONFIG CHECK
To access the Configuration Check menu, press

F3, from the Device Configuration Menu:
L
P
P
C
- ADR : DE V
T Y P E
ANE L : X X X DE V I CE : Z Z Z
R E S S E N TE R T O S T A R T
OMP A R I S ON
0 - 0 00
Exhibit 7-8 Configuration Check Menu
Line 1
Loop Address: Device Type. (Same as

noted in 7.5.2.1
Line 1

noted in 7.5.2.1
Line 2
Press Enter to remove the device address

from the list of devices to supervise.
Line 2
Displays
calculated
checksum
for
configuration created by C-Linx. This
checksum is loaded in the Panel location
XXX and can be compared with what the
device holds ZZZ by pressing enter. One
press of enter will begin a configuration
check test on the entire system.
7.6.2.3
READ/WRITE/ENABLE/
DISABLE DEVICE
To access the Read/Write/Enable/Disable Device

menu, press F2, from the Device Configuration;
Alarm Features Menu:
L - ADR : DE V
T Y P E
PRE S S EN T ER TO
R E A D D E VI C E C O N F I G
Exhibit 7-7 Read/Write/Enable/Disable Menu
Line 1

noted in 7.5.2.1
Line 3
Press +/- to change from READ, WRITE,

ENABLE or DISABLE for the address.
Press Enter to perform the desired
function. Once Enter is pressed, line 4
will display status of process. Wait until
process is completed prior to exiting
this screen.
NOTE: The Write function from this menu
will take the copy of the configuration that
the panel holds for the device and send it
to the device. It will also replace the
S/N of the device that it needs to
supervise with the current one present at
the time of the Write function.
Page 84 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
7.6.2.5
RELEASE FEATURES
To access the Release Features menu, press F2

from the Device Configuration menu:
L - ADR : DE V
T Y P E
PRE - D I SCH T Y P E :
A
*
C O U N T D OW N:
A U T OMA T I C
Exhibit 7-9 Release Features Menu
Line 1
Loop Address: Device Type. Position

the cursor under any of these 3 fields
and use the +/- buttons to change to a
different loop number, address number,
or device type for the address shown.
Line 2
There are six (6) different PreDischarge types available for each
addressable input device.
This
selection will tell the panel how the input
should participate with the Suppression
zone. Appendix 4 defines each of these
Pre-Discharge types, A-F).
The
asterisk will blink and then go away.
Wait for the asterisk to go away.
Line 3
Countdown time for the system to

operate when this device is activated,
automatic or manual. These countdown
times are set up in the zone
configuration.

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
CONFIGURATION
in this line; use the +/- buttons to
increment/decrement the group of 20
forward or backwards (zones 001-254).
7.6.3 NAC CONFIG

F 1 - NAC F UNC T I ONS
F 2 - NAC ZONE AS S I GNS
F 3 - P R OT O C O L
Line 3
Number designators to assist in

displaying the group of addresses
selected in line 2 for the individual
zones displayed in line 4.
Line 4
Zone assignment programming for the

circuit displayed in Line 1 if
MULTIZONE is selected.
- = not
programmed for this zone; Y =
programmed for this zone. Position the
cursor under the specific zone position;
use the -/- button to toggle the status.
Exhibit 7-10 NAC Config Menu
7.6.3.1
N
S
P
S
A
T
R
I
C
A
O
L
# 1 :
ENAB L ED
T E :
S T A T E
TOCOL :
CONS T AN T
: N D R I L L : Y WA L K : Y
Exhibit 7-11 NAC Functions Menu
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
7.6.3.2
N
Z
1
-
A
O
2
-
NAC FUNCTIONS
Line 2
NAC PROTOCOL
To access the NAC Protocol menu, press F3, from

the NAC Configuration Menu:
Operating State for the NAC circuit

displayed in Line 1. Move the cursor
to line 2 and use the +/- button to
change the State to the desired
operation (see section 7.4.2 for the
possible states).
Exhibit 7-12 NAC Protocol Menu
Output protocol selection for the NAC

circuit displayed in Line 1. Mover the
cursor to line 3 and use the +/- buttons
to change to the desired protocol (see
section 7.4.2 for the possible
protocols).
Silenceable, Drill, and Walktest
Enabled (Y)/Disabled (N). Position
cursor under Y or N and toggle with
the +/- button.
S E L E C T N A C P R O T O C OL
FOR PANE L :
G EN T E X
Line 3
Notification Circuits 1&2 (P8 & P9) zone

assignment.
Move cursor to NAC
circuit number and use +/- button to
change from NAC 1 to 2. Move cursor
to Zone function field and use the +/buttons to toggle the functional status of
the circuit (Any zone or multi zone).
SLC
POS I T I V E A L
LOOP W I R I NG
S EQ :
NO
S T Y L E : 4
Exhibit 7-13 SLC Menu

Line 1
Line 2
7.6.5
Is Positive Alarm Sequencing used on

the detection? Yes/No. Edit with the +/button to change
Loop Wiring Style for addressable loop.
Style 4, 6 and 7 available. Use the +/buttons to change the field.
LEARN MENU
S E L
N
PRE S
PA
Line 2
20 zone range displayed in line 3&4.

Position cursor under the first number
UL S2203
FM 3029134
Notification Circuits 1&2 (P8 & P9)

SYNC protocol assignment for BOTH
circuits. Use +/- button to change from
allowable Sync protocols.
7.6.4
NAC ZONE ASSIGNS
C # 1 :
ANY
ZONE
NE RANGE :
0 0 1 - 0 2 0
3 4 5 6 7 8 90 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -Exhibit 7-12 NAC Zone Assigns Menu
Line 1
7.6.3.3
Notification Circuits 1&2 (P8 & P9)

enable/disable status. Move cursor to
NAC circuit number and use +/- button
to change from NAC 1 to 2. Move
cursor to Enable/Disable field and use
the +/- buttons to toggle the
Enable/Disable status of the circuit.

Manual P/N: 06-369
EC T RE
ONE S E
S E N TE
NE L W I
Exhibit 7-14
S E T M O D E:
L EC T ED
R TO S T AR T
L L RE S E T
Learn Menu
Allows the controller to Learn the loops

connected (Learns Device LoopAddress, Serial number and Device
Type to supervise).
Press +/- to
change from None Selected to Learn
New Devices, or Learn All Devices.
Press Enter for the panel to Reset and
perform the desired Learn.
Page 85 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
CONFIGURATION
FIKE
7.6.6 NEW DEVICES ONLY

S E L E C T R E S E T M O D E:
L E A R N N E W D E V I CE S
P R E S S E N TE R T O S T A R T
PANE L W I L L RE S E T
Exhibit 7-15 Learn New Screen
If the ENTER button is pressed it will learn new
devices. The loops will be reset and any new
devices that are found on the loop but not in the
panel configuration, will be added to the panel
configuration. All new devices added will contain the
configuration held by the device. If it is a device that
has never been in a configuration it will contain the
default configuration.
See section 7.3 for
Configuration options and default configurations.
7.6.9 TIME
T
D
D
D
I
A
A
A
M
T
Y
Y
E :
H H : MM : S S AM
E :
MM / D D / Y Y Y Y
:
D A Y O F WE E K
L I GH T
S A V I N G S : Y ES
Exhibit 7-18 Time Menu
Line 1
Hour (HH), Minute (MM), Second

(SS), and AM/PM fields. Position
the cursor under the field; use the
+/- buttons to increment/decrement
the field to a different number.
Line 2
Month (MM), Day (DD), and Year

(YYYY) fields. Position the cursor
under the field; use the +/- buttons
to increment/decrement the field to
a different number.
Line 3
Day of the week. Position the

cursor under the field; use the +/buttons to increment/decrement the
field to a different day.
Line 4
Daylight savings (Yes/No). Position

+/- buttons to toggle the status.
7.6.7 ALL DEVICES

S E L E C T R E S E T M O D E:
L E A R N A L L D E V I CE S
P R E S S E N TE R T O S T A R T
PANE L W I L L RE S E T
Exhibit 7-16 Learn All Screen
When the Learn All function is invoked, the loop will
be reset and all addresses stored in the control
panel will be deleted. The panel will search the
loops for all devices and auto-configure for only the
devices connected to the loops.
All device
addresses will be learned and the configurations
held by the devices will NOT be altered (nor will the
custom messages).
Caution This method will delete and/or
add supervision to devices. Testing or
review of the configuration should be
performed to ensure that all required devices are
supervised.
7.6.8
C
F
F
F
O
1
2
3
7.6.10 SILENCE
S I L ENCE
I NH I B I T :
OF F
S I L ENCE REM I NDER : OF F
A U T O U NS I L E N C E
I N
2 4
HOURS
Exhibit 7-19 Silence Menu
Line 1
Silence Inhibit (On/Off). Position

+/- buttons to toggle the status.
Line 2
Silence
Reminder
(On/Off).
Position the cursor under the field;
use the +/- buttons to toggle status.
Line 4
Auto Unsilence time. NFPA 72

documents that a silenced panel
shall be unsilenced within 24 hours.
Position the cursor under the field;
use
the
+/buttons
to
increment/decrement the time.
CONFIGURATION MENU 2
N
-
F
T
S
P
I GURA T
I ME
I L ENC
0WE R
Exhibit 7-17
Page 86 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
I ON MENU
2
F 4 - DAY S EN
F 5 - ZONE
F 6 - MENU
3
Config Menu 2

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
CONFIGURATION
7.6.12.2 SELECT HOLIDAYS
7.6.11 POWER
SUP ERV MA I N BA T T : Y E S
X FORMER S I Z E :
1 2 0 V AC
HO
0
0
0
L
1
1
1
I
-
Exhibit 7-20 Power Menu

Line 1
Supervise Main controller Battery

Input (Yes/No). Position the cursor
under the field; use the +/- buttons to
toggle the status.
Line 2
Main
power
input
voltage
(120/240)VAC. Position the cursor
under the field; use the +/- buttons to
toggle the status.
DAY S ( 1 )
0 1 - 0
0 1
0 1 - 0 1
0 1 - 0
0 1
0 1 - 0 1
0 1 - 0
0 1
0 1 - 0 1
0 1 - 0
Exhibit 7-23 Holidays Menu
1
1
1
1
Line 1
There are 2 holiday screens

available to provide 20 holidays.
Move cursor to the 4th line last field
on the right will move to Holidays
(2) or similar with the first field on
line 1.
Line 2-4
Lines 1-4 provide 10 editable fields

for entering the Month (MM)-Day
(DD) of holiday. Position the cursor
under the field; use the +/- buttons
to increment/decrement the value at
the cursor.
7.6.12 DAY SENS

F 1 - D A Y T I M E S E N R A NG E
F 2 - S E L EC T HOL I DAY S
7.6.13 ZONE
Exhibit 7-21 Daytime Sensitivity Menu
N
S
T
N
E
0 0 1 : ENAB L ED
T O M M ES S
ZONE
0 0 1
O CO U N T DO W N ;
0 3 0 s
U CO U N T DO W N ;
0 1 5 s
Exhibit 7-24 Zone Menu
Line 1
Daytime sensitivity start time. Hour

(HH),Minute (MM), AM/PM. Position
cursor under the field; press the +/buttons to increment/decrement the
value at the field.
Zone
Enable/Disable
status.
Position the cursor under the zone
number field. Use the+/- buttons to
change zone number. Move cursor
under the enable status field. Use
the +/- buttons to toggle the status.
Line 2
Daytime sensitivity stoptime. Hour

(HH),Minute (MM), AM/PM. Position
value at the field.
Zone Custom Message for the zone

displayed in line 1. Move the cursor
to the field; use the +/- button to
cycle through all ASCII characters
and display the desired character.
Line 3
Automatic Countdown for the panel

is done here for the zone displayed
in line 1. Move the cursor to the
field; use the +/- button to cycle
through the numbers and display
the desired character.
Line 4
Manual Countdown for the panel is

done here for the zone displayed in
line 1. Move the cursor to the field;
use the +/- button to cycle through
the numbers and display the
desired character.
7.6.12.1 DAYTIME SEN RANGE

D
S
S
D
A Y T I M E S E N S I T I V I TY
T AR T :
H H : MMAM
TOP :
H H: M M P M
A Y O F WE E K :
S M TWR FS
Exhibit 7-22 Daytime Sens. Range Menu
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Days of the week using Daytime

sensitivity. Use +/- button to turn
ON letter to participate on day.
Toggle letter OFF if it stays with night
sensitivity all day.
UL S2203
FM 3029134
ZO
CU
AU
MA

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 87 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
CONFIGURATION
FIKE
7.6.14 CONFIGURATION MENU 3

C
F
F
F
O
1
2
3
N F I G UR A T I O N M E N U
3
- P ER I PH F 4 - WA LK
F 5 - S EN CHG
- G R OU N D F 6 - M E N U
4
P ER I PHERA L MENU
F 1 - DE V I CE
F 4 - CMD S E T
F 2 - S OU RC E
F 5 F 3 F 6 Exhibit 7-26 Peripheral Menu
7.6.16 SOURCE
This menu is used when configuring a system with
C-Linx software and the USB cable. The panel
and device configurations are sent with this menu
set in the PANEL mode (default). If desiring to
send the peripheral configurations, the software
will prompt the user to move the cable. With the
USB version panels, the user must keep the cable
in the USB port and then enter the level 3
password at the panel and go to this menu to redirect the configuration information out the
peripheral buss (USB Connector selection).
P ER I PHERA L BUS S
C O M MA N D S O U R C E :
PANE L
7.6.15 DEVICE
P
T
S
P
E
Y
U
E
I
P
P
R
PHERA L ADDR :
0 2
E : R EMO T E D I S P L A Y
E R VI S E :
Y E S
Z : 0 0 0
I P HE R A L M S G
0 2
Exhibit 7-27 Peripherals Menu
Line 1
RS485 Peripheral address (2-32, DACT

at address 2, if used). Position cursor
under address field; use the +/- buttons
to increment/decrement the value at the
cursor.
Line 2
Type of RS485 Peripheral device

programmed at the address displayed
in line 1. Position the cursor under the
device type menu; use the +/- buttons to
change to the desired device type.
Line 3
Supervise the RS485 peripheral

device/address shown in lines 1 & 2
(Yes/No). Position the cursor under the
field; use the +/- button to toggle the
status of the field.
Exhibit 7-28 Configuration Menu
Line 3
Use the +/- buttons to change from

Panel to USB Connector.
1. Panel allows you to connect
to C-Linx to configure the
panel.
If you are in this
setting you can not configure
the peripherals
2. USB Connector allows you to
connect to Peripheral devices
and configure them through
C-Linx. If you are in this
setting you can not configure
the panel or devices
Zone (Z): this is releasing so that it will

display the Zone that you would like to
remote display to show the count down
for Predischarge. Position the cursor
under the field; use the +/- button to
change the desired Zone.
Line 4
Peripheral device custom message for

the device displayed in line 1. Move the
cursor to the field; use the +/- button to
cycle through all ASCII characters and
display the desired character.
Page 88 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
CONFIGURATION
7.6.17 COMMAND SET
7.6.20 ABORT
For further details refer to step 7.4.5

E
H
H
H
V
I
I
I
A
S
S
S
PANE L
X : ON
S T A T U S : E XP
T O RY
XM I T : COMP A C T
T O RY
PACK I NG : ON
T O RY
ME S SAGE : E X P
Exhibit 7-29 Command Set Menu
Line 1
Line 2
STATUS EXP/STD .
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
History transmit COMPACT/VERBOSE

position cursor under the field; press the
+/- buttons to increment/decrement the
value at the field.
History Packing ON/OFF position cursor
under the field; press the +/- buttons to
increment/decrement the value at the
field.
T Y P E
Exhibit 7-32 Abort Menu
EVAX ON/OFF. .
For both of these settings position
value at the field.
ABOR T
2
System Abort Type chosen, 1-6, for

providing the ability to prevent an
unwanted suppression agent release.
Abort types are noted in Appendix 4.
7.6.21 SEN CHG

S E N S I T I V I T Y C H A N G ES :
E N A BL E D
C U R R EN T :
D AY T I M E
Exhibit 7-33 Sensitivity Change Menu
Line 2
Enable/Disable status of Day/Night

Sensitivities.
Line 4
Displays the current Sensitivity being

used due to the time of day and
day/night changeover times.
History Message EXP/STD position

value at the field.
7.6.18 WALKTEST
WA L K T E S T : E N A B L E D
Exhibit 7-30 Walktest

Line 1
Enable/Disable status of Walktest for

the panel. Use the +/- button to cycle
between Enable and Disable
7.6.19 GROUND (PW LEVEL 4/FACTORY)

G N D F A U L T S U P E R V I SE :
L E V EL
1 :
EN AB L ED
L E V EL
2 :
EN AB L ED
O F FS E T :
+0 0 0
Exhibit 7-31 Ground Fault Menu
Line 2 &
Line 3
Enable/Disable
Fault.
Line 4
Enable/Disable status of Ground

Fault, 2nd level suppression devices.
UL S2203
FM 3029134
status
of
Ground

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 89 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
CONFIGURATION
FIKE
Line 3
Custom Message field for detector.

Move the cursor to the field; use the
=/- button to cycle through all ASCII
characters and display the desired
character. Arrow to next character
and repeat until custom message is
completed.
Line 4
Cheetah Xi 50 zone assignment. This

allows you to select up to 4 Cheetah
Xi 50 zones that this detector will
participate in. Arrow until you get to
each field, then use the =/- button to
change zones to that desired. Repeat
for each of 4 zones required.
Remember, Zone 255 is ANY Zone.
7.6.22 CONFIGURATION MENU 4

C
F
F
F
O
1
2
3
N F I GURA T I ON MENU
4
- AC D E L
F 4- V E SD A
F 5- R E L A Y S
F 6- M E N U
5
7.6.23 AC DELAY
S E L EC T DE L AY
F O R AC
P OWE R L O S S
TR O U B L E :
0 0
H O UR S
Exhibit 7-35 AC Delay Menu
Line 3
Select 0 for no delay or provide a

delay for the trouble to be transmitted
to the DACT by changing using the
+/- buttons to 01-30 hours.
7.6.26 VESDA SECTOR ZONES

V E SDA ZONE NUM
0 01
S 1 : 0 0 0A L M S 2: 0 0 0 A L M
S 3 : 0 0 0A L M S 4: 0 0 0 A L M
Exhibit 7-38 VESDA Sector Menu
7.6.24 VESDA CONFIGURATION

V
F
F
F
E S D A C O N F I G U R A T I ON
1 - A L AR M F E A T U R E S
2 - S E CT O R Z O N E S
3 - E V AX
F 4- R E L E A S E
Exhibit 7-36 VESDA Configuration Menu
7.6.25 VESDA ALARM FEATURES

V
T
C
Z
E
Y
U
O
Line 1
VESDA detector Zone Number. Arrow

under the field, and use the +/- button
to change to VESDA detector zone
number.
Line 2
Sector 1 & 2 Cheetah Xi 50 Zone

number for the sector event and state.
Arrow to the zone field and use the
+/- button to change to desired zone.
Then arrow over under the state and
use the +/- button to toggle through
events of ALM, SUP or TRB.
Line 3
Sector 3 & 4 Cheetah Xi 50 Zone

number for the sector event and state.
Then arrow over under the state and
use the +/- button to toggle through
events of ALM, SUP or TRB.
SDA ZONE NUM :

0 01
P E :
A LM ENA
S T O M M E S S A G E- V Z
0 0 1
N E: 0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
Exhibit 7-37 VESDA Alarm Menu
Line 1
VESDA Detector Zone number.

Position the cursor under any of the 3
fields and use the +/- buttons to
change to a different zone number
(VESDA zone, not Cheetah Xi 50
zone).
Line 2
Detector type. Select the type by

positioning the cursor under that area
and using the =/- buttons until the
type detector installed is shown. Then
arrow over to the right using the right
arrow button until under the STATE
field and use =/- to select the state of
operation for that detector. Then use
the right arrow button again to move
over under the ENA field. Use the =/buttons to enable or disable that
detector
Page 90 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
CONFIGURATION
7.6.27 VESDA LOOP/ADDR

To light an LED on an LED Graphic that
corresponds to a VESDA detector, this screen
needs to have an address associated with the
VESDA Zone number:
V E SDA ZONE NUM : 0 0 1
E V AX
L O O P:
0
E V AX
A D D R:
0 0 0
Exhibit 7-39 Loop/Addr for Vesda Menu
Line 1

This is required if LED Graphic is to
respond for VESDA activation
Line 2

+/- button to change to desired Loop
Number. This is required if LED
Graphic is to respond for device
activation
Line 3

+/- button to change to desired
Address Number. This is required if
EVAX is to respond for device
activation
7.6.28 VESDA RELEASE FEATURES

V
P
P
C
E
R
R
O
7.6.29 RELAYS
F 2 - R E LA Y
F 2 - R E LA Y
Exhibit 7-41 Relay 1 and Relay 2 Menu
7.6.30 RELAY FUNCTION

RE L A Y N U M 1 :
E N A B L ED
S T A T E :
A L ARM
S I L E N CE : N O
D R L L :N O
Exhibit 7-42 Relay Function Menu
Line 1
Line 2
VESDA detector Zone Number. Arrow

under the field, and use the +/- button
to change to VESDA detector zone
number.
Use the Arrow keys to position the

curser under the Enable and press
the +/- key to toggle between
Enable/Disable
Line 2
The VESDA Fire level to participate in

Pre-Discharge events, Fire1 or Fire2.
Line 4
Countdown time for the system to

operate when this device is activated,
automatic or manual.
These
countdown times are set up in the
zone configuration.
UL S2203
FM 3029134
State Use the Arrow keys to position

the curser under the State and press
the +/- key to toggle between different
states
Alarm, Pre Alarm #1, Pre Alarm #2,
Pre Discharge, Release, Process,
Trouble, Supervisory, Abort, Zone
Disable.
Line 3
There are six (6) different PreDischarge types available for each
addressable input device.
This
selection will tell the panel how this
VESDA should participate with the
Suppression zone.
Appendix 4
defines each of these Pre-Discharge
types, A-F).
Line 3
Relay Number Use the Arrow keys to

position the curser under the N and
press the +/- key to toggle between
Relay 1 or relay 2.
Note: Relay 1 and Relay 2 are
configured separately
SDA ZONE NUM

0 01
E - D I S C H T YP E :
A - A L
E - D I S C H L EV : F I R E
2
U N T DO W N :
AU T O M A T I C
Exhibit 7-40 VESDA Release Menu
Line 1
F U NC T I O N S
Z O NE
AS S I GN

Manual P/N: 06-369
Silenceable Use the Arrow keys to

position the curser under the NO and
press the +/- key to toggle between
NO/YES
Drill Use the Arrow keys to position
the curser under the NO and press
the +/- key to toggle between
NO/YES
Page 91 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
CONFIGURATION
FIKE
7.6.31 RELAY ZONE ASSIGN

RE
Z O
1 2
- -
L AY NUM1 :
ANY
Z ON E
N E RA N G E : 0 0 1 - 0 2 0
3 4 56 78 9 0 12 3 4 5 67 8 9 0
- - - -- - - - - -- - - - - - - Exhibit 7-43 Relay Zone Assign Menu
Line 1
Arrow to the N (NUM1) and use the

+/- button to change to relay.
7.6.34 AUTO A
AUT O
Line 4
Arrow to the zone range and use the

+/- button to change to desired range
of zones.
Arrow to the zone and use the +/button to put a Y in the zone that you
desired.
OF F
S E L E C T A D DR S: 0 0 1 0 5 0
P R ES S E N T E R T O S T O R E
Exhibit 7-46 Auto Address Screen
Line 3
Arrow to the ANY ZONE and use the

+/- button to change to change from
ANY ZONE to MULTI ZONE.
Line 2
A D D R ES S I N G :
7.6.35
Position the cursor on the third line. At

this location you will set the address
range that you would like to auto
address. When you have the address
range that you would like to have auto
addressed press enter
DIALER CONFIGURATION
D I A L E R AU T O T E S T
R E P E A T C Y C L E: D I S A B LE
S T A R T I N G H O UR : 0 2 A M
Exhibit 7-47 Dialer Configuration Menu
7.6.32
C
F
F
F
O
1
2
3
Line 2
The dialer can be configured to

perform an operation test of the
dialer on a periodic basis. This test
will send contact id code 50 (Auto
Test). Default is DISABLING for
no test. Other options available are
06Hours, 12Hours, and 24Hours.
Use the +/- buttons to change the
value at the cursor.
Line 3
Starting hour to begin the daily

dialer test. Use the +/- buttons to
increment/decrement the time.
5
- L O GO
F 4- D I A L E R
- A U TO
A F 5- N E T WO R K
F 6- ME N U
6
Exhibit 7-44 Configuration 5 Menu
7.6.33 LOGO
PANE L
LOGO
ON
L I NE
2 :
F I K E C O R P OR A T I O N
Exhibit 7-45 Panel Logo Menu
Line 3
The second line of the System

Status Display is defaulted to Fike
Corporation.
This entire row is
editable using the arrow buttons in
conjunction with the +/- buttons to
advance/decrement the character at
the cursor.
Page 92 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
7.6.36 CONFIGURE NETWORK MENU

CON F I G
F 1 - I D S
F 2 - M O DU
F 3 - Z O NE
Exhibit 7-48
URE
N E T WO R K
F 4- E N A B L E D
F 5- SW I T C H
L E
S
Configure Network Menu
Line 2
Pressing F1 will take you to the

screen shown in 7.5.30 to configure
Network ID. Pressing F4 will toggle
the
Network
Enable
status:
ENABLE/DISABLED.
Line 3
Pressing F2 will take you to screen

shown in 7.5.26 to configure Network
module installed on Cheetah Xi 50
Line 4
Pressing F3 will take you to the

screen shown in 7.5.27 to configure
Network zones.

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
CONFIGURATION
7.6.37
NETWORK PANEL ID
N E T WO R K P A N E L
I D: 0 0 1
A L L- N E T
I D S : 0 0 1 - 0 2 0
1 2 3 4 5 67 8 9 0 1 23 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
7.6.39
A S S I G N T O N E T WO R K
ZONE R ANGE : 0 0 1 - 0 2 0
1 2 3 4 5 67 8 9 0 1 23 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Exhibit 7-49 Network Panel ID Menu

Line 1
This allows you to assign the unique

network ID to each panel. Arrow to ID
field and using +/- buttons to change
network ID.
Line 2
20 IDs range displayed in lines 3 & 4

below. Position the cursor under the
first number in this line and use the
+/- button to increment/decrement the
range in groups of 20 to display at
one time.
Line 4
7.6.38
Network supervision by this panel.

This shows the panel ids on the
network in groups of 20. Move the
cursor with the arrow buttons to
position under desired id number
shown on Line 3 and then using the
+/- buttons, toggle to a Y under each
id you wish to supervise by this panel.
Y means to supervise, - means no
supervision of that network ID by this
panel. Only a FIRST panel performs
supervision
NETWORK MODULE CONFIG
NETWORK ZONE
Exhibit 7-51 Network Zones Menu

Line 2
20 zone range that will be displayed in

lines 3 & 4 below. Position the cursor
under the first number in this line and
use
the
+/button
to
increment/decrement the range in
groups of 20 to display at one time. This
will cycle through the 254 zones
available on the Cheetah Xi 50.
Line 3
These numbers act as placeholders

and zone number indicators for the
range of zones signified on line 1.
Line 4
Position the cursor on the fourth line

beneath the address selected and use
the +/- button to toggle to select zones
to participate. Toggle to Y to participate
and to not participate. (If a zone is not
selected to participate, it will still show
up in History but does not act on the
state indicated in that zone.
7.6.40
SWITCH
AC C E P T SW I T C H E S
F RO M
N E T WO R K
I D S: 0 0 1- 0 2 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 23 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
Exhibit 7-52 Switch Menu
C U S T O M M S G PA N E L
0 0 1
Exhibit 7-50 Network Module Config Menu
Line 4
Custom Message field for this panel.

Move the cursor to the field; use the
+/- button to cycle through all ASCII
characters and display the desired
character. Arrow to next character
and repeat until custom message is
completed.
UL S2203
FM 3029134
Line 2
20 IDs range that will be displayed in

lines 3 & 4 below. Position the cursor
under the first number in this line and
use
the
+/button
to
increment/decrement the range in
groups of 20 to display at one time.
This will cycle through the 128 zones
available on the Cheetah Xi 50.
Line 4
Position the cursor on the fourth line

beneath the address selected and
use the +/- button to toggle to select
Panel IDs to participate. Toggle to Y
to participate and Blank to not
participate.

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 93 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
CONFIGURATION
7.6.41
C
F
F
F
O
1
2
3
FIKE
6
- I P A D R F 4- SW O P E R
- I P S UP
F 5- L E D O P R
- I P T I M F 6- ME N U
1
7.6.42
IP ADR
7.6.44
I P S UP ERV I S I ON
T I M E O UT :
0 0 4 M I NU T ES
Exhibit 7-56 Member IP Supervision Timeout
Line 3
I P ADDRE S S E S
S RC :
00 0 . 0 0 0. 0 0 0 . 0 0 0
H I S T : 00 0 . 0 0 0. 0 0 0 . 0 0 0
S U P V : 00 0 . 0 0 0. 0 0 0 . 0 0 0
Exhibit 7-52 IP ADRress
Line 2
Position the cursor on the second line.

At this location you will set the Source
IP for the panel. This is required In
order to utilize the remote monitoring
capability. This is the menu that will
need to set up correctly to utilize
Ethernet operation.
Line 3

this location you will set the Destination
IP for the monitoring panel.
Line 4

this location you will set the Destination
IP for the supervising panel.
7.6.43
IP TIM
Position the cursor on the third line

beneath the number of minutes. Use
the +/- button to toggle to select time
from 001 - 255. This is the time that if
the device is missing it will take before
the panel will show the trouble of a
panel missing.
7.6.45 SW OPERATION AND LED

OPERATION
Alternate displays can be made available for
particular local authorities who require no switch
operation (Drill/Acknowledge/Silence) or LED
operation (Alarm or Suppression). These menus
provide ability to modify per the local authority
requirements and can be accessed with F4 & F5
from the Configuration Menu 6.
IP SUP
S U P E R V I S E N E T WO R K
I D
0 0 1
A T
I P A D DR E S S
0 0 0 . 0 0 0 . 0 00 . 0 0 0
Exhibit 7-55 Member IP Supervision
Line 2
Position the cursor on the second line

beneath the number of the panel you
are wanting to supervise use the +/buttons to toggle to select panel from
001 - 128. This is the same number as
the Member ID that you are wanting to
supervise. Refer to step 5.33.
Line 4
Position the cursor on the forth line.

Use the +/- buttons to toggle to select
the IP Address of the panel that line 2
panel has as the Source IP. Refer to
step 7.5.35.
Page 94 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
SERVICE
8.0 SERVICE
Qualified individuals shall perform Inspection,
Testing, and Maintenance.
Fike provides a
training class on the Cheetah Xi 50 for Factory
Authorized Distributors.
The training class
provides Certification for Installation, Service and
Maintenance of the Cheetah Xi 50. The certified
individual performing the service must have also
read this entire manual and understand the basics
of Fire Alarm Systems, codes, and standards.
Before proceeding with any testing, notify all
building occupants and any parties monitoring the
Fire Control System. Notification must also be
performed at the conclusion of the testing.
8.1
CHECKOUT
After system installation per previous chapters, verify

system operation to the satisfaction of the authority
having jurisdiction. As required, the Record of
Completion referenced in NFPA 72 must be
completed.
8.2
MAINTENANCE
Periodic maintenance shall be, as a minimum,

performed per NFPA 72. Maintenance shall be
performed by a trained or authorized Fike
representative. Certain components of the Cheetah
Xi 50 require replacement, even though no obvious
sign of failure is present.
Batteries (Lead Acid)

Replace every 3 years according to date of
manufacture
Battery (Lithium Coin cell)
Replace every 5 years
Replace battery with Fike battery 02-4040 only.
Use of another battery may present a risk of fire
or explosion.
Replace the lithium battery by using thumb and
forefinger to slide the coin cell from the battery
holder on the system controller. Insert new
battery making sure to observe polarity markings
on the battery holder. Dispose of used battery
promptly. Keep away from children. Do not
disassemble and do not dispose of in fire.
8.3
TROUBLESHOOTING
System events with suggested resolution are

displayed in section 8.5 of this manual. If a module
or control board is not operating properly, remove all
field wiring and replace end-of-line resistors directly
on the control board or module. Determine if the
control equipment operates properly without field
wiring. It may also be necessary to isolate the
control board from the environment. Vibration,
temperature, airflow, electromagnetic interference,
and radio frequency interference are all conditions
that may adversely effect the operation of the
electronics.
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 95 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
SERVICE
8.3.1
FIKE
F3 DIAGNOSTIC MENU 1
The Cheetah Xi 50 has 7 diagnostic screens available as tools for troubleshooting the installation. As
described in the Operation section, the Diagnostic Menu can be accessed through the Function Switches
display by pressing the F3 button:
D I AGNOS T I C MENU
1
F 1 - DE V I CE
F 4 - B R D COM
F 2 - VA L U
1
F 5 -C RC
F 3 - VA L U
2
F 6 - MENU
2
Exhibit 8-1 Diagnostic Menu 1
8.3.2
F1 DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC
Pressing F1 from the Diagnostic Menu will display the Device Diagnostic menu:
D E V I CE
D I AGNOS T I CS
F 1 - T Y P E
LOC & L ED
F 2 - S E R I A L N U M BE R S
Exhibit 8-2 Device Diagnostic Menu
8.3.3
F1 DEVICE TYPE LOCATION AND LED DIAGNOSTIC
Pressing F1 from the Device Diagnostic Menu will display the Device Loc & LED Diagnostic menu:
LOOP : N ADR : 0 0 1 - 0 2 0
D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
CON F I GURED DE V
T Y P E
PRE S EN T DE V I CE
T Y P E
Exhibit 8-3 Device LED & LOC Diagnostic Menu
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Page 96 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
Loop number represented by N, position cursor under the value and

press +/- to change to desired loop (1-4)
Displays devices in groups of 20; Position cursor under the first digits
(001 in this case), press +/- to increment/decrement the group
selection
The very last position in this line is D or L.. D is intended for displaying
the device types in the 3rd and 4th line. L is intended for light the LED
for the device (red/green flash). To light the device LED set this
location to L using the +/- button then move the cursor to the desired
address on the 4th line. Toggle the LED status by pressing the +/button at the specific address location.
Displays the place holders for the 3rd and 4th lines.
Displays the type of device programmed in the configuration for the
specific address displayed:
P = Photo
U = Photo/Heat H = Heat
- = Unknown
D = DUCT
T = Pull Station M = Monitor, 4
I = Ion
Y = Relay
C = Control
m = Mini Monitor
R=Release Control
Displays the type of device present/found connected on the
addressable loop at the specific address displayed. Same device
types as shown in line 3 description above.

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
8.3.4
SERVICE
F2 DEVICE SERIAL NUMBER DIAGNOSTIC
Pressing F2 from the Device Diagnostic Menu will display the Device Serial Number Diagnostic menu:
ADDRE S S : 0 0 1
LOOP :N
T Y P E :
T Y P E OF DE V I CE
S ER I A L
#
S T O R ED P A N E L
S ER I A L
#
D E V I CE
LOOP
Exhibit 8-4 Device S/N Diagnostic Menu
Line 1
Loop number represented by N, position cursor under the value and

press +/- to change to desired loop (1 only for Cheetah Xi 50)
Address number of device to display; Position cursor under the first
digits (001 in this case), press +/- to increment/decrement the value
shown at the cursor.
Line 2
Displays the type of device connected to the panel for the loop and
address in line 1.
Line 3
Displays the serial number of the device held by the panel for
supervision of the loop and address displayed in line 1.
Line 4
Displays the serial number of the device physically connected to the

loop and address displayed in line 1.
(GOAL IS THAT LINE 3 AND 4 SHOULD MATCH OR A MULTIPLE
DEVICE TROUBLE WILL BE REPORTED).
8.3.5
F2 VALUE 1 DIAGNOSTIC MAIN PANEL
The Cheetah Xi 50 has several monitoring points that it supervises continuously. Pressing F2 from the
diagnostic menu will display some of the main panel critical monitoring points (displayed in an analog-todigital reference level):
GF : 1 1 1 < A 1 : 2 3 4
2 4 : 2 3 1
A 2 : 2 3 5
B 1 : 2 4 7
L 1 : 0 4 0
N 1 : 0 8 9
N 2 : 0 8 8
Exhibit 8-5 Value 1 Diagnostic Screen
Line 1
GF = Ground Fault; < = Level 1 ground fault is active, -= ground

fault level is transitioning, >= Level 2 Ground fault is active
Low = 60K ohm or less between power ground and chassis ground
High = 1M ohm or less between Main power (27.6V) and chassis
Level 1<: Low = 0-84
Normal = 85-120 High = 121-255
Level 2>: Low = 0-189 Normal = 190-255
Note: While trouble shooting a ground fault, go
into the Diagnostic screen and the levels are
alternating between level 1 (<) and level 2 (>).
Find the Level that is causing the ground and
press the ENTER button on the keypad to lock the
level where you are getting the ground fault. The < or > will flash
while it is locked in that level. Press ENTER again on the keypad
and the < or > will stay on steady and begin ground fault detection
at both levels again.
A1 = Voltage Regulator on main for AC power
For 120VAC = 200-255, For 240VAC = 206-255
L1 = Loop 1 short circuit detect; Normal = 10-255
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 97 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
SERVICE
FIKE
Line 2
24V = Main panel 24VDC power; 140-255

A2 = Voltage Regulator on main for AC power
For 120VAC = 200-255, For 240VAC = 206-255
Line 3
B1 = Battery circuit on Main controller; Normal = 80-255

For 120VAC = 200-255, For 240VAC = 206-255
N1 = Notification output #1; Open=171-255, Short=49-0
N2 = Notification output #2; Open=171-255, Short=49-0
Line 4
8.3.6
F3 VALUE 2 DIAGNOSTIC LOOP STATUS
Press F3 from the diagnostic menu to display the loop monitoring data (also displayed in an analog-to-digital
reference data):
C 1 + 2 1 4
C 1 - 0 0 3
Exhibit 8-6 Value 2 Diagnostic Screen

Line 1
8.3.7
C1+ = Loop 1 ++ supervision trouble < 100

C1- = Loop 1 supervision trouble >100
F4 BOARD COMM DIAGNOSTIC MICROPROCESSOR STATUS
Press F4 from the diagnostic display to view the microprocessor status (Fike use only):
MA I N P I C
RXD : 0 2 5 2 0
ERR : 0 0 0 0 0
M I S : 0 0 0 0 0
Exhibit 8-7 Board Comm Diagnostic Menu
Left Half = MAIN PIC
(Microprocessor that
Controls loop 1 & 2)
Line 2
RXD = total received data

from the Main PIC
Line 3
ERR = # of checksum
errors noted for the Main
PIC
Line 4
MIS
=
#
of
communication
messages
missed
completely at the main
PIC
Press the ENTER button while this menu is displayed to clear the counters and restart at 0. This provides a
starting point to monitor the communications. The purpose of this window is to detect for electrical noise or
interference (EMI, Radio, etc.) that could be interfering with the on-board communications.
Page 98 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N: 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
8.3.8
SERVICE
F5 CYCLIC REDUNDANCY COUNT MENU

P R O GR A M C R C : n n n n
MA I N P I C V E R : - - - PRE S S E NT ER TO CA LC
Exhibit 8-8 CRC Diagnostic Menu
Line 1
Line 2
Line 4
Program CRC is the CRC for the micro of the panel

Main PIC VER is the Firmware version of the PIC
micro that controls the SLC
Instructions for completing the CRC calculation. From
this screen, press ENTER button.
The newly
calculated CRC and PIC firmware will be displayed on
their respective lines.
Press enter and the nnnn and the -.characters all turn to * while the program is retrieving the PIC
version and re-calculating the CRC. Once completed (about 10 seconds), the CRC is shown and the version
is shown as X.XX. X.XX is the actual firmware version for the board. i.e. 3.00
8.3.9
F6 DIAGNOSTIC MENU #2
D I AGNOS T I C MENU
2
F 1 - KE Y PAD
F 4 - P ER I PH
F 2 - V E SDA
1
F 5F 3 - V E S DA
2
F 6 Exhibit 8-9 Diagnostic Menu 2
8.3.10 F1 KEYPAD DIAGNOSTICS

KE Y PAD
KE Y
D I A G NO S T I C
PRE S S ED :
COUN T :
Exhibit 8-10 Keypad Diagnostics Menu

Line 3
UL S2203
FM 3029134
Press any key on the keypad to display keypress status. This

diagnostic is helpful to test the switch operation. Also displays
number of times the button was pressed.
NOTE: 3rd entry of ESCAPE will exit this menu.

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 99 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07
SERVICE
FIKE
8.3.11 F2 VESDA 1 DIAGNOSTICS

V
C
A
F
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
0 0 1 >
E S D A Z O N E N UM :
URREN T : 0 . 0 0 0 0% / F T
L : - . - - - AC : - . - - - 1 : - . - - - F 2 : - . - - - Exhibit 8-11 VESDA 1 Diagnostics Menu
VESDA zone number for diagnosis. Position cursor in ones, tens, or

hundreds field for zone number. Press + or to change value at
cursor. Arrow/carrot moves back and forth to display successful
communication with VESDA zone number displayed.
Displays current obscuration being seen at the detector (for zone
number in top line). This updates upon each press of ENTER
button (noted in %/ft value)
ALarm setting for Detector located in the zone displayed in line 1.
ACtion setting for Detector located in the zone displayed in line 1.
F1, Fire 1 setting for Detector located in the zone displayed in line 1.
F2, Fire 2 setting for Detector located in the zone displayed in line 1.
8.3.12 F3 VESDA 2 DIAGNOSTICS

V
E
Line 1
Line 2
0 0 1 >
E S D A Z O N E N UM :
N T ER FOR F AU L T
L I S T
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Exhibit 8-12 VESDA 2 Diagnostics Menu
VESDA zone number for diagnosis. Position cursor in
ones, tens, or hundreds field for zone number. Press
+ or to change value at cursor. Arrow/carrot moves
back and forth to display communication.
Press enter to list the VESDA status for the VESDA
zone number displayed in line 1.
8.3.13 F4 PERIPHERAL DIAGNOSTICS

SUP V CN T : 0 0
ADDR : 0 2
T Y P E :
BOSCH DAC T
C OMMA N D S S E N T :
0 0 0 0 0
C OMMA N D S R C V D :
0 0 0 0 0
Exhibit 8-13 Peripheral Diagnostics Menu
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Page 100 of 124

Rev. 0, 3/07
Use the +/- button to select the Peripheral ID to

diagnose. The CNT will display the number of times
the panel sent a supervision message without a
response. As soon as it responds, it sets the counter
back to 0.
Displays the TYPE of peripheral configured at the
selected peripheral address on line 1.
Number of supervision commands Sent to the
peripheral selected.
Number of supervision comments Received from the
peripheral selected.

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
SERVICE
8.3.14
WALKTS - WALKTEST
Section 5.15 of this section described the Walktest State and entry to the Walktest. Walktest entry can be
accomplished by pressing F4 from the Maintenance Menu. Entry to this menu requires a Level 3 Password
or higher.
8.3.15
BUZZER
Some technicians prefer to keep the buzzer disabled while performing testing or diagnostics. To access the
Buzzer menu, press F5, from the Maintenance Menu (access to this menu requires prior successful entry of
password level 3 or higher):
BU Z Z ER OP ERA T I ON :
N OR M A L
Exhibit 8-14 Buzzer Operation Menu
Press the + or button on the
keypad to select the desired Buzzer
operation
1. Normal
2. Disabled
Line 3
On Reset, the status is automatically returned to NORMAL.
8.4
VOLTAGES
The main control board has two primary test points located in the lower left corner of the board:
TP1 = COM
This test point should be used when making DC voltage measurements on the control board. Connect the
voltmeter ground lead to this terminal, then touch the positive lead to the point under test. This is the ground
reference for all points on the control board
TP2 = 24V
This test point is the + side for the main controller 24VDC power buss (connect the voltmeter ground to TP1).
Check this point if AC power is applied, but the system does not seem to operate properly.
LOOP VOLTAGE
Nominally 24VDC with a data communication pulse that drops down to a 0-5VDC level. During normal
operation, a meter should measure anywhere from 0-24VDC. It should not measure a constant 0VDC.
GROUND FAULT, TP1 to Chassis
With a normal panel and no ground fault, this voltage is 2.17 VDC nominal for level 1, 5V for level 2. If a
ground fault is present, this voltage will sway in either direction. Use the Diagnostic screen to troubleshoot
the ground fault. Ground fault detection impedances are 60K ohm between power ground and chassis ground
or 1M ohm between main power and chassis ground.
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 101 of 124

Rev. 0, 3/07
SERVICE
8.5
FIKE
EVENT DESCRIPTION/HISTORY
When an event occurs on the Cheetah Xi 50, it appears on the top line of the display. The same information
is recorded in the 3,200 event history buffer.
The following are the possible events in the Cheetah Xi 50, followed by the event description, and the
recommended steps to restore the system to normal:
EVENT DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RESOLUTION
ABORT INPUT
The input device programmed

for ABORT is active (and an
alarm is active).
Press F1 to determine the loopaddress of the input module activated.

Locate the device. Determine who
pressed the switch at the time of
activation.
ABORT INPUT CLEAR
The abort input has restored to

normal.
This is an expected event if the abort

is returned to normal.
ACKNOWLEDGE FUNCTION
The
user
pressed
the
Acknowledge button or a
remote Acknowledge input.
Determine
who
Acknowledge button.
AC POWER LOW
AC Power is low or missing on

the main controller or SPS as
shown on line 2 of the display.
Meter the transformer incoming AC

primary for 120 or 240VAC as
required. Measure the transformer
Secondary for
27VAC.
Use
Diagnostic Screen #1, reading A3/A4
to determine if within normal status
range. Locate cause if any one of
these is not normal. Check the status
of AC fuse, F1.
AC POWER TROUBLE CLR
AC Power Low trouble has

been restored.
Determine cause for power loss or dip.
ACTION CLEAR: VZ nnn
The VESDA detector, Zone

nnn, which previously reported
ACTION LEVEL has restored
obscuration
levels
below
ACTION.
This is an expected event if the smoke

or obscuration has cleared in the
hazard. Note events if desired.
ACTION LEVEL: VZ nnn
The
VESDA
detector
programmed as Zone nnn has
reached the ACTION level of
obscuration.
Locate VESDA Zone nnn and

determine
cause
for
elevated
obscuration.
ADDR LOOP ON LINE
The control panel is requesting

the devices to send their
current state to the Cyber-loop.
This message is used to
confirm that this specific loop is
now functioning correctly. (soft
reset the loop)
Expected command shown upon each

panel reset for each loop.
ADDRESS OUT OF RANGE
A device address greater than

50 is present on a 50 point
panel.
Locate the device with diagnostic tools

and remove it or re-address it using IR
or C-Linx software.
AIRFLOW FAULT: VZ nnn
The
VESDA
detector
an airflow fault.
Locate VESDA Zone nnn. Determine

if detector piping is changed or if the
environment where the detector is
sampling has been modified.
(BROADCAST CURRENT
STATE)
Page 102 of 124

Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
pressed
the
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
SERVICE
EVENT DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RESOLUTION
AIRFLOW F CLR: VZ nnn
The VESDA Zone nnn that was

reporting an Airflow Fault has
cleared to normal.
This event is expected if the fault is

cleared. Note the event, if desired.
ALARM TYPE #1
The addressable sensor has

reached its alarm set-point or
the addressable input is active
for the alarm state.
Press
F1
to
determine
the
loop/address of the device. Locate the
device and examine the cause for the
activation.
ALARM TYPE #2
The addressable sensor is

active for a summing alarm
condition.
Press
F1
to
determine
the
activation.
ALARM VERIFY ON
The
intelligent
sensor,
programmed
for
alarm
verification, has reached its
alarm threshold and started the
alarm verification timer.
Locate the sensor that sent the

message and determine the cause for
the alarm.
ALERT CLEAR: VZ nnn

ALERT LEVEL has restored
obscuration
levels
below
ALERT.

ALERT LEVEL:
VZ nnn
The
VESDA
detector
reached the ALERT level of
obscuration.

determine
cause
for
elevated
obscuration.
AUX OUTPUT TROUBLE
The supervised auxiliary output

circuits at P7 or from SPS are
not reporting appropriately.
Measure the output voltage at each P7

or SPS output circuit. Check each 4 A
fuse. Determine wiring fault.
AUX OUTPUT TRB CLR
The supervised auxiliary output

circuits at P7 have restored to
normal.
Expected result if the normal

supervision is restored to the Aux
output circuits.
BATTERY TROUBLE
Battery Power is low or missing

on the main controller or SPS
as shown on line 2 of the
display.
Meter the Battery terminals for

27.6VDC.
Remove the battery
terminals and temporarily install a 1.2K
ohm watt resistor (02-11457) to
measure
the
charging
voltage.
Remove the shorting jumper between
the batteries. Measure the voltage of
each battery (12VDC). Use Diagnostic
Screen #1, reading B1 to determine if
within normal status range when
connected to panel. Replace batteries
if low. Check the status of Battery
fuse, F2. Note: Batteries are NOT
supervised during an ALARM.
BATTERY TROUBLE CLR
Battery trouble
restored.
Note cause for battery trouble.
UL S2203
FM 3029134
has
been

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 103 of 124

Rev. 0, 3/07
SERVICE
FIKE
EVENT DISPLAY
CHECKSUM ERROR
DESCRIPTION
The addressable device has a
checksum error.
CHECKSUM ERROR CLEAR
The Checksum Error for the

device has cleared.
CLASS A TROUBLE
The
Cyber-Loop
Circuit
contains and open circuit
condition (or wiring break). The
specific loop that has the fault is
displayed on line 2 of the
display. This fault is latching
and
requires
Reset
to
restore/clear.
Remove the redundant wiring from the

++ and -- terminals and insulate them
so that they do not touch other
conductors or surfaces. Devices after
the break will be displayed as DEVICE
MISSING. Go out to look for devices
that are NOT blinking (or meter for
loop voltage) and locate the wire
break. Fix the break, return the ++
and -- wiring to the proper terminal
blocks and RESET the panel. RESET
IS REQUIRED.
CLASS A TROUBLE CLR
The CLASS A TROUBLE fault

has been cleared and Reset.
A one minute timer is started
any
time
you
write
a
configuration to the devices
from the device configuration
menu. Any switch press resets
the timer.
If a device
configuration is changed, this
message is recorded just
before the automatic reset is
performed. This is just a safety
factor to make sure that the
panel gets reset and the new
device configuration can take
effect.
Previously
identified
at
Checksum Error. Configuration
stored in panel for device does
not match what is stored in the
device.
Note where the open wire or trouble

was located.
Determine who was logged into the
panel at the noted date and time to
determine why the configuration was
changed.
DACT GENERAL TROUBLE
The DACT wired to terminal P6

has a trouble.
Refer to the DACT installation and

operating instructions.
DACT TROUBLE CLEAR
The DACT that was previously

reporting trouble is now normal.
Note what function was performed to

clear the trouble.
DAYTIME SENSITIVITY
The control panel has sent the

loop the command to use the
daytime sensitivities for the
alarm thresholds. (Mode 1)
None.
CONFG CHANGE TIMEOUT
CONFIG MIS-MATCH
Page 104 of 124

Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
RESOLUTION
Press F1 to determine the Panel, loop
and address for the device with the
error. Go to the F3 Checksum Menu
for the device to view Checksum.
Recalculate
by
pressing
enter.
Reconfigure the device or replace if
necessary.
No action required.
Press F1 to determine the Panel, loop

and address for the device with the
mis-match.
Go to the F3 Device
Config-Config Check menu to view the
Checksum. Recalculate by pressing
enter.
Reconfigure the device or
replace if necessary.
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
SERVICE
EVENT DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RESOLUTION
DETECTOR IN ALARM
The addressable input device

programmed for DETECTION is
active.
Press
F1
to
determine
the
loop/address of the device that is
active.
Locate the device and
determine the cause for activation.
DEVICE CONFIG TR CLR
The device has been added to

the config and the DEVICE
NOT IN CONFIG trouble is
cleared.
Note why it was omitted or where the

new device is located.
DEVICE ERR BITS: XXXX
The device has an internal

processing error. NXXX is a
number that will define the
actual problem experienced:
Addressable device communication

problem. A panel Reset may clear the
error. If the error does not clear, try
resending the configuration with CLinx. Validate that the wiring is not the
issue by temporarily t-tapping the
device into the loop at the panel to see
if the trouble clears. Replace the
device if the problem persists.
Or
DEVICE ERR : Nxxx
8000 = Memory Access Error

4000 = Password Error
1000/2000 = Checksum Error
DEVICE MISSING
A device programmed in the

configuration is not responding
on the Cyber-loop.
Press
F1
to
determine
the
loop/address of the device that is
missing. Use installation drawings or
custom message to assist in locating
the device. Meter the device for 24V
power and/or loop power. Press F6 to
turn ON the IR communication and
use the IR tool to light the LED of the
device address. Press F6 to turn the
IR Communication back OFF.
DEVICE NOT IN CONFIG
A New device was reported, but

not in the configuration.
Locate the device and add it to the

configuration, change the address to
the appropriate address, or remove
the device if it is not in the design.
DEVICE ON WRONG LOOP
A device is found on a loop

while it is programmed in the
configuration to be on different
loop. Or device wired to the
loop is addressed to be on a
different loop number.
Press F1 to locate the loop/address.

Press
F6
to
turn
ON
IR
communication. Use the IR Tool to
turn on the Device LED and locate the
device. Fix the loop number in the
device using the IR Tool or move it to
the appropriate loop. Make sure the
loop number programmed in the
device matches the loop number
where it is physically wired. Press F6
to disable the IR communication again.
DEVICE REPLACE FAIL
The device replace menu was

accessed and an error was
encountered
during
the
process.
Determine who was doing the device

replacement and why. Locate the
device and replace it with other
menus and/or with C-Linx software.
DEVICE REPLACE OK
The device Replace menu was

accessed and it successfully
replaced the device.
Determine from the password who

replaced the device and why.
DEVICE RETURN
A Device Missing trouble has

been restored.
Note the cause for the device to be

missing and then restore.
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 105 of 124

Rev. 0, 3/07
SERVICE
FIKE
EVENT DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RESOLUTION
DEVICE TYPE TROUBLE
An addressable device is found

at the loop/address that is
configured, but it is a different
KIND/TYPE of device than what
is configured for that address.

Press
F6
to
turn
ON
IR
device. Replace the device or change
the configuration. Press F6 to disable
the IR communication again.
DEVICE TYPE TRB CLR
An addressable device that was

previously reporting DEVICE
TYPE TROUBLE has been
corrected.
The addressable device is
disabled.
Note the new type of device or what

was done to fix this issue.
The user pressed the Drill

button or a remote Drill input.
The addressable device is reenabled.
Determine who pressed

button.
No action required.
ENTER CONFIGURE MODE
The PC (C-Linx Software) has

taken control of the loops.
Communication
is
now
suspended until the PC allows
access.
Determine who was configuring the

system with the PC.
ENTER WALKTEST MODE
The user has pressed the

appropriate
control
panel
buttons
for
entering
the
Walktest State
Determine who pressed the Walktest

button.
EXIT CONFIGURE MODE
The PC (C-Linx Software) has

returned control of the loops to
the control panel. The system
is now operational.
Determine who was configuring the

system with the PC.
EXIT WALKTEST MODE
The control panel either timed

out from the Walktest mode or it
was reset to exit the Walktest
State.
Determine who activated the Walktest.

If it was exited prior to desired,
examine the history time to determine
if it was over 30 minutes from the last
event to the Exit Walktest Mode
record.
FACTORY DEFAULT LOAD
A Factory initialization has been

performed on the system. Fike
use only.
This should be a normal event noted in

the complete history of a new panel
received from Fike. This event should
not be seen on an installed panel
unless Fike has been called for
assistance.
FEEDBACK CNTRL ALARM
The RM is configured to provide

a feedback feature.
Its
feedback
input
was
not
activated in the time required
after relay activation.
Press
F1
to
determine
the
device and determine why the input
did not activate after the relay was
activated. Change the programming
to not provide feedback if the feedback
input is not desired.
FILTER FAULT: VZ nnn
The
VESDA
detector
a filter fault.
Locate VESDA Zone nnn and replace

filter.
DISABLED DEVICE TRBL

DRILL FUNCTION
ENABLED DEVICE
Page 106 of 124

Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
Enable the device.

the
Drill
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
SERVICE
EVENT DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RESOLUTION
FILTER F CLR: VZ nnn

FILTER FAULT has cleared.
This is an expected event if the filter is

changed/fault cleared. Note events if
desired.
FIRE-1 CLEAR: VZ nnn

FIRE-1 LEVEL has restored
obscuration levels below FIRE1.

FIRE-1 LEVEL: VZ nnn
The
VESDA
detector
reached the FIRE-1 level of
obscuration.

determine
cause
for
elevated
obscuration.
FIRE-2 CLEAR: VZ nnn

FIRE-2 LEVEL has restored
obscuration
levels
below
ALERT.

FIRE-1 LEVEL:

determine
cause
for
elevated
obscuration.
GATEWAY ACKNOWLEDGE
The
VESDA
detector
reached the FIRE-1 level of
obscuration.
Gateway action/pre-alarm 2
from the Cheetah.
Gateway action/pre-alarm 2
event is restored.
Gateway alarm from the
Cheetah.
Gateway PreAlarm1 from the
Cheetah.
Gateway PreAlarm1 event is
restored.
Gateway Process from the
Cheetah.
Gateway Process event is
restored.
Gateway Supervisory from the
Cheetah.
Gateway Supervisory event is
restored.
Gateway Trouble from the
Cheetah.
Gateway Trouble event is
restored.
Gateway Acknowledge event.
GATEWAY DRILL
Gateway Drill button is pressed.
GATEWAY RESET
Gateway Reset activated.
GATEWAY SILENCE
Gateway Silence activated.
GATEWAY UNSILENCE
Gateway Unsilence occurred.
VZ nnn
GATE ACTION ACT Znnn

GATE ACTION CLR Znnn
GATE ALARM
Znnn
GATE PRE-AL ACT Znnn

GATE PRE-AL CLR Znnn
GATE PROCES ACT Znnn
GATE PROCES CLR Znnn
GATE SUPERV ACT Znnn
GATE SUPERV CLR Znnn
GATE TROUBL ACT Znnn
GATE TROUBL CLR Znnn
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Go to the Cheetah to determine

location of the PreAlarm2 event.
No action required.
location of the Alarm event.
location of the PreAlarm 1 event.
No action required.
location of the Process event.
No action required.
location of the Supervisory event.
No action required.
location of the Trouble event.
No action required.
Go to the Cheetah to determine who
pressed the Acknowledge.
pressed the Drill.
pressed the Reset.
pressed the Silence button.
Go to the Cheetah to determine what
occurred to unsilence the panel.
Page 107 of 124

Rev. 0, 3/07
SERVICE
FIKE
EVENT DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RESOLUTION
GCA OPEN TROUBLE
The Gas Cartridge Actuator

(GCA) attached to the Agent
Release Module (ARM) wired to
a Release Control module is
open.
The ARM needs to see a good GCA or

wire short/flash bulb across the RED
and BLUE terminals. Press F1 to
locate the Control Module that has the
fault and locate the module. Examine
the wiring and determine if the GCA
has activated or if there is a wiring
fault.
GCA OPEN TRB CLEAR
The GCA Open trouble has

cleared.
This is an expected event if the GCA

wiring is resolved.
GENERAL TROUBLE
The
addressable
device
contains an abnormal condition
with its monitoring circuit or it
has detected an internal fault.
Press
F1
to
determine
the
device and examine the monitoring
circuit for a fault in the wiring or
replace the device.
GENERAL TROUBLE CLR
The addressable device that

previously reported a trouble
has cleared.
Note the action taken to restore the

trouble.
GROUND FAULT CLEAR
Ground Fault trouble has been

cleared.
Note what was changed to correct the

ground fault trouble.
GROUND FAULT HIGH
A conductor on the Cheetah Xi

50 installation is shorted to
building
ground/chassis
ground/conduit ground.
Use Diagnostic Screen #1 to view

constant GF status. GF threshold
needs to be 85 -120.
Remove
terminal blocks one at a time while
watching this diagnostic. When the
counter begins to count back down to
85-120, the GF should be located on
the circuit that has just been removed.
Now break down the circuit watching
the same screen, until the GF is
located. Aux power circuits '+', NAC
circuits '+' when not active, Loop
circuits '+' and '-', and RS485 circuits
can cause HIGH GF.
GROUND FAULT LOW
A conductor on the Cheetah Xi

50 installation is shorted to
building
ground/chassis
ground/conduit ground.
HISTORY ERASED
History was erased.
Use Diagnostic Screen #1 to view

constant GF status. GF threshold
needs to be 85 -120.
Remove
terminal blocks one at a time while
watching this diagnostic. When the
counter begins to count back up to 85120, the GF should be located on the
circuit that has just been removed.
Now break down the circuit watching
the same screen, until the GF is
located. Aux power circuit '-' , NAC
circuits '-' when not active, loop circuit
'+' and '-' cause LOW GF.
No action required.
INPUT CLEAR:ZONE DIS

for zone disable and activated,
is now clear. The zone is now
enabled once again.
Page 108 of 124

Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
Note who cleared the zone disable

input to normal.
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
SERVICE
EVENT DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RESOLUTION
INTERNAL COM FAILURE
The Cheetah Xi 50 controller

contains 3 microprocessors.
This trouble indicates that the
Main
micro
has
lost
communication to any one of
the other micros.
Press SW1 reset switch (hard reset to

the micro). Reset, power down/up.
Find possible cause for event
(electrical noise, ESD, etc.)
INVALID ABORT ACTIVE
The ABORT input is active, but

there are no alarms, therefore
no agent release to abort.
(Note: some abort types require
the abort to be active prior to
Pre-Discharge. It will not be
active until the 1st alarm
occurs).
If Loop 0 or Address 0 is found
connected to the system, the
panel will record this event.
Press
F1
to
determine
the
loop/address of the input module that
contains the abort input. Locate the
input module. Determine who pressed
the abort input switch.
IR STATUS ENABLED
The
Addressable
devices
communication with IR Tool is
enabled. A person has pressed
the F6 button and enabled the
IR communication.
Expected response if the IR was

intended to be enabled.
If not
intended, press Reset or enter
password and press F6 for IR
Communication. Move the cursor to
the field where the IR communication
is enabled and toggle to disable with
the +/- button.
IR STATUS DISABLED
The Loop IR communication

has restored to disabled.
This is an expected event when the IR

status has changed from Enabled
back to disabled.
ISOLATE FAULT:
VZ nnn
The
VESDA
detector
programmed as Zone nnn is
isolated/disabled.
Locate VESDA Zone nnn and deisolate or determine reason it is

currently isolated.
ISOLATE F CLR:
VZ nnn

ISOLATE FAULT has cleared.
The distributor invoked a
LEARN ALL on the system to
add all devices to the
configuration for supervision.
This is an expected event if the

detector is de-isolated. Note events if
desired.
No action required if it is known why
the Learn was performed.
If not
known, determine who performed the
Learn. ANY TIME A LEARN ALL IS
PERFORMED,
THE
CONFIGURATIONS SHOULD BE
SENT TO THE DEVICES USING CLINX AFTER THE LEARN ALL IS
PERFORMED.
If not
Learn.
If not
Learn.
INVALID ADDRESS
LEARN ALL STARTED
LEARN MODE COMPLETED
LEARN NEW STARTED
UL S2203
FM 3029134
The distributor invoked a Learn

to the system and the Learn
mode is complete.
The distributor invoked a
LEARN NEW devices on the
system to add them to the
configuration for supervision.

Manual P/N: 06-369
Press F1 to display the panel loop and

address that caused this event. Use
the C-Linx Assign Device Address or
Auto-Address menu to change the
address of the device.
Page 109 of 124

Rev. 0, 3/07
SERVICE
FIKE
EVENT DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RESOLUTION
LINE OPEN
The NAC contains an open

circuit condition (or wiring
break). The specific NAC that
has the fault is displayed on line
2 of the display.
Meter the voltage at the specific NAC

terminals which have the fault. Go to
devices in the field and meter for the
same voltage. Continue to follow the
circuit until a device is located with no
voltage. The break exists just prior to
this device. Correct the wiring break.
Note: NAC circuits are not supervised
if EITHER one is active OR if Walktest
is active.
LINE OPEN CLEAR
The NAC Line Open Trouble

has been located and fixed.
Note where the open wire or trouble

was located.
LINE OPEN TROUBLE
Addressable device monitoring

circuit contains an open circuit
fault.
Press
F1
to
determine
the
circuit for the open fault.
LINE SHORT (Loop Ckt)
The Cyber-Loop Circuit is

shorted or excessive current is
being pulled from the loop #
displayed on line 2. Latching
trouble.
Remove short condition from loop

AND reset. RESET IS REQUIRED. If
short is not located with a meter on the
wire, remove sections of the loop
gradually until the section/device that
brings down the loop is found.
LINE SHORT CLEAR
The short circuit or over-current

has been removed from the
loop and the loop was reset.
Note which section of the loop or

device that caused the fault to clear.
LINE SHORT (NAC Ckt)
The Notification Circuit is

shorted or excessive current is
being pulled from the NAC #
displayed on line 2 of the
display.
Remove the NAC circuit and meter the

wires for a short condition. Break
down the loop in section to locate the
short. If the meter does not detect a
short condition, one of the devices is
pulling excessive current. Break down
the NAC circuit in sections to
determine which device is pulling the
excessive current.
LINE SHORT TROUBLE
Addressable device monitoring

circuit has a short circuit
present. This could be from an
input
module
programmed/wired to detect
short circuit fault trouble or from
a control module output circuit
wiring.
Press
F1
to
determine
the
circuit for the short fault.
LINE SHORT CLEAR
The short circuit or over current

has been removed from the
NAC.
Note which section of the circuit or

device that caused the fault to clear.
LINE TROUBLE CLEAR
The addressable device short

or open trouble has been
restored.
Note the cause for the open or trouble

fault and the method used to clear the
error.
LOW POWER TROUBLE
The Control module external

24VDC input power has
dropped below 9VDC. Eclipse
data frames are too long .
Use a DC voltmeter to measure the

voltage at the panel. Measure the
voltage at the device. Remove the
wiring and locate the fault.
Page 110 of 124

Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
SERVICE
EVENT DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RESOLUTION
LOW POWER TRB CLEAR

was previously reporting LOW
POWER
TROUBLE
has
cleared.
Determine what was causing the

power to drop at the device.
MACHINE SHOT #1: Znnn
The Machine application of

watermist, shot #1 is active in
zone nnn.
Expected result when Watermist

release begins. Determine the cause
of the alarms shown prior to this event
that started the Machine shots.
MACHINE SHOT #2 : Znnn
The Machine application of

zone nnn.

that started the Machine shots.
MAINTENANCE TROUBLE
Dirty sensor. The addressable

sensor is sensing that it is near
its operating limits. This is the
Drift Warning level that is
programmed in the sensor.
This trouble is non-latching.
Press
F1
to
determine
the
device and clean or replace it. Allow
30 seconds for averaging and
recalculating the new drift level.
Restart the loop. Note: The sensor
can still alarm while in this trouble.
MAINTENANCE TRB CLR
The addressable device has

restored from a maintenance
trouble.
Note the cause for the maintenance

trouble and method used to clear the
error.
MAJOR FAULT:
VZ nnn
The
VESDA
detector
a major fault.
Locate VESDA Zone nnn and connect

with software or programmer to
diagnose fault.
MAJOR FLT CLR: VZ nnn

MAJOR FAULT has cleared.

VESDA fault is cleared. Note events if
desired.
MANUAL PULL ALARM

programmed
for
MANUAL
PULL is active.
Press
F1
to
determine
the
device and determine the cause for
the activation.
MANUAL RELEASE

for Manual Release is active.
Press
F1
to
determine
the
the activation.
MINOR FAULT:
VZ nnn
The
VESDA
detector
a MINOR FAULT.
Locate VESDA Zone nnn and connect

with software or programmer to
diagnose fault.
MINOR FLT CLR: VZnnn

MINOR FAULT has cleared.
The Config Mis-Match Error for
the device has cleared.

VESDA fault is cleared. Note events if
desired.
No action required.
MIS-MATCH ERROR CLR
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 111 of 124

Rev. 0, 3/07
SERVICE
FIKE
EVENT DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RESOLUTION
MULTIPLE DEVICES TRB
The addressable loop has

found multiple devices assigned
to the same loop/address.
NAC DISABLED
Notification Appliance Circuit or

CRM4 relay is disabled.
NAC ENABLED
Notification Appliance Circuit or

CRM4 relay is re-enabled.

Press
F6
to
turn
ON
IR
device. Change the address of the
device that is addressed incorrectly.
Press F6 to disable the IR
communication again.
Go further up in the history to
determine when and the level of the
password last entered. This person
disabled the NAC circuit.
Enter
password and go to the NAC menu to
Enable the NAC or CRM4 relay.
No action required.
NEW DEVICE
A new Eclipse device is

responding on the addressable
loop. Each device will send this
message to the panel when first
powered up or restarted.
This is an expected response from

each configured device on system
power up. If this message is shown at
other times, look for possible causes
of how the device could be losing
power.
NIGHTIME SENSITIVITY
The control panel has sent the

loop the command to use the
nighttime sensitivities for the
alarm thresholds. (Mode 2)
None, unless you do not want to be

using the night time sensitivities.
Change the configuration if this is the
case.
OUT OF RANGE TR CLR
The device that previously

reported out of range has been
fixed or removed.
Determine who readdressed or

removed the device that fixed the
error.
PANEL MISSING ID:nnn
The networked system is

programmed
to
supervise
ID:nnn and it is not being seen.
Locate Panel nnn and determine if the

panel is normal and if the network
wiring is connected. Check the wiring
between network nodes.
PANEL RETURN ID:nnn
The networked panel that

previously reported PANEL
MISSING is now seeing panel
ID nnn.
This is an expected event when the

Network supervision is restored. Note
events if desired.
PASSWORD ACCEPTED
The panel has recorded a valid

password
entry
on
the
configuration menu.
PER #aa Znnn DISABLE
RS485 Peripheral Device #aa

sent a Zone Disable in Zone
nnn.
Someone keyed the
Remote Device #aa to Access
and pressed the Zone Disable
Button.
RS485 Peripheral Device #aas
Zone Disable has cleared to
normal.
Determine who was present at the

time and date of the event and who
entered the password. The password
level is identified on line 2.
Locate Peripheral #aa and determine
who pressed the Zone Disable button.
PER #aa Znnn ENABLE
Page 112 of 124

Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369

who pressed the Zone Disable button
to normal.
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
EVENT DISPLAY
PER #aa PROCESS Znnn
SERVICE
DESCRIPTION
sent a PROCESS state in Zone
nnn.
Someone keyed the
Remote Device #aa to Access
and pressed the Process
Button.
process has cleared to normal.
RESOLUTION
who pressed the Process button.
PERIPH #aa ACKNOWL

sent
an
Acknowledge
command. Someone pressed
the Acknowledge button on
Peripheral #aa.

who pressed the Acknowledge button.
PERIPH #aa CLEAR 1nn

Error has been fixed/cleared.
Determine what was changed to fix the

fault.
PERIPH #aa DRILL ON

sent
an
Acknowledge
command. Someone pressed
the Drill button on Peripheral
#aa.

who pressed the Drill button. Press
Reset to clear the Drill operation.
PERIPH #aa ERROR 1nn

reported a specific error as
defined in their respective
instruction manual.
Locate Peripheral Device #aa and its

associated
instruction
manual.
Determine definition of Error number
and proceed with the individual
manual
recommendations
for
restoration.
PERIPH #aa IR DIS Lx

sent an command to disable the
IR communication for Loop x.

who keyed the device and pressed the
IR Disable button.
PERIPH #aa IR EN Lx

sent an command to enable the
IR communication for Loop x.

IR Enable button.
PERIPH #aa MISSING
RS485 Peripheral Device #aa is

not communicating with the
main Cheetah Xi 50.
Locate Peripheral Device #aa and

determine if appropriate power is
present and if the RS485 wire is
connected appropriately. Make sure
that the address is set as required by
the installation instructions for the
peripheral.
Make sure the 100
termination resistor is inserted only on
the last device for the peripheral loop.
Validate
wiring
is
within
the
specifications.
PERIPH #aa RESET

sent a RESET command.
Someone pressed the Reset
button on Peripheral #aa.

who pressed the Reset button.
PERIPH #aa RETURN

has restored communication
with the main Cheetah Xi 50..
Determine what was changed

restore the communication.
PER #aa PROCESS CLR
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369

who pressed the Process button to
normal.
to
Page 113 of 124

Rev. 0, 3/07
SERVICE
FIKE
EVENT DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RESOLUTION
PERIPH #aa SILENCE

sent a Silence command.
Someone pressed the Silence
button on Peripheral #aa.

who pressed the Silence button.
PERIPH #aa WALKTEST

sent a Walktest command.

Walktest button.
Locate VESDA Zone nnn and check
the power connections.
POWER FAULT:
VZ nnn
POWER FLT CLR: VZ nnn
The VESDA programmed for

Zone nnn is reporting a power
fault.
POWER FAULT has power
restored to normal.
This is an expected event if the power

is restored to the VESDA detector.
Note event if desired.
POWER SUPPLY LOW
The specific device has lost its

operating power or it is too low
for proper operation.
Other
devices see this message and
all devices on the loop turn OFF
their LED. This is specifically
for the 24V power input on
output module.
Check the loop voltage for proper

voltage. Check the device 24V and
loop voltage input. If loop voltage is
low, remove loop terminal block and
see if the loop voltage restores. If it
does check the loop for possible
causes. If it doesnt check the main
board power supply for proper
voltages.
POWER SUPPLY TRB CLR

was previously reporting a
POWER SUPPLY LOW trouble
is now normal.
Note what was causing the device to

lose its 24V power.
POWER-UP RESET
The Cheetah Xi 50 system has

been powered and a long reset
was performed.
Determine how power was removed

from the system.
PRE-ALARM #1

reached its Pre-Alarm #1
threshold.
Press
F1
to
determine
the
elevated obscuration.
PRE-ALARM #1 CLEAR

restored below its Pre-Alarm #1
level and is normal.
Press
F1
to
determine
the
original Pre-Alarm and restoration.
PRE-ALARM #2

reached its Pre-Alarm #2
threshold.
Press
F1
to
determine
the
elevated obscuration.
PRE-ALARM #2 CLEAR

restored below its Pre-Alarm #2
level.
Press
F1
to
determine
the
original Pre-Alarm and restoration.
PRE-DISCHARGE INPUT

for PRE-DISCHARGE is active.
Press
F1
to
determine
the
device and determine who activated
the Pre-Discharge input.
Page 114 of 124

Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
SERVICE
EVENT DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RESOLUTION
PROCESS INPUT
The addressable input module

programmed for Process state
is active.
Press
F1
to
determine
the
the activation.
PROCESS CLEAR
The addressable input that was

previously active with a Process
event has cleared.
CRM4 relay is disabled.
CRM4 relay is enabled.
Note action taken to restore the

process to normal.
RELAY P1na DISABLED

RELAY P1na ENABLED
Same as noted above for NAC.

No action required.
SILENCE FUNCTION
The user pressed the Silence

button or a remote Silence
input.
Determine who pressed the Silence

button.
SECTOR ACTION CLEAR
The VESDA detector that

previously reported a SECTOR
ACTION event has cleared
below the ACTION level.

obscuration falls below the ACTION
setting. Note event if desired.
SECTOR ACTION Vnnn-x
The VESDA detectors sector x

on Zone nnn has reached the
ACTION level.
Locate VESDA nnn determine area for

sector x. Look for obvious signs of
obscuration/smoke.
SECTOR ALERT CLEAR

previously reported a SECTOR
ALERT event has cleared
below the ALERT level.

obscuration falls below the ALERT
SECTOR ALERT Vnnn-x

ALERT level.

obscuration/smoke.
SECTOR FIRE-1 CLEAR

previously reported a FIRE-1
event has cleared below the
FIRE-1 level.

obscuration falls below the FIRE-1
SECTOR FIRE-1 Vnnn-x

FIRE-1 level.

obscuration/smoke.
SECTOR FIRE-2 CLEAR

previously reported a FIRE-2
event has cleared below the
FIRE-2 level.

obscuration falls below the FIRE-2
SECTOR FIRE-2 Vnnn-x

FIRE-2 level.

obscuration/smoke.
SUPERVISORY INPUT

programmed for Supervisory is
active.
Press
F1
to
determine
the
activation.
SUPERVISORY CLEAR

was previously active with a
supervisory event has cleared.
Note the cause for the supervisory

return to normal.
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 115 of 124

Rev. 0, 3/07
SERVICE
FIKE
EVENT DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RESOLUTION
SYSTEM POWER LOW
The Cheetah Xi 50 main 24V

power is low.
Check input power AC and Battery to

determine if they are normal. Remove
all field wiring. Determine if device or
wiring is pulling down system power.
SYSTEM POWER RETURN
System Power Low trouble has

been restored.
Note cause for power low fault.
SYSTEM RESET
The Reset button was pressed

on the control panel, peripheral,
or addressable input module. A
fast reset will be performed
unless
Acknowledge
was
pressed to perform other reset
types.
Determine location where Reset was

performed and locate person who
pressed the button.
TURBINE SHOT #1:Znnn
The Turbine application of

zone nnn.

that started the Turbine shots.
TURBINE SHOT #2:Znnn
The Turbine application of

zone nnn.

that started the Turbine shots.
TVA#1 WATERMIST Znnn
The
TVA
application
of
zone nnn.

that started the TVA shots.
TVA#2 WATERMIST Znnn
The
TVA
application
of
zone nnn.

that started the TVA shots.
VESDA CFG ERR: VZ nnn
VESDA detector Zone nnn has

a configuration error.
Locate VESDA detector nnn and

connect with software or programmer
to diagnose configuration error.
VESDA MISSING: VZ nnn
VESDA detector Zone nnn is

programmed in the Cheetah Xi
50 but not reporting through
VESDAnet
attached
to
HLI/through P4.
Locate VESDA nnn and determine

why it is not reporting through
VESDAnet HLI or remove this detector
from the Cheetah Xi 50.
VESDA RETURN: VZ nnn
VESDA detector Zone nnn that

previously
reported
as
MISSING is now responding
again.
This event is expected if the VESDA

communication is restored.
Note
events if desired.
WALKTEST ALARM
The addressable sensor has

been activated while in the
Walktest state.
Validate that the inspector activated

this sensor while in the Walktest state.
Check the inspectors sequence of
alarms with the history recorded.
WATERFLOW ALARM
The
addressable
input
programmed for Waterflow is
active.
Locate the waterflow input and

determine cause for activation of the
alarm. In a Pre-Action system, the
Waterflow is active when a sprinkler
head is open/active water is flowing
in the pipe.
Page 116 of 124

Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
FIKE
SERVICE
EVENT DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION
RESOLUTION
WRONG LOOP TRB CLR
A Device On Wrong Loop

trouble has been cleared.
Note method used to clear the trouble.
ZONE DISABLED:
The zone identified in the last

part of this message is
disabled. The inputs can still
operate in the panel, but the
outputs will not operate.
Determine who disabled the zone.
ZONE ENABLED:
The zone that was previously

disabled is now enabled.
Determine who enabled the zone.
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 117 of 124

Rev. 0, 3/07
FIKE
APPENDIX 1 BATTERY CALCULATIONS
APPENDIX 1 - BATTERY CALCULATION FORM

TOTAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Standby Current
Alarm Current
1.
Controller
0.116 A
0.176 A
2.
3.
DACT (if installed)

Signaling Line
Circuit
0.150 A
0.190 A
Auxiliary Power
______A
______A
(Note 1)
(Note 2,4)
0.000 A
______A
4.
5.
______A
<SAME>
______A
Insert totals from Section 2
(Note 4)
Notification Circuits

(Note 2)
Total(Stdby)
______A
Total (Alm)
______A
(Note 1 &2)
Standby Capacity = [Total (Stdby)] x [Standby Time] + [Total (Alm)] x [0.083] (Note 5)
Minimum Battery Size = [Standby Capacity] x [1.2] = ______________AH (Note 3,5)
SECTION 2
Communication Loop
Auxiliary Power
Addressable Device Current
(#used) x (current) = total
63-1052/1058
Photo
(____) x (0.25mA) = _____
N/A
67-033/034
Ion
(____) x (0.314mA) = _____
63-1053/1059
Photo/Heat
(____) x (0.25mA) = _____
N/A
60-1039/1040
Heat
(____) x (0.215mA) = _____
N/A
55-045/050
MMM
(____) x (0.485mA) = _____
N/A
55-041/046
MM
(____) x (0.485mA) = _____
N/A
20-1063/4
APS
(____) x (0.37mA) = _____
N/A
55-042/047
SCM
(____) x (0.56mA) = _____
(____) x (
55-043/048
RM
(____) x (0.50mA) = _____
N/A
63-1057/1062
Duct
(____) x (0.36mA) = _____
N/A
63-1063
Relay Base
(____) x (0.565mA) = _____
55-052/053
Release Module
(____) x (0.30mA) = _____
(____) x (
_____mA / 1000 = _____A
Insert total in line #6 above.
Total Signaling Line Circuits
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
mA) = _____
(Note 4)
mA) = _____
(Note 4)
Page 119 of 124

Rev. 0, 3/07
APPENDIX 1 BATTERY CALCULATIONS
FIKE
SECTION 3
Standby Current
Alarm Current
Auxiliary Power
10-2321
Remote Display
(____) x (0.025 A) = _____
(____) x (0.105 A) = _____
10-2373
Zone Annunciator
(____) x (0.034 A) = _____
(____) x (0.083 A) = _____
10-11x
LED Graphic Micro
(____) x (0.043 A) = _____
(____) x (0.074 A) = _____
63-1064
Sounder Base
(____) x (0.007 A) = _____
(____) x (0.035 A) = _____
________
Type
(____) x (0.xxx A) = _____
(____) x (0.xxx A) = _____
_____ A
_____ A Insert totals in line #7 above.
Total Aux. Power

SECTION 4
Notification Model
________
Type
(____) x (xxxmA) = _____
________
Type
(____) x (xxxmA) = _____
________
Type
(____) x (xxxmA) = _____
________
Type
(____) x (xxxmA) = _____
Total NAC
_____mA / 1000 = _____A
Insert total in line #8 above.
NOTES:
1. Auxiliary Power cannot exceed 2.0A in normal standby condition.
2. Auxiliary Power plus Notification Power cannot exceed 5.25A.
3. Cheetah Xi 50 Control panel can support charging up to 75AH of standby batteries.
4. Addressable device currents above are identical for standby and alarm conditions. Auxiliary power does
not include current delivered to SCM or RCM output circuits during alarm conditions.
5. Standby time should be 24, 60 or 90 hours as required by the local authority or installation. Factory Mutual
requires a 90 hour standby time for Sprinkler Systems. 0.083 hour represents 5 minutes of alarm. 1.2
represents battery derating factor.
Page 120 of 124

Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134
"SYSTEM OPERATION POSTING"

P/N 02-11761 REV 0
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
FIKE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
10-071 Cheetah Xi 50 CONTROL SYSTEM
Commercial Protected Premises Control Unit
Local, Auxiliary, Remote Station (PPU), Central Station (PPU), Releasing Service
OPERATIONAL CONDITIONS
SYSTEM STATUS
LEDs ON
Normal Standby:
AC Normal Green LED
All audibles off
System Trouble:
Trouble Yellow LED
Local piezo on, Trouble audible(s) on
System Alarm:
Alarm Red LED
Local piezo pulses, Alarm audible(s) on
AUDIBLE STATUS
To Silence Panel:
Press SILENCE button
Silences audibles & piezo. Changes

flashing LEDs to steady. Press F1 for
top line to show source of event.
To Reset Panel:
Press RESET button
Resets system including turning off outputs,

interrupting resettable power. Momentarily
activates piezo, all LEDs, and trouble relay.
Restores system to normal state.
CAUTION:
Remove AC and battery power before servicing equipment. The lithium battery used in this
device may present a risk of fire or chemical burn if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above
100C (212F) or incinerate. Replace battery with Fike part 02-4040 only. Use of another battery may
present a risk of fire or explosion.
Periodic testing and inspection shall be conducted in accordance with NFPA 72 and NFPA 16.
AC and Battery fuses must be replaced with 15A Mini Automotive, Fast Acting Fuses.
Terminals P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P9, P10 and P11 are Power Limited Circuits.
This control unit is intended for installation in a controlled indoor environment, in a dry location.
The operation of a manual release will override an activated abort switch.
IN CASE OF TROUBLE CONTACT:
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
__________________________________________________
Phone # ___________________________________________
OR
Customer Service Department
Fike
(800) 979-FIKE (3453) <OR> (816) 229 3405
Refer to Fike Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual #06-369
Frame this sheet and place adjacent to the control equipment.
FIKE
APPENDIX 3 MENU STRUCTURE
APPENDIX 3 CHEETAH XI 50 MENU STRUCTURE

SYSTEM STATUS
SYSTEM EVENT
<ESCAPE>
Time/Date
FUNCTION SWITCH/TOP LEVEL MENU
<ESCAPE>
See Below
F1 EVENT SOURCE (If addressable event, Panel-Loop-Address).

F2 - 40 MORE Custom Message Characters to locate event.
#alm; #supv; #trbl
FUNCTION SWITCHES/TOP LEVEL MENU

2-4
F1 CONFIG 2-4
F1 - DEVICE
F2 - NAC
F1 - ALARM FEATURES
P A SSWOR D A C C E SS
N o t e: A c cess Le vels no t ed by numbers o n menu.
F1 DELETE DEVICE
(if no numbers, it requires a Level 3 or 4 to change)
F2 - READ/WRITE/ENA/DIS
Level 1 = Door Keylock, View Events & Diagnostics, all buttons
F2 - RELEASE FEATURES
Level 2 = Maintenance, View Configuration
F3 - CONFIGURATION CHECK
Level 3 = Distributor, Change Configuration & Level 3 PW
F1 - NAC FUNCTIONS
Level 4 = Factory, Create Level 3 PW & Factory Initialize
F2 - NAC ZONE ASSIGNS

F3 - PROTOCOL
F3 - SLC
F4 LEARN
F6 MENU 2
2-4
F1 - TIME
F2 - SILENC
F3 - POWER
F4 - DAY SEN
F1 - DAYTIME SEN RANGE

F2 - SELECT HOLIDAYS
F5 - ZONE
F6 - MENU 3
F2 HISTORY
HISTORY MENU
F1 - ALARM1-4
F2 - WALK
F2 - SOURCE
F2 - SUPERV1-4
F3 - GROUND 4
F4 - CMD SET
F3 - TROUBL1-4
F4 - ABORT
F4 - EVENTS1-4
F5 - ZONE1-4
F5 - SEN CHG
F6 - MENU 4
F6 - ERASE3-4
F3 - DIAG
2-4
F1 - PERIPH
F1 - DEVICE
F1 - AC DEL
DIAGNOSTIC MENU 1
F2 - VESDA
F1 - ALARM FEATURES
F1 - DEVICE1-4
F1 - TYPE LOC & LED1-4
F2 - SECTOR ZONES
F2 - VALU 11-4
F2 - SERIAL NUMBERS1-4
F3 - EVAX
F3 - VALU 21-4
F4 - RELEASE
F4 - BRD COM1-4
F5 - CRC1-4
F5 - RELAYS
F2 - RELAY FUNCTIONS
DIAGNOSTIC MENU 2
F6 - MENU 2
F3 - RELAY ZONE ASSIGN
F1 - KEYPAD1-4
F4 - PASSWORD 1-4
F5 - MAINT
2-4
F2 - VESDA 11-4
1-4
F4 - FAN RESTART
F6 - MENU 5
1-4
F1 - DEV RD
F3 - VESDA 2
F1 - LOGO
F2 - DEV ADR1-4
F4 - PERIPH1-4
F2 - AUTO A
F3 - DEV RPL 2-4

F4 - WALKTS
2-4
F4 - DIALER
3-4
F5 - NETWORK
F5 - BUZZER 3-4
F1 - ID'S
F2 - MODULE
F3 - ZONES
F6 IR COMM 1-4
F4 - ENABLED
F5 - SWITCH
F6 - MENU 6
F1 - IP ADR
F2 - IP SUP
F3 - IP TIM
F4 - SW OPER
F5 - LED OPR
F6 - MENU 1
UL S2203
FM 3029134

Manual P/N: 06-369
Page 123 of 124

Rev. 0, 3/07
2-4
APPENDIX 4 PREDISCHARGE AND ABORT TYPES
FIKE
APPENDIX 4 PRE-DISCHARGE AND ABORT TYPES

As noted in the operation section of this manual,
each alarm or suppression zone can enter the
Alarm state. The suppression zone can enter the
Pre-Discharge state depending on the activation of
the input device(s) and their configured PreDischarge type (defined below).
PRE-DISCHARGE TYPE
A
Alarm Device Only This type will create

the Alarm state only and will NOT allow it to
participate in Pre-Discharge events.
Once the zone enters the Pre-Discharge state, a

countdown time is started (manual or detection).
The Cheetah Xi 50 can have one abort type
(defined below) assigned to the system. This
abort type is a defined operation for ability to
prevent the suppression zone from advancing to
the release state and activating the suppressant
agent.
ABORT TYPE
Abort is effective only if active upon entry into

Pre-Discharge state. Countdown continues
during abort activation.
Upon abort
deactivation (during Pre-Discharge), the
release can not again be aborted, so release
occurs
upon
countdown
completion.
Conforms to Industrial Risk Insurers (IRI)
requirements.
Countdown continues during abort activation.

Release occurs when both the countdown is
completed and the abort is deactivated.
If the abort is active during Pre-Discharge,

release occurs upon abort deactivation.
If the abort is active during Pre-Discharge,

release occurs 10 seconds after abort
deactivation. Only abortable ONCE.
Upon abort deactivation, countdown occurs

from the full programmed countdown time.
Prior to countdown completion, abort
activation extends the countdown time to the
programmed length. Does not conform to UL
requirements (pg 75), but is allowed by some
Local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
Upon abort deactivation, system operates in

New York City mode which has a 9 second
verification delay, then a 30 second
countdown. Prior to countdown completion,
abort activation again extends the countdown
time. During 120 second verification delay,
the system emulates continuous abort
activation. After a 90 second delay, the
system starts a 30 second Pre-Discharge
delay. Does not conform to UL requirements
(pg 75), but is allowed by some Local
Authority Having Jurisdiction.
st
1 Cross Zone Device This type will work

in conjunction with type C for crossing two
different TYPES of detection. If one alarm
has occurred from Type B OR C, the Alarm
state is created. The zone requires at least
one alarm from Type B AND one from Type
C to advance to the Pre-Discharge state.
2nd Cross Zone Device This type will work

in conjunction with type B for crossing two
different TYPES of detection. If one alarm
has occurred from Type B OR C, the Alarm
state is created. The zone requires at least
one alarm from Type B AND one from Type
C to advance to the Pre-Discharge state.
Count Zone This type requires at least

two detection alarms active in the same zone
to advance to the Pre-Discharge state.
Single Device Release This type will allow

a single detection alarm to advance to the
Pre-Discharge state.
Non Abortable Release (Manual Release)

This type will activate the alarm and/or
release state and will override any abort
activations.
Used for Manual Release
programming.
NOTE: The ABORT input delays

release initiated by automatic
detection schemes.
Release
initiated by Manual Release
input circuits override the
Abort Input.
Page 124 of 124
Rev. 0, 3/07

Manual P/N 06-369
UL S2203
FM 3029134

P.O. Box 610
Blue Springs, Missouri 64013 U.S.A.
(800) 979-FIKE (3453)
Fax: (816) 229-0314
http://www.fike.com
Engineered System
Design, Installation, and Maintenance Manual
(for use with GCA and DOT / TC containers)
P/N 06-285 (Rev D)

Revision Date: January, 2010
REVISION HISTORY
Document Name:
DESIGN, INSTALLATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FOR ENGINEERED ECARO-25 SYSTEMS
Original release date of manual:............................................................................................................January, 2003

Revision / Description of Change
Revision Date
Revision A.........................................................................................................................................September, 2003

1) Added low pressure information to Section 1 & 4
2) Add back to back 180 nozzles to Section 2 & 4
3) Deleted Section 7 Parts List
4) Added new design limits and UL Ex4623 reference to all Sections
5) Removed Pre-Engineered information from all sections
Revision B....................................................................................................................................................May, 2005
1) Updated 10, 20 & 35 lb container information in Section 1 and 4
Revision C ..................................................................................................................................................June, 2009
1) Added 3/8 Sch 40 & Sch 80 pipe to paragraph 4.4, Section 4
2) Changed Mounting Bracket information in Section 1 &4
3) Removed 10 lb. Container from Manual
4) Added reference to ULC and TC to Manual
5) Changed 8 Liter container to 8.5 Liter thru out the Manual
6) Changed approximate tare weight on 650 and 1000 lb. (267 and 42 Liter) containers from 380 and 540
lbs. (172.4 and 244.9)
7) Added Reload Kit information to Section 1
8) Removed Valve Reconditioning information from Section 6
9) Updated 1 & 2 Check Valve information in Section 1 & 2
10) Removed reference to 4B500/4BM500 in paragraph 1.5.2, Section 1
Revision D .............................................................................................................................................January, 2010
1) Added threaded valve information to Sections 1, 2 and 4
Manual P/N: 06-285
This page intentionally left blank
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 1 PAGE
SECTION 1.0 EQUIPMENT .................................................................................... 25 PAGES
1.1
AGENT ..........................................................................................................................................................1
1.2
PERFORMANCE...........................................................................................................................................1
1.3
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES HFC-125 (FE-25) ............................................................................................1
1.4
USE and LIMITATIONS................................................................................................................................2
1.4.1
Exposure........................................................................................................................................................2
1.4.2
Exposure Limits .............................................................................................................................................3
1.4.2.1
Normally Occupied Spaces.....................................................................................................................3
1.4.2.2
Not Normally Occupied Spaces ..............................................................................................................3
1.4.3
Toxicity...........................................................................................................................................................3
1.4.4
Noise..............................................................................................................................................................4
1.4.5
Turbulence.....................................................................................................................................................4
1.4.6
Chilling ...........................................................................................................................................................4
1.4.7
Visibility..........................................................................................................................................................4
1.4.8
Pressure ........................................................................................................................................................4
1.5
AGENT STORAGE CONTAINERS ..............................................................................................................5
1.5.1
Rupture Disc ..................................................................................................................................................5
1.5.2
Containers w/ 1 (25mm) Valve .....................................................................................................................6
1.5.3
Containers w/ 2 (65mm) Valve .................................................................................................................8
1.5.3.1
1.5.4
1.5.4.1
Floor Mounting Kits .................................................................................................................................9

Containers w/ 3 (80mm) Valve ...................................................................................................................10
Mounting Straps ....................................................................................................................................11
1.6
ITEMS FURNISHED W/ CONTAINERS .....................................................................................................12
1.6.1
Nameplate ...................................................................................................................................................12
1.6.2
Siphon Tube ................................................................................................................................................12
1.6.3
Victaulic Coupling & Nipple .........................................................................................................................12
1.6.4
Pressure Gauge...........................................................................................................................................12
1.6.5
Pressure Gauge Adapter.............................................................................................................................13
1.6.6
Agent Fill Valve............................................................................................................................................13
1.6.7
Agent Release Module (ARM).....................................................................................................................14
1.6.8
Mounting Hardware For GCA & ARM..........................................................................................................14
1.7
GAS CARTRIDGE ACTUATOR (GCA)......................................................................................................15
1.8
CONTAINER ACCESSORIES ....................................................................................................................16
1.8.1
Liquid Level Indicator (LLi) ..........................................................................................................................16
1.8.2
Low Pressure Switch ...................................................................................................................................17
Manual P/N: 06-285 (Rev C)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.8.3
Reload Kits ..................................................................................................................................................17
1.8.3.1
Reload Kit 1 Valve ............................................................................................................................18
1.83.2
Reload Kit 2 Valve .......................................................................................................................19
1.8.3.3
Reload Kit 3 Valve ............................................................................................................................20
1.9
CONTAINER ORDERING FORMAT ..........................................................................................................21
1.10
DISCHARGE NOZZLES - ENGINEERED ..................................................................................................22
1.10.1 Nozzle Ordering Format .............................................................................................................................22

1.11
CHECK VALVES.........................................................................................................................................23
1.12
CAUTION / ADVISORY SIGNS ..................................................................................................................24
1.12.1 Notice System Alarm Sign........................................................................................................................24

1.12.2 Abort Sign ....................................................................................................................................................24
1.12.3 Main / Reserve Sign ....................................................................................................................................34
1.12.4 Agent Release Sign.....................................................................................................................................24
1.12.5 Notice System Discharge Sign ................................................................................................................24
1.12.6 Caution Area Protected by FE-25 Sign ....................................................................................................24
1.13
CONTROL SYSTEM & ACCESSORIES ....................................................................................................25
1.13.1 Control Panels .............................................................................................................................................25

1.13.2 Manual Acturator .........................................................................................................................................25
SECTION 2.0 SYSTEM DESIGN ............................................................................ 27 PAGES

2.1
DETERMINE HAZARD TYPE.......................................................................................................................1
2.2
DETERMINE CONCENTRATION PERCENTAGE.......................................................................................1
2.2.1
Automatically Activated Class "A" or "C" Hazards ........................................................................................1
2.2.2
Manually Activated Class "A" or "C" Hazards................................................................................................1
2.3
SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONS..................................................................................................................2
2.3.1
Normally Occupied Spaces ...........................................................................................................................2
2.3.2
Normally Non-Occupied Spaces ...................................................................................................................2
2.4
DETERMINE AGENT QUANTITY ................................................................................................................3
2.4.1
Determine The Hazard Volume .....................................................................................................................3
2.4.2
Calculate Agent Required..............................................................................................................................3
2.4.3
Additional Considerations..............................................................................................................................6
2.4.3.1
Tee Design Factor...................................................................................................................................6
2.4.3.2
Altitude Correction Factors .....................................................................................................................8
2.4.3.3
Determine Actual Concentration at Maximum Temperature...................................................................8
2.4.3.4
Leakage ..................................................................................................................................................9
2.5
SYSTEM DESIGN CONCEPT ....................................................................................................................10
2.5.1
Engineered Systems Concept .....................................................................................................................10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.5.2
Modular Systems .........................................................................................................................................10
2.5.3
Central Storage Systems.............................................................................................................................10
2.6
CONTAINER SELECTION..........................................................................................................................11
2.6.1
Container Size and Fill Range.....................................................................................................................11
2.6.2
Container Location(s) ..................................................................................................................................12
2.6.3
Storage Temperature Limitations ................................................................................................................12
2.7
NOZZLE SELECTION.................................................................................................................................13
2.7.1
System Type................................................................................................................................................13
2.7.2
Nozzle Flow Rates.......................................................................................................................................13
2.7.2.1
Engineered Nozzles ..............................................................................................................................14
2.7.3
Nozzle Area Coverage ................................................................................................................................14
2.7.4
Nozzle Placement........................................................................................................................................15
2.7.4.1
Ceiling Heights Greater Than 16'-0" (4.9 m).........................................................................................16
2.7.5
Nozzle Discharge Obstructions ...................................................................................................................17
2.8
PIPING NETWORK LIMITATIONS (ENGINEERED SYSTEMS) ...............................................................18
2.8.1
Tee Split Ratios ...........................................................................................................................................18
2.8.1.1
Bullhead Tee .........................................................................................................................................18
2.8.1.2
Side-Thru Tee .......................................................................................................................................18
2.8.2
Maximum Elevation Differences in Pipe Runs ...........................................................................................19
2.8.3
Tee Orientation ............................................................................................................................................20
2.8.4
Estimating Pipe Size (Engineered Systems)...............................................................................................21
2.8.4.1
Discharge Duration ...............................................................................................................................21
2.8.4.2
Minimum Flow rate................................................................................................................................21
2.8.5
Equivalent Length Values............................................................................................................................22
2.9
ENGINEERED SYSTEM DESIGN LIMITS .................................................................................................23
2.9.1
Percent of Agent In Pipe..............................................................................................................................23
2.9.2
Location of First Tee....................................................................................................................................23
2.9.3
Liquid Arrival Time .......................................................................................................................................24
2.9.4
Liquid Runout Time .....................................................................................................................................24
2.10
MANIFOLD OPTIONS (ENGINEERED SYSTEMS)...................................................................................25
SECTION 3.0 SAMPLE PROBLEM ........................................................................ 25 PAGES

3.1
Determine Hazard Volume ..........................................................................................................................1
3.2
Calculate Agent Required...........................................................................................................................2
3.2.1
Determine Concentration At Maximum Temperature....................................................................................2
3.3
Establish System Concept .........................................................................................................................3
3.3.1
Container Selection .......................................................................................................................................3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.3.2
Nozzles Required. .........................................................................................................................................3
3.4
Layout Piping Network................................................................................................................................5
3.5
Sample Flow Calculation English Units .................................................................................................6
3.6
Sample Flow Calculation SI Units.........................................................................................................16
SECTION 4 SYSTEM INSTALLATION................................................................... 21 PAGES

4.1
Agent Storage Containers ..........................................................................................................................1
4.1.1
Mounting Details for Vertical / Horizontal Containers....................................................................................1
4.1.1.1
Mounting Details 20 lb. & 35 lb. (8.5L & 15L) Container.........................................................................2
4.1.1.2
Mounting Details 60 lb. (27 L) Container ................................................................................................3
4.1.2
Mounting Details for Inverted (Spherical) Containers....................................................................................4
4.1.2.1
Mounting Details 125 lb. (51 L) Container ..............................................................................................4
4.1.2.2
Mounting Details 215 lb. (90 L) Container ..............................................................................................5
4.1.3
Mounting Details for Vertical (Upright) Containers ........................................................................................6
4.2
Discharge Piping Connections ..................................................................................................................7
4.2.1
1" (25mm) Valve Connections .......................................................................................................................7
4.2.2
2-1/2" (65mm) Valve Connections.................................................................................................................7
4.2.3
3" (80mm) Valve Connections .......................................................................................................................8
4.3
Manifolds ......................................................................................................................................................8
4.3.1
1" NPT Check Valve Installation..................................................................................................................10
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.4
Piping and Fitting Materials......................................................................................................................11
4.4.1
Pipe Size Changes ......................................................................................................................................12
4.4.1.1
Pipe Size Change at a Tee ...................................................................................................................12
4.4.1.2
Pipe Size Change at an Elbow .............................................................................................................12
4.4.1.3
Pipe Size Change at a Coupling ...........................................................................................................12
4.4.2
Installing Main Discharge Piping .................................................................................................................12
4.5
Nozzle Installation .....................................................................................................................................13
4.5.1
360 Nozzles................................................................................................................................................14
4.5.2
180 Nozzles................................................................................................................................................14
4.5.3
Nozzle Set Screw Installation ......................................................................................................................14
4.6
Gas Cartridge Actuator (GCA) / Agent Release Module (ARM) ............................................................15
4.6.1
2-1/2" (65 mm) Valve (Inverted Container) GCA Installation ......................................................................15
4.6.2
1" & 3" (25 mm & 80 mm) Valve GCA Installation.......................................................................................16
4.7
Container Electrical Connections ............................................................................................................17
4.7.1
Gas Cartridge Actuator (GCA) Safety Recommendations ..........................................................................18
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.7.2
Gas Cartridge Actuator (GCA) Installation Procedure.................................................................................19
4.8
Low Pressure Switch ................................................................................................................................20
4.8.1
Low Pressure Switch Wiring........................................................................................................................21
SECTION 5.0 FINAL SYSTEM CHECKOUT ............................................................ 2 PAGES

5.1
Hazard Area Check......................................................................................................................................1
5.1.1
Area Configuration.........................................................................................................................................1
5.1.2
Area Leakage ........................................................................................................................................1
5.1.3
Enclosure Integrity Door Fan Testing.........................................................................................................1
5.2
Containers ....................................................................................................................................................2
5.3
Discharge Piping . ............................................................................................................................2
5.4
Nozzles .........................................................................................................................................................2
5.5
Auxiliary Functions .....................................................................................................................................2
SECTION 6.0 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE.................................................................. 3 PAGES

6.1
Discharge Piping .........................................................................................................................................1
6.2
Discharge Nozzles.......................................................................................................................................1
6.3
Agent Storage Containers ..........................................................................................................................1
6.4
Gas Cartridge Actuators .............................................................................................................................2
6.5
Container Test and Inspection ...................................................................................................................2
6.6
Pressure Gauge & Low Pressure Switch Maintenance ...........................................................................3
6.6.1
Replacing a Pressure Gauge or Low Pressure Switch .................................................................................3
6.6.2
Adding a Low Pressure Switch......................................................................................................................3
APPENDIX A MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS .............................................. 11 PAGES

Material Safety Data Sheet FE-25 Agent .................................................................................................... 8 Pages
Material Safety Data Sheet Gas Cartridge Actuator (GCA) ........................................................................ 3 Pages
INTRODUCTION
Fikes Design, Installation and Maintenance Manual for our ECARO-25 fire suppression systems incorporates the
latest design requirements found in NFPA Standard 2001, as well as the most up-to-date information available for
our products.
This manual has been provided for those individuals that are responsible for the design, installation, and/or
maintenance of Fike ECARO-25 hardware and systems. Others such as architects, engineers, sales and
marketing personnel, etc. will find the information herein useful as well.
Fike utilizes an Engineered System concept when applying ECARO-25 These systems are designed within
the basic parameters outlined in this manual, and their performance is evaluated with the assistance of the Fike
Flow Calculation Program.
Tests have shown that the Fike Flow Calculation Program can accurately determine the expected performance of
the ECARO-25 system when it is discharged. This provides the system designer with the maximum degree of
flexibility possible as it pertains to flow imbalance, tee splits, piping configurations, etc.
Fike ECARO-25 systems must be installed and maintained in accordance with the limitations established NFPA
Standard no. 2001, Clean Agent Extinguishing Systems, as well as the limitations set forth by Underwriters
Laboratories Inc. / Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Canada and FM Approvals. The information contained within
this manual defines these limitations in detail.
Enough information is incorporated into this manual to allow those responsible for designing Fike ECARO-25
systems to properly do so, and for the parties responsible for verifying the system design to determine if the
design parameters have in deed been met.
The data contained within this manual is provided for informational purposes only. Fike believes this data to be
accurate; however, all dimensions are approximate and this document is presented without any guarantee or
warranty whatsoever.
Any questions concerning the information presented in this manual should be addressed to:
Fike Corporation
P.O. Box 610
Blue Springs, MO 64013
Phone: (816) 229-3405
Fax: (816) 229-5082
Webpage: www.fike.com
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
ECARO-25 Systems Engineered

Manual P/N 06-285 (Rev D)
Page 1 of 1
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
This section covers the hardware utilized by Fike ECARO-25 Systems, including the optional items that are
available. All of the information contained herein is believed to be accurate and up-to-date. However, it should
be noted that all dimensions shown are approximate and Fike reserves the right to make adjustments as
necessary.
1.1
AGENT
The extinguishing agent used in Fike Suppression Systems is Pentafluoroethane more commonly known by its
ASHRAE designation: HFC-125. HFC-125 is a colorless, odorless, liquefied compressed gas. (See the Physical
Properties Table below.) It is stored as a liquid, but dispensed into the hazard as a colorless, electricallynonconductive, gaseous vapor due to its relatively low boiling point. HFC-125 has been tested and verified to be
safe for use in occupied spaces when used as specified in the U.S. EPA Significant New Alternative Policy
(SNAP) rules. Tests have proven that exposure to HFC-125 is safe and effective in extinguishing fires at low
concentrations; most of which are well below the EPAs maximum exposure levels. HFC-125 is approved for use
in occupied areas up to an 11.5% concentration by volume with a mandated egress time of 5 minutes or less.
1.2
PERFORMANCE
HFC-125s mechanism of extinguishing fires is considered active. Its primary action is through physically cooling
the fire at the molecular level. HFC-125 belongs to the same class of agents used in refrigeration and as such, is
an efficient heat transfer agent. HFC-125 removes the thermal energy from the fire to the extent where the
combustion reaction cannot sustain itself. Additionally, there is a chemical action that provides a secondary
means of extinguishing the fire. Trace amounts of free radicals are released into the fire thereby inhibiting the
chain reaction of combustion. HFC-125 does not significantly reduce oxygen levels and is safe for use in
occupied spaces in accordance with the U.S. EPA guidelines. HFC-125 can be removed from the protected
space by simple means of ventilation after discharge.
1.3
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF HFC-125 (FE-25)
Chemical Name/Formula
Pentafluoroethane / CHF2CF3
CAS Number
354-33-6
Molecular Weight
120.02
3
Vapor Density @ 25 C (77 F) and atm, kg/m (lb/ft )
4.982 m (0.3111)
Vapor Pressure, Saturated at 25 C (77 F), bar (psia)
13 bar (200.4)
Boiling Point,1 atm, C (F)
-48.14 (-54.7)
Freezing Point, C (F)
-103 (-153)
Solubility in Water in FE-25 at 25 C (77 F), ppm
700
Critical Temperature, C (F)
66.25 (151.25)
Critical Pressure, bar (psia)
36 (526.6)
Critical Volume, cc/mole
210
Critical Density, kg/m (lb/ft )
571.9 (35.70)
Specific Heat, Liquid (CP) at 25 C (77 F), KJ/Kg- C (Btu/lbF)
1.37 (0.327)
Specific Heat, Vapor at (CP) at 25 C (77 F), KJ/Kg- C (Btu/lbF) and 1 atm
0.809 (0.193)
Heat of Vaporization @ Boiling Point KJ/Kg (Btu/lb)
164.4 (70.7)
Thermal Conductivity, Liquid at 25 C (77 F), W/m- C (Btu/hr-ftF)

o
0.0652 (0.0377)
Thermal Conductivity, Vapor at 25 C (77 F), W/m- C (Btu/hr-ftF)
0.0166 (0.0096)
Viscosity, Liquid at 25 C (77 F), cP (lb/ft-hr)
0.137
Viscosity, Vapor at 25 C (77 F), cP (lb/ft-hr)
0.013
Ozone Depletion Potential
Global Warming Potential (based on a 100-yr horizon relative to CO2)
2800
Inhalation Exposure Limit (AEL-8 and 12hr. TWA), ppm**
1000
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Manual P/N: 06-285 (Rev D)
Page: 1 of 25
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
1.4
USE AND LIMITATIONS
Fike ECARO-25 Systems must be designed and installed in accordance with the requirements outlined in this
manual, and in accordance with the requirements of the Standard for Clean Agent Extinguishing Systems, NFPA
2001, latest edition. ECARO-25 systems are primarily used to protect hazards that are enclosed; this provides a
means to establish and maintain an effective extinguishing concentration. Typical hazards that can be protected
include the following:
Electrical and electronic hazards
Telecommunications facilities
Storage Rooms Flammable liquids and gases
High value assets, where the associated down-time would be costly
ECARO-25 systems shall NOT be used on fires involving the following materials:
Chemicals or mixtures of chemicals that are capable of rapid oxidation in the absence of air. Examples
include Cellulose Nitrate and Gunpowder.
Reactive metals such as Lithium, Sodium, Potassium, Magnesium, Titanium, Zirconium, Uranium, and
Plutonium
Metal hydrides such as Sodium Hydride and Lithium Aluminum Hydride
Chemicals capable of undergoing auto-thermal decomposition. Examples include Organic Peroxides and
Hydrazine.
1.4.1
EXPOSURE
Although HFC-125 is considered to be non-toxic, the EPA has established the guidelines controlling the amount
(concentration) of agent provided for the protected area. Based on PBPK modeling, the EPA allows HFC-125 for
use where people are normally present (normally occupied spaces) up to concentration of 11.5 % by volume with
exposure limited to 5 minutes or less.
WARNING:
The discharge of clean agent systems to extinguish a fire can result in potential hazard to
personnel from the natural form of the clean agent or from the products of combustion that result
from exposure of the agent to the fire or hot surfaces. Unnecessary exposure of personnel either
to the natural agent or to the products of decomposition shall be avoided. The requirement for
pre-discharge alarms and time delays are intended to prevent unnecessary exposure to humans
where their presence is not critical to the operation of the area being protected. Suitable
safeguards shall be provided to ensure prompt evacuation of (and prevent entry into) protected
areas after discharge.
Page: 2 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
1.4.2
EXPOSURE LIMITS
1.4.2.1 NORMALLY OCCUPIED SPACES

ECARO-25 systems can be designed to concentrations above the NOAEL, given that means be provided to limit
exposure to design concentrations shown in Table 1.4 that correspond to a maximum permitted human exposure
time of five minutes.
HFC-125
Concentration
ppm
Human Exposure
Time (minutes)
7.5%
75,000
5.00
8.0%
80,000
5.00
8.5%
85,000
5.00
9.0%
90,000
5.00
9.5%
95,000
5.00
10.0%
100,000
5.00
10.5%
105,000
5.00
11.0%
110,000
5.00
11.5%
115,000
5.00
12.0%
120,000
1.67
12.5%
125,000
0.59
13.0%
130,000
0.54
13.5%
135,000
0.49
TABLE 1.4
1.4.2.2 NOT NORMALLY OCCUPIED SPACES
ECARO-25 systems can be designed for concentrations exceeding the LOAEL provided that any personnel in the
area can escape within 30 seconds.
NOTE: Fike does not recommend ECARO-25 systems to be used in any normally occupied spaces where the
design concentration required is above 11.5%.
1.4.3
TOXICITY
With a database in excess of 70 toxicity tests, ECARO-25 has been extensively tested and approved by
institutions and agencies around the world. The LC50 toxicity rating for ECARO-25 is greater than 700,000 ppm.
When you consider that most ECARO-25 systems are designed for concentrations providing 80,000 ppm or less,
it is evident that ECARO-25 is safe to use.
ECARO-25 will decompose to form halogen acids when exposed to extremely high temperatures. The formation
of these acids is minimized by using fast-acting Fike detection and control systems, and proper system design
and installation of the piping system to deliver the agent quickly. The generation of by-products from the ECARO25 discharge will be minimal when properly applied.
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 3 of 25
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
1.4.4
NOISE
The high-pressure discharge from the nozzle(s) of a system can cause noise that is loud enough to be startling,
but ordinarily insufficient to cause injury.
1.4.5
TURBULENCE
The high velocity discharge from the nozzle(s) can be sufficient enough to dislodge substantial objects located
directly in the discharge path. Enough general turbulence may be created within the enclosure to move
unsecured paper and light objects.
1.4.6
CHILLING
Direct contact with the vaporizing agent being discharged from the nozzle(s) will have a chilling effect on objects
and can cause cryogenic burns to the skin. The liquid phase vaporizes rapidly when mixed with air, thus limiting
the hazard to the immediate vicinity of the discharge nozzle.
1.4.7
VISIBILITY
Although ECARO-25 is odorless, discharging the agent into a humid atmosphere may cause a reduction in
visibility for a brief period of time due to condensation of water vapor normally present in the room atmosphere.
1.4.8
PRESSURE
The normal operating pressure of a Fike ECARO-25 clean agent extinguishing system unit is 360 psig @ 70oF
(24.8 bar @ 21oC). This is accomplished by adding a charge of nitrogen to the ECARO-25 agent. Since these
are pressurized vessels, care must be observed when handling, filling and transporting storage containers. The
anti-recoil devices (baffle plugs or baffle plates) MUST be in place whenever the charged container is removed
from the piping network.
Page: 4 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
1.5
AGENT STORAGE CONTAINERS
The Agent Storage Container is a steel pressure vessel designed to hold the ECARO-25 under pressure until it is
discharged. All Fike ECARO-25 Containers are suitable for use at storage temperatures of +32oF to +120oF (0oC
to 48.9oC). Each container is manufactured in strict accordance with Department of Transportation / Transport
Canada (DOT / TC) regulations and undergoes extensive pressure and leak testing before shipment to the field.
All Fike ECARO-25 Containers are shipped from the factory fitted with an anti-recoil device installed in the
discharge valve outlet in accordance with DOT / TC requirements. The anti-recoil device ensures the contents
of the pressurized container will be released in a slow, controlled, rate of discharge if the valve is opened during
the shipping and handling process. ECARO-25 Containers are filled with agent within the allowable range of 25
lbs/ft3 to 56 lbs/ft3 (400 kg/m3 to 896 kg/m3) of container volume in accordance with DOT / TC requirements. All
containers are filled in 1 lb. (0.5 kg) increments to the user-specified level defined for each container. Each
ECARO-25 container is super-pressurized with dry nitrogen to a working pressure of 360 psig at 70oF (24.8 bar at
21oC) after filling. Fike ECARO-25 Containers are available in twelve different sizes (capacities). Each container
includes a discharge outlet valve, fill valve, pressure gauge, mounting bracket or mounting strap(s), agent release
module, and provisions for the accessories available for that particular container size and/or style.
The Discharge Outlet Valve is a rupture disc (metal diaphram), pressure operated device that allows the agent to
be released from the container and into the protected space via the associated piping network and nozzle(s). The
Discharge Outlet Valve can be either welded or threaded to the Agent Storage Container (except for the 125i &
215i containers available with welded valves only).
Activation of the Discharge Outlet Valve is accomplished by one of two methods:
Standard operation of the valve is accomplished by a Gas Cartridge Actuator (GCA) that produces the
pressure wave (energy) necessary to open the valve. The GCA is an electrically operated device that is
activated by a signal from the control panel or the optional manual actuator device.
If the contents of the container are subjected to temperatures exceeding 120oF (48.9oC), the pressure
associated with the thermal expansion of the agent will be sufficient to open the valve automatically.
NOTE: The Discharge Valve also fulfills the pressure relief valve requirements in accordance with DOT / TC
regulations.
1.5.1
RUPTURE DISC
The Rupture Disc is the heart of the Fike ECARO-25 Discharge Outlet Valve. Each is manufactured to exacting
tolerances and standards by Fike to ensure their reliability and performance. The Rupture Disc is a pre-scored
metal membrane formed into a domed shape and scored with four pressure-relief lines across the domed surface
at right angles to each other. When the pressure in the container rises to the pre-determined level, the rupture
disc will open along the score lines thus allowing the contents to be released into the piping network. The four
segments of the rupture disc fold back during discharge to produce the minimum amount of flow restriction
possible.
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 5 of 25
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
1.5.2
CONTAINERS 1 (25 mm) VALVE
Containers are available in the following sizes (capacities): 20, 35, 60, and 100 lb. (8.5, 15, 27 and 44 L). Each of
these containers utilize a 1 NPT (25 mm) discharge outlet valve, consisting of a 1 (25 mm) rupture disc
assembly operated by a Gas Cartridge Actuator (GCA).
All containers are designed and fabricated in accordance with DOT 4BW500 requirements. Containers are also
available with dual markings that meet the requirement of both DOT and TC; the associated ratings for these
containers are 4BW500/4BWM500.
For ordering information, refer to Section 1.9 of this section.
Each container is supplied with a 1 NPT (25 mm) anti-recoil pipe plug (p/n: 80-1046) installed in the adapter nut
(outlet) of the discharge valve. The pipe plug supplied has a 1/8 (4 mm) through hole to allow the container
pressure to vent safely to atmosphere in the event that the discharge valve is activated prior to installation.
The 20, 35 and 60 lb. (8.5, 15 and 27 L) containers can be mounted in either the horizontal or upright (valve up)
positions.
The 100 lb. (44 L) container MUST be installed in the upright (valve up) position. Horizontal mounting of the 100
lb. (44 L) container is not allowed. Mounting Brackets are supplied with each container, and each must be
anchored to an appropriate load-bearing structure.
CONTAINER DATA TABLES

Container
Part Number
Container
Part Number
(w/ Welded Valve)
(w/ Threaded Valve)
20 lb.
(8.5 L)
70-098
35 lb.
(15 L)
Fill Range
lbs. (kg)
Mounting
Position
Valve
Size
Approx.
Tare Weight
70-098T
8.0 16.0
(3.5 7.5)
Upright - Horizontal
1 NPT
(25 mm)
21.0 lbs.
(9.5 kg)
70-089
70-089T
14.0 30.0
(6.5 13.5)
1 NPT
(25 mm)
31.0 lbs.
(14.1 kg)
60 lb.
(27 L)
70-152
70-152T
25.0 54.0
(11.5 24.5)
1 NPT
(25 mm)
43.0 lbs.
(19.5 kg)
100 lb.
(44 L)
70-153
70-153T
39.0 87.0
(18.0 39.0)
Upright (Valve Up)
1 NPT
(25 mm)
61.0 lbs.
(27.7 kg)
Container
Size
Page: 6 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
Dimension B
Container Size
Dimension A
Container w/ Welded Valve
Container w/ Threaded Valve
20 lb. (8.5 L)
7 (178 mm)
21-1/2 (546 mm)
23-1/2 (597 mm)
35 lb. (15 L)
7 (178 mm)
32-1/2 (826 mm)
35 (889 mm)
60 lb. (27 L)
10-3/4 (273 mm)
28 (711 mm)
29-1/4 (743 mm)
100 lb. (44 L)
10-3/4 (273 mm)
38-3/4 (984 mm)
40-3/4 (1035 mm)
NOTE: All dimensions shown are approximate
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 7 of 25
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
1.5.3
CONTAINERS 2 (65 mm) VALVE
Inverted spherical containers are available in the following sizes

(capacities): 125 and 215 lb. (51 and 90 L). Both of these
containers utilize 2-1/2 NPT (65 mm) discharge outlet valves,
consisting of 2-1/2 (65 mm) rupture discs operated by Gas
Cartridge Actuators.
All containers are designed and fabricated in accordance with
DOT requirements. The associated rating is 4BA500.
Containers are also available with dual markings that meet the
requirement of both DOT and TC; the associated ratings for
these containers are 4BA500/4BAM500.
Each container is supplied with a 2-1/2 (65 mm) anti-recoil
device (p/n: 70-1123) consisting of a steel baffle plate with a 3/8
dia. (10 mm) through hole. This allows the container pressure to
safely vent to atmosphere if the discharge valve is activated prior
to installation. The baffle plate is installed in the Grooved
Coupling attached to the discharge outlet valve.
The 125 and 215 lb. (51 and 90 L) Inverted Containers MUST be
installed in the valve down (inverted) position. Mounting Brackets
are supplied with each container, and each must be anchored to
an appropriate load-bearing structure.
Both containers are equipped with a Liquid Level Indicator Boss to install the optional Liquid Level Indicator. This
device must be installed prior to filling the container with agent.

Container
Size
Container
Part Number
Fill Range
(lbs.)
Mounting
Position
Valve
Size
Approx.
Tare Weight
125 lb.
(51 L)
70-041
46.0 101.0
(21.0 46.0)
Inverted
(Valve Down)
2-1/2 NPT
(65 mm)
141.0 lbs.
(64.0 kg)
215 lb.
(90 L)
70-077
80.0 178.0
(36.5 81.0)
Inverted
(Valve Down)
2-1/2 NPT
(65 mm)
200.0 lbs.
(90.7 kg)
Page: 8 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
A
Mounting Bracket
B
Liquid Level Boss
Outlet Valve
Container
Size
Dimension A
inch (mm)
Dimension B
inch (mm)
125 lb. (51 L)
20 (508 mm)
20-1/4 (515 mm)
215 lb. (90 L)
24 (610 mm)
23-3/4 (605 mm)

1.5.3.1 FLOOR MOUNTING KIT
An optional Floor Mounting Kit is available for the Inverted Containers that allows the container to be mounted on
the floor. Two kits, which must be ordered in addition to the normal mounting bracket, are available as follows:
P/N 70-1197 Floor Mounting Kit 125 lb. (51 L) Container
P/N 70-1198 Floor Mounting Kit 215 lb. (90 L) Container

Container
Size
Dim. A
inch (mm)
Dim. B
inch (mm)
125 lb. (51 L)
22-1/2 (572)
39-3/4 (1010)
215 lb. (90 L)
26-1/4 (667)
45-3/4 (1162)
Outlet Valve
B
Mounting Surface
1 (40mm) Pipe
Cut to 18 3/8 (46.67mm) Long
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 9 of 25
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
1.5.4
CONTAINERS 3 (80 mm) VALVES
3"Containers are available in the following sizes (capacities): 215, 375, 650 and
1000 lb. (87, 153, 267 and 423 L). Each of these containers utilize a 3 NPT (80
mm) discharge outlet valve, consisting of a 3 (80 mm) rupture disc assembly
operated by a Gas Cartridge Actuator (GCA).
All containers are designed and fabricated in accordance with DOT requirements.
The associated rating is 4BW500.
Containers are also available with dual markings that meet the requirement of both
DOT and TC; the associated rating for these containers is 4BW500/4BWM500.
Each container is supplied with a 3 (80 mm) anti-recoil device (p/n: 70-1294)
consisting of a steel baffle plate with a 1/2 dia. (13 mm) through hole. This allows
the container pressure to safely vent to atmosphere if the discharge valve is
activated prior to installation. The baffle plate is installed in the Grooved Coupling
attached to the discharge outlet valve.
All 3 Valve Containers MUST be installed in the upright (valve up) position on the
floor. A mounting strap is supplied with each container, and must be anchored to an
appropriate load-bearing structure.
All 3 Valve Containers are equipped with a Liquid Level Indicator Boss to install the
optional Liquid Level Indicator. This device must be installed prior to filling the
container with agent.

Container
Part Number
Container
Part Number
(w/ Welded Valve)
(w/ Threaded Valve)
215 lb.
(87 L)
70-154
375 lb.
(153 L)
Container
Size
Fill Range
lbs. (kg)
Mounting
Position
Valve
Size
Approx.
Tare Weight
70-154T
78.0 173.0
(35.5 78.5)
Upright (Valve Up)
3 NPT
(80 mm)
155.0 lbs.
(70.3 kg)
70-155
70-155T
136.0 302.0
(61.5 137.0)
Upright (Valve Up)
3 NPT
(80 mm)
225.0 lbs.
(102.1 kg)
650 lb.
(267 L)
70-156
70-156T
236.0 528.0
(107.0 239.5)
Upright (Valve Up)
3 NPT
(80 mm)
380.0 lbs.
(172.4 kg)
1000 lb.
(423 L)
70-157
70-157T
374.0 836.0
(169.5 379.5)
Upright (Valve Up)
3 NPT
(80 mm)
540.0 lbs
(244.9 kg)
Page: 10 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
Container
Size
Dim. A
inch (mm)
Dim. B
inch (mm)
Container w/
Welded Valve
Container w/
Threaded Valve
215 lb. (87 L)
20 (508)
28-7/8 (733)
29-1/4 (743)
375 lb. (153 L)
20 (508)
42-1/2 (1080)
42-1/2 (1080)
650 lb. (267 L)
24 (610)
48-3/4 (1238)
49 (1245)
1000 lb. (423 L)
24 (610)
70 (1778)
71 (1803)
Liquid Level Boss
B
A
1.5.4.1 MOUNTING STRAPS
Mounting Straps are used to secure containers to a wall or other suitable mounting surface. These devices are
supplied with each container purchased in accordance with the information shown below.
Part No.
Dimension A
Dimension B
Used On
Qty.
70-1310
21-3/4 (552 mm)
19-7/8 (505 mm)
70-154 & 70-155
70-1384-W
26 (660 mm)
23-7/8 (606 mm)
70-156 &70-157
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 11 of 25
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
1.6
ITEMS FURNISHED WITH CONTAINERS
All Fike Containers are furnished with the following items:

1.6.1
NAMEPLATE
All Fike Containers are provided with a nameplate that provides the following information that is specific to each
container:
Assembly and serial numbers of the container
Weight Information: tare, gross and agent
Installation, operation and safety information
All containers filled at the factory, or at an approved Initial Fill Station, will be
provided with a nameplate bearing the UL / ULC and FM markings.
1.6.2
SIPHON TUBE
Siphon Tubes are provided in all containers that are suitable for mounting in the horizontal and upright (valve up)
positions. The purpose of the siphon tube is to ensure the complete dispersal of suppression agent from the
container to the protected space(s).
125i and 215i Inverted Containers (P/N 70-041 and 70-077) do not have siphon tubes.
WARNING: DO NOT install containers with siphon tubes in the inverted (valve down) position. This will result in a
system failure due to the majority of the suppression agent
remaining in the container after activation.
1.6.3
VICTAULIC COUPLING & NIPPLE
Fike Containers equipped with 2-1/2 (65 mm) and 3 (80 mm) discharge
outlet valves are supplied with a Grooved Coupling and a short (grooved
x threaded) nipple to facilitate connection of the container to the
discharge piping. For shipping purposes, a baffle plate is inserted into
the Grooved Coupling as a safety device (see container section). The
baffle plate MUST be removed prior to connection to the discharge
piping.
Coupling P/N
Nipple P/N
Nipple Length
2-1/2 (65 mm) Valve
02-1376
02-1388
3 (76 mm)
3 (80 mm) Valve
02-1987
02-2106
4-1/2 (114 mm)
1.6.4
PRESSURE GAUGE
All Fike Containers are provided with a Pressure Gauge (P/N 02-10279) to indicate the internal container
pressure. The Pressure Gauge scale is calibrated to show the actual pressure, as well as a color-coded
acceptable operating range, under-pressure range, and over-pressure range.
Page: 12 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
1.6.5
PRESSURE GAUGE ADAPTER
All Fike Containers are provided with a Pressure Gauge Adapter (P/N 70-1574)
installed in the 1/8 NPT (4 mm) pressure gauge port of the container. This
device allows the pressure gauge to be replaced without having to remove the
agent first. The Pressure Gauge Adapter works by allowing a small, controlled
amount of leakage past its internal threads. This provides enough flow to
operate the pressure gauge while being small enough to allow an operator to
change the devices on the downstream side safely.
CAUTION: When replacing a gauge on a pressurized container, DO NOT allow
the pressure port to remain open (disconnected) for an extended
period of time. A significant quantity of agent could be lost from the
container.
1" REF.
(25 mm)
1/8" NPT
5/8" REF.
(16 mm)
3/4" REF.
(19 mm)
#8 32-3A
SETSCREW
BODY 3/4"ROUND BAR
w/ 16 MM FLATS
1.6.6
1/8" NPT
AGENT FILL VALVE
All containers are provided with an Agent Fill Valve used to fill (refill) and pressurize
the container. The Fill Valve is a brass Schraeder type that consists of the following
components.
Valve Body (P/N 02-2406)
Cap (P/N 02-2407)
Valve Core (P/N 02-4161)
Refer to Fike Recharge/Fill Manual (P/N 06-290) for additional information regarding filling and/or nitrogen
pressurization procedures.
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 13 of 25
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
1.6.7
AGENT RELEASE MODULE (ARM)
Fike Containers MUST utilize an Agent Release Module (P/N 10-1832) to

supervise the circuit wiring from the container to the control panel. The ARM also
stores the electrical energy needed to actuate the GCA and open the discharge
outlet valve. Agent Release Modules are wired in parallel in either a two-wire
(Class B), or four-wire (Class A) arrangement with a separate return loop. The
ARM provides the means necessary to fully supervise the agent release circuit for
open and ground fault conditions.
YEL
GRN
RED
BLUE
GCA CARTRIDGE
END OF LINE RESISTOR

OR TO NEXT AGENT
RELEASE MODULE (ARM)
RED BLUE YELGRN

SQUIB/GCA
+ -
- +
TS1
TO CONTROL
PANEL
CAPACITOR
Fike ARM III

AGENT RELEASE MODULE
P/N 10-1832
1.6.8
MOUNTING HARDWARE FOR GCA & ARM
Fike supplies the typical electrical/mounting hardware that can be used for the installation of the GCA and ARM to
the Fike discharge valves. For applications requiring longer flex loop connections, rigid pipe connections, etc., the
hardware must be supplied by the installing contractor. For installations with 1 (25 mm) and 3 (80 mm) Valves,
the following components are supplied:
1 x 1/2 (25 mm x 15 mm) Reducing Conduit Bushing
1 (25 mm) Lock Nut
1 (25 mm) Conduit Coupling
1 NPT (25 mm) Chase Nipple
4-11/16 (120 mm) Square J-Box w/ 1 NPT (25 mm) knockouts & cover
For installations using 2-1/2 (65 mm) Valves, the following components are
supplied:
1 x 1/2 (25 mm x 15 mm) Reducing Conduit Bushing
1 (25 mm) Lock Nut (qty. of 3)
1 (25 mm) Conduit Coupling
3-1/2 lg. (89 mm) x 1 NPT (25 mm) Pipe Nipple
4-11/16 (120 mm) Square J-Box w/ 1 NPT (25 mm) knockouts &
cover
The following part numbers can be used to purchase the components listed above for retrofit application:
GCA Junction Box Assembly for 1 3 (25 80 mm) Valves (P/N 70-1697)
GCA Junction Box Assembly for 2-1/2 (65mm) Valve (P/N 70-1698)
Page: 14 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
1.7
GAS CARTRIDGE ACTUATOR (GCA)
The Gas Cartridge Actuator (P/N 70-1651) is an electrically

activated, pressure-producing device used to open the discharge
outlet valve on a Fike container. An electrical charge is sent
through the device upon activation from the control panel: this
overheats the internal bridge wire and ignites the smokeless
powder inside the GCA. The resultant burn-off (approximately 10
milliseconds) generates a pressure wave sufficient to burst the
rupture disc, thus releasing the agent from the container. The GCA has a stainless steel body with dual thread
sizes that enable the device to be installed in any of the container valve sizes. The GCA has a Mylar seal in the
discharge end, and an epoxy plug on the wire end to create a sealed unit with a de-rated shelf life of 10 years.
The GCA will not detonate explosives and it is not considered to be a mass detonating device. Therefore, the
GCA has a DOT classification of 1.4, sub-class S, and a shipping number of UN-0323. GCAs can be
transported by any commercial carrier and do not require special handling permits or licensing.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
WARNING:
NOTE:
The GCA is NOT furnished with the standard container assembly and MUST be ordered
separately.
Both sets of electrical leads (red-to-blue and yellow-to-green) MUST be shunted together when
the GCA is not installed within the discharge outlet valve, and when testing/troubleshooting the
detection and control system. Failure to do so can result in bodily injury or unwanted system
activation.
The yellow and green leads are provided for Manual Actuator (P/N 10-2225) connections only. Refer
to the Installation Section of this manual for the wiring diagrams associated with these devices.
3.5"
40" REF.
(89 mm)
(1016 mm)
SHUNT
AGENT RELEASE MODULE

RED/BLUE
#22 AWG SOLID COPPER

PVC INSULATED WIRE
(4 WIRES)
MANUAL ACTUATOR
YELLOW/GREEN
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SST BODY
1.5"
(38 mm)
3/4" HEX
(19 mm)
EPOXY PLUG
7/16-20 UNF-2A THREAD

FOR 3" (80 mm) VALVES

3/8-24 UNF-2A THREAD

FOR 1" (25 mm) &
2-1/2" (65 mm) VALVES
Page: 15 of 25
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
1.8
CONTAINER ACCESSORIES
The following components are optional devices that do not come with the standard
container assembly and must be ordered separately.
1.8.1
LIQUID LEVEL INDICATOR (LLi)
The Liquid Level Indicator provides a means of verifying the weight of agent in a
container without having to remove the container and weigh it on a calibrated scale.
The device enables the inspector to determine the weight of agent with the container
safely secured in its installed position. Liquid Level Indicators are available for 100,
125, 215, 375, 650 and 1000 lb. (44, 51, 90, 87, 153, 267 and 423 L) Containers. Refer
to the Liquid Level Indicator Manual (P/N 06-107) for additional information concerning
its installation and use.
WARNING:
The Liquid Level Indicator (LLi) MUST be installed while the

Container is EMPTY.
Container
Size
lb. (L)
Liquid Level Indicator (LLi)

Part Number
Part Number
Container with Welded Valve

100 (44)
70-153
70-1353-27
125 (51)
70-041
70-1353-11
215i (90)
70-077
70-1353-15
215 (88)
70-154
70-1353-18
375 (153)
70-155
70-1353-28
650 (267)
70-156
70-1353-38
1000 (423)
70-157
70-1353-49
Container with Threaded Valve

215 (88)
70-154T
70-1353-18
375 (153)
70-155T
70-1353-27
650 (267)
70-156T
70-1353-38
1000 (423)
70-157T
70-1353-49
Page: 16 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
1.8.2
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH
Fike offers an optional Low Pressure Switch for the purpose of

continuously monitoring the container pressure for a low-pressure
condition. If the pressure inside the container drops below 288
psig (1965 kPa), the switch contacts will transfer and invoke a
trouble indication on the control panel. The Low Pressure
Switch (P/N 02-9830) has a single pole, double-throw switch that
can be wired for normally open or normally closed shelf states.
Specifications:
Temperature Limits:
32 to 120oF (0 to 48.9oC)
Enclosure Classification:
NEMA 4
Contact Rating:
Single pole, double throw; 5 amps resistive, 3 amps inductive @ 30VDC
Body Material:
Aluminum with irridite finish
Weight:
6.5 ounces
Pressure Connection:
1/8 NPT (6 mm)
Electrical Connection:
1/2 NPT (15 mm)
Pressure Setting:
288 psig (20 bar)(decreasing)
1.8.3
RELOAD KITS
After a system discharge, each container valve will need to be reconditioned using the appropriate reload kit
before the container can be recharged.
3 RELOAD KIT
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
2 RELOAD KIT

1 RELOAD KIT
Page: 17 of 25
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
1.8.3.1 RELOAD KIT 1 VALVE

1 Reload Kit (P/N 85-044-1) is used on the following container sizes: 20, 35, 60, and 100 lb. (8.5, 15, 27 and 44
L). Reload Kit consist of the following items:
RELOAD KIT 1 VALVE
ITEM
NO.
PART NO.
80-1046
Baffle Plug
See Note 1
80-1034
Adaptor Nut
See Note 1
70-1049
Rupture Disc
See Note 2
02-1223
O-Ring
See Note 2
70-1559
Teflon Washer
See Note 2
70-1054
Actuator Housing Assembly
See Note 2
70-1044
Retainer Nut
See Note 1
02-10279
Pressure Gauge
See Note 2
02-4134
Gas Cartridge Actuator (GCA)
See Note 2 (Item not shown)
10
02-4161
Valve Core
NOTES:
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
1. Item furnished with container, not part of 1 Reload Kit, shown for illustration purposes only.
2. Item furnished as part of 1 Reload Kit
3
4
SEATING SURFACES
5
VALVE
BODY
8
Page: 18 of 25
ACTUATOR BOSS

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
1.8.3.2 RELOAD KIT 2 1/2 VALVE

2 1/2 Reload Kit (P/N 85-045-1) is used on the following container sizes: 125i and 215i lb. (51 and 90 L). Reload
Kit consist of the following items:
RELOAD KIT 2 1/2 VALVE
ITEM
NO.
PART NO.
70-1123
Baffle Plate
See Note 1
02-1376
Victaulic Coupling (Style No. 77)
See Note 1
70-1094
Holddown Nut
See Note 1
70-1104
Holddown Ring
See Note 1
D1383-1
Rupture Disc
See Note 2
02-1375
O-Ring
See Note 2
70-1059
Teflon Washer
See Note 2
70-1054
Actuator Housing Assembly
See Note 2
70-1044
Retainer Nut
See Note 1
10
02-10279
Pressure Gauge
See Note 2
11
02-4134
12
02-4161
Valve Core
NOTES:
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
1. Item furnished with container, not part of 2 1/2 Reload Kit, shown for illustration purposes only.
2. Item furnished as part of 2 1/2 Reload Kit.
1
2
3
4
SEATING SURFACES
5
7
6
VALVE
BODY
8
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
ACTUATOR BOSS

Page: 19 of 25
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
1.8.3.3 RELOAD KIT 3 VALVE

3 Reload Kit (P/N 85-046-1) is used on the following container sizes: 215, 375, 650, and 1000 lb. (87, 153, 267
and 423 L). Reload Kit consist of the following items:
RELOAD KIT 3 VALVE
ITEM
NO.
PART NO.
70-1294
Baffle Plate
See Note 1
02-1987
Victaulic Coupling (Style No. 77)
See Note 1
70-1393
Holddown Nut
See Note 1
70-1331
Holddown Ring
See Note 1
70-1661
Rupture Disc
See Note 2
02-2114
O-Ring
See Note 2
n/a
Siphon Tube Assembly
See Note 1
02-10279
Pressure Gauge
02-4134
10
02-4161
Valve Core
NOTES:
DESCRIPTION
NOTE
1. Item furnished with container, not part of 3 Reload Kit, shown for illustration purposes only.
2. Item furnished as part of 3 Reload Kit.
2
3
4
5
6
SEATING
SURFACES
VALVE
BODY
Page: 20 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
1.9
CONTAINER ORDERING FORMAT
In addition to the basic container part number that identifies the capacity and type of container, there are a series
of options that must be defined when placing an order for a Fike Clean Agent Container.
70 X X X* X X X X X X X X 06
A
B
CDEF
G
A=
Basic container part number (i.e. 70-155, 70-041, 70-155 etc.)

Placing a T after the basic container number indicates the container will be supplied with the discharge valve
outlet threaded to the container. Without T indicates the container will be supplied with the discharge valve
outlet welded to the container.
EXAMPLES:
70-155 is basic container part number for a 375 lb. container fabricated to meet DOT requirements and
the container is stamped with the DOT number.
NOTES:
1) If container being ordered needs to meet Transport Canada (TC) requirements and be dual stamped with
appropriate DOT and TC numbers, this requirement must be indicated on your purchase order.
2) Containers are available in the following colors:
White
CO2 Red
This option needs to be indicated on your purchase order.
B=
Agent quantity in lbs. (container must be filled in 1 lb. increments)

Agent quantity in kg (container must be filled in 0.5 kg increments)
For Field Initial Fill, enter <0000>
C=
0 Field Initial Fill, container is pressurized to 120 psig with dry nitrogen @ 70oF (8.3 bar @ 21oC)
1 Factory Fill, container is pressurized to 360 psig with dry nitrogen @ 70oF (24.8 bar @ 21oC)
D=
0 Pressure Gauge and Liquid Level Indicator (LLi) required

1 Pressure Gauge Only
2 Pressure Gauge, Liquid Level Indicator and Low Pressure Switch
3 Pressure Gauge and Low Pressure Switch
NOTE:
E=
NOTE:
LLi is standard on containers with threaded valves (215, 375, 650 & 1000 lb.) LLi is not available on
the 100 lb. container with threaded valve.
3 Agent Release Module required for control panel
0 No ARM, When ordering a replacement container
An Agent Release Module is required for each container. Always indicate <3> unless ordering a
replacement cylinder.
F=
0 No Mounting Bracket required

1 Standard Mounting Bracket required
G=
6 HFC-125
English Units Example: Part Number 70-157-590-1031-06 indicates the following: the customer wants a 70157, 1000 lb. Container Assembly, factory-filled with 590 lbs. of HFC-125, pressurized to 360 psig @ 70oF, with a
pressure gauge and liquid level indicator installed, an agent release module, and a standard mounting bracket.
Metric Units Example: Part Number 70-157-226.5-1031-06 indicates the following: the customer wants a 70157, 423 kg Container Assembly, factory-filled with 226.5 kg of HFC-125, pressurized to 24.8 bar @ 21oC, with a
pressure gauge and liquid level indicator installed, an agent release module, and a standard mounting bracket.
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 21 of 25
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
DISCHARGE NOZZLES ENGINEERED (180o & 360o)
1.10
The Discharge Nozzle is the device that controls the agent flow and distributes the agent throughout the protected
area. Fike nozzles are available in 180o and 360o dispersal patterns. Fike Discharge Nozzles are machined from
aluminum and anodized with a dull gray finish to prevent corrosion. Nozzle orifice hole diameters are determined
by the Fike Engineered Flow Calculation Program.
360o Engineered Nozzles (6 Orifices)
Part Number
Nozzle
Size
(in.-mm)
Orifice Area (in2)

Minimum
Maximum
180o Engineered Nozzles (7 Orifices)

Nozzle
Size
(in.-mm)
Part Number
Orifice Area (in2)

Minimum
Maximum
80-036-XXXX
3/8 (10)
0.0212
0.1527
80-044-XXXX
3/8 (10)
0.0222
0.1580
80-037-XXXX
1/2 (15)
0.0309
0.2450
80-045-XXXX
1/2 (15)
0.0318
0.2494
80-038-XXXX
3/4 (20)
0.0634
0.4298
80-046-XXXX
3/4 (20)
0.0665
0.4218
80-039-XXXX
1 (25)
0.1089
0.7021
80-047-XXXX
1 (25)
0.1087
0.6658
80-040-XXXX
1 1/4 (32)
0.1866
1.1781
80-048-XXXX
1 1/4 (32)
0.1882
1.2083
80-041-XXXX
1 1/2 (40)
0.2669
1.6616
80-049-XXXX
1 1/2 (40)
0.2685
1.5513
80-042-XXXX
2 (50)
0.4298
2.6507
80-050-XXXX
2 (50)
0.4218
2.7178
Nozzle Size (NPT-mm)
A
(in.-mm)
B
(in.-mm)
C
(in.-mm)
3/8 (10)
1.25 (32)
1.56 (40)
0.87 (22)
1/2 (15)
1.25 (32)
1.88 (48)
1.00 (25)
3/4 (20)
1.75 (44)
2.19 (56)
1.22 (31)
1 (25)
1.75 (44)
2.50 (64)
1.44 (37)
1-1/4 (32)
2.75 (70)
3.13 (79)
1.80 (47)
1 1/2 (40)
2.75 (70)
3.38 (86)
2.02 (51)
2 (50)
2.75 (70)
3.75 (95)
2.50 (64)
1.10.1 NOZZLE ORDERING FORMAT

80 XXX XXXX
A
B
Orifice hole diameter MUST be specified in addition to the basic part

number for the nozzle needed.
A=
Basic nozzle part number (e.g., 80-038 etc.)
B=
Orifice hole diameter (obtained from Engineered Flow Calculation Program)
Page: 22 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
1.11
CHECK VALVES
Check Valves are required for all containers connected in a manifold arrangement. NFPA 2001 requires all
containers connected to a manifold have an automatic, mechanical, means of preventing agent loss from an open
leg of a manifold if the system is activated while a container is removed for maintenance. Therefore, the Check
Valves are required for each container in a manifold arrangement.
1 NPT (25 mm) Check Valves (P/N 02-2980) are used for manifold arrangements, including connected
main-to-reserve systems, that utilize Small Capacity Containers with the 1 (25 mm) Discharge Outlet
Valve.
main-to-reserve systems, that utilize Inverted Containers with the 2-1/2 (65 mm) Discharge Outlet Valve.
main-to-reserve systems, that utilize Large Capacity Containers with the 3 (80 mm) Discharge Outlet
Valve.
Check Valve Data
Dimensions
Height
Length
Approximate
Weight
Part No.
Description
Equivalent
Length
02-2980
1 (25 mm) Check Valve
2 ft. (0.61 m)
3-3/4 (95 mm)

(maximum)
4-1/4 (108 mm)
9 lbs. (4.1 kg)
02-4158
4 ft. (1.22 m)
4-1/2 (114 mm)

(maximum)
6 (152 mm)
12 lbs. (5.4 kg)
4 ft. (1.22 m)
6 (152 mm)
8 (203 mm)
31 lbs. (14.1 kg)
02-4157
Height
Flow Direction
Length
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 23 of 25
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
1.12
CAUTION / ADVISORY SIGNS
Caution / Advisory Signs are provided to comply with NFPA 2001 requirements,
and to provide the necessary information to personnel in the area.
1.12.1 NOTICE SYSTEM ALARM SIGN (P/N 02-10309)
This sign is provided to alert personnel that the room is protected with an
ECARO-25 system and to evacuate the area when the alarms sound.
The sign measures 9 x 6 x 1/16 (229 mm x 152 mm x 1.6 mm).
The sign should be placed adjacent to each audible/visual device used to notify
personnel of the status of the ECARO-25 system.
1.12.2 ABORT SIGN (P/N 02-10310)
This sign is provided to identify each system abort station associated with the
ECARO-25 system. This reduces the risk of an abort station being mistaken for a
manual release or fire alarm pull station. This sign measures 4 x 2 1/4 x 1/16
(102 mm x 57 mm x 1.6 mm). The System Abort Station Sign should be placed at
each abort station location for positive identification.
HFC-125
EXTINGUISHING
SYSTEM ABORT
PUSH AND HOLD
Fike<
02-10310-N/C
1.12.3 MAIN/RESERVE SIGN (P/N 02-10311)

This sign is provided to identify each system main/reserve station associated with
the ECARO-25 system. This sign clearly identifies the purpose of the switch. This
sign measures 4 x 2 1/4 x 1/16 (102 mm x 57 mm x 1.6 mm). The System
Main/Reserve Sign should be placed at each main/reserve station location for
positive identification.
HFC-125
EXTINGUISHING
SYSTEM
MAIN / RESERVE
Fike<
02-10311-N/C
1.12.4 RELEASE SIGN (P/N 02-10312)

This sign is provided to identify each system release station associated with the
ECARO-25 system. This reduces the risk of a manual discharge station being
mistaken for a fire alarm pull station. This sign measures 4 x 2 1/4 x 1/16
(102 mm x 57 mm x 1.6 mm). The System Release Sign should be placed at each
manual release station location for positive identification
HFC-125
EXTINGUISHING
SYSTEM RELEASE
Fike<
02-10312-N/C
1.12.5 NOTICE SYSTEM DISCHARGE SIGN (P/N 02-10313)

ECARO-25 system and that they should not enter the area when the alarm
sounds. This sign measures 9 x 6 x 1/16 (229 mm x 152 mm x 1.6 mm).
The sign should be placed adjacent to each audible/visual device (typically
located outside the area) used to notify personnel that the ECARO-25 system has
discharged.
1.12.6 CAUTION AREA PROTECTED BY HFC-125 SIGN (P/N 02-10314)
ECARO-25 system and that they should not enter the area during or after
discharge. The sign also indicates the requirement that all doors serving the
protected area must be kept closed at all times.
This sign measures 13 x 10 x 1/16 (330 mm x 254 mm x 1.6 mm). The sign
should be placed on all doors serving the protected area.
Page: 24 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 1 EQUIPMENT
1.13
CONTROL SYSTEM & ACCESSORIES
Fike offers several options to allow the user to interface with the Detection & Control system as needed to suit
their specific needs. The following control systems and accessories are considered to be specific to ECARO-25
systems, and will be required in various configurations. This is not intended to be a complete reference for the
Detection & Control System that will be required. The devices not shown here include detectors (heat & smoke),
audio/visual devices, I/O devices, power supplies, etc. Refer to the appropriate Detection & Control Manual for
the system and/or device in question for additional information.
1.13.1 CONTROL PANELS
The control panel utilized with a Fike Fire Suppression System
MUST be a UL Listed releasing device for GCA and/or initiatoroperated discharge valves. Fike offers several control panel
options, each having both automatic and manual actuation
capabilities, and each supplied with battery back-up capabilities.
The following Fike Detection & Control Panels are UL listed and
FM approved for use with Fike ECARO-25 Systems:
SHP Pro
Cheetah Xi
Cheetah Xi50
1.13.2 MANUAL ACTUATOR

The Fike Manually Operated Actuator (P/N 10-2225) provides an independent
means of operating a Fike ECARO-25 System that utilizes GCAs. The unit
consists of a manually-operated DC generator and a supervisory module. This
device will activate the ECARO-25 system without the need for external power
or stored energy, thereby providing a fail-safe method of activation. To operate
the Manual Actuator, simply pull the break-seal and push the handle up a
quarter turn. This action generates the power necessary to activate the GCA.
The Manual Actuator can be used as a stand-alone device, or in conjunction
with a detection & control system as a back-up operator. Each unit is capable of
activating up to six GCAs each, and the wiring is supervised when the unit is
hooked-up to a suitable control panel. The Manual Actuator is housed in a 11 x
7 x 6 (279 mm x 178 mm x 152 mm) enclosure that should be mounted as
close to the ECARO-25 containers as possible. Refer to Fike Manual 06-152 for
additional design, installation, and maintenance information for this device.
NOTE: This device is not FM approved.
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 25 of 25
SECTION 2 DESIGN
This section of the manual will detail the steps necessary to design a Fike ECARO-25 System within the
limitations established by our UL / ULC listing and FM approval. The first part of this chapter will guide the user
through the process of analyzing the requirements of the hazard(s) to be protected and determining the amount of
agent needed. The balance of the chapter will then address the specific hardware and system design
requirements to install an ECARO-25 system.
2.1
DETERMINE HAZARD TYPE
The Hazard Type generally falls into one of the three following categories, and sometimes a combination thereof.
The designer must be aware of the Hazard Type to determine the correct design concentration, agent quantity,
etc. The two Hazard Types are:
Class A (wood, paper, cloth anything that leaves an ash residue after combustion)
Class C (electrical)
ECARO-25 system can be used to project Class B (flammable liquids) hazards. Consult the Fike Product Support
group with your specific questions regarding system design
2.2
DETERMINE CONCENTRATION PERCENTAGE
The following is a guideline to be used in determining the proper agent concentration percentage for the hazard(s)
being protected.
2.2.1
AUTOMATICALLY ACTIVATED CLASS A OR C HAZARDS
Systems that incorporate the use of a Detection & Control System for the purpose of automatically discharging
the ECARO-25 into the protected space can be designed for an 8% concentration.
2.2.2
MANUALLY ACTIVATED CLASS A OR C HAZARDS
Systems that DO NOT incorporate the use of a Detection & Control System for the purpose of automatically
discharging the ECARO-25 into the protected space MUST be designed for an 8.7% concentration. This is due
to the slower activation times that could be expected from a manually activated system and the potential for a
larger fire size to be extinguished.
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 1 of 27
SECTION 2 DESIGN
2.3
SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONS
The designer must be aware of the occupancy of the hazard(s) being protected as they complete their evaluation
of the project and make adjustments or recommendations as necessary.
2.3.1 NORMALLY OCCUPIED SPACES
Protected spaces that are considered to be Normally Occupied (e.g. computer room, clean room, etc.) can be
designed for concentrations shown in Table 2.3.1 that correspond to a maximum permitted human exposure time
of 5 minutes.
HFC-125
Concentration
% v/v
Human Exposure
Time (minutes)
8.0%
5.00
8.5%
5.00
9.0%
5.00
9.5%
5.00
10.0%
5.00
10.5%
5.00
11.0%
5.00
11.5%
5.00
12.0%
1.67
12.5%
0.59
13.0%
0.54
13.5%
0.49
TABLE 2.3.1
2.3.2
NOT NORMALLY OCCUPIED SPACES
Protected spaces that are considered to be Not Normally Occupied (e.g. flammable liquids storage room) can be
designed for concentrations above the LOAEL concentration. Where personnel could possibly become exposed,
measures shall be taken to limit exposure to the times shown in Table 2.3.1.
NOTE:
Fike does not recommend ECARO-25 systems to be used in any normally occupied spaces where
the design concentration required is above 11.5%.
Page: 2 of 27

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 2 DESIGN
2.4 DETERMINE AGENT QUANTITY
The following steps are necessary to determine the amount of HFC-125 needed to protect the hazard(s).
2.4.1
DETERMINE THE HAZARD VOLUME
The first step in designing the ECARO-25 system is to determine the volume of the space(s) being protected.
The volume is calculated by multiplying the length x width x height of the space. Sometimes it is necessary to
divide the protected space into smaller segments due to the configuration of the space. Each smaller segment is
then added together to determine the total volume.
As a general rule, the volume used to calculate the quantity of ECARO-25 required should be based on the empty
(gross) volume. Additional considerations include:
The volume taken by solid, non-permeable, and non-removable objects can be deducted from the
protected volume
Any volume that is open to the space being protected must be added (i.e. non-dampered ductwork,
uncloseable openings, etc.)
NOTE: Any object that can be removed from the protected space CANNOT be deducted from the volume.
2.4.2
CALCULATE AGENT REQUIRED
The next step in designing the ECARO-25 system is to determine the base quantity of agent required to provide
the desired concentration within the hazard(s) being protected. This calculation must be based upon two
important criteria: the lowest expected ambient temperature and the design concentration required to protect this
type of hazard.
To determine the agent quantity needed to produce the design concentration level, the Hazard Volume is
multiplied by the factors as determined in the formula below.
W=
Where:
V
----S
C
---------100 - C
W=
Agent Weight in lbs. (kg)
V=
Hazard Volume / ft3 (m3)
C=
Design Concentration, % by volume
S=
Specific Vapor in ft3/lb (m3/kg)

S = k1 + k2 (t)
Where:
k1 = 2.7500, k2 = 0.0064(t), t = temperature (oF)

or k1 = 0.1825, k2 = 0.0007(t), t = temperature (oC)
NOTE:
The equation to calculate S is an approximation.
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 3 of 27
SECTION 2 DESIGN
As an alternative, the following tables have been compiled to make it an easier process for the system designer.
The information provided is derived from the formulas shown above
Temp.
T
(oF)c
Specific
Vapor
Volume
s
(ft3/lb)d
Weight Requirements of Hazard Volume, W/V (lb/ft3)b

(English Units)
FE-25 Design Concentration (% by Volume)e
8
8.7
10
11
12
13
10
2.7855
0.0312
0.0342
0.0355
0.0399
0.0444
0.0490
0.0536
20
2.8506
0.0305
0.0334
0.0347
0.0390
0.0434
0.0478
0.0524
30
2.9146
0.0298
0.0327
0.0339
0.0381
0.0424
0.0468
0.0513
40
2.9789
0.0292
0.0320
0.0332
0.0373
0.0415
0.0458
0.0502
50
3.0432
0.0286
0.0313
0.0325
0.0365
0.0406
0.0448
0.0491
60
3.1075
0.0280
0.0307
0.0318
0.0358
0.0398
0.0439
0.0481
70
3.1706
0.0274
0.0301
0.0312
0.0350
0.0390
0.0430
0.0471
80
3.2342
0.0269
0.0295
0.0306
0.0344
0.0382
0.0422
0.0462
90
3.2971
0.0264
0.0289
0.0300
0.0337
0.0375
0.0414
0.0453
100
3.3602
0.0259
0.0284
0.0294
0.0331
0.0368
0.0406
0.0445
110
3.4223
0.0254
0.0279
0.0289
0.0325
0.0361
0.0398
0.0437
120
3.4855
0.0249
0.0274
0.0284
0.0319
0.0355
0.0391
0.0429
130
3.5486
0.0245
0.0269
0.0279
0.0313
0.0348
0.0384
0.0421
140
3.6101
0.0241
0.0264
0.0274
0.0308
0.0342
0.0378
0.0414
150
3.6724
0.0237
0.0259
0.0269
0.0303
0.0337
0.0371
0.0407
160
3.7341
0.0233
0.0255
0.0265
0.0298
0.0331
0.0365
0.0400
170
3.7965
0.0229
0.0251
0.0261
0.0293
0.0326
0.0359
0.0394
180
3.8595
0.0225
0.0247
0.0256
0.0288
0.0320
0.0353
0.0387
190
3.9200
0.0222
0.0243
0.0252
0.0283
0.0315
0.0348
0.0381
200
3.9825
0.0218
0.0239
0.0248
0.0279
0.0310
0.0342
0.0375
a
b
c
d
The manufacturers listing specifies the temperature range for operation.

W/V [agent weight requirements (lb/ft3)] = pounds of agent required per ft3 of protected volume needed to
produce the indicated concentration at the temperature specified.
t [temperature (oF)] = the design temperature in the hazard area.
s [specific volume (ft3/lb)] = specific volume of superheated HFC-125 vapor as approximated by the
formula: s = 2.7200 + 0.0064(t)
Page: 4 of 27

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 2 DESIGN
Weight Requirements of Hazard Volume, W/V (kg/m3)b

(Metric Units)
Specific
Vapor
Volume
s
3
d
(m /kg)
8.7
10
11
12
13
-10
0.1755
0.4955
0.5430
0.5635
0.6331
0.7042
0.7770
0.8514
-5
0.1791
0.4855
0.5321
0.5522
0.6204
0.6901
0.7614
0.8343
0.1828
0.4757
0.5213
0.5410
0.6078
0.6761
0.7460
0.8174
0.1864
0.4665
0.5112
0.5306
0.5961
0.6631
0.7316
0.8216
10
0.1900
0.4577
0.5015
0.5205
0.5848
0.6505
0.7177
0.7864
15
0.1935
0.4494
0.4925
0.5111
0.5742
0.6387
0.7047
0.7722
20
0.1971
0.4412
0.4835
0.5018
0.5637
0.6271
0.6919
0.7581
25
0.2007
0.4333
0.4748
0.4928
0.5536
0.6158
0.6794
0.7445
30
0.2042
0.4258
0.4667
0.4843
0.5441
0.6053
0.6678
0.7318
35
0.2078
0.4185
0.4586
0.4759
0.5347
0.5948
0.6562
0.7191
40
0.2113
0.4115
0.4510
0.4681
0.5258
0.5849
0.6454
0.7072
45
0.2149
0.4046
0.4434
0.4602
0.5170
0.5751
0.6345
0.6953
50
0.2184
0.3982
0.4363
0.4528
0.5088
0.5659
0.6244
0.6842
55
0.2219
0.3919
0.4294
0.4457
0.5007
0.5570
0.6145
0.6734
60
0.2254
0.3858
0.4228
0.4388
0.4930
0.5483
0.6050
0.6629
65
0.2289
0.3799
0.4163
0.4321
0.4854
0.5400
0.5957
0.6528
70
0.2324
0.3742
0.4100
0.4256
0.4781
0.5318
0.5868
0.6430
75
0.2358
0.3688
0.4041
0.4194
0.4712
0.5242
0.5783
0.6337
80
0.2393
0.3634
0.3982
0.4133
0.4643
0.5165
0.5698
0.6244
85
0.2428
0.3581
0.3925
0.4073
0.4576
0.5090
0.5616
0.6154
90
0.2463
0.3531
0.3869
0.4015
0.4511
0.5018
0.5536
0.6067
Temp.
T
(oC)c
a
b
c
d
FE-25 Design Concentration (% by Volume)e
The manufacturers listing specifies the temperature range for operation.

W/V [agent weight requirements (kg/m3)] = kilograms of agent required per m3 of protected volume
needed to produce the indicated concentration at the temperature specified.
t [temperature (oC)] = the design temperature in the hazard area.
s [specific volume (m3/kg)] = specific volume of superheated HFC-125 vapor as approximated by the
formula: s = 0.1825 + 0.007(t)
C [concentration (%)] = volumetric concentration of HFC-125 in air at the temperature indicated.
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 5 of 27
SECTION 2 DESIGN
2.4.3
ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS
Additional quantities of agent are required through the use of design factors to compensate for special conditions
that may affect the ability of the system to extinguish the fire. Therefore, additional agent may be necessary for
either of the following situations: Tee Design Factor or altitude adjustments. The system designer MUST be
aware of these criteria and make adjustments as necessary.
2.4.3.1 TEE DESIGN FACTOR
Where a single agent supply is used to protect multiple hazards, a design factor must be applied to compensate
for the number of tees within the piping network, as shown in the following table.
TEE DESIGN FACTORS
Tee Count
Design Factor
04
0.00
0.01
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
10
0.06
11
0.07
12
0.07
13
0.08
14
0.09
15
0.09
16
0.10
17
0.11
18
0.11
19
0.12
The Tee Design Factor is determined for each hazard protected in accordance with the following.
NOTE:
Starting from the point where the piping enters the hazard that is located farthest (hydraulically) from
the supply tank(s), count the number of tees in the direct flow path as it returns to the supply tank(s).
Do Not include the tees that are used in the manifold (if applicable).
Any tee within the hazard that supplies agent to another hazard shall be included in the tee count.
After counting the tees, compare that number to the chart above to determine the Tee Design Factor.
Apply the Tee Design Factor to the Agent Quantity calculations by multiplying the Tee Design Factor
by the amount of agent previously determined in the volumetric calculations.
If you are not sure which hazard is farther away, count the tees in the flow path from each hazard and
use the highest number.
Page: 6 of 27

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 2 DESIGN
Example No. 1: This example shows a simple, two hazard application. Starting at the point where the piping
enters the hazard that is farthest away (hydraulically) from the container, count the number of tees leading back to
the supply container.
HAZARD #1
HAZARD #2
#1
#2
#3
#4
START HERE
With a tee count of four (4), refer to the Tee Design Factor Table and determine the multiplier required. With this
quantity, an additional 0% (0.00) of agent is required. Therefore, the base quantity of agent calculated is correct.
Example No. 2: This example shows a multi-hazard area arrangement. Starting at the point where the piping
enters the hazard farthest away, count the number of tees leading back to the supply container. If you are not
sure which hazard is the farthest away, count each hazard and use the highest number.
HAZARD #4
HAZARD #5
#1
START
HERE
HAZARD #1
HAZARD #3
#2
#6
#5
HAZARD #2
#3
#4
With a tee count of six (6), refer to the Tee Design Factor Table and determine the multiplier required. With this
quantity, an additional 2% (0.02) of agent is required. Therefore, the base quantity of agent is multiplied by 1.02
(2%) to determine the adjusted quantity of agent required.
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 7 of 27
SECTION 2 DESIGN
2.4.3.2
ALTITUDE CORRECTION FACTORS
The design quantity of ECARO-25 shall be adjusted to compensate for ambient pressures that vary more than
eleven percent [equivalent to approximately 3000 ft. (915 m) of elevation change] from standard sea level
pressures [29.92 in. Hg at 70oF].
The amount of agent required must be adjusted using the correction factors shown below to compensate for
these effects.
Altitude
2.4.3.3
Enclosure Pressure
Correction
Feet
Kilometers
psia
mm Hg
Factor
-3,000
-0.92
16.25
840
1.11
-2,000
-0.61
15.71
812
1.07
-1,000
-0.30
15.23
787
1.04
0.00
14.71
760
1.00
1,000
0.30
14.18
733
0.96
2,000
0.61
13.64
705
0.93
3,000
0.91
13.12
679
0.89
4,000
1.22
12.58
650
0.86
5,000
1.52
12.04
622
0.82
6,000
1.83
11.53
596
0.78
7,000
2.13
11.03
570
0.75
8,000
2.45
10.64
550
0.72
9,000
2.74
10.22
528
0.69
10,000
3.05
9.77
505
0.66
DETERMINE ACTUAL CONCENTRATION AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE
The next step is to determine the expected concentration level at the maximum temperature for the hazard(s).
This is a necessary step when designing systems for occupied spaces in order to properly evaluate the exposure
and egress time limitations discussed in Section 2.3.
The expected concentration can be determined by applying the following formula.
C=
Where:
100WS
---------V + WS
W=
Agent Weight in lbs. (kg)
V=
Hazard Volume / ft3 (m3)
C=
Design Concentration, % by volume
S=
Specific Vapor in ft3/lb (m3/kg)

Refer to Section 2.4.2 of this Manual for determining the S value.
Page: 8 of 27

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 2 DESIGN
2.4.3.4 LEAKAGE
The physical characteristics of the protected space(s) must be taken into consideration when designing an
ECARO-25 system. The area of uncloseable openings must be kept to a minimum to prevent loss of agent into
adjacent areas thus reducing the effectiveness of the system to extinguish a fire. Simply adding more agent is
neither practical, nor effective. Therefore, all openings must be sealed or equipped with automatic closures.
Forced-air ventilating systems shall be shut down or closed automatically where their continued operation would
adversely affect the ability of the system to extinguish a fire. Completely self-contained recirculating ventilation
systems are not required to be shutdown, but recommended. Dampers should be of the low smoke or 100%
closing type to ensure an adequate seal and prevent leakage. Where the ventilation system is not shutdown or
dampered, the volume of the associated ductwork and ventilation unit(s) shall be considered as part of the total
hazard volume when determining the amount of agent needed.
All enclosures must be sealed in order to achieve and maintain the desired concentration for a period of time that
is sufficient for emergency personnel to respond. Under normal circumstances, the agent will extinguish the fire
rapidly, thereby limiting the potential for fire damage and the creation of dangerous products of decomposition.
Therefore, it is critical that the protected space is constructed to prevent any leakage from the protected space(s).
The general guidelines for controlling leakage from the hazard are as follows:
Doors All doors entering and/or exiting from the perimeter of the protected space(s) should have
drop seals on the bottom, weather-stripping around the jams, latching mechanisms and door closure
hardware. In addition, double doors should have a weather-stripped astragal to prevent leakage
between the doors, and a coordinator to assure the proper sequence of closure. Doors that cannot
be kept normally closed shall be equipped with door closure hardware and magnetic door holders that
will release the door(s) upon a system alarm.
Ductwork All ductwork leading into, or out of, the protected space(s) should be isolated with sealed,
low smoke dampers. Dampers should be spring-loaded or motor-operated to provide 100% air
shutoff upon activation.
Air Handling/Ventilation It is recommended that all air handling/ventilation units be shutdown upon
alarm to prevent leakage into other areas. If the air handling unit(s) cannot be shutdown, the volume
of the associated ductwork must be added to the total volume of the protected space, and agent must
be added to compensate for the additional volume.
Penetrations All holes, cracks, gaps or penetrations of the perimeter walls defining the hazard
area(s) must be sealed. Less obvious areas of leakage include wire trays, pipe chases, and floor
drains. Make certain that floor drains have traps filled with a non-evaporating product to prevent
leakage.
Walls All perimeter walls that define the hazard area(s) should extend slab-to-slab, and each should
be sealed top and bottom on the interior side. Where walls do not extend slab-to-slab, bulkheads will
have to be installed to achieve the desired sealing characteristics.
Block Walls Porous block walls must be sealed, or the ECARO-25 agent will leak through.
A room integrity fan pressurization test is an accepted means of determining how long the protected space will
hold the agent (concentration) after a discharge. In conjunction with testing the integrity of the room, the test has
a program that predicts the performance of the ECARO-25 system so that the Authority Having Jurisdiction can
determine if the system has been designed and installed properly.
The room integrity fan pressurization test must be performed in accordance with the manufacturers requirements,
and NFPA 2001, latest edition.
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 9 of 27
SECTION 2 DESIGN
2.5
SYSTEM DESIGN CONCEPT
The distribution of ECARO-25 agent to the protected area(s) may be accomplished through one, or more, of the
following piping distribution methods:
Engineered System
Modular System (Engineered)
Central Storage System (Engineered)
The method used may depend on several factors including: installation time, the quantity of agent involved,
economic factors, number of hazard areas, available space for placement of storage containers and customer
preferences. Larger projects may require more than one method to address the challenges presented.
Therefore, the designer should be familiar with each of these methods, and the advantages and disadvantages of
each for any particular application.
2.5.1
ENGINEERED SYSTEMS CONCEPT
Engineered Systems are more complex and flexible configurations that enable the designer to create a custom
piping network to suit the individual needs of the project. The piping configurations can be balanced or
unbalanced, and the flow splits within the system can vary from point to point. This requires a computerized
hydraulic flow calculation to model the system and verify its performance in accordance with NFPA 2001
requirements prior to installation. Therefore, this design concept gives the designer a great deal more flexibility to
work with, but it will generally take longer to design these systems. In order to perform hydraulic flow calculations
you must have a copy of the Fike ECARO-25 Flow Calculation Software Version 3.00.0000, or higher.
Engineered Systems can be designed with the containers arranged in modular, central storage or manifolded
arrangements as described below.
2.5.2
MODULAR SYSTEMS
Modular Systems can be defined as a design concept where the containers are located throughout or around the
protected area(s). This keeps the discharge piping requirements down to a minimum, but increases the electrical
materials necessary to reach each individual container location.
A modular approach is often desirable (or necessary) for larger applications to reduce the amount of piping
materials and installation labor necessary to complete the installation. In some instances, this approach will be
necessary in order to make the system flow the agent required within the design guidelines identified for an
Engineered System.
2.5.3
CENTRAL STORAGE SYSTEMS
Central Storage Systems can be defined as a design concept where the containers are located in one location,
and piped to the protected space(s) from this location. This concept often requires more discharge piping, but it
decreases the electrical materials necessary to reach the singular container(s) location. This concept may be
more difficult to design due to the increased piping runs involved, and the installation labor will tend to be more
costly.
However, the installation may be more aesthetically desirable to the customer, and it is generally easier to
maintain and service.
Page: 10 of 27

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 2 DESIGN
2.6
CONTAINER SELECTION
Generally, the selection of containers is determined by the amount of ECARO-25 required vs. the approved fill
ranges for the various container sizes. However, additional factors such as the System Design Concept,
container storage location, and flow calculation limitations may have an impact on this decision as well.
2.6.1
CONTAINER SIZE AND FILL RANGE
All containers must be filled within the allowable fill range mandated by DOT / TC and UL Standard 2166. The
acceptable fill range for these containers is based upon a minimum fill density of 25 lbs./ft3 (400 kg/m3) of
container volume, to a maximum of 56 lbs./ft3 (896 kg/m3), in 1 lb. (0.5 kg) increments.
ENGINEERED CONTAINER DATA TABLE

Container Size
Container
Part Number
Minimum Fill lbs.

(kg)
Maximum Fill lbs.

(kg)
Mounting Position
20 lb. (8.5 L)
70-098 (T)
8 lbs. (3.5 kg)
16 lbs. (7.5 kg)
35 lb. (15 L)
70-089 (T)
14 lbs. (6.5 kg)
30 lbs. (13.5 kg)
60 lb. (27 L)
70-152 (T)
25 lbs. (11.5 kg)
54 lbs. (24.5 kg)
100 lb. (44 L)
70-153 (T)
39 lbs. (18.0 kg)
87 lbs. (39.0 kg)
125 lb. (51 L)
70-041 (T)
46 lbs. (21.0 kg)
101 lbs. (46.0 kg)
Inverted Valve Down
215 lb. (90 L)
70-077 (T)
80 lbs. (36.5 kg)
178 lbs. (81.0 kg)
Inverted Valve Down
215 lb. (87 L)
70-154 (T)
78 lbs. (35.5 kg)
173 lbs. (78.5 kg)
Upright Floor Mount
375 lb. (153 L)
70-155 (T)
136 lbs. (61.5 kg)
302 lbs. (137.0 kg)
Upright Floor Mount
650 lb. (267 L)
70-156 (T)
236 lbs. (107.0 kg)
528 lbs. (239.5kg)
Upright Floor Mount
1000 lb. (423 L)
70-157 (T)
374 lbs. (169.5 kg)
836 lbs. (379.5 kg)
Upright Floor Mount
(T) = Container part number with the suffix T indicates container with threaded valve.
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 11 of 27
SECTION 2 DESIGN
CONTAINER LOCATION(S)
The type and location(s) of the storage container(s) is based on several considerations.
1) Agent Quantity The agent storage container(s) selected must have the capacity to store the total
quantity of agent required for the system.
2) System Type An area might be protected by several smaller containers with independent nozzles,
or it might be protected by a large capacity container that is discharged through a piping network of
2, 4, or more nozzles.
3) Extent of Piping In systems having an unusually large piping system, the pressure drop may be
too great for the location or configuration selected. In some cases, it may be necessary to relocate
the container(s) closer to the hazard area(s) being protected. It may also be necessary to subdivide the piping network into smaller configurations with separate containers.
4) Floor Space Consideration should be given to the space available to install the container. For
example, a 900 lb. (408 kg) system could be stored in (2) 650 lb. (267 L) containers located on the
floor. However, if floor space is a problem, the system could be designed to utilize (6) 215 lb. (90 L)
Inverted Containers mounted on the wall(s).
5) Cost Factors In the example above, the (2) 650 lb. (267 L) containers would be less expensive
than the (6) 215 lb. (90 L) containers.
6) Serviceability In general, the larger the container, the more difficult it will be to remove it from the
system for maintenance and service. However, smaller containers that are located in a subfloor
space, under a computer bank, or above the ceiling over the same computer bank can be difficult
as well.
7) Floor Loading This factor must be considered when selecting a container location. Excessive
floor loading may require relocating the container(s) to a more suitable location.
8) Proximity ECARO-25 Containers should be located as close as possible to, or within the
hazard(s) that they protect.
9) Environmental Effects Do not located containers where they would be subject to physical
damage, exposure to corrosive chemicals, or harsh weather conditions
2.6.2
STORAGE TEMPERATURE LIMITATIONS
Fike ECARO-25 systems are UL / ULC listed and FM approved for a service temperature range of +32oF to
+120oF (0oF to 48.9oC). However, the system designer should be aware that the computer flow program for
Engineered Systems is based on an ambient temperature of 70oF (21oC). Therefore, the container storage
temperature range for an Engineered System must be in the 60oF to 80oF (16oC to 27oC) range. At temperatures
outside of this range, the system may not supply the desired quantity of agent.
Page: 12 of 27

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 2 DESIGN
2.7
NOZZLE SELECTION
The selection of nozzles is generally determined by the amount of ECARO-25 required (flow rate) vs. the flow rate
capabilities of the nozzle(s). Additional factors such as area coverage, nozzle placement, discharge path
obstructions, etc. will have an impact on this decision as well.
2.7.1 SYSTEM TYPE
The system designer must take into account the following for Engineered Systems, multiple nozzle, flow rate, pipe
size, and tee split variations are possible.
2.7.2 NOZZLE FLOW RATE
All ECARO-25 Systems are required to discharge the agent into the protected space within a 6-to-10 second
time window. Therefore, the number of nozzles provided for any area must be capable of delivering the flow rate
required to accomplish this timing criteria.
Each nozzle size is capable of delivering a certain range of flow rates. To determine the number and size of
nozzles required for each area, use the flow rate table below. Note this information is provided for estimation
purposes only. The final system design MUST be verified using the Fike ECARO-25 Flow Calculation Program.
NOZZLE FLOW RATES (ENGLISH UNITS)

NOMINAL PIPE SIZE
MINIMUM DESIGN FLOW RATE

(System Limitation)
MAXIMUM DESIGN FLOW RATE

(Estimate only)
3/8 NPT
0.75 lbs./sec.
1.88 lbs./sec.
1/2 NPT
1.29 lbs./sec.
3.23 lbs./sec.
3/4 NPT
2.43 lbs./sec.
6.08 lbs./sec.
1 NPT
4.12 lbs./sec.
10.30 lbs./sec.
1-1/4 NPT
7.40 lbs./sec.
18.50 lbs./sec.
1-1/2 NPT
10.25 lbs./sec.
25.63 lbs./sec.
2 NPT
17.26 lbs./sec.
43.15 lbs./sec.
NOZZLE FLOW RATES (METRIC)

NOMINAL PIPE SIZE
MINIMUM DESIGN FLOW RATE

(System Limitation)
MAXIMUM DESIGN FLOW RATE

(Estimate only)
10 mm
0.34 kg/sec.
0.85 kg/sec.
15 mm
0.59 kg/sec.
1.46 kg/sec.
20 mm
1.10 kg/sec.
2.75 kg/sec.
25 mm
1.87 kg/sec.
4.68 kg/sec.
32 mm
3.36 kg/sec.
8.40 kg/sec.
40 mm
4.65 kg/sec.
11.63 kg/sec.
50 mm
7.83 kg/sec.
19.58 kg/sec.
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 13 of 27
SECTION 2 DESIGN
Example No.1: A system supplying 1,300 lbs. has a system flow rate requirement of 130 lbs./sec. (1,300 lbs.
10 sec. = 130 lbs./sec.). Refer to the Nozzle Flow Rate Table. The highest possible flow rate for any nozzle size
is 35 lbs./sec. Therefore, a minimum of four (4) 2 NPT nozzles will be required.
Example No. 2: A system supplying 590 kg has a system flow rate requirement of 59 kg/sec. (590 kg 10 sec. =
59 kg/sec.). Refer to the Nozzle Flow Rate Table. The highest possible flow rate for any nozzle size is 16 kg/sec.
Therefore, a minimum of four (4) 50 mm nozzles will be required.
NOTE:
A maximum nozzle flow rate of 17 lbs./sec. (7.7 kg/sec.) is recommended for all areas with false
ceilings or delicate operations where a higher flow rate may dislodge objects or affect a process.
2.7.2.1 ENGINEERED NOZZLES

The minimum orifice area that can be utilized for a 180o or a 360 o Engineered System Nozzle is twenty percent of
the pipe cross sectional area. The maximum orifice area that can be utilized must be less than eighty percent of
the pipe cross sectional area. Therefore, a computerized flow calculation program is used to select the proper
nozzles to meet the orifice size limitations, as well as the minimum pressure requirement of 95 psia / 80.3 psig
(6.6 bar).
WARNING:
2.7.3
System installation SHALL NOT begin until the final design of the piping network has been
verified using Fikes Engineered Flow Calculation.
NOZZLE AREA COVERAGE
Nozzle Area Coverage must also be considered when designing a Fike ECARO-25 System. Each nozzle type
(180o or 360o) has been FMRC approved for the maximum area coverage limitations listed below. The maximum
area coverage is expressed as a radius (R) of coverage along the discharge axis for both nozzle types.
Both nozzle types can be located a maximum of one (1) ft. (0.3 m) below the ceiling (or highest point of protection
when stacking nozzles). Additionally, 180o Nozzles can be placed a maximum of one (1) ft. (0.3 m) away from the
sidewall. A single 180 nozzle is to be used to protect semi-circular shaped areas only.
R
R
180 NOZZLE
360 NOZZLE

1/2 2 (15 50 mm)

3/8 (10 mm)
Nozzle
Type
Radius R
Dimension
Ceiling Height
Range
Nozzle
Type
Radius R
Dimension
Ceiling Height
Range
180o
22-9
(6.93 m)
1.0 to 16.0
(0.3 to 4.9 m)
180o
45-8
(13.92 m)
1.0 to 16.0
(0.3 to 4.9 m)
360o
14-5
(4.5m)
1.0 to 16.0
(0.3 to 4.9 m)
360o
29-8
(9.04 m)
1.0 to 16.0
(0.3 to 4.9 m)
Page: 14 of 27

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 2 DESIGN
2.7.4
NOZZLE PLACEMENT
Nozzles should be located in a symmetrical or near symmetrical pattern within the protected area. 360o Nozzles
are designed to be located on, or near, the centerline of the protected area, discharging toward the perimeter of
the area being covered. The system designer should layout the nozzles on a floorplan and verify that the entire
area being protected is adequately covered without any blind spots due to nozzle locations.
180o Nozzles are designed to be located along the perimeter of the area, discharging toward the opposite side as
shown below. These nozzles MUST be located no farther than 1-0 (0.3 m) away from the wall.
180o Nozzles can also be installed in back to back applications. Maximum distance between nozzles is 1-0
(0.3 m) as shown in the following illustration.
1-0 (0.3 m)
NOTE:
All discharge nozzles may be located a maximum of 1-0 (0.3 m) below the ceiling.
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 15 of 27
SECTION 2 DESIGN
2.7.4.1 CEILING HEIGHTS GREATER THAN 16-0 (4.9 m)
Enclosures with ceiling heights greater than 16-0 (4.9 m) require nozzles to be placed at multiple levels
(elevations) in segments no greater than 16-0 (4.9 m) in elevation. Refer to Section 2.8.2 of this manual for
further guidance regarding the maximum elevation differences when installing multiple levels of nozzles in
enclosures exceeding 16-0 (4.9 m).
Example: For an enclosure with a ceiling height of 20-0 (6.1 m), the lower level of nozzles MUST be placed at a
maximum height of 16-0 (4.9 m). A second (upper) level of nozzles MUST be placed within 1-0 (0.3 m) of the
ceiling.
1'-0" (0.3 m) MAX.

CEILING
+ 16'-0" (4.9 m) MAX.
NOTE: Refer to Section 2.8.2 of

this manual for further
clarification regarding nozzle
and piping elevation limitations.
16'-0" (4.9 m) MAX.
Page: 16 of 27

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 2 DESIGN
2.7.5
NOZZLE DISCHARGE OBSTRUCTIONS
Walls, partitions, equipment racks, and tall equipment can provide area coverage obstructions for nozzle
discharges. For this reason, the discharge path of the nozzles must also be taken into account when
determining the quantity of nozzles required.
Anytime that solid obstructions extend to where they could interfere with the line-of-sight discharge path from the
nozzle, they should be treated as separate areas. All nozzles should be located in a manner that will provide a
clear discharge path that reaches all of the outer extremes for the protected space.
8' - 0" (2.44m) CEILING HT.
6.5 FT.(1.98m)
HIGH
COMPUTER
BANK
5 FT. (1.52m) HIGH COMPUTER BANK

7 FT. (2.13m) HIGH STORAGE RACKS
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 17 of 27
SECTION 2 DESIGN
2.8
PIPING NETWORK LIMITATIONS (ENGINEERED SYSTEMS)
This section will cover the piping limitations that apply to all Fike Engineered ECARO-25 system configurations.
This information is intended to give the system designer the information necessary to complete a preliminary
piping layout. The following limitations define the parameters that have been verified through testing, but
installation SHALL NOT begin until the design has been verified using Fikes Engineered ECARO-25 Flow
Calculation Program. For program details, refer to the ECARO-25 Flow Calculation Users Manual, P/N 06-291.
2.8.1
TEE SPLIT RATIOS
The Fike Engineered ECARO-25 System has been tested to define the maximum degree of imbalance that can
be predicted at tee splits. This value has been expressed in terms of a split ratio of one outlet branch versus the
other. Each ratio indicated is referring to a percentage of the total incoming flow.
2.8.1.1 BULLHEAD TEE
A Bullhead Tee is defined as a tee configuration where the two-outlet branches change direction from the
incoming piping inlet. See the diagram below for further clarification. The split ratio range for a Bullhead Tee is
75:25 to 50:50. This means that the major-flow outlet has an acceptable range of 50% minimum to 75%
maximum, and the minor-flow outlet has an acceptable range of 25% minimum to 50% maximum. These figures
are determined as percentages of the total incoming flow amount through the tee. See the diagram below for
further clarification.
50% OUT
100% IN
75% OUT
50% OUT
100% IN
25% OUT
2.8.1.2 SIDE-THRU TEE

A Side-Thru Tee is defined as a tee configuration where one outlet branch changes direction from the inlet, and
the other continues straight through in the same direction as the inlet. See the diagram below for further
clarification. The split ratio range for a Side-Thru Tee is 90:10 to 65:35. This means that the major-flow outlet
(the thru branch) has an acceptable range of 65% minimum to 90% maximum, and the minor-flow outlet (the side
branch) has an acceptable range of 10% minimum to 35% maximum. These figures are determined as
percentages of the total incoming flow amount through the tee. See the diagram below for further clarification.
Page: 18 of 27

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 2 DESIGN
2.8.2
MAXIMUM ELEVATION DIFFERENCES IN PIPE RUNS
The maximum elevation difference between horizontal pipe runs or nozzles is limited as follows.
a. If nozzles are only located above the container outlet, the maximum elevation difference between the
container outlet and the farthest horizontal pipe run or discharge nozzle (whichever is greater) shall not
exceed 30 feet (9.1 m).
b. If nozzles are only located below the container outlet, the maximum elevation difference between the
container outlet and the farthest horizontal pipe run or discharge nozzle (whichever is greater) shall not
exceed 30 feet (9.1 m).
c.
If nozzles are located above and below the container outlet, the maximum elevation difference between
the container outlet and the farthest horizontal pipe run or discharge nozzle (whichever is greater) shall
not exceed 30 feet (9.1 m).
30' - 0" MAX.

(9.1 m MAX.)
30' - 0" MAX.

(9.1 m MAX.)
30' - 0" MAX.
(9.1 m MAX.)
System with a
single level of nozzles
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
System with
multiple levels of nozzles

System with ceiling

and subfloor nozzles
Page: 19 of 27
SECTION 2 DESIGN
2.8.3
TEE ORIENTATION
The Fike Engineered ECARO-25 System has been tested to define the limitations necessary to accurately predict
how the system will perform when discharged. The Tee orientation is an important characteristic in maintaining
consistency of flow split percentages. Therefore, a simple rule MUST be observed concerning tee orientation:
EVERY OUTLET of every tee MUST be orientated in the horizontal plane.
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
CORRECT
OUT
OUT
SIDE-THRU
IN
INCORRECT
OUT
OUT
OUT
CORRECT
IN
IN
BULLHEAD
INCORRECT
OUT
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
CORRECT
IN
OUT
OUT
INCORRECT
BULLHEAD
Page: 20 of 27

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 2 DESIGN
2.8.4
ESTIMATING PIPE SIZE (ENGINEERED SYSTEMS)
The proper pipe size for each section of piping is selected based on the design flow rate for each pipe section.
Generally, the size selection should be based on the smallest pipe size that will handle the design flow rate for
branch lines supplying the discharge nozzles, and the next to smallest size for trunk lines.
2.8.4.1 DISCHARGE DURATION
ECARO-25 Systems must discharge the agent in a manner that will achieve 95% of the design concentration
within ten (10) seconds in accordance with NFPA 2001. Fike ECARO-25 Systems have been tested by UL and
FM in accordance with this requirement, along with an additional requirement that requires the minimum
discharge time associated with an ECARO-25 to be no less than six (6) seconds.
Therefore, these time requirements must be taken into account when estimating pipe sizes. The Fike ECARO-25
Flow Calculation Program selects pipe sizes based on these criteria and selects the nozzle orifice hole sizes
accordingly. Ultimate control of the discharge time is accomplished through the custom sizing of the discharge
nozzles by the Fike Program.
2.8.4.2 MINIMUM FLOW RATE
Flowing ECARO-25 agent actually consists of two phases: liquid and vapor. To accurately predict its flow through
a piping network, the piping has to be sized to provide enough resistance to create a turbulent flow effect. When
turbulent flow is achieved, the two phases join to form a homogenous mixture that can be accurately calculated.
If the pipe size is too large, phase separation will occur and the flow cannot be predicted. Therefore, the pipe
sizes selected must be in accordance with the Flow Rate Table below.
To determine the flow rate of a pipe section, divide the amount of agent flowing through that section by the
discharge time (10 seconds).
PIPE SIZE ESTIMATING TABLE
Pipe Size
(NPT MM)
Minimum.
Design Flow
Rate
(lbs/sec)
(System
Limitation)
Maximum Design
Flow Rate
(lbs/sec) (Estimate)
Minimum Design
Flow Rate (kg/sec)
(System Limitation)
Maximum
Design Flow
Rate
(kg/sec)
(Estimate)
3/8 10 mm
0.75 lbs./sec
1.88 lbs./sec
0.34 kg/sec.
0.85 kg/sec.
1/2 15 mm
1.29 lbs./sec
3.23 lbs./sec
0.59 kg/sec.
1.46 kg/sec.
3/4 20 mm
2.43 lbs./sec
6.08 lbs./sec
1.10 kg/sec.
2.75 kg/sec.
1 25 mm
4.12 lbs./sec
10.30 lbs./sec
1.87 kg/sec.
4.68 kg/sec.
1 1/4 32 mm
7.40 lbs./sec
18.50 lbs./sec
3.36 kg/sec.
8.40 kg/sec.
1 1/2 40 mm
10.25 lbs./sec
25.63 lbs./sec
4.65 kg/sec.
11.63 kg/sec.
2 50 mm
17.26 lbs./sec
43.15 lbs./sec
7.83 kg/sec.
19.58 kg/sec.
2 1/2 65 mm
25.00 lbs./sec
62.50 lbs./sec
11.30 kg/sec.
28.25 kg/sec.
3 80 mm
39.00 lbs./sec
97.50 lbs./sec
17.70 kg/sec.
44.25 kg/sec.
4 100 mm
68.00 lbs./sec
170.00 lbs./sec
30.80 kg/sec.
77.00 kg/sec.
6 150 mm
156.00 lbs./sec
390.00 lbs./sec
70.70 kg/sec.
176.75 kg/sec.
WARNING:
DO NOT install the pipe system based on pipe size estimates from this chart.
The pipe system design MUST be verified by the Fike ECARO-25 Flow Calculation Program prior
to installing the system.
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 21 of 27
SECTION 2 DESIGN
2.8.5 EQUIVALENT LENGTH VALUES
All pipe, fittings, valves and other piping devices have Equivalent Length values that have been determined by
flow testing to represent the restriction (pressure loss) associated with flowing ECARO-25 through the device.
The following table lists the Equivalent Length values that have been established.
EQUIVALENT LENGTH TABLE (ENGLISH UNITS)

Pipe Size
NPT
Union
(feet)
45o Elbow
(feet)
90o Elbow
(feet)
Thru Tee
(feet)
Side Tee
(feet)
Check Valve
(feet)
3/8
0.3
0.6
1.3
0.8
2.7
---
1/2
0.4
0.8
1.7
1.0
3.4
---
3/4
0.5
1.0
2.2
1.4
4.5
---
0.6
1.3
2.8
1.8
5.7
2.0
1-1/4
0.8
1.7
3.7
2.3
7.5
---
1-1/2
0.9
2.0
4.3
2.7
8.7
---
1.2
2.6
5.5
3.5
11.2
4.0
2-1/2
1.4
3.1
6.6
4.1
13.4
---
1.8
3.8
8.2
5.1
16.6
4.0
2.4
5.0
10.7
6.7
21.8
---
3.0
6.3
13.4
8.4
27.4
---
3.5
7.6
16.2
10.1
32.8
---
EQUIVALENT LENGTH TABLE (METRIC)

Pipe Size
(mm)
Union
(m)
45o Elbow
(m)
90o Elbow
(m)
Thru Tee
(m)
Side Tee
(m)
Check Valve
(m)
10 mm
0.09
0.18
0.40
0.24
0.82
---
15 mm
0.12
0.24
0.52
0.30
1.04
---
20 mm
0.15
0.30
0.67
0.43
1.37
---
25 mm
0.18
0.40
0.85
0.55
1.74
0.61
32 mm
0.24
0.52
1.13
0.70
2.29
---
40 mm
0.27
0.61
1.31
0.82
2.65
---
50 mm
0.37
0.79
1.68
1.07
3.41
1.22
65 mm
0.43
0.94
2.01
1.25
4.08
---
80 mm
0.55
1.16
2.50
1.55
5.06
1.22
100 mm
0.73
1.52
3.26
2.04
6.64
---
125 mm
0.91
1.92
4.08
2.56
8.35
---
150 mm
1.07
2.32
4.94
3.08
10.0
---
Page: 22 of 27

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 2 DESIGN
2.9
ENGINEERED SYSTEM DESIGN LIMITS
The Fike Engineered ECARO-25 System has been tested to define the limitations necessary to accurately predict
how the system will perform when discharged. The physical limitations covered previously (e.g. tee orientation,
flow rate, etc.) are easily seen and managed prior to running a flow calculation. However, the following is a list of
physical limitations that are not easily identified until the system designer runs the flow calculation.
2.9.1
PERCENT OF AGENT IN PIPE
Fike ECARO-25 Systems are pressurized systems that utilize a limited source of pressurization (nitrogen) to
expel the extinguishing agent through the piping network and into the protected space. Therefore, there has to be
a limit placed on the size (volume) of the associated piping network to ensure that the agent will be delivered to
the protected space within the discharge time period allowed. This is a floating limitation dependent upon the
size and fill weight of the container(s) involved. This makes this a difficult design limitation to identify, but it is
usually associated with very large pipe systems and multiple tee split arrangements.
Therefore, this limitation is defined as follows: no more than 51% of the total agent weight (liquid) may reside in
the piping network during discharge. If the piping volume is too large, the Flow Calculation Program will indicate a
Warning message, [Maximum Percent Agent in Pipe Exceeded]. The piping network volume must be decreased
by reducing pipe sizes, reducing pipe lengths, or a combination of both to correct this error.
2.9.2
LOCATION OF FIRST TEE
Some piping configurations present timing problems for the system due to the degree of hydraulic imbalance
created. For example, a system that splits and supplies agent for the room nozzles and underfloor nozzles is
unbalanced because of the difference in pipe size and agent quantities. Therefore, the Flow Program must try to
manipulate the orifice hole diameters of the nozzles in an attempt to satisfy all of the timing requirements for the
system. When the timing criteria cannot be met, the location of the first tee becomes critical.
The distance from the cylinder to the first tee depends on the size and configuration of the piping system. The
minimum distance is defined as a distance which will allow for a 4% drop in pressure from the cylinder outlet to
the pressure at the first tee. This limit is checked by the ECARO-25 flow calculation software and will be reported
if this limit is violated.
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 23 of 27
SECTION 2 DESIGN
2.9.3
LIQUID ARRIVAL TIME
The amount of time necessary for the liquid HFC-125 to arrive at each nozzle must be within one (1) second of
each other. For example, if the liquid agent takes two (2) seconds to arrive at the first nozzle, (the closest nozzle
to the container), the liquid arrival time to all of the remaining nozzles cannot exceed three (3) seconds.
2 SEC.
2.5 SEC.
3 SEC.
2.9.4
LIQUID RUNOUT TIME
The amount of time necessary for the liquid HFC-125 to discharge (runout) of each nozzle must be within 2.1
seconds of each other. For example, if the liquid runout time for the first nozzle takes 3 seconds, the runout time
for all of the remaining nozzles must not exceed 5.1 seconds.
5.1 SEC.
3 SEC.
4.9 SEC.
4.9 SEC.
Page: 24 of 27

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 2 DESIGN
2.10
MANIFOLD OPTIONS (ENGINEERED SYSTEMS)
Sometimes, a system will require more agent than a single container can provide. In this case, multiple
containers can be connected together via a common manifold arrangement. Main and Reserve supplies of agent
are also connected together in this manner.
Manifolds are assembled using a combination of grooved pipe and grooved fittings, or threaded pipe and fittings
meeting the pressure requirements of NFPA 2001. Every container must be the same type, same size, and
identical fill weight. Check Valves are required for EACH container being connected to a manifold.
Manifold assemblies are configured using 3 (80 mm) through 6 (150 mm) pipe sizes, depending upon the
amount of agent being supplied. The common manifold types are as follows:
Center Exit Manifold
End Exit Manifold
Center Exit Manifold / Main and Reserve
End Exit Manifold / Main and Reserve
The following diagrams and table show the basic manifold configurations and dimensions. Refer to Section 4 for
additional installation information.
EES
EE S S
CE
CE r
CHECK
VALVE
3" (76 mm)

CE
3" (76 mm)
EL T
EL V
30"
(762 mm)
38"
(965 mm)
CENTER EXIT MANIFOLD / 3 THRU 6 (80 mm thru 150 mm)

OR
MAIN & RESERVE MANIFOLD / 3 THRU 6 (80 mm thru 150 mm)
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 25 of 27
SECTION 2 DESIGN
CE
EE s
CE r
CHECK VALVE
3" (76 mm)

CE i
3" (76 mm)
EL t
EL v
30" (762 mm)
END EXIT MANIFOLD / 3 THRU 6 (80 mm thru 150 mm)
CHECK VALVE
THREADED MANIFOLD
(NOT RECOMMENDED FOR LARGER THAN 3 NPT (80 mm)
Page: 26 of 27

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 2 DESIGN
MANIFOLD DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH UNITS)

Container
Manifold
Dimensions (inches)
Size
Size
ELv
ELt
CEi
CEr
CE
EEs
EEss
215 lb.
28.87
47.87
18.25
4.25
4.25
13.63
5.50
(20 OD)
28.87
48.62
19.00
5.00
5.00
12.13
4.00
375 lb.
42.50
61.50
18.25
4.25
4.25
13.63
5.50
(20 OD)
42.50
62.25
19.00
5.00
5.00
12.13
4.00
42.50
63.75
20.50
6.50
6.50
9.13
---
650 lb.
48.69
68.44
19.00
5.00
5.00
16.13
9.00
(24 OD)
48.69
69.94
20.50
6.50
6.50
13.13
6.00
1000 lb.
70.00
89.75
19.00
5.00
5.00
16.13
9.00
(24 OD)
70.00
91.25
20.50
6.50
6.50
13.13
6.00
MANIFOLD DIMENSIONS (METRIC)

Container
Manifold
Size
Size
ELv
ELt
CEi
CEr
CE
EEs
EEss
87 L
80
733
1216
464
108
108
346
140
(508 mm)
100
733
1235
483
127
127
308
102
153 L
80
1080
1563
464
108
108
346
140
(508 mm)
100
1080
1582
483
127
127
308
102
150
1080
1620
521
165
165
232
---
267 L
100
1237
1739
483
127
127
410
229
(610 mm)
150
1237
1777
521
165
165
334
152
423 L
100
1778
2280
483
127
127
410
229
(610 mm)
150
1778
2318
521
165
165
334
152
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
Dimensions (mm)

Page: 27 of 27
SECTION 3 SAMPLE PROBLEM
This section is intended to illustrate a step by step procedure for designing a Fike ECARO-25 system. The
sample system will be designed to comply with the guidelines and limitations discussed in the previous sections.
For detailed instructions, consult Fike's ECARO-25 Engineered System Flow Calculation Program manual for the
use and operation of the program. The following example consists of a Computer Room, UPS Room and
Operations Room with a common Sub-Floor.
3.1
DETERMINE HAZARD VOLUME
The first step is to determine the hazard area and volume for each enclosure involved.
Refer to Figure 3.1 for details.
32.0'
(9.8m)
12.0'
(3.7m)
20.0'
(6.1m)
COMPUTER ROOM
(with common underfloor)
UPS ROOM
10.0'
(3.0m)
20.0'
(6.1m)
OPERATIONS
ROOM
10.0'
(3.0m)
FIGURE 3.1
English Values
Metric Units
Computer Rm:
20.0 x 20.0 =
400 sf
9.0
3600.0 cf
6.1 x 6.1 =
37.2 m
2.7
100.4 m
UPS Room:
10.0 x 12.0 =
120 sf
9.0
1080.0 cf
3.0 x 3.7 =
11.1 m
2.7
30.0 m
2.743
30.0 m
0.8
47.8 m
Operations Room:
10.0 x 12.0 =
120 sf
9.0
1080.0 cf
3.0 x 3.7 =
11.1 m
Sub-Floor:
20.0 x 32.0 =
640 sf
2.5
1600.0cf
6.1 x 9.8 =
59.8 m
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 1 of 25
3.2
CALCULATE AGENT REQUIRED
The minimum design concentration required is 8.0%. The minimum expected storage temperature of the
container in this example is 70 F (21oC).
English Units
Metric Units
3
Computer Room / 3600 cf:

W=
3600
3.1706
8.0
(100 8.0)
99 lbs.
Computer Room / 100.4m

100.4
W=
0.1971
X
30 lbs
UPS Room / 30.0m

30.0
W=
0.1971
30 lbs
Operations Room / 30.0m

30.0
W=
0.1971
X
44 lbs
Sub-Floor / 47.8m
47.8
W=
.0.1971
= 44.9 kg
8.0
(100 8.0)
13.6 kg
8.0
(100 8.0)
13.6 kg
8.0
(100 8.0)
20.0 kg
UPS Room / 1080 cf:

W=
1080
3.1706
8.0
(100 8.0)
W=
X
3
Operations Room / 1080 cf

1080
3.1706
8.0
(100 8.0)
Sub-Floor / 1600.0 cf:

W=
3.2.1
8.0
(100 8.0)
1600
3.1706
8.0
(100 8.0)
DETERMINE CONCENTRATION AT MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE
The next step is to check the concentration level, at the maximum temperature that is anticipated within all the
hazard enclosures being protected, in order to verify the NOAEL level has not been exceeded. (Refer to Section
2)
For this example, we are utilizing a maximum temperature of 90 F. (32.2oC).
English Units
Metric Units
Computer Room
C=
100 (99 x 3.2971)

3600 + (99 x 3.2971)
8.3%
C=
100 (44.9 x 0.2057)

100.4 + (44.9 x 0.2057)
8.3%
C=
100 (30 x 3.2971)

1080 + (30 x 3.2971)
8.4%
C=
100 (13.9 x 0.2057)

30.0 + (13.9 x 0.2057)
8.4%
C=
100 (30 x 3.2971)

1080 + (30 x 3.2971)
8.4%
C=
100 (13.9 x 0.2057)

30.0 + (13.9 x 0.2057)
8.4%
C=
100 (44 x 3.2971)

1600 + (44 x 3.2971)
8.3%
C=
100 (20.0 x 0.2057)

47.8 + (20.2x 0.2057)
8.3%
UPS Room:
Operations Room:
Sub-Floor:
Page: 2 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
3.3
ESTABLISH SYSTEM CONCEPT
This system has four areas that need fire protection each with a different amount of agent for each enclosure
and different nozzle requirements. Of the three types of systems that we can apply to these hazard areas, the
most flexible is the unbalanced system.
3.3.1 CONTAINER SELECTION
This system requires a total of 203 lbs. (92 kg) of ECARO-25 to protect all four-hazard areas, which allows us to
utilize a common agent supply. Refer to Table 2.4.2 for the container selections available.
Container size = 375 lb. (153 L) with a 203 lb. (92 kg) fill weight
3.3.2 NOZZLES REQUIRED
Step 1: Determine the correct number and size of nozzle(s) required for each hazard area and calculate the
nozzle flow rate required to discharge the system in a maximum of 10 seconds.
=
9.9 lbs. (4.5 kg)/ second

Use 1 nozzle
Computer Room =
99 lbs./(44.9 kg)
10 seconds
UPS Room =
30 lbs./(13.6 kg)
10 seconds

Use 1 nozzle
Operations Room =
30 lbs./(13.6 kg)
10 seconds

Use 1 nozzle
Sub-Floor =
44 lbs./(20 kg)
10 seconds
4.4 lbs. (2.0 kg)/ sec 2 = 2.2 lbs. (1.0 kg)/ second
Use 2 nozzles due to area coverage
Step 2: Determine the nozzle sizes based on the minimum and maximum pipeline flow rate and from the flow rate
established in Step 1.
Computer Room
9.9 lbs. (4.5 kg) / second - Use (1) 1-1/4" (32 mm) nozzles
UPS Room
3.0 lbs. (1.4 kg) / second - Use (1) 3/4" (20 mm) nozzle
Operations Room
3.0 lbs. (1.4 kg) / second - Use (1) 3/4" (20 mm) nozzle
Sub-Floor
4.4 lbs. (2.0 kg) / second - Use (2) 1/2" (15 mm) nozzles
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 3 of 25
Step 3: Locate the nozzle(s) on a scaled plan view of the hazard areas being protected. This will allow you to
check the area coverage of each nozzle being used. This will also determine if you use 180o or 360o
nozzles, or a combination of the two.
32.0'
(9.8m)
12.0'
(3.7m)
5.0'
(1.5m)
20.0'
(6.1m)
COMPUTER ROOM
(with common underfloor)
UPS ROOM
10.0'
(3.0m)
5.0'
(1.5m)
20.0'
(6.1m)
OPERATIONS
ROOM
10.0'
(3.0m)
5.0'
(1.5m)
ceiling height = 9.0' (2.7m)
10.0'
(3.0m)
FIGURE 3.3.2-A
32.0'
(9.8m)
8.0'
(2.4m)
8.0'
(2.4m)
10.0'
(3.0m)
20.0'
(6.1m)
COMMON SUBFLOOR
underfloor height = 2.5' (0.8m)

FIGURE 3.3.2-B
Page: 4 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
3.4
LAYOUT PIPING NETWORK / ISOMETRIC
Step 1: Layout pipe network and container location(s) on a scaled plan view. While many methods of pipe
routing may exist in any given system, it is best to supply nozzles, or groups of nozzles, from central points along
the trunk line to avoid high degrees of piping imbalance
Step 2: Layout a piping isometric to show all elevation changes, fittings, pipe sizes and lengths. Pipe sizes will be
based on the flow rate for each section and the pipe size estimating table in Section 2 paragraph 2.8.4.2.
Check the piping network for tee split ratios; tee orientation, minimum piping distances, proper nozzle
screen quantity and location, etc.
IMPORTANT: Your final design must be checked by using Fike's ECARO-25 Engineered System Flow
Calculation Program before installation starts. When using the Isometric input portion of the
flow calculation program, it is not necessary to assign Node points to the piping isometric as the
isometric input will automatically assign node point numbers as you draw the piping system.
NOTE:
After calculating this system on Fike's ECARO-25 Engineered System Flow Calculation Program, the
amount of agent required was increased to 208 lbs. (93.5 kg) and sub-floor nozzle sizes were
changed to 3/4 (20 mm) to meet system limitations.
The following pages are a copy of the Fike's ECARO-25 Engineered System Flow Calculation Program printout
showing the inputs and outputs of the program.
30.3 lb. FE-25

(13.7 kg)
3
4" x 2.3'
(0.7m)
3
3
4" x 2.6'
4"x 5.0'
(0.8m)
(1.5m)
30.8 lb. FE-25
(13.9 kg)
3
4"
4"
x 4.0' (1.2m)
1- 1 4" x 4.0' (1.2m)
1- 1 4 " x 5.2' (1.6m)
~
~
1 1 4" x 4.0'
(1.2m)
1-1 4" x 2.2'
(0.7m)
99.4 lb. FE-25
(45.0 kg)
x 4.0' (1.2m)
25.5 lb. FE-25

(11.6 kg)
11 2" x 14.0' (4.3m)
1" x 16.5' (5.0m)

11 2" x 4.0' (1.2m)
1" x 9.2' (2.8m)

3
4"
x 9.5' (2.9m)
4"
26.0 lb. FE-25

(11.8 kg)
x 6.3' (1.9m)
375 lb. (153 L) ECARO-25 Container

Pressurized to 360 psi (25 bar)
FIGURE 3.4
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 5 of 25
3.5
SAMPLE FLOW CALCULATION ENGISH UNITS
Page: 6 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 7 of 25
Page: 8 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 9 of 25
Page: 10 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 11 of 25
Page: 12 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 13 of 25
Page: 14 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 15 of 25
3.6
SAMPLE FLOW CALCULATION SI UNITS
Page: 16 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 17 of 25
Page: 18 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 19 of 25
Page: 20 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 21 of 25
Page: 22 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 23 of 25
Page: 24 of 25

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 25 of 25
SECTION 4 SYSTEM INSTALLATION
The system installation must comply with the requirements of this manual; NFPA 2001, latest edition; all
applicable local codes, regulations, and standards and the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ).
4.1
The following sections provide pictorial clarification and procedures for the correct installation and mounting
positions of Fike ECARO-25 containers and associated hardware.
Make certain that each container has been installed in the correct location. Each container should have a
nameplate with an identifying part number. Check the container part number against those listed on the system
plans to verify their locations.
Containers should be located in clean, dry, and relatively vibration-free areas. Avoid aisleways and other high
traffic areas where physical damage or tampering is more likely. Containers should never be mounted where the
container could potentially be splashed with, or submerged in any liquid.
Container brackets must be mounted securely to solid load-bearing surfaces that will support the container load.
Some installations may require additional mounting support not supplied by Fike.
WARNING:
4.1.1
The Gas Cartridge Actuator (GCA) should always be the last component installed on a Fike
ECARO-25 Clean Agent system.
MOUNTING DETAILS FOR VERTICAL / HORIZONTAL CONTAINERS
20 60 lb. (8.5 27 L) Containers are supplied with mounting brackets that must be secured to a solid, loadbearing surface using a minimum of four fasteners. As an option, the brackets may be welded into place. These
containers can be mounted in the following configurations:
Floor or wall mounted in the vertical (valve up) position
Floor mounted in the horizontal (pressure gauge up) position
CAUTION:
These containers have siphon tubes. DO NOT mount the containers in the inverted (valve down)
position. Failure to comply with this requirement will result in an incomplete discharge.
Vertical (Upright)
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Horizontal Floor
Page: 1 of 21
4.1.1.1 MOUNTING DETAILS FOR 20 lb. AND 35 LB. (8.5L & 15L) CONTAINER
P/N 70-098, 70-098T, 70-089 AND 70-089T
IMPORTANT NOTE:
When mounting the 20 lb. or 35 lb. containers in the horizontal positions (wall mount or
sub-floor mount), the container pressure gauge MUST point up.
20 lb. Container
35 lb. Container
Dimension
w/ Welded
Valve
in (mm)
w/ Threaded
Valve
in (mm)
w/ Welded
Valve
in (mm)
w/ Threaded
Valve
in (mm)
21-1/2 (546)
23-1/2 (597)
32-1/2 (826)
35 (889)
Top U-bolt
location for 35 lb.
container
A
Top U-bolt
location for 20 lb.
container
Side View
Dimension
D
C
(in)
22-9/32
(mm)
566
7-1/2
191
127
51
8-11/16
221
203
3-19/32
91
8-7/32
209
6-1/2
165
6-7/8
175
51
25
Front View
Page: 2 of 21
J
I
Bottom View
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE APPROXIMATE

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 301447
4.1.1.2 MOUNTING DETAILS FOR 60 lb. (27 L) CONTAINER, P/N 70-152 & 70-152T
E
F
See
Overall
Height
Table
I
G
D
Front View
Side View
Dimensions
Inch (mm)
4 (108)
20 (508)
1 (44)
(19)
9 (229)
3 (89)
18 (470)
1 (38)
13 5/8 (346)
4 7/8 (124)
13 3/16 (335)
11 5/32 (283)
1 5/32 (29)
K
M
H
Bottom View
Overall Height 60 lb. Container

w/ Welded Valve
in (mm)
w/ Threaded Valve
in (mm)
28 (711)
29-1/4 (743)
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 3 of 21
4.1.2
MOUNTING DETAILS FOR INVERTED (SPHERICAL) CONTAINERS
125 & 215 lb. (51 & 90 L) Inverted Containers are supplied with mounting brackets that must be secured to a
solid, load-bearing wall. These containers DO NOT have siphon tubes; therefore, they MUST be mounted in the
inverted (valve down) position.
Additional hardware such as the optional backing/mounting straps (P/N 70-1119) is required when mounting
Inverted Containers to porous block walls. For this application, the anchor bolts must run through the wall and
through the backing/mounting brackets on the opposite side to provide structural integrity.
An optional Floor Mounting Kit is available for both container sizes. When using this option, the floor mounting kit
must be anchored to a solid, load-bearing floor or similar surface.
4.1.2.1 MOUNTING DETAILS FOR: 125 lb. (51 L) CONTAINER, P/N 70-041
DRILL PATTERN CL
WALL MOUNTING SURFACE
P/N 70-1119 MOUNTING

STRAP, (IF REQ'D.)
16"
(406 mm)
20 1/2"
(521 mm)
14 1/2"
(368 mm)
20 1/4"
(514 mm)
8"
(203 mm)
2 1/2" x 2" REDUCER

(65 mm x 50 mm)
6 1/2"
(165 mm)
1/2" (15 mm) STUD AND

NUT (TYP.)
FALSE CEILING
(REF.)
VICTAULIC COUPLING
NOZZLE
WALL MOUNT DETAIL
22 1/2"
(572 mm)
39 3/4" (1010 mm)

APPROX.
1 1/2" NPT PIPE CUT TO
18 3/8" (467 mm) LONG
VICTAULIC COUPLING
19 1/2"
(495 mm)
SCH. 40
PIPING
BELL REDUCER
1 1/2' NPT FLOOR FLANGE
ANGLE IRON BRACE
16 1/2"
(419 mm)
MOUNTING SURFACE
2 1/2" (64 mm)
DRILL PATTERN CL
6"
(152 mm)
7 3/4"
(197 mm)
5 1/4"
(133 mm)
Page: 4 of 21

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 301447
4.1.2.2 MOUNTING DETAILS FOR 215 lb. (90 L) CONTAINER, P/N 70-077
DRILL PATTERN CL
WALL MOUNTING SURFACE
18"
(457 mm)
24 1/4"
(616 mm)
16"
(406 mm)
P/N 70-1119 MOUNTING

STRAP, (IF REQ'D.)
23 1/4"
(591 mm)
9"
(229 mm)
2 1/2" x 2" REDUCER

(65 mm x 50 mm)
8"
(203 mm)
1/2" (15 mm) STUD AND

NUT (TYP.)
FALSE CEILING
(REF.)
VICTAULIC COUPLING
NOZZLE
WALL MOUNT DETAIL
26 1/4"
(667 mm)
45 3/4" (1162 mm)

APPROX.
1 1/2" NPT PIPE CUT TO
18 3/8" (467 mm) LONG
VICTAULIC COUPLING
22 1/2"
(572 mm)
BELL REDUCER
SCH. 40
PIPING
1 1/2" NPT FLOOR FLANGE

20"
(508 mm)
ANGLE IRON BRACE
MOUNTING SURFACE
2 1/2" (64 mm)
DRILL PATTERN CL
6"
(152 mm)
9 3/4"
(248 mm)
7 1/4"
(184 mm)
FLOOR MOUNT DETAIL
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 5 of 21
4.1.3
MOUNTING DETAILS FOR VERTICAL (UPRIGHT) CONTAINERS, P/N 70-153, 70-153T, 70-154,
70-154T, 70-155, 70-155T, 70-156, 70-156T, 70-157 & 70-157T
100, 215, 375, 650 & 1000 lb. (44, 87, 153, 267 & 423 L) Containers are supplied with mounting straps that must
be anchored to a wall or other suitable surface. Typical mounting is accomplished by anchoring Unistrut channel
to the wall and securing the mounting straps to the Unistrut as shown.
All containers must be mounted in the upright (valve up) position
on a solid, load-bearing surface such as a floor. DO NOT mount
these containers in the horizontal position.
B
C O N T A IN E R
M O U N T IN G S T R A P
P 1 0 0 0 U N IS T R U T C H A N N E L
(B Y O T H E R S )
C
W ALL
U N IS T R U T N U T , B O L T A N D
W A S H E R (B Y O T H E R S )
Mounting Strap Detail
Floor
A
Dimension
Container Size
A
B
w/ Welded Valve
B
w/ Threaded Valve
100 lb. (44 L)
14 (356 mm)
38-3/4 (984 mm)
40-3/4 (1035 mm)
20 (508 mm)
215 lb. (87 L)
21-3/4 (552 mm)
28-7/8 (733 mm)
29-1/4 9743)
12 (305 mm)
375 lb. (153 L)
21-3/4 (552 mm)
42-1/2 (1080 mm)
42-1/2 (1080 mm)
26 (660 mm)
650 lb. (267 L)
26 (660 mm)
48-3/4 (1238 mm)
49 (1245)
28 (711 mm)
1000 lb. (423 L)
26 (660 mm)
70 (1778 mm)
71 (1803)
40 (1016 mm)
Page: 6 of 21

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 301447
4.2
DISCHARGE PIPING CONNECTIONS
The discharge piping is connected to the discharge valves in the various manners that follow. A basic installation
would involve direct connection to the valve via a pipe union or grooved coupling to facilitate removal of the
container for service purposes. More advanced installations will be accomplished by using a discharge manifold
to join multiple containers into a common piping supply network.
Refer to the sections that follow for additional information regarding pipe and fitting materials, installation
requirements, configurations, etc.
4.2.1
1" (25 mm) VALVE CONNECTIONS
The 1" (25 mm) valve used on the 20, 35, 60 & 100 lb. (8, 15, 27 and 44 L) containers has an Adapter Nut with 1
NPT female threads that accept 1" NPT male threaded pipe. Prior to installing the discharge piping, remove the
Adapter Nut and coat the 2 (50 mm) straight threads of the container valve body with teflon tape or thread
sealant and replace the Adapter Nut.
IMPORTANT: Remove the Baffle Plug before installing the discharge piping to the Adapter Nut. The Baffle Plug
is an anti-recoil device that is required to be installed whenever transporting or handling charged
containers that are not connected to the discharge piping.
A pipe union should be installed close to the adapter nut. This makes removal of the container for service
purposes much easier.
DISCHARGE PIPING
1" NPT UNION
CLOSE NIPPLE
ADAPTER NUT
2" (50 mm)
STRAIGHT THREADS
OUTLET
2 1/2" (65 mm)
GROOVED COUPLING
RETAINER NUT
2 1/2" (65 mm)

ADAPTER NIPPLE
COUPLING
DISCHARGE PIPING
1" (25 mm) DISCHARGE VALVE
4.2.2
2 1/2" (65 mm) DISCHARGE VALVE
2-1/2" (65 mm) VALVE CONNECTIONS
The 2-1/2" (65 mm) valves used on the 125 & 215 lb. (15 & 90 L) containers have 2-1/2" (65 mm) grooves
machined into the outlets of the valves. The transition from the grooved outlet to pipe thread is made through the
use of an adapter nipple (supplied by Fike) that receives 2-1/2" (65mm) female pipe thread.
It is not necessary to supply a pipe union after the grooved coupling to facilitate removal of the container for
service or maintenance purposes.
IMPORTANT:Remove the Baffle Plate located inside the grooved coupling before connecting the discharge
piping to the container. The Baffle Plate is an anti-recoil device that must be installed whenever transporting or
handling charged containers that are not connected to the discharge piping.
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 7 of 21
4.2.3
3" (80mm) VALVE CONNECTIONS
The 3" (80 mm) valve used on the 215, 375, 650 & 1000 lb. (9787, 153, 267 and 423 L) containers has a 3" (80
mm) groove machined into the outlet of the valve. The transition from the grooved outlet to pipe thread is made
through the use of an adapter nipple (supplied by Fike) that receives 3" (80mm) female pipe thread.
It is not necessary to supply a pipe union after the grooved coupling to facilitate removal of the container for
service or maintenance purposes.
IMPORTANT: Remove the Baffle Plate located inside the grooved coupling before connecting the discharge
piping to the container. The Baffle Plate is an anti-recoil device that must be installed whenever
transporting or handling charged containers that are not connected to the discharge piping.
DISCHARGE PIPING
COUPLING
3" (80 mm) ADAPTER NIPPLE

3" (80 mm) GROOVED COUPLING
NOTE:
CUT OR ROLL GROOVED PIPING
MEETING THE REQUIREMENTS
OF NFPA 2001 MAY BE USED
OUTLET
GCA HOUSING
3" (80 mm) DISCHARGE VALVE
4.3
MANIFOLDS
Discharge manifolds are used to connect multiple containers into a common supply and discharge piping network.
Simple two container manifolds may be used to create Main & Reserve systems without the need for redundant
piping systems. Larger multiples of containers are often manifolded to create larger bulk supplies of agent for
areas that require more than 836 lbs. (379.5 kg) of agent.
Manifolds are assembled in the field using approved fittings meeting the requirements of NFPA 2001. Larger
manifolds are commonly assembled using grooved fittings, but threaded, welded or flanged fittings can be used
as well. If grooved couplings are used, the gaskets must be lubricated with a non-petroleum base lubricant as
recommended by the fitting manufacturer.
Once the manifold is assembled and the containers connected, the manifold should not be supported by the
containers. The manifold piping should be secured with pipe hangers or brackets to support the manifold when
the containers are removed for service.
Page: 8 of 21

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 301447
NOTE:
In the details that follow, Item 1 is a Grooved Coupling that is supplied by Fike with each Large
Capacity Container. Item 2 is a 3 NPT x 4-1/2 (115 mm) long Adapter Nipple. Fike supplies one
Adapter Nipple with each Large Capacity Container; however, two each will be required for
manifolded arrangements.
CHECK
VALVE
2
1
TYPE A
End Exit Manifold (Threaded or Grooved)
MIN. 30"
(762 mm)
MIN. 38"
(965 mm)
TYPE B
Center Exit Manifold (Threaded or Grooved)
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 9 of 21
4.3.1
1 NPT CHECK VALVE INSTALLATION
1" NPT check valves are installed in the piping network when 20, 35, 60 or 100 lb. (8.5, 15, 27 or 44 L) containers
are grouped into a manifold or form a "Main & Reserve" system. The check valves have threaded bodies;
therefore, the piping leading into and exiting from each check valve must be threaded as well.
DISCHARGE PIPING
TEE
NOTE:
The Check Valves must be installed with
the flow arrow pointing in the direction of
discharge. If reversed, the system will not
discharge properly.
1" NPT CHECK VALVE
1" NPT UNION

1" NPT CLOSE NIPPLE (TYP.)
RETAINER NUT
ADAPTER NUT
4.3.2
2" NPT CHECK VALVE INSTALLATION
2" NPT check valves are installed in the piping network when 125 or 215 lb. (51 or 90 L) Inverted Containers are
grouped into a manifold or form a "Main & Reserve" system. The check valves have threaded bodies; therefore,
the piping leading into and exiting from each check valve must be threaded as well.
RETAINER NUT (TYP.)
2 1/2" (65 mm) VICTAULIC COUPLING (TYP.)
NOTE:
The check valves must be installed with
the flow arrow pointed in the direction of
discharge. If reversed, the system will not
discharge properly.
2 1/2" (65 mm) GROOVED X THREADED

ADAPTER NIPPLE (TYP.)
2 1/2" X 2" NPT BELL REDUCER
2" NPT NIPPLE (TYP.)
2" NPT 90 ELBOW
2" NPT
TEE
2" NPT CHECK VALVE (TYP.)

DISCHARGE PIPING
4.3.3
3" NPT CHECK VALVE INSTALLATION
3" NPT check valves are installed in the piping network when 215, 375, 650 or 1000 lb. (87, 153, 267 or 423 L)
Large Capacity Containers are grouped into a manifold or form a Main & Reserve system. The check valves
have threaded bodies; therefore, the piping leading into and exiting from each check valve must be threaded as
well.
NOTE:
The check valves must be installed with the flow arrow pointed in the same direction as the
discharge. If reversed, the system will not discharge properly.
Page: 10 of 21

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 301447
4.4
PIPING AND FITTING MATERIALS
Piping materials must conform to the requirements as outlined in NFPA 2001, latest edition. The thickness of the
piping wall shall be calculated in accordance with ASME B31.1 Power Piping Code. For ECARO-25, use a
minimum piping design pressure of 500 psig (34.4 bar) at 70F (21C).
CAUTION: Cast iron pipe, steel pipe conforming to ASTM A120, or nonmetallic pipe shall not be used.
The following piping materials and configurations are acceptable:
Schedule 40 Threaded
Schedule 40 Welded
Schedule 40 Grooved
Schedule 80 Threaded
Schedule 80 Welded
The following piping types and grades are acceptable for pipe configurations utilizing threaded, welded or grooved
end connections:
Pipe
Schedule
40
80
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
NPS
Pipe
Size
Wall
Thickness
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
4
5
6
8
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
4
5
6
8
.091
.109
.113
.133
.140
.145
.154
.203
.216
.237
.258
.280
.322
.126
.147
.154
.179
.191
.200
.218
.276
.300
.337
.375
.432
.500
A-53B
Grade:
A-106C
Type:
Seamless
Seamless
ERW
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A-106B

A-53B
A-53A
A-53A
A-53F
Seamless
ERW
Furnace
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A-106A
Page: 11 of 21
Fitting materials must conform to the requirements as outlined in NFPA 2001, latest edition. In general, Class 300
malleable or ductile iron fittings are acceptable through 3 NPT sizes. 1000 lb. ductile or forged steel fittings are
required for all sizes greater than 3 NPT. Class 300 flanged fittings are acceptable for all pipe sizes.
All grooved fittings must be UL / ULC Listed and conform to the pressure requirements outlined in NFPA 2001,
latest edition. Cast Iron fittings are NOT acceptable.
4.4.1
PIPE SIZE CHANGES
Pipe size changes, to increase or decrease the size, can be done at three different locations in the piping
network:
At a tee,
At an elbow,
At a coupling
4.4.1.1 PIPE SIZE CHANGE AT A TEE:

When the change in pipe size is done at a tee, this is accomplished by using either a reducing tee or a standard
tee and reducing fittings. All reducers must be concentric bell reducers or concentric reducing couplings.
4.4.1.2 PIPE SIZE CHANGE AT AN ELBOW:
When the change in pipe size is done at an elbow, this is accomplished by using either reducing elbows or a
standard elbow with concentric bell reducers or concentric reducing couplings.
4.4.1.3 PIPE SIZE CHANGE AT A COUPLING:
When the change in pipe size accomplished at a coupling, only concentric bell reducers or concentric reducing
couplings can be used.
NOTE: Reducing bushings, weld-o-let, and hole-cut fittings ARE NOT acceptable.
4.4.2
INSTALLING MAIN DISCHARGE PIPING
Each pipe section shall be cleaned internally before installation with a nonflammable cleaner such as
Perchlorethylene in accordance with NFPA 2001, latest edition.
Teflon tape or joint compound shall be used on all threaded joints. All grooved coupling gaskets shall be
lubricated per the manufacturer's specifications.
The piping system should be securely supported with due allowance for agent thrust forces, thermal expansion,
and contraction, and should not be subject to mechanical, chemical, vibration, or other damage.
Page: 12 of 21

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 301447
The maximum horizontal spacing for screwed, welded or grooved pipe are as indicated on the following table:
Distance
Pipe
Rod
Between
Size
Diameter
Supports
(inches)
(inches)
(feet)
3/8
3/8
1/2
3/8
3/4
3/8
3/8
1 1/4
3/8
1 1/2
3/8
10
3/8
2 1/2
11
1/2
12
1/2
14
5/8
16
5/8
17
3/4
19
3/4
Note: C Clamps are not acceptable to support rod hangers

Rigid pipe supports are required to support the live load of the pipe system
during discharge. Rigid bracing is required at each directional change, fitting,
tee and nozzle. All drops to 180 nozzles require back bracing in the opposite
direction of the discharge. Earthquake bracing shall be used where required
by local code. (Refer to ANSI B31.1 Power Piping Code for additional
information)
For additional information on pressure rating of pipe and fittings, plus
recommended pipe supports and hangers, refer to FSSAs Pipe Design
Handbook, FSSA PDH-01.
All system piping shall be installed in strict accordance to system plans. If
piping changes are necessary, they must be recalculated on Fikes ECARO25 Flow Calculation Program.
4.5
NOZZLE INSTALLATION
Many nozzles look the same. Always verify the nozzle identification number (stamped on the closed end of the
nozzle) matches the nozzle part number listed on the system installation plans. All nozzle locations should be
within 1'- 0" (0.3m) of their intended locations on the system plans.
CAUTION:
The piping should be blown clear to remove chips, mill scale, or metal shavings before the
nozzles are installed.
RAISED FLOOR
NOZZLE
SUPPORT PIPE
ON RAISED FLOOR
STANCHION
CENTER OF
SUBFLOOR SPACE
NOZZLE
SUPPORT BRACKET
FLOOR
FLOOR
SUBFLOOR NOZZLE
SUPPORT
BRACKET
SUSPENDED CEILING
12" (30.5 cm) MAX.

NOZZLE WITH
DEFLECTOR PLATE
NOTE: NOT U.L. LISTED.
MAY BE FLUSH MOUNTED.
CEILING NOZZLE
NOZZLE MOUNTING DETAILS
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 13 of 21
4.5.1
360 NOZZLES
360 Nozzles should be located in a symmetrical, or near symmetrical, pattern within the protected area. 360o
Nozzles should be located near the area centerline discharging toward the perimeter and/or other nozzles.
4.5.2
180 NOZZLES
180 Nozzles should be located in a symmetrical, or near symmetrical, pattern within the protected area. 180o
Nozzles should be located along the perimeter of the area discharging along the perimeter and toward the
opposite side. These nozzles can be located a maximum of 1-0 (0.3 m) out from the wall.
1.0 (0.3 m)
Maximum
NOTE: 180 Nozzles can also be installed in back to back applications. Maximum distance between nozzles is
1-0 (0.3 m) as shown in the illustration on page 15, Section 2 / Design.
180o Nozzles generate a reactive force in the opposite direction from the nozzle orifices. Rigid pipe
bracing must be attached to the nozzle drop to counteract the expected movement.
4.5.3
NOZZLE SET SCREW INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Verify the Set Screws found on the side of the

nozzle are in place after system installation.
Failure to have the setscrews in place will affect
agent distribution and possibly the systems ability
to suppress the fire.
Page: 14 of 21
NOZZLE
SET SCREWS TO
BE FLUSH WITH
INSIDE WALL

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 301447
4.6
GAS CARTRIDGE ACTUATOR (GCA) / AGENT RELEASE MODULE (ARM)
The GCA/ARM installation and electrical connection should be the last items completed before the system is
placed into operation. The following sections show the standard hardware required and the procedures
necessary to complete this part of the installation.
4.6.1
2-1/2 (65 mm) VALVE (INVERTED CONTAINER) GCA INSTALLATION
The following components are provided with all Inverted ECARO-25 containers. Use the following procedure to
install the GCA and ARM for these containers. The electrical hardware (conduit, junction box, etc.) can be
changed to suit special conditions or customer preference as needed.
1. Install the 1 x 1/2 (25mm x 15mm) conduit reducing bushing on the Container Actuator Boss. Assemble
a 1 (25mm) locknut on the conduit bushing.
2. Insert the GCA into the Actuator Boss and tighten to approximately 50-90 inch-pounds. Unwrap and
straighten the GCA leads. Be certain that the lead ends are shunted together. Remove all bends, twists
and/or kinks from the wires. Do not remove shunts.
3. Install the 1 (25mm) coupling with the nipple attached onto the bushing, allowing the GCA leads to pass
through the grouping. Tighten the coupling/nipple to the locknut. The face of the bushing and locknut
assembly should be flush with the face end of coupling.
4. Install a second locknut to the open end of the nipple. Remove the knockout blank from upper left side of
the 4-11/16 (120 mm) square conduit box. Pass the GCA leads through the knockout hole and install
the assembly to the box using the third locknut, which is inserted from the inside of the box. Align the box
and tighten securely.
5. Install ARM in the lower right corner of the box using the adhesive strips provided on the back.
4-11/16" SQ.
ELECTRICAL BOX
REDUCING
BUSHING
ELEC. NIPPLE
GCA
ARM
LOCKNUT
CONTAINER
ACTUATOR BOSS
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
LOCKNUT
CONDUIT
COUPLING

Page: 15 of 21
4.6.2
1 (25 mm) and 3 (80 mm) VALVE GCA INSTALLATION
The following components are provided with all ECARO-25 containers utilizing 1 & 3 (25 mm & 80 mm) valves.
Use the following procedure to install the GCA and ARM for these containers. The electrical hardware (conduit,
junction box, etc.) can be changed to suit special conditions or customer preference as needed.
1. Install the 1 x 1/2 (25mm x 15mm) conduit bushing on the Container Actuator Boss. Assemble a 1
(25mm) locknut on the conduit bushing.
2. Insert the GCA into the Actuator Boss and tighten to 50-90 inch-pounds. Unwrap and straighten the GCA
leads. Be certain that the lead ends are shunted together. Remove all bends, twists and/or kinks from
wires. Do not remove shunts.
3. Install the 1 (25mm) conduit coupling onto the bushing, allowing the GCA leads to pass through the
coupling. Tighten all parts. The face of the bushing and locknut should be flush with the face end of
coupling.
4. Remove a 1 (25mm) knockout blank from upper left side of 4-11/16 (120mm) square box. Pass the
leads through the knockout hole. Now pass the leads through the chase nipple, make sure the threaded
end is facing GCA.
5. Secure the chase nipple to the coupling by passing through the knockout hole in the box. Tighten
securely, after aligning the box in an accessible position.
6. Install ARM in the lower right corner of box using the adhesive strips provided on the back.
CONDUIT
COUPLING
REDUCING
BUSHING
CONTAINER
ACTUATOR BOSS
4-11/16" SQ.
ELECTRICAL BOX
GCA
LOCKNUT
CHASE NIPPLE
Page: 16 of 21

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 301447
4.7
CONTAINER ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Each container must have an Agent Release Module (ARM). The ARM is mounted in the container junction box
using the adhesive strips located on the back of the module.
Wiring will vary from system to system, depending on the type of control system used. Consult the system plans
and control panel manual for specific wiring information.
G.C.A. WIRE LEADS TO CONTROL SYSTEM

CONDUIT
ELECTRICAL BOX
WITH A.R.M. MODULE
G.C.A./A.R.M. MOUNTING KIT

(P/N 70-1698)
ACTUATOR BOSS
2 1/2" VALVE
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
G.C.A. WIRE LEADS TO CONTROL SYSTEM

G.C.A./A.R.M. MOUNTING
KIT (P/N 70-1697)
CONDUIT
ACTUATOR BOSS
ELECTRICAL BOX
WITH A.R.M. MODULE
1" AND 3" VALVE

ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 17 of 21
4.7.1
GAS CARTRIDGE ACTUATOR (GCA) SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONS
Before proceeding with the Gas Cartridge Actuator (GCA) lead installation, all system components must be
installed, and the electrical and control systems thoroughly checked out by a factory-trained technician. The
following safety procedures must be observed when handling Gas Cartridge Actuators.
1. Disable the Control Panel and allow ten minutes for the ARM to bleed off all energy before disconnecting
the GCA leads.
2. Gas Cartridge Actuators MUST remain shunted at all times when they are not installed in the ECARO-25
discharge valve.
3. Approved eye protection must be worn when handling and/or installing Gas Cartridge Actuators.
4. Never handle more than one gas cartridge actuator at any given time.
5. DO NOT handle this device when wearing static producing clothes or shoes.
6. DO NOT expose Gas Cartridge Actuators to high heat sources this may greatly affect their service life.
7. DO NOT check Gas Cartridge Actuator continuity using any type of Ohmmeter or other device.
8. If a GCA is suspected of being defective, return it to the factory or to a Fike Authorized distributor for
proper disposal.
9. The Gas Cartridge Actuator fits all (3) Fike container valves.
10. DO NOT install gas cartridge actuators if ground faults are present on the control system.
11. DO NOT install gas cartridge actuators if voltage is present on conduit or equipment.
12. Connect GCA leads only after installing the device in the container discharge valve.
Page: 18 of 21

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 301447
4.7.2
GAS CARTRIDGE ACTUATOR (GCA) INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
After the electrical and control systems have been checked out, proceed with the gas cartridge actuator installation
as follows.
Step 1:
Move the armed/disabled switch on the control panel to the disabled position.
Step 2:
Wait a minimum of 10 minutes to allow capacitors on agent release modules to dissipate their electrical
charge.
Step 3:
Stretch all the leads and find the proper length required for the installation. Remember to allow extra
length for the possibility of servicing the system and the need to shunt in the future. However, do not
allow a quantity that will not safely store within the space provided within the ARM box.
Step 4:
With shunts intact, strip about 1/2" (15mm) of insulation from the red and the blue lead, but keep the
shunt intact. In the middle of the stripped portion, use small pliers to fold the wires in half and crimp.
Step 5:
Insert the stripped sections of the gas cartridge actuators red and blue leads under their respective
screws on the terminal of the agent release module and tighten each screw. For ARM Rev.1, use the
center two terminals. For Fike ARM III, terminate the yellow and green leads in the same manner as the
red and blue leads. The yellow and green terminals are shunted internally and connection to these
terminals provides safety for this pair. DO NOT use these terminals for the red and blue leads. (See
figure below)
Step 6:
Repeat steps 3 through 5 for all containers in the system.
Step 7:
Remove the shunts from the pigtails and isolate each wire. If the wire ends are exposed, cover with
electrical tape and secure against ground faults. These pigtails can be used at a later date to recreate
a shunt and safely remove the wires from the ARM when servicing the system. Install covers on all
electrical boxes.
Step 8:
Check the control panel for any trouble indication, other than the one caused by the disable position of
the armed/disabled switch.
WARNING:
Step 9:
DO NOT ARM THE SYSTEM IF A GROUND FAULT INDICATION IS PRESENT.
If no other trouble condition exist, move the armed/disabled switch to the armed position and reset
the control panel.
WARNING:
The Container(s) is/are NOW ARMED

GAS CARTRIDGE
ACTUATOR LEADS
SHUNTS
ARM
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 19 of 21
4.8
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH P/N 02-9830
To facilitate the connection to the Low Pressure Switch, 1/2 NPT threads are provided. This allows for the
connection of conduit, flexible conduit, seal tight, or similar. Refer to the following details.
PRESSURE
GAUGE
REMOVABLE GAUGE ADAPTER

GCA BOSS
FILL VALVE ASSEMBLY
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
WIRE LEADS
STREET TEE
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH

(P/N 02-9830)
FLEXIBLE-RIGID
CONDUIT FITTING
Installation Detail Top View

10 lb. Container Only
Assembly P/N: 70-1650
FILL VALVE ASSEMBLY
GCA BOSS
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH

(P/N 02-9830)
WIRE LEADS

BRANCH TEE
PRESSURE
GAUGE
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
FLEXIBLE-RIGID
CONDUIT FITTING
Installation Detail Top View

For: 20 1000 lb. Containers
Assembly P/N: 70-1121
Page: 20 of 21

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 301447
4.8.1
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH WIRING
The Low Pressure Switch can be wired for either of two configurations: normally open or normally closed shelfstate (de-energized) conditions. When the container is filled and pressurized, the contacts change state. For
example, a normally open switch configuration will be closed when the container is pressurized. If the pressure in
the container drops below 288 psig (196.5 bar kPa), the contact will return to the open (de-energized) position.
The pressure switch should be wired into a supervised circuit in the control panel used to provide a trouble signal
if the container sees a low-pressure condition. The preferred method would be to wire the switch normally open
(closed under pressure).
For applications utilizing a U.L. listed and FMRC approved Cheetah panel, one switch per FRCM (Fast Response
Contact Module) is recommended. Refer to the Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual for the control
panel being used for specific wiring criteria.
NOTE:
When the cylinder low pressure switch (p/n 02-9830) is connected to a standard supervisory input
circuit, there will be no distinction between a wiring fault and device actuation. This device is to only
be utilized when accepted by the authority having jurisdiction.
SUPERVISORY
CIRCUIT
N/O
COM
SUPERVISORY
CIRCUIT
BLUE
N/O
VIOLET
COM
N/C
N/C
N/O
COM
BLUE
COM
COM
N/C
BLUE
VIOLET
BLACK
N/O
VIOLET
COM
N/C
N/C
VIOLET
BLACK
E.O.L.
E.O.L.
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
BLACK
N/O
VIOLET
N/C
N/O
VIOLET

Page: 21 of 21
SECTION 5 FINAL SYSTEM CHECKOUT
The checkout procedures outlined in this section are intended to represent the minimum requirement for the
extinguishing portion of the system. Additional procedures may be required by the authority having
jurisdiction (AHJ).
The control portion of the system should be thoroughly checked out according to the manufacturer's
recommendations and the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ).
5.1
HAZARD AREA CHECK
A good review of the hazard area is just as important as the proper operation of system components. Certain
aspects about the hazard may have changed, or been overlooked, which could affect overall system
performance. The following points should be thoroughly checked.
5.1.1 AREA CONFIGURATION
The area dimensions should be checked against those shown on the system plan(s). If the area volume has
changed, the agent weight should be recalculated and compared with the agent weight supplied.
The area should also be checked for walls or movable partitions, which have been added or changed. If walls or
partitions have been added, check to see that all areas within the hazard still receive adequate nozzle coverage
and agent distribution.
5.1.2 AREA LEAKAGE
The hazard area should be checked for openings which could allow agent leakage after system discharge.
Openings, such as cable and duct penetrations into the area, should be permanently sealed.
Other sources of leakage should be checked for and sealed, especially in subfloor areas, where potential leak
points are easily overlooked. Door(s) entering the hazard area(s) should be checked for tightness. Door seals
and door sweeps should be installed to minimize leakage. Joints where walls contact floors, or other walls,
should be sealed as these are potential leak points most often overlooked. Wall switch and receptacle boxes
should be sealed. Sub-floor drains must have P- traps and be sealed with a non-evaporating liquid, such as
anti-freeze or mineral oil. All penetrations between floors must be sealed.
5.1.3 ENCLOSURE INTEGRITY DOOR FAN TESTING
Door fan testing provides a method to estimate worst-case room leakage. The door fan calculation method
makes it possible to predict the timeline for a descending interface to fall to a given height and estimate how long
an extinguishing concentration will be maintained within the protected space. This procedure is limited to door fan
technology. This is not intended to preclude alternative technology such as acoustic sensors.
Enclosure integrity testing is not intended to verify other aspects of Clean Agent system reliability; i.e., hardware
operability, agent mixing, hydraulic calculations, and piping integrity. Refer to NFPA Standard 2001, latest edition
for additional test requirements.
The door fan testing procedure should not be considered to be an exact model of a discharge test. The
complexity of this procedure should not obscure the fact that most failures to hold concentration are due to the
leaks in the lower surfaces of the enclosure, but the door fan does not differentiate between upper and lower
leaks. The door fan provides a worst-case leakage estimate that is very useful for enclosures with complex
hidden leaks, but will generally require more sealing than is necessary to pass a discharge test.
Refer to NFPA Standard 2001, latest edition for additional information and door fan test procedures.
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 1 of 2
SECTION 5 FINAL SYSTEM CHECKOUT
5.2
CONTAINERS
Check to make sure all containers and brackets are securely fastened. Check the mounting position of all
horizontally mounted containers. The brass fill valve [located on the discharge valve] must be pointing down.
Check all container pressure gauges. They should be reading 360 PSIG at 70oF (24.8 bar at 21oC). For
temperatures other than 70oF(21oC), reference Section 6, Table 6.3.
The container firing circuit should be checked by connecting an AG1 flashbulb [or equal] in place of each gas
cartridge actuator. Activate the control system automatically. All flashbulbs should flash. This procedure should
be repeated for manual actuation of the control system.
5.3
DISCHARGE PIPING
The discharge piping should be checked to see that it is securely supported and free from any lateral movement.
All joints should be checked for mechanical tightness. Discharge piping shall be pressure tested in accordance
with NFPA 2001, latest eition.
5.4
NOZZLES
Check to see that all nozzles are installed in the proper locations, according to system plans. Refer to Section
1.9 for nozzle identification. Make sure all nozzle set screws are in place and that 180o nozzle discharge orifices
are properly oriented.
Check all nozzle orifices for obstructions and make sure large objects have not been placed in front of the
nozzles that would block the discharge.
If the piping system was changed from the original system plans, make sure the nozzles calculated were done so
using the "as installed" piping configuration.
5.5
AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Operation of auxiliary functions such as door closures, damper closures, air handling shutdown, etc. should be
verified when the control system is activated, both manually and automatically.
WARNING:
If the air handling system is NOT being shut down during system discharge, it must be of the
recirculating type, and enough agent should have been added to compensate for the duct and
plenum volumes.
After all checkout functions have been performed, and the control system checked out according to the
manufacturer's recommendations, proceed with the gas cartridge actuator installation and arming of the system,
as outlined in Section 4.6.
Page: 2 of 2

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
SECTION 6 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The following maintenance procedures and intervals indicated are meant to represent the minimum requirements
for Fike ECARO-25 systems. These procedures do not preclude those required by NFPA 2001 and the authority
having jurisdiction. More frequent service intervals may be necessary if systems are installed in more severe
service applications. This section does not cover maintenance and service procedures for the electrical and
control portions of the system. Consult the appropriate product manuals for those products.
6.1
DISCHARGE PIPING
Every Six Months:

Check the system discharge piping for corrosion and damage. Check all piping supports to make sure they are
tight and all piping is securely supported.
Every Year:
Same as six month inspection. The piping should also be blown out with compressed air or nitrogen to check for
obstructions.
6.2
DISCHARGE NOZZLES
Every Six Months:

Check to see that nozzle orifices are clear and unobstructed, and verify that the orifices are not showing signs of
corrosion.
Make sure the nozzles are aimed or positioned correctly. Verify that the correct nozzle part number is installed at
the proper location in accordance with the system plans.
6.3
Every Three Months:

Check the pressure gauge on each container. The nominal pressure should be 360 PSIG at 70oF (24.8 bar @
21oC); however, the pressure will vary with temperature. In the range of 50F to 80F (10oC to 27oC) the
difference is approximately 2 psig (15 kPa) per degree. If the pressure loss indicated exceeds ten percent of the
nominal pressure, check the container for leaks and repair as necessary.
APPROXIMATE CONTAINER PRESSURE VS. TEMPERATURE

US Standard
Metric
o
Temp.
(oF)
Pressure
(psig)
Temp. ( C)
Pressure
(bar)
32
261
18
40
276
19
50
334
10
21
60
340
16
23
70
360
21
25
80
377
27
26
90
406
32
28
100
464
38
32
110
493
43
34
120
551
49
38
TABLE 6.3
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 1 of 3
Every Six Months:

Verify the weight of the agent in each container matches the agent weight stamped on the label. If the weight
indicates a shortage exceeding five percent of required weight, the container must be removed from service for
repair and/or recharge.
NOTE:
If the container has a liquid level indicator installed, weight verification can be made without the need
for cylinder removal.
WARNING:
6.4
The control panel must be disabled and the GCA must be shunted BEFORE removing any
container to be weighed.
GAS CARTRIDGE ACTUATORS
WARNING:
Gas Cartridge Actuators are pyrotechnic devices that can cause bodily injury and equipment
damage if improperly handled. Refer to Section 4.6.1 for proper handling of these devices.
Before checking or servicing GCAs, disable the system control panel or interface firing module releasing circuit.
Allow ten minutes for the capacitor(s) on the agent release module(s) to dissipate their electrical charge.
Every Six Months:
Check gas cartridge actuator leads and wiring to agent release modules for corrosion. Check for loose or broken
wires.
Every Ten Years:
Replace gas cartridge actuators. Refer to 4.6 for gas cartridge actuator installation procedures.
6.5
CONTAINER TEST AND INSPECTION
ECARO-25 containers shall not be recharged without a retest if more than five years have elapsed since the last
test. The retest consists of a complete external and internal visual inspection in accordance with the Code of
Federal Regulations, Title 49, Section 173.34(e)(10). The CFR requirements also refer to the Compressed Gas
Association (CGA) Pamphlet C-6, Section 3.
Cylinders continuously in service without discharging shall receive a complete external [visual] inspection every
five years. The cylinder does not need to be emptied for this inspection.
All visual inspections must be performed according to the regulations of CFR Title 49 and CGA Pamphlet C-6,
Section 3. All inspections are to be done by CGA / DOT approved inspectors only.
(Reference: NFPA No. 2001, Section 4-2)
Page: 2 of 3

UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476
6.6
PRESSURE GAUGE & LOW PRESSURE SWITCH MAINTENANCE
All Fike ECARO-25 Containers provided with a Removable Gauge Adapter (P/N 70-1574) allow the user to add
or replace the pressure gauge and/or low pressure switch even when the container is charged. This can be
accomplished easily with a little planning and preparation. If you have the parts ready and the tools that you need
on-hand, the process is easy.
CAUTION:
6.6.1
When replacing a gauge or switch on a charged container (or adding a Low Pressure switch), do
not allow the pressure port to remain open (disconnected) for an extended period of time. A
significant quantity of ECARO-25 could be lost from the container.
REPLACING A PRESSURE GAUGE OR LOW PRESSURE SWITCH
Follow these procedures to replace a pressure gauge or low pressure switch on a charged ECARO-25 container.
1. Place Teflon tape on the male thread connection of the device(s) being replaced. DO NOT overlap the end of
the connection the first thread should be uncovered.
2. Remove the device to be replaced.
3. Install the replacement device. It may be necessary to have a second wrench on hand to hold the tee or
removable gauge adapter in place while you perform this step.
4. Check the assembly for leaks using a suitable leak test device. (Refer to the Recharge Manual for
recommendations and leak test procedures.)
6.6.2
ADDING A LOW PRESSURE SWITCH
Follow these procedures to add a low pressure switch to a charged ECARO-25 container.
1. Place Teflon tape on the male thread connections of the pressure switch and street tee provided with the
assembly. DO NOT overlap the end of the connections the first thread should be uncovered.
2. Remove the pressure gauge from the removable gauge adapter. You will need to have a second wrench on
hand to hold the removable gauge adapter in place while you perform this step. DO NOT allow the adapter to
turn this may cause a leakage problem.
3. Thread the street tee into the adapter and tighten the tee should be positioned in the horizontal plane when
complete. A second wrench is required for this step as well. DO NOT allow the gauge adapter to turn.
4. Install the low pressure switch in the side outlet of the tee. Tighten the switch with a wrench. Use a second
wrench to hold the tee in place during this operation.
5. Install the pressure gauge in the tee. The gauge should be facing you and positioned where it can be read
correctly. Use a second wrench to hold the tee in place during this operation.
6. Check the assembly for leaks using a suitable leak test device. (Refer to the Recharge Manual for
recommendations and leak test procedures.)
UL / ULC Ex4623
FM 3014476

Page: 3 of 3
Information in this format is provided as a service to our

customers and is intended only for their use. Others may use it
at their own discretion and risk.
The MSDS format adheres to U.S. standards and regulatory
requirements and may not meet regulatory requirements in other
locations.
This information is based upon technical information
believed to be reliable. It is subject to revision as additional
knowledge and experience are gained. Please return to this
website for the most current version.
FE-25
3016FR
Revised 25-JUN-2002
CHEMICAL PRODUCT/COMPANY IDENTIFICATION

Material Identification
Corporate MSDS Number
CAS Number
Formula
CAS Name
:
:
:
:
DU002868
354-33-6
CHF2-CF3
PENTAFLUOROETHANE
Company Identification
MANUFACTURER/DISTRIBUTOR
DuPont Fluoroproducts
1007 Market Street
Wilmington, DE 19898
PHONE NUMBERS
Product Information
Transport Emergency
Medical Emergency
: 1-800-441-7515 (outside the U.S.

302-774-1000)
: CHEMTREC 1-800-424-9300(outside U.S.
703-527-3887)
: 1-800-441-3637 (outside the U.S.
302-774-1000)
COMPOSITION/INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS
Components
Material
ETHANE, PENTAFLUORO-
CAS Number
354-33-6
%
100
HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION
Potential Health Effects
INHALATION
Gross overexposure may cause: Central nervous system depression
with dizziness, confusion, incoordination, drowsiness or
unconsciousness. Suffocation, if air is displaced by vapors.
Based on animal data, this material may cause: Irregular heart
beat with a strange sensation in the chest, "heart thumping",
apprehension, lightheadedness, feeling of fainting, dizziness,
weakness, sometimes progressing to loss of consciousness and death.
SKIN CONTACT
Immediate effects of overexposure may include: Frostbite, if
liquid or escaping vapor contacts the skin. Significant skin
permeation, and systemic toxicity, after contact appears unlikely.
There are no reports of human sensitization.
ADDITIONAL HEALTH EFFECTS
Increased susceptibility to the effects of this material may be
observed in persons with pre-existing disease of the:
cardiovascular system.
Carcinogenicity Information
None of the components present in this material at concentrations
equal to or greater than 0.1% are listed by IARC, NTP, OSHA or ACGIH
as a carcinogen.
FIRST AID MEASURES

# First Aid
INHALATION:
If concentrations above the recommended levels are inhaled,
immediately move person to fresh air. Keep person calm. If
not breathing, give artificial respiration. If breathing is
difficult, give oxygen.
SKIN CONTACT:
Flush area with lukewarm water. Do not use hot water.
frostbite has occurred, call a physician.
If
EYE CONTACT:
In case of contact, immediately flush eyes with plenty of
water for at least 15 minutes. Call a physician.
INGESTION:
Not a probable route. However, in case of accidental

ingestion, call a physician.
Notes to Physicians
THIS MATERIAL MAY MAKE THE HEART MORE SUSCEPTIBLE TO
ARRHYTHMIAS. Catecholamines such as adrenaline, and other
compounds having similar effects, should be reserved for
emergencies and then used only with special caution.
FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES

Flammable Properties
NOTE: HFC-125 is used as a fire extinguishant.
Flash Point:
No flash point
Flammable Limits in air, % by Volume:

LEL
:
None per ASTM E681
UEL
:
None per ASTM E681
Autoignition: Not determined
Fire and Explosion Hazards:
Cool storage containers to avoid cylinder bursting.
Decomposition may occur with PROLONGED contact with fire.
Contact of welding or soldering torch flame with high
concentrations of HFC-125 can result in visible changes
in the size and color of torch flames. This flame effect
will only occur in concentrations of product well above the
recommended exposure limits, therefore, stop all work and
ventilate to disperse HFC-125 vapors from the work area.
HFC-125 is not flammable in air at temperatures up to 100
deg. C (212 deg. F) at atmospheric pressure. However,
mixtures of HFC-125 with high concentrations of air at
elevated pressure and/or temperature can become combustible
in the presence of an ignition source. HFC-125 can also
become combustible in an oxygen enriched environment (oxygen
concentrations greater than that in air). Whether a mixture
containing HFC-125 and air, or HFC-125 in an oxygen enriched
atmosphere become combustible depends on the
inter-relationship of 1) the temperature, 2) the pressure,
and 3) the proportion of oxygen in the mixture. In general,
HFC-125 should not be allowed to exist with air above
atmospheric pressure or at high temperatures; or in an
oxygen enriched environment. For example, HFC-125 should
NOT be mixed with air under pressure for leak testing or
other purposes.
Extinguishing Media
As appropriate for combustibles in the area.
Fire Fighting Instructions
Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) may be required if

cylinders rupture and contents are released under fire
conditions.
ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES

Safeguards (Personnel)
NOTE: Review FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES and HANDLING (PERSONNEL)
sections before proceeding with clean-up. Use appropriate
PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT during clean-up.
# Accidental Release Measures
Ventilate area, especially low or enclosed places where
heavy vapors might collect. Do not reoccupy area until the
HFC-125 vapor concentration is within recommended levels and
the room atmosphere is safe. Extinguish open flames or
eliminate sources of extremely high temperature that may
produce decomposition products. Comply with Federal, State,
and local regulations on reporting releases.
HANDLING AND STORAGE

Handling (Personnel)
Avoid breathing high concentrations of vapor. Use with
sufficient ventilation to keep employee exposure below
recommended limits. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, and
clothing.
Storage
Clean, dry area.
Do not store above 52 deg C (125 deg F).
EXPOSURE CONTROLS/PERSONAL PROTECTION

Engineering Controls
Normal ventilation for standard manufacturing procedures is
generally adequate. Local exhaust should be used when large
amounts are released. Mechanical ventilation should be used
in low or enclosed places.
Personal Protective Equipment
Impervious gloves should be used to avoid prolonged or
repeated exposure. Chemical splash goggles should be
available for use as needed to prevent eye contact. Under
normal manufacturing conditions, no respiratory protection
is required when using this product. Self-contained
breathing apparatus (SCBA) is required if a large release
occurs.
Exposure Guidelines
Exposure Limits
FE-25
PEL
(OSHA)
TLV
(ACGIH)
AEL * (DuPont)
WEEL (AIHA)
:
:
:
:
None
None
1000
1000
Established
Established
ppm, 8 & 12 Hr. TWA
ppm, 4900 mg/m3, 8 Hr. TWA
* AEL is DuPont's Acceptable Exposure Limit. Where governmentally

imposed occupational exposure limits which are lower than the AEL
are in effect, such limits shall take precedence.
PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES

Physical Data
Boiling Point
Vapor Pressure
Vapor Density
Freezing Point
% Volatiles
Solubility in Water
Odor
Form
Color
Density
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Boiling Point
:
Saturated Vapor Pressure:
Vapor Density
:
Freezing Point
:
% Volatiles
:
Solubility in Water
:
Odor
:
Form
:
Color
:
Density
:
-48.5 C (-55.3 F)
1377 kPa 200 psia at 25 deg C (77 deg F)
4.2 (Air = 1)
-103 C (-153 F)
100 WT%
0.09 WT% @ 25 C (77 F)
Slight ethereal
Liquefied gas
Clear, colorless
1.248 g/cc at 20 deg C (68 deg F) Liquid
-48.5 C (-55.3 F)
1377 kPa (200 psia) at 25 deg C(77
4.2 (Air = 1)
-103 C (-153 F)
100 WT%
0.09 WT% @ 25 C (77 F)
Slight ethereal
Liquefied gas
Clear, colorless
1.248 g/cc at 20 deg C (68 deg F)-
STABILITY AND REACTIVITY

# Chemical Stability
Material is stable under normal storage conditions. In the
presence of open flames or extemely high temperatures,
decomposition may occur.
Incompatibility with Other Materials
Incompatible with alkali or alkaline earth metals- powdered
Al, Zn, Be, etc.
Decomposition
Decomposition products are hazardous. This material can be

decomposed by high temperatures (open flames, glowing metal
surfaces, etc.) forming hydrofluoric acid and possibly carbonyl
fluoride.
As in the case with all HFC fire extinguishants, there is a
potential to produce hazardous thermal decomposition
products. Appropriate caution must be used to ensure that
safe levels of fire extinguishant and decomposition products
exist before allowing personnel to enter the area without
appropriate personal protective equipment.
Polymerization
Polymerization will not occur.
TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION
Animal Data
EYE:
This material has not been tested for eye irritation.
SKIN:
LD50: No information found.
This material has not been tested for skin irritation or
sensitization.
INGESTION:
LD50: No information found.
INHALATION:
4 hour, ALC, rat: > 709,000 ppm (Very low toxicity).
Single exposure to high doses caused: Lethargy. Labored
breathing. Weak cardiac sensitization, a potentially fatal
disturbance of heart rhythm caused by a heightened sensitivity to
the action of epinephrine. Lowest-Observed-Adverse-Effect-Level
for cardiac sensitization: 100,000 ppm.
Repeated exposure caused: No significant toxicological effects.
No-Observed-Adverse-Effect-Level (NOAEL): 50,000 ppm
ADDITIONAL TOXICOLOGICAL EFFECTS:
No animal data are available to define the following effects of
this material: carcinogenicity, reproductive toxicity. In animal
testing this material has not caused developmental toxicity.
Tests have shown that this material does not cause genetic damage
in bacterial or mammalian cell cultures, or in animals. This
material has not been tested for its ability to cause permanent
genetic damage in reproductive cells of mammals (not tested for
heritable genetic damage).
DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS
Waste Disposal
Treatment, storage, transportation and disposal must be in
accordance with applicable Federal, State, and local
regulations.
TRANSPORTATION INFORMATION
Shipping Information
DOT/IMO
Proper Shipping Name
Hazard Class
UN No.
DOT/IMO Label
:
:
:
:
PENTAFLUOROETHANE
2.2
3220
NONFLAMMABLE GAS
REGULATORY INFORMATION
U.S. Federal Regulations
TSCA Inventory Status
: Reported/Included.
TITLE III HAZARD CLASSIFICATIONS SECTIONS 311, 312

Acute
Chronic
Fire
Reactivity
Pressure
:
:
:
:
:
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
LISTS:
SARA Extremely Hazardous Substance
CERCLA Hazardous Substance
SARA Toxic Chemical
-No
-No
-No
OTHER INFORMATION
NFPA, NPCA-HMIS
NPCA-HMIS Rating
Health
Flammability
Reactivity
: 1
: 0
: 1
Personal Protection rating to be supplied by user depending on use

conditions.
Additional Information
MEDICAL USE: CAUTION: Do not use in medical applications
involving permanent implantation in the human body. For other
medical applications see DuPont CAUTION Bulletin No. H-50102.
---------------------------------------------------------------------The data in this Material Safety Data Sheet relates only to the
specific material designated herein and does not relate to use in
combination with any other material or in any process.
Responsibility for MSDS : MSDS Coordinator
>
: DuPont Fluoroproducts
Address
: Wilmington, DE 19898
Telephone
: (800) 441-7515
# Indicates updated section.
End of MSDS
CARTRIDGE ACTUATED DEVICES, INC.

51 Dwight Place, Fairfield, New Jersey 07004
074055
26 AUG 04
page 1 of 3
HAZARDOUS CHEMICAL MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET

(Conforms to the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.1200)
I.
PRODUCT IDENTITY:
Cartridges, power device, UN0323

1.4S, Pkg. Gr. II
US DOT EX-9609043
(Cartridge Assembly, CAD P/N: 074055,
Fike P/N: 02-4134)
Net Explosive Weight 1.500 grams per unit

51 Dwight Place
Fairfield, N.J. 07004
Telephone Number: 973-575-1312
Prepared by CAD Engineering
24 HOUR EMERGENCY PHONE #

IN U.S.A.: 800-424-9300
OUTSIDE U.S.A.:
202-483-7616 CALL COLLECT
FIRE, SPILL, EMERGENCY ONLY
Material(s) described is/are:
Electro-Pyrotechnic device and by-products of

initiation.
II.
HAZARDOUS INGREDIENTS AND EXPOSURE LIMITS: N/A
Chemical and common name of Hazardous chemical ingredients:

** COMMON NAME
Nitroglycerin
Nitrocellulose
Potassium Chlorate
Lead Thiocyanate
III.
CAS NO.
000055-63-0
009004-70-0
003811-04-9
000592-87-0
PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Boiling point:
Specific gravity:
Vapor Pressure:
% Volatile:
N/A
N/A
N/D
Negligible.
Solubility in water:
pH:
Evaporation Rate:
N/A
N/D
N/A

IV.
FIRE, EXPLOSION AND REACTIVITY HAZARD DATA
DANGER
Extremely Flammable --EXPLOSIVE-Keep away from heat and keep shunted.
Flash Point:
Flammable Limits:
Auto-Ignition Temperature:
Extinguishing Media:
Special Fire-Fighting Procedures:
Grounding Procedure:
Stability Considerations:
Incompatibility:
Hazardous decomposition products:
Hazardous products of combustion:
Hazardous Polymerization:
V.
074055
26 AUG 04
page 2 of 3
N/D
None, Explosive Device
225 F
Dry, Chemical Extinguisher
None.
Insure that the device is shunted and handlers are
grounded.
None
Shock, Flame, Friction, Temperature high heat and
static sources.
None
Flame, high heat, carbon monoxide, carbon
dioxide, oxides of nitrogen, hydrogen chloride,
trace cyanide compounds, oxides and salts of lead.
Under certain conditions, device can propel high
velocity particles on initiation.
None
HEALTH HAZARD DATA
Emergency and First Aid Procedure:

Treat burns and any laceration by cleaning and applying sterile bandages. Transport individual for
further medical treatment.
Primary Route of Entry:
N/A (cartridge is intact)

Inhalation of actuation fumes.
Cancer Information:
Not listed as carcinogen by N.T.P. if cartridge is

intact
Reported effects on Humans:
Respiratory irritant.
Other:
N/A (cartridge is intact)

VI.
074055
26 AUG 04
page 3 of 3
SPILL AND LEAK PROCEDURES
Steps to be taken if material is spilled: ( applies only if cartridge is ruptured)

Clean spill after liberally wetting down with solvent (Acetone, Butyl Acetate or Alcohol) by wiping
material up with paper towels or with cotton rag. Keep a fire extinguisher present. Wear safety glasses,
protective gloves, and non-static generating clothing during clean up or transfer operation.
Waste Disposal Method:
Disposal must be in accordance with local, state, and Federal regulations.
VII.
APPLICABLE CONTROL MEASURES
Appropriate Hygienic Practices:

Personal Protective Equipment:
N/A
Safety glasses & grounding devices (ground straps and/or
conductive footwear). When firefighting, wear
NIOSH approved gas respirator.
Work Practices:
Avoid high temperatures; keep the cartridge
shunted and wear personal protective equipment.
Work behind shielding.
Handling and Storage precaution:
Recommended storage, 70F
Engineering Controls:
Work with device in a shielded area, keep shunted
until installed.
Protective Measures during Repair and Maintenance:
Eliminate static discharge sources. Avoid flame
or high heat. Shield the device when working
with the device.
DISCLAIMER: The above information was taken from various published and unpublished sources
and is believed to be accurate and to represent the best information currently available
to us. However, we make no warranty, expressed or implied, of the accuracy of such
information, and assume no liability resulting from its use. Users should make their
own investigation to determine suitability of the information for their particular
purposes.
THIS UNIT IS NOT USER SERVICEABLE. DO NOT ATTEMPT DOWNLOADING OR

DISASSEMBLING.
Net Reactive Material Content: 1.5 grams maximum per unit.

P.O. Box 610
Blue Springs, Missouri 64013 U.S.A.
800-979-FIKE(3453)
Fax: (816) 229-4615
http://www.fike.com
CHEETAH XI 50 INTELLIGENT SUPPRESSION CONTROL SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
Fikes Cheetah Xi 50 (P/N 10-071) is a state-of-the-art true intelligent digital
peer-to-peer modular suppression control system. It is ideal for all life safety
and property protection applications, and is intended for both commercial and
industrial use. It is designed with extensive programmability that allows the
almost-instantaneous relay of information and the ability to perform process
management tasks with ease including HVAC shutdowns, Emergency Voice
Evacuation Systems, damper control, door closure, elevator recall, security, and
CCTV/Building Management Awareness.
This cost-effective panel comes standard with one Signaling Line Circuit (SLC)
that support 50 devices, with any mix and match of sensors and modules. The
Cheetah Xi 50 utilizes extreme intelligence via its Eclipse based sensors including
photoelectric, photoelectric with heat, ionization, photoelectric duct, and heat
detectors. It also utilizes Eclipse based modules such as the monitor, mini-monitor,
relay, intelligent pull station, releasing and control modules. With Cheetah Xi 50,
every device communicates as a peer on the signaling line circuit. These peers not
only communicate up-to-the-second information to the control panel, but also
communicate with each other. Each device is capable of generating accurate and
highly detailed information. Conventional suppression alarm systems give a general
idea of the fires location, while the Cheetah Xi 50s intelligent sensors indicate
precisely which device is in an alarm state. This intelligence provides incredible
speed with response times as little as one-quarter second between manual pull
station and notification appliance. Its flexibility allows you to attach the intelligent
devices that are required for your specific application.
The System is programmed with either the Windows based field configuration
software C-LINX or through a comprehensive password protected front-panel
keypad programming option. This option allows you to quickly update and adapt
to any future requirements or changes in the system such as changes in occupancy
or remodeling. The sophisticated control panel circuitry coupled with the software
allows you to read specific information and sensitivity levels of the different eclipse
devices. The sensors also compensate for any changes due to age, contamination, or
other environmental factors.
Fike Cheetah Xi 50
APPROVALS
UL - S2203
FM - 3029134
CSFM - 7165-0900:149
MEA - 307-05-E Vol. 2
City of Denver
State of CA Seismic - OSP-007
SYSTEM OPERATION
The Cheetah Xi 50 Control system operates on a Zone and State relationship. In this design, all input and output devices
must be assigned to at least one zone (253 are available), each one defining an area to be protected. Input devices can be
assigned up to 253 zones (one zone is typical) and output devices may be configured for up to 254 zones.
These devices use the SLC signaling line circuit to exchange status information with other devices as well as with the
control panel. When an input is activated, it is configured to cause its associated zone to enter into an operational state. Any
detection device will cause the associated zone to enter into an alarm state. The output devices are configured to activate to
protect and evaluate the endangered zone. This system is completely modular, allowing you the flexibility to design a system
that is just right for your application. A typical configuration is shown on page 2 that illustrates the communications of a
Cheetah Xi 50 system.
Form No. D.1.20.01-2

704 S.W. 10th Street P.O. Box 610 Blue Springs, Missouri 64013-0610 U.S.A. (816) 229-3405 www.fike.com
Page 1
TYPICAL CONFIGURATION
STANDARD FEATURES
The Cheetah Xi 50 features are designed to save lives and protect your valuable capital investments through unprecedented
speed, intelligence and flexibility. These features include:
General
All Cheetah Xi 50 panels come standard with a controller, transformer and enclosure (see ordering information for
details)
254 user defined zones
80 character, backlit LCD display
Real time clock
3200 event history buffer
Critical process monitoring
One-person Walktest capability
Disable by zone, device or circuit
Drill function at panel and remote
Provides solenoid releasing operation
Alarm verification capability
Easy to add/remove devices
Diagnostic menus
Local piezo with distinct event tones
10 Status LEDs to easily identify system status
Optional point ID DACT Module available
Supports up to 31 peripheral devices such as Remote Display, LED Graphic and Zone Annunciators,
Ethernet Module and Multi-Interface Module
USB Port for programming
Page 2
CHEETAH XI 50 CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS

The Controller contains the power supply, microprocessor, hardware interface, display and keypad.
Enclosure
Steel Enclosure 22.1 H x 14.35 W x 3.25 D (Back-box dimensions)
Flush or surface mounting
Removable door for ease of installation
Available in red or grey
Dead Front option available to isolate panels internal electronics and wiring
Power
5.25 amps useable alarm power, (2 A standby)
Operation from 120VAC/60 Hz or 240 VAC 50/60 Hz transformer
Two 24V DC, 1.75A continuous auxiliary power outputs
Supports up to 75AH of batteries
Controller consumes 0.116A @ 24VDC in normal standby mode and 0.176A @ 24 VDC in alarm
Signaling Line Circuit
Address devices with Infrared (IR) tool, similar to remote control device
One SLC loop, NFPA style 4, 6 or 7
50 devices on loop
True peer-to-peer digital protocol for extremely fast and reliable communications
Auto-learn function
Automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment
Automatic holiday sensitivity adjustment
Acclimate operation for sensors
IR Tool provides ability to read sensitivity levels or perform remote test of device
Devices contain multi-color LED for quick reference of device status
Sensors provide early warning pre-alarm detection and can also provide a summing feature. (up to eight sensors)
Maximum Resistance: 70 ohms
Maximum Capacitance: .60 uf
12,000 ft. maximum distance total from panel to last device.
NAC Circuit
Two NAC circuits standard
Rated at 24VDC, 1.75 Amps maximum Class A or B
Built-in synch protocol for both System Sensor and Gentex devices
Operating Environment
32-120F (0-49C)
93% relative humidity, non-condensing
Page 3
OPTIONAL MODULES AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES

Point ID Dact (Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter) Module (P/N 10-2528)*
The DACT provides interface with Central Station monitoring systems. It is available with 5 contact zones of connection
OR the intelligent serial interface which provides point ID information. The Contact ID form is the preferred reporting
format. It provides a four digit account code followed by a three digit event code, a two-digit group number, and a three
digit contact number, all of which are used to provide specific point identification. This DACT can also provide an SIA or
4/2 Pulse reporting format. Note: 10-2476 is the same as 10-2528 with enclosure for external mounting.
14 Button Remote Display Unit ( P/N 10-2646)*
The Fike fourteen button remote display (FRD), provides remote annunciation of Fikes intelligent control panels. The
FRD is provided with a 80 character, backlit display which performs two display functions. First, it duplicates information
provided by the control panel. Additionally the FRD has the capability of viewing system conditions such as alarm,
trouble, supervisory, etc. The FRD also includes six buttons (Enter, Escape, +/-, left/right arrow) that are used for
navigation through events as well as configuration of the device. Additionally it has eight programmable buttons that can
be configured for things such as reset, silence, acknowledge, drill, or process. A key lock is included for additional security
access. Dimensions: 9-1/2 L x 4 H x 2-1/4 D. Weight: 0.5 lbs.
10 Button Remote Display Unit (P/N 10-2631)*
The Fike ten button remote display (FRD), provides remote annunciation of Fikes intelligent control panels. The FRD is
provided with a 80 character, backlit display which performs two display functions. First, it duplicates information provide
d by the control panel. Additionally the FRD has the capability of viewing system conditions such as alarm, trouble,
supervisory, etc. The FRD also includes six buttons (Enter, Escape, +/-, left/right arrow) that are used for navigation
through events as well as configuration of the device. Additionally it has four dedicated buttons that perform the following
functions: drill, silence, acknowledge, and reset. A key lock is included for additional security access. Dimensions: 7-3/4 L
x 4 H x 2-1/4 D. Weight: 0.5 lbs.
2 Button Remote Display Unit (P/N 10-2630)*
The Fike two button remote display (FRD), provides remote annunciation of Fikes intelligent control panels. The FRD
is provided with an 80 character, backlit display which performs two display functions. First, it duplicates information
provided on the main control panel. Additionally, the FRD has the capability of viewing system conditions such as alarm,
trouble, supervisory, etc. Dimensions: 5-3/4 L x 4 H x 1-1/2 D. Weight: 0.5 lbs.
Fike Zone Annunciator (P/N 10-2667)*
The Fike twenty zone remote annunciator is used with Fikes intelligent control systems to provide remote annunciation for
up to twenty zones at a location remote from the control panel. The module provides a tabular display that incorporates 20
red alarm and 20 yellow trouble/supervisory LEDs. Each LED is programmable and can provide visual indication of alarm,
trouble/supervisory conditions for zones or individual points. Communication between the intelligent control panels and
remote annunciator is via the RS485 peripheral bus. When an event from the control panel is received the appropriate LED
will illuminate based on the annunciators configuration. Dimensions: 4 W x 5-3/4 H x 2 1/2D .
Fike Ethernet Module (P/N 10-2627)*
This Module provides the ability to remote monitoring of multiple Cheetah Xi 50 panels via Ethernet/IP. This module
is connected to the Cheetah Xi 50 via the peripheral connections at P6 and will be configured as a peripheral device. In
order to utilize the remote monitoring capability, a network ID must be assigned to each panel for identification purposes.
This module connects to the Panel at P6 per and also requires 24 volts DC from the panel to P6 24A . See the 06-388
Ethernet Module manual for more details. Dimensions: 8 H x 6 W x 3-1/2 D.
Note: 10-074 is the same module with enclosure.
Fike Multi-Interface (P/N 10-2583)*
The primary function of the multi-interface module is that it is used as a printer interface for the Cheetah Xi 50 control
panels. It provides specific event and point information to be communicated from the panel to the printer. It is compatible
with either a Epson FX-890 or equivalent IEEE 1284 standard printer or for UL required applications, the Keltron 90 series
UL listed fire alarm printer. It is also approved for the Precise Vision computer connection or as a Gateway to existing
Cheetah Classic Network. Dimensions: 8 H x 6 W x 3-1/2 D.
Note: 10-069 is the same module with enclosure.
See ordering information for individual data sheet that gives additional specifications
Page 4
PROGRAMMING CONFIGURATION
Software
All configuration variables can be assigned using C-LINX software. This software provides the designer the capability to
provide a pre-engineered design. The user can review the construction plans to assign the zones. The configuration can also
be set to identify the exact device circuit operation desired along with the custom message information.
IR Configuration Tool (P/N 55-051)*
This optional hand-held infrared IR remote control is available on the Cheetah Xi 50 system. This small device can be used
in the field to simplify installation, testing and service. It operates with 2 AA batteries and can read device information such
as loop, address, branch, service dates and initiate device test. This tool:
Communicates bi-directionally with any Cheetah Xi 50 device
Easily addresses devices by setting the loop and address
Quickly reads sensitivity levels, date serviced, device type, loop and address, manufacture date
Immediately records the date serviced
Instantly initiates walk test of any sensor or module
Accesses and tests hard-to-reach sensor or module (such as duct detector) through any other device on loop
FIELD WIRING DIAGRAM
See ordering information for individual data sheet that gives additional specifications
Page 5
ORDERING INFORMATION
FIKE P/N
Description
10-071-c-p Cheetah Xi 50 System, includes Controller, Enclosure, and Transformer

or
c: (R=Red, G=Grey) p: (1=120V, 2= 240V )
10-071-c-p-d d=Deadfront
Cheetah Xi 50 System Controller
10-2622
(included with 10-071-c-p and L)
10-2628-c Dead Front Option c: (R=Red, G=Grey)
Peripheral Devices
10-2630
2 Button Expanded Protocol Remote Display
10-2631
10-2646
10-2667
Zone Annunciator
10-2627
Ethernet Module
10-2583
Multi-Interface Module
10-2528
Point ID DACT (Internal Mounting)
Intelligent Sensors
63-1052
Photoelectric Smoke Sensor Non-Isolator Version
63-1058
Photoelectric Smoke Sensor Isolator Version
63-1053
Photo/Heat Combination Sensor Non-Isolator Version
63-1059
Photo/Heat Combination Sensor Isolator Version
60-1039
Thermal Sensor Non-Isolator Version
60-1040
Thermal Sensor Isolator Version
67-033
Ion Sensor Non-Isolator Version
67-034
Ion Sensor Isolator Version
63-1057
Duct Sensor Non-Isolator Version
63-1062
Duct Sensor Isolator Version
63-1056
Duct Housing
Intelligent Sensor Bases
63-1054
6" Sensor Base Non-Isolator Version
63-1060
6" Sensor Base Isolator Version
63-1055
4" Sensor Base Non-Isolator Version
63-1061
4" Sensor Base Isolator Version
63-1064
Sounder Base
63-1063
Relay Base
Intelligent Modules
55-045
Mini-Monitor Module Non-Isolator Version
55-050
Mini-Monitor Module Isolator Version
55-041
4" Monitor Module Non-Isolator Version
55-046
4" Monitor Module Isolator Version
20-1063
Intelligent Pull Station Non-Isolator Version (Fire)
20-1064
Intelligent Pull Station Isolator Version (Fire)
20-1343
Intelligent Pull Station Non-Isolator Version (Agent)
55-042
Supervised Control Module Non-Isolator Version
55-047
Supervised Control Module Isolator Version
10-2360
Series Solenoid Diode/Resistor (Needed for solenoids)
10-2413
Masterbox Interface
55-043
Relay Module Non-Isolator Version
55-048
Relay Module Isolator Version
55-052
Releasing Control Module Non-Isolator Version
55-053
Releasing Control Module Isolator Version
10-1832
ARM III Agent Release Module
10-2748
Impulse Release Module (IR)
Programming Parts
55-051
Infrared (IR) Remote Control Tool
06-327
C-LINX Software
10-2629
Interface cable, USB/A Male to USB/B Male
10-2477
DACT Programmer
Individual
Datasheet #
D.1.20.01
D.1.20.01
P.1.103.01
P.1.107.01
P.1.108.01
P.1.118.01
D.1.22.01
P.1.85.01
D.1.18.01
P.1.88.01
P.1.88.01
P.1.89.01
P.1.89.01
P.1.90.01
P.1.90.01
P.1.91.01
P.1.91.01
P.106.01
P.106.01
P.106.01
P.1.98.01
P.1.98.01
P.1.99.01
P.1.99.01
P.101.01
P.101.01
P.1.93.01
P.1.93.01
P.1.92.01
P.1.92.01
P.1.65.01
P.1.65.01
P.1.104.01
P.1.94.01
P.1.94.01
P.1.95.01
P.1.95.01
P.1.96.01
P.1.96.01
C.1.04.01
IV.1.15.01
P.1.97.01
Copyright Fike Corporation All Rights Reserved.

Form No. D.1.20.01-2 June, 2011 Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Page 6
MINI MONITOR MODULE

DESCRIPTION
The Mini Monitor Module (P/N 55-045 & 55-050) provides a single, Class B
initiating device circuit (IDC) capable of monitoring normally open contact fire alarm
and supervisory devices. In addition to monitoring the connected contacts, the module
will monitor the wiring to the device for open circuits. The module has a single panel
controlled red LED to indicate device status. The isolator version of the module
(P/N 55-050) provides complete short circuit isolation for installations requiring NFPA,
Style 7 wiring.
The module is compatible with Fikes CyberCat and Cheetah Xi intelligent control
panels. Its operating parameters are configured using the panels programming
software and are stored within non-volatile RAM in the module. This on-board
intelligence allows each module to communicate its status directly to other devices
connected to the panel. This peer-to-peer digital protocol results in less information
that needs to be sent between the module and the host control panel, resulting in faster,
more reliable communication.
SPECIFICATIONS
Normal Operating Voltage:
Standby Current:
IDC Voltage:
Alarm Current:
Maximum IDC Wiring Resistance:
Temperature Range:
Humidity:
Dimensions:
Wire Length:
Accessories:
Mounting:
15 to 30 VDC
485 A max. (continuous broadcasts)
5.4 VDC max.
2 mA (red LED on)
100
32F to 120F (0C to 49C)
10 to 93% RH Noncondensing
1.31 H x 2.73 W x 0.61 D
(33 mm H 69 mm W 15 mm D)
6.5 inches (165 mm)
39 k End of Line Resistor P/N 10-2625 included
14 k Short Detect Resistor, P/N 10-2530, must be ordered separately
Inside standard electrical box behind monitored device
Fike P/N
55-045
55-050
20-1071
20-1072
55-051
Description
Mini Monitor Module - Non-isolator
Mini Monitor Module - Isolator
Accessories
Control Module Barrier
Surface Mount Box
Configuration IR Tool
APPROVALS
UL - S3705
FM - 3021590 (isolator) 3023166 (non-isolator)
MEA - 376-06-E
CSFM - 7300-0900:140
Form No. P.1.93.01-3
704 S. 10th Street P.O. Box 610 Blue Springs, Missouri 64013-0610 U.S.A. (816) 229-3405 (816) 229-4615 www.fike.com
MODULE DIMENSIONS
WIRE COLOR DEFINITIONS

Red
(+) SLC in/out
Red
(+) SLC in/out
Black
(-) SLC in/out
Purple
(+) Supervised Input
Yellow
(-) Supervised Input/(-) SLC in/out

Form No. P.1.93.01-3 August, 2009 Specifications are subject to change without notice.
CONTROL MODULE
DESCRIPTION
The Fike Control Module (P/N 55-042 & 55-047) is used to switch an external power
supply to notification appliances or release solenoids used for sprinkler operation, or to
activate Fikes Masterbox Interface module (P/N 10-2413), which is used on a Local Energy
Type Auxiliary Fire Alarm System. The module is capable of Class A or Class B wiring. The
device will monitor the wiring (while external power is not switched to the auxiliary devices)
to the connected device for open and short circuits. The module will monitor the external
power input for loss of power (DC voltage supplies only). The isolator version of the
module (P/N 55-047) provides complete short circuit isolation for installations requiring
NFPA Style 7 wiring.
The module is compatible with Fikes CyberCat and Cheetah Xi intelligent control panels.
Its operating parameters are configured using the panels programming software and are
stored within non-volatile RAM in the module. This on-board intelligence allows each
module to communicate its status directly to other devices connected to the panel. This peer-to-peer digital protocol results
in less information that needs to be sent between the module and the host control panel, resulting in faster, more reliable
communication.
SPECIFICATIONS
Standby Current:
Alarm Current:
Maximum NAC Circuit Wiring Resistance:
Power Supply Monitor:
Temperature Range:
Humidity:
Dimensions:
Accessories:
Mounting:
Current Rating
3A
2A
1A
0.5A
0.9A
0.7A
Maximum Voltage
30 VDC
30 VDC
30 VDC
30 VDC
70.7 VAC
70.7 VAC
15 to 30 VDC
630 A max. average (continuous broadcasts)
2 mA (red LED on)
100 ohms
Normal Range: 9 to 80 VDC
Trouble Range: 0 to 2 VDC
32F to 120F (0C to 49C)
4.17H x 4.26W x 1.22D (106 mm H x 108 mm W x 31 mm D)
39 k End of Line Resistor P/N 10-2625 (included)
Wall cover plate (included)
P/N 20-1072 Surface Mount Electrical Box
P/N 20-1071 Control Module Barrier
P/N 10-2360 Solenoid Series Impedance
Mounts to a 4 x 4 x 2 1/8 Junction Box for flush mounting or on a
surface mount box (P/N 10-2072) for surface mounting
Load Description
Resistive
Resistive
Inductive (L/R=2 ms)
Inductive (L/R=5 ms)
Resistive
Inductive (PF=.035)
Application
Non-Coded
Coded
Coded
Coded
Non-Coded
Non-Coded
Form No. P.1.94.01-3

Fike P/N
55-042
55-047
Description
Supervised Control Module - Non-isolator
Supervised Control Module - Isolator
Accessories
Surface Mount Box
20-1071
20-1072
55-051
APPROVALS
UL - S2203
FM - 3021590 (non-isolator) 3023166 (isolator)
MEA - 8-05-E
CSFM - 7165-0900:137
MODULE DIMENSIONS
TERMINAL DEFINITIONS
T1
(+) SLC in/out
T8
(+) 24 VDC External Power in/out
T2
(-) SLC in/out
T9
(-) 24 VDC External Power in/out
T3
(+) SLC in/out
T10
(+) 24 VDC External Power in/out
T4
(-) SLC in/out
T11
NAC (+) Class A/B
T5
No Connection
T12
NAC (-) Class A/B
T6
No Connection
T13
NAC (-) Class A
T7
(-) 24 VDC External Power in/out
T14
NAC (+) Class A

RELEASING MODULE
DESCRIPTION
Releasing Control Module (P/N55052/55-053) is a device programmed to supervise
either an agent release module(s) or a solenoid. This module can only be used for one type
of application at one time (either supervising up to six agent release modules or one
solenoid, but never both simultaneously). This module also monitors the external power
input for loss of power. A tri-color LED is located on the front of module to provide instant
device status.
SPECIFICATIONS
SLC:
External Supply:
Standby Current:
Activation Current:
Agent Releasing Module:
Solenoid:
Temperature Range:
Humidity:
Dimensions:
Accessories:
Mounting:
Normal Operating Voltage: 24 VDC Nominal

Standby Current: 450 A max. average (continuous broadcasts)
Activation Current: 6.0 mA (red LED on)
Normal Operating Voltages: 24 VDC Nominal
450 A
6 mA
Supervisory Loop Voltage: 20 to 28 V
Supervisory Loop Current (Normal): 13 mA
Supervisory Loop Voltage: 3.3 V
Supervisory Loop Current (Normal): 30 mA
32F to 120F (0C to 49C)
4.17H x 4.26W x 1.22D (106 mm H x 108 mm W x 31 mm D)
2.7 k End of Line Resistor P/N 10-2165 (included)
Wall cover plate (included)
Surface Mount Electrical Box P/N 20-1072
Mounts on a 4 x 4 x 2 1/8 J-Box
Fike P/N
55-052
55-053
20-1071
20-1072
55-051
Description
Releasing Module (Cheetah Xi Only) - Non-isolator
Releasing Module (Cheetah Xi Only) - Isolator
Accessories
Surface Mount Box
APPROVALS
UL - S2203
FM - 3023436
MEA - 376-06-E
CSFM - 7300-0900:143
Form No. P.1.96.01-1

(This page is left blank intentionally)

INTELLIGENT PHOTOELECTRIC SENSOR

DESCRIPTION
The Fike Intelligent Photoelectric, spot-type smoke sensors (P/N 63-1052 & 63-1058)
have sensing chambers that utilize the light scattering principle to detect smoke. The
sensing chamber employs features that minimize the effect of settled dust on performance.
The sensor is designed with tri-color LEDs to indicate detector status. A remote LED
annunciator (P/N 02-3868) is available as an accessory. It can be configured to follow
the sensor LED operation or be independently controlled. The isolator version (P/N
63-1058) provides complete short circuit isolation for NFPA 72, Style 7 wiring if used
with an isolator base.
The detector is compatible with Fikes CyberCat and Cheetah Xi intelligent control panels. Its operating parameters are
configured using the panels programming software and are stored within non-volatile RAM in the detector. This on-board
intelligence allows each detector to communicate its status directly to other devices connected to the panel. This peerto-peer digital protocol results in less information that needs to be sent between the detector and the host control panel,
resulting in faster, more reliable communication.
SPECIFICATIONS
Standby Current:
Alarm Current:
Humidity Range:
Temperature Range:
Height:
Diameter:
Weight:
Detector Spacing:
15 to 30 VDC
481A max. @ 24 VDC (continuous broadcasts)
2 mA max. @ 24 VDC (LEDs on)
10% to 93% Relative Humidity, non-condensing
32F to 120F (0C to 49C )
2.1 inches (51 mm) installed in 63-1054 Base
5.2 oz. (147 g)
30 ft. (9.1 m) maximum
APPROVALS
UL - S911
FM - 3021590 (isolator) 3023166 (non-isolator)
MEA - 7-05-E
CSFM - 7272-2010:0100
Form No. P.1.88.01-3

Fike P/N
63-1052
63-1058
Manf. Model No.
63-1054
63-1060
63-1055
63-1061
02-10373
20-1083
20-1084
63-1063
63-1064
20-1085
20-1405
20-1087
02-4986
20-1089
20-1090
55-051
RMK400
SMK400E
A10-29-400
F110
RA100Z
XR2B
XP-4
T55-127-000
BCK-200B
Description
Photoelectric Smoke Detector - Non-Isolator
Photoelectric Smoke Detector - Isolator
Mounting Bases
6 Flanged Mounting Base - Non-Isolator
6 Flanged Mounting Base - Isolator
4 Flangeless Mounting Base - Non-Isolator
4 Flangeless Mounting Base -Isolator
Recessed Mounting Kit
4 Flangeless Surface Mounting Kit
6 Flanged Surface Mounting Kit
Relay Base
Sounder Base
Accessories
Retrofit Flange
Remote LED Annunciator
Detector Removal Tool (20-1089 included)
Extension for 02-4985 (515 ft)
Detector Removal Head
Black Detector Kit

Form No. P.1.88.01-3 June, 2011 Specifications are subject to change without notice.
INTELLIGENT HEAT DETECTOR

DESCRIPTION
The Fike Intelligent Heat detector (P/N 60-1039 & 60-1040) is a fixed
temperature/rate-of-rise detector that can be programmed for a set-point range
of 135-170F for ordinary detection, or 175-190F for intermediate detection.
Detectors in the intermediate range may be programmed for either fixed or
15F rate-of-rise application. The detector is designed with tri-color LEDs to
indicate detector status. A remote LED annunciator (P/N 02-3868) is available
as an accessory. It can be configured to follow the sensor LED operation or be
independently controlled. The isolator version (P/N 60-1040) provides complete
short circuit isolation for NFPA 72, Style 7 wiring if used with an isolator base.
The detector is compatible with Fikes CyberCat and Cheetah Xi intelligent control panels. Its operating parameters are
configured using the panels programming software and are stored within non-volatile RAM in the detector. This on-board
intelligence allows each detector to communicate its status directly to other devices connected to the panel. This peerto-peer digital protocol results in less information that needs to be sent between the detector and the host control panel,
resulting in faster, more reliable communication.
SPECIFICATIONS
Standby Current:
LED Current:
Operating Humidity Range:
Installation Temperatures: .
Fixed Temperature Rating:
Rate of Rise Detection:
Spacing for Thermal Detectors:
Height:
Diameter:
Weight:
15 to 30 VDC
215 A max. @ 24 VDC (continuous broadcasts)
2 mA max. @ 24 VDC (LEDs on)
10% to 93% Relative Humidity Non-condensing
-4F to 100F (-20C to 38C); 135F-174F setpoint
-4F to 150F (-20C to 66C); 175F-190F setpoint
135F (57C)190F (88C); programmable
Responds to greater than 15F/min.(8C/mm); programmable
Detectors set between 135o to 155oF or 175o to 190oF : 50 ft (15.24 m) spacing
Detectors set between 160o to 170oF: 15 ft. (4.57 M) spacing
2.1 inches (51 mm)in 63-1054 base
6.1 inches (155 mm) installed in 63-1054 base
4.1 inches (104 mm) installed in 63-1055 base
4.8 ounces (137 g)
Form No. P.1.90.01-4

Fike P/N
60-1039
60-1040
Manf. Model No.
63-1054/63-1060*
63-1055/63-1061*
02-10373
20-1083
20-1084
63-1063
63-1064
RMK400
SMK400E
A10-29-400
20-1085
20-1405
20-1087
02-4986
20-1089
20-1090
55-051
F110
RA100Z
XR2B
XP-4
T55-127-000
BCK-200B
Description
Fixed Temperature/ROR/Hi-Temp Thermal Detector - Non-isolator
Fixed Temperature/ROR/Hi-Temp Thermal Detector - Isolator
Mounting Bases
6 Flanged Mounting Base
4 Flangeless Mounting Base
Recessed Mounting Kit
4 Flangeless Surface Mounting Kit
6 Flanged Surface Mounting Kit
Relay Base
Sounder Base
Accessories
Retrofit Flange
Black Detector Kit
APPROVALS
UL - S2101
FM - 3021590
MEA - 63-05-E
CSFM - 7270-0900:0152

Form No. P.1.90.01-4 June, 2011 Specifications are subject to change without notice.
PLUG-IN DETECTOR BASE

DESCRIPTION
The Six Inch Detector Base (P/N 63-1054/63-1060) is designed for use with any of Fikes
intelligent CyberCat/Cheetah Xi plug-in detectors. The base is approximately 2 inches larger
than the sensor head. The base mounts directly to a 3 inch and 4 inch octagon boxes, 4
inch square boxes (with or without plaster ring) and single gang boxes. The base provides
terminals for connection of an optional remote LED annunciator (P/N 02-3868).
SPECIFICATIONS
Diameter:
Wire Gauge:
6.1 inches (155 mm);

63-1054/63-1061 4.0 inches (102 mm)
12 to 18 AWG (0.9 to 3.25 mm2)
Fike P/N
Manf. Model No.
63-1054
63-1060
20-1085
02-3868
20-1087
02-4986
20-1089
20-1090
55-051
F110
RA400Z
XR2B
XP-4
T55-127-000
BCL-20B
63-1052
63-1058
63-1053
63-1059
60-1039
60-1040
67-033
67-034
Description
Mounting Bases
6 Flangeless Mounting Base - Non-isolator
6 Flangeless Mounting Base - Isolator
Accessories
Retrofit Flange
Black Detector Kit
Compatible Sensors
Photo - Non-isolator
Photo - Isolator
Photo/Heat - Non-isolator
Photo/Heat - Isolator
Heat - Non-isolator
Heat - Isolator
Ion - Non-Isolator
Ion - Isolator
APPROVALS
UL - S911
FM - 3021590 (non-isolator) 3023166 (isolator)
MEA - 9-05-E
CSFM - 7300-0900:138
Form No. P.1.98.01-2
TERMINAL LAYOUT
TERMINAL DEFINITIONS
No.
Function
T1
(+) SLC in/out
T2
No Connection
T3
(-) SLC in/out, (-) Remote Annunciator
T4
(+) Remote Annunciator

MS SERIES
www.gamewell.fci.com
Model MS-2, MS-2H
The MS-2 manual fire alarm stations are
dual action devices. These stations require that the outer door be lifted to expose the actuation door which is then
pulled forward to operate the alarm toggle
switch. The actuation door is now locked
in the readily observable alarm position.
To reset the station, a key (common to
FCI control panels) must be inserted and
turned turn clockwise, opening the
station. Closing the station resets the
switch automatically.
An optional breakglass rod is available
for positive indication of station operation.
FEATURES
Model MS-2L (Institutional)

Operation of the Model MS-2L institutional station requires that a special key
be used to release the actuation door
before it can be operated.
Optional DPST Switch (MS-2-D)
NON-CODED, MANUAL
FIRE ALARM STATIONS
Single and Dual Action Versions

Tumbler Lock for Test and Reset
Keyed Alike with FCI Control Panels
Rugged Metal Construction
Positive Indication of Operation
over 180 Viewing Angle
Surface or Semi-flush Mounting
Shock and Vibration Resistant
MS-2
Institutional Version (MS-2L)

Optional FIRE SUPPRESSION
SYSTEM RELEASE Markings
(MS-2H)
MS-2H
Model MS-2-D (Multiple Contact)

The MS-2-D features a DPST switch for
multiple signaling via wire lead connections.
MS-6
Model MS-6 (Single Action)

The MS-6 station is a single action device, requiring only the pulling of the action door to release the compressed button switch. It is available either with terminals (MS-6T) or wire leads (MS-6).
The station resets in the same
manner as the MS-2. The reset key is
common to FCI control panels.
An ISO 9001 Company

Specifications are provided for information only, are
not intended to be used for installation purposes and
are believed to be accurate. However, no responsibility is assumed by Gamewell-FCI for their use.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
2006
All Rights Reserved.
9020-0358 Rev. I
Page 1of 2
MS SERIES
AGENCY APPROVALS
UL (Std 38)
FM (MS-2)
(MS-6, MS-6T)
C.S.F.M.
NYC-BS&A (MS-2)
NYC-MEA (MS-6)
File S2465
OJ3A9.AY/12880
1D4A7.AY
7150-0694:107
960-81-SA
103-93-E
SPECIFICATIONS
Extruded 6063/T5 aluminium
Clear anodize
Material (MS-2, MS-6)

Doors (MS-2, MS-6)
Switch Type
MS-2
MS-6
Contact Material
Contact Ratings
MS-2
MS-6
Dimensions (overall)
MS-2, MS-6
Enclosed toggle
Enclosed push button
Silver plated bronze or copper
6 amp. max. @ 30 VDC (resistive)
0.5 amp. max. @ 30 VDC (resistive)
5 H x 3.4 W x 2.8 D (12.7 cm x 8.64 cm x 7.11 cm)
Part No.
1100-0615
1100-0634
Model
MS-2
MS-2H
1100-0621
1100-0617
1100-0632
1100-0633
2520-0023
1120-0206
MS-2L
MS-2-D
MS-6
MS-6T
BB-2
Description
Dual action fire alarm station
Dual action station with
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM RELEASE markings
Institutional fire alarm station
Dual action station with DPST switch
Single action station, wire leads
Single action station, terminals
Surface back box for MS-2, MS-6 stations
Package of two replacement breakglass rods for MS-2 station
Specifications are provided for information only, are not intended to be used for installation purposes and are believed to be accurate.
However, no responsibility is assumed by Gamewell-FCI, for their use. Specifications subject to change without notice.
2006 All Rights Reserved
GAMEWELL-FCI
12 Clintonville Road, Northford, CT 06472 - Tel: (203) 484-7161 - Fax: (203) 484-7118
www.gamewell.fci.com
9020-0358 Rev. I Page 2 of 2
CONTROL ACCESSORIES
MANUAL RELEASE SWITCH - 10-1638
DESCRIPTION
The Manual Release Switch is a dual actuation device which provides a means of manually
discharging the automatic fire extinguishing system when used in conjunction with the Fike
Control Panel.
To operate the Manual Release Switch pull the spring clip safety pin (breaking the seal) and
depress the button. The switch will remain engaged until released by unlocking the button
with a key. A single normally open contact block is provided. The front housing of the
Release Switch is constructed of stainless steel with the keyed red plastic release button
centered and bordered in black trim. The dimensions of this component are 4-1/2 wide,
4-9/16 high and 2-3/8 deep, and it may be mounted to a standard 4 electrical box or others.
(Reference Data Sheet P.1.71.01).
SYSTEM ABORT SWITCH - 10-1639

DESCRIPTION
The System Abort Switch is designed to be used in conjunction with other system equipment.
It provides a temporary manual means by which the system actuation circuit may be
interrupted, when operated prior to the circuit actuation. The unit employs a momentary
contact push button switch. While depressed, the switch causes the agent release circuit to be
manually delayed. Upon release of the Abort Switch, the release circuit will follow the specific
configuration of the system control panel.
The Abort Switch may be mounted to a standard 4 electrical box or others (Reference Data
Sheet P.1.71.01).
MAIN-RESERVE SWITCH - 10-1640

DESCRIPTION
The Main to Reserve switch is used with systems that incorporate main and reserve
(back-up) agent storage. The switch may utilize 1 or 2 Form C Contact blocks which will
provide an electrical path to either the Main or Reserve releasing modules.
Following a system discharge, reset any field devices. Once all devices are in a stand-by status
the Main-Reserve Switch may be moved to the Reserve position. The Control Panel may
then be reset to ta normal mode for uninterrupted Fike protection. The empty main
containers can be removed for recharge. After the containers in the Main system have been
recharged, the switch may be returned to the Main position.
The switch may be mounted to a standard 4 electrical box or others
(Reference Data Sheet P.1.71.01).
APPROVALS
UL Listed
FM Approved
CSFM Approved
BSA
Form No. P.1.72.01-1

KEYED ABORT SWITCH - 10-1642

DESCRIPTION
The System Abort Switch is designed to be used in conjunction with other system equipment.
It provides a temporary manual means by which the actuation circuit may be interrupted
before automatic actuation occurs. The unit employs a keyed contact switch with two
positions, normal and abort. While in the extreme left hand position the Abort Switch is in the
normal mode. In the extreme right hand position the release circuit is manually delayed.
The Keyed Abort Switch may be mounted to a standard 4 electrical box or others (Reference
Data Sheet P.1.71.01).
Note: Keyed abort is not recognized by approval/listing agencies.
KEYED REMOTE RESET - 10-1641

DESCRIPTION
The Keyed Remote Reset Switch provides a method for resetting the Control Panel from a
remote location. To reset the Control Panel simply insert the key and turn in a clockwise
direction. Upon release of the key the spring loaded switch will return to its original position.
The front housing of the Keyed Remote Reset Switch is constructed of stainless steel and is
4-1/2 wide, 4-9/16 high and 2-3/8 deep. It may be mounted to a standard 4 electrical
box or others (Reference Data Sheet P.1.71.01)
Note: All numbers in this section reference switches and stainless steel face plates only, back box
assemblies are not provided. All switches are CSA approved.

Form No. P.1.72.01-1 March, 2006 Specifications are subject to change without notice.
SUPPRESSION DISCONNECT SWITCH

DESCRIPTION
The Suppression Disconnect is a keyed switch that enables the operator to put
the suppression release circuit that the switch is connected to in a DISARMED
condition. It electrically isolates the connected release device from the associated
control panels releasing circuit and provides a supervisory contact to allow
monitoring by a control panel. This allows the operator to work in the area
protected by the suppression system without accidentally releasing the system.
The switch can be ordered with or without status LEDs (Green ARMED and
Red DISARMED). The LEDs provide positive indication of the status of the
releasing circuit. LEDs require 24 VDC auxiliary power from the associated
control panel for operation.
Switch with LEDs
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Voltage:
Current Consumption:
Circuit Limitations:
Dimensions (LxWxD):
Weight:
Operating Temp:
Operating Humidity:
Contact Ratings:
Mounting:
15 30 VDC
13.1 mA (LED active)
Class B only
4.5 in. x 4.5 in. x 2.125 in.
(11.5cm x 11.5cm x 5.4cm)
0.55 lb. (0.25 kg)
0 to 49 C (32to 120 F)
93% RH
8A @ 24 VDC Resistive
4A @ 24 VDC Inductive
Two-gang masonry box (Raco 691 or equal)
APPROVALS
UL - S3217
Fike P/N
Description
10-2698
Suppression Disconnect Switch, no LEDs
10-2699
Suppression Disconnect Switch, with LEDs
Form No. P.1.124.01-2

WIRING DIAGRAM
Switch without LEDs
Switch with LEDs

Form No. P.1.124.01-2 January, 2011 Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Outdoor Commander Series

Evacuation Signals
WGEC24/
WGES24
Applications
The Outdoor Commander Series offers dependable visible and/or audible
alarms for all outdoor needs.
S E R I E S
Included with the WGE Series is the GOE or GOELP outdoor enclosure. The
enclosure is made of high quality Lexan material, providing protection from
weather related conditions and allowing the necessary full candela
output. This highly constructed enclosure meets various installation
requirements including deterring moisture from entering the enclosures.
The Outdoor Series is equipped with the 4 mounting plate which incorporates
the Super-Slide feature that allowes the installer to easily test for
supervision. The product also features a locking mechanism which
secures the product to the bracket without any screws showing.
The WGE Series also features the Checkmate - Instant Voltage Verification
feature which allows the installer to check the voltage without removing the
signal.
The WGE Series strobe has a minimal operation current and has a minimum
flash rate of 1Hz and can vary up to 2Hz regardless of input voltage.
The WGE Series appliances are UL 464 and UL 1638 listed for use with fire
protective systems and are warranted for three years from date of purchase.
Standard Features
Nominal Voltage 24VDC
Unit is Shipped with UL1638 listed WGES24-75 Candela Strobe
or WGEC24-75 Candela Horn/Strobe
Unit Dimensions: GOE 5.75 High x 4.75 Wide x 4.18 Deep
GOELP 5.75 High x 4.75 Wide x 3.25 Deep
To Obtain Outdoor Horn, Must Order GEH24 and GOE/GOELP
Separately
Super-Slide - Ease of Supervision Testing
Checkmate - Instant Voltage Verification
Lower Installation and Operating Costs
Switch Selection for High dBA
Switch for Mechanical and 2400Hz Tone
Switch for Continuous Tone
Tamperproof Re-entrant Grill
Wide Voltage Range 16-33 VDC or FWR
Separate Horn and Strobe Functions
Synchronize Strobe and/or Horn by Using Gentex
Synchronization Control Module
Listed for UL1638 when used with the GOE or GOELP enclosure
GOE/GOELP Made of Clear Lexan - Provides Maximum Visibility and
Reliability for effective Visible Signaling - Allowing Full 75cd Output
Input Terminals 12 to 18 AWG
Faceplate Available in Red or Off-White
GOELP
GOE
WGES24 and WGEC24 Shipped

with the GOE or GOELP
Outdoor Enclosure
Product Listings
TM
TM
BFP (City of Chicago)

BS+A/MEA #285-91E-XVI
CSFM 7135-0569:122 (WGEC)
7125-0569:127 (WGES)
7300-0569:124 (ENCLOSURE)
UL 464 & UL 1638 Listed
Product Compliance
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA 4.28.3)
NFPA 72
GEH24 - 24 Volt Low Profile Evacuation Horn

Model Number
GEH24-R
GEH24-W
Part Number
Nominal
Voltage
24 VDC
24 VDC
904-1205-002
904-1207-002
Reverberant dBA @
10ft. Per UL 4641
70-82
70-82
In Anechoic Room
dBA @10ft.
100
100
NOTE: Must order the GOE or GOELP separately when using the GEH24 in an outdoor application.
WGES24 - 24 Volt Low Profile Evacuation Outdoor Strobe

Model Number
WGES24-75WR
WGES24-75WW
WGES24-75PWR
WGES24-75PWW
WGES24-75WRLP
WGES24-75WWLP
WGES24-75PWRLP
WGES24-75PWWLP
Part Number
904-1219-002
904-1220-002
904-1247-002
904-1248-002
904-1261-002
904-1263-002
904-1262-002
904-1264-002
Nominal
Voltage
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
Candela
(UL 1638)
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
Model designations:
"W" = Wall Mount
"R" = Red Faceplate
"W" = Off-White Faceplate
"P" = Plain (no lettering)
Plain units are non-returnable.
LP = Low Profile (GOELP Enclosure)
WGES24 and WGEC24
shipped with the GOE or
GOELP Outdoor Enclosure
WGEC24 - 24 Volt Low Profile Evacuation Outdoor Horn/Strobe

Model Number
WGEC24-75WR
WGEC24-75WW
WGEC24-75PWR
WGEC24-75PWW
WGEC24-75WRLP
WGEC24-75WWLP
WGEC24-75PWRLP
WGEC24-75PWWLP
Part Number
904-1217-002
904-1218-002
904-1245-002
904-1246-002
904-1257-002
904-1259-002
904-1258-002
904-1260-002
Nominal
Voltage
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
Candela
(UL 1638)
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
Reverberant dBA @
10ft Per UL 464
70-82
70-82
70-82
70-82
70-82
70-82
70-82
70-82
In Anechoic Room
dBA @ 10ft.
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
Notes:
The WGE Series is listed for outdoor use. Indoor Operating Temperature: 32to 120F (0 to 49C).
Outdoor Operating Temperature: -31to 150F (-35 to 66C).
For nominal and peak current across UL regulated voltage range for filtered DC power and unfiltered
(FWR [Full Wave Rectified]) power, see installation manual.
Gentex does not recommend using a coded or pulsing signaling circuit with any of our strobe products
WGE Series Product Strobe Current Ratings
Candela
75cd
24 VDC
112mA
180mA
UL Max1
Horn Mode
Temp 3 2400Hz
Temp 3 Mechanical
Temp 3 Chime
Continuous 2400Hz
Continuous Mechanical
Continuous Chime
Whoop
WGE Series Product Horn Current Ratings

Minimum dBA @ 10ft.
Minimum dBA @ 10ft.
per UL464 (HIGH)
per UL464 (LOW)
78
71*
76
70*
70*
66*
81
74*
80
72*
70*
66*
82
69*
Regulated 24VDC Max.

Operating @ High Setting (mA)
28
25
15
28
25
15
56
*Operating the horn in this mode at this voltage will result in not meeting the minimum UL reverberant sound level required for public mode fire protection service. These settings are acceptable only for private mode fire alarm use. Use the high dBA setting for public mode application (not applicable when using the chime tone. The chime tone is
always private mode).
Notes: The sound output for the temporal 3 tone is rated lower since the time the horn is off is averaged into the sound output rating. While the horn is producing a tone in
the temporal 3 mode its sound pressure is the same as the continuous mode.
To obtain the horn/strobe current draw, add the strobe current draw and the horn current draw.
1
RMS current ratings are per UL average RMS method. UL max current rating is the maximum RMS current within the listed voltage range (16-33VDC for 24VDC units) (8-17VDC for
12VDC units). For strobes the UL max current is usually at the minimum listed voltage (16VDC for 24VDC units) (8VDC for 12VDC units). For audibles the max current is usually at the
maximum listed voltage. For unfiltered FWR ratings, see installation manual.
Mounting Super-Slide
Super-Slide Mounting Plate:

Mounts to GOELP outdoor box.
Super-Slide Mounting Plate:

Mounts to GOE outdoor box.
Switch Locations
The access holes are provided in the back of the terminal

block to allow the voltage to be measured directly without
removing the device. Typically this would be done at the
end of the line to confirm design criteria. Most measurements will be taken using the S+ and S- locations
although access is provided to other locations. NOTE:
Care should be taken to not short the test probes.
Conventional WGE Series Wiring Diagrams
WGEC24/
WGES24
S E R I E S
Wiring Diagram WGE Series with Gentex Synchronization Module
Note: See Technical Bulletin 015 for proper synchronization module for application.
Architect & Engineering Specifications:

The audible and/or visible signal shall be Gentex WGE Series or approved equal and shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. per UL 1638
and/or UL 464. The notification appliance shall also be listed with the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) and the Bureau of Standards and Appeals
(NYC).
The notification appliance (combination audible/visible) shall produce a peak sound output of 100dBA or greater at as measured in an anechoic
chamber. The signaling appliance shall also have the capability to silence the audible signal while leaving the visible signal energized with the use of a
single pair of power wires. Additionally, the user shall be able to select either continuous or temporal tone output with the temporal signal having the ability
to be synchronized.
The audible/visible and visible signaling appliance shall also maintain a minimum flash rate of 1Hz or up to 2 Hz regardless of power input voltage.
The appliance shall have an operating current of 112mA or less for the 75Cd strobe circuit. The appliance shall also be capable of meeting the candela
requirements of the ADA (75cd).
The appliance shall be polarized to allow for electrical supervision of the system wiring. The unit shall be provided with a mounting bracket with
terminals with barriers for input/output wiring and be able to mount to a single gang or double gang box or double workbox without the use of an adapter
plate. The unit shall have an input voltage range of 16-33 volts with either direct current of full wave rectified power for 24 volt models.
The appliance shall be capable of testing supervision without disconnecting wires. Also the appliance shall be capable of mounting to a surface back
box. The unit shall also be able to verify voltage at the unit without removing unit.
The appliance has extended temperature range of -31 to 150F (-35 to 66 C). The appliance shall satisfy virtually all outdoor and severe
environment applications. The GOE Enclosure is includes a gasket that must be inserted between the box and mounting bracket. There are drain holes
in the back box to allow for drainage, the seal on the GOE Enclosure is not water tight. The GOELP Enclosure includes a weather seal for mounting to
wall and intended for use with universal electrical box. To allow for drainage, bottom edge of enclosure is not water tight.
1 unit per carton
3 pounds per carton
Important Notice:
These materials have been prepared by Gentex Corporation ("Gentex") for informational purposes only, are
necessarily summary, and are not purported to serve as legal advice and should not be used as such.
Gentex makes no representations and warranties, express or implied, that these materials are complete
and accurate, up-to-date, or in compliance with all relevant local, state and federal laws, regulations and
rules. The materials do not address all legal considerations as there is inevitable uncertainty regarding
interpretation of laws, regulations and rules and the application of such laws, regulations and rules to particular fact patterns. Each person's activities can differently affect the obligations that exist under applicable
laws, regulations or rules. Therefore, these materials should be used only for informational purposes and
should not be used as a substitute for seeking professional legal advice. Gentex will not be responsible for
any action or failure to act in reliance upon the information contained in this material.
551-0047-02
r
Lowe
nt
e
r
r
u
C
!!
Draw
Commander3 Series
Selectable Candela Evacuation Signals
Applications
The Commander3 Series is a low profile strobe and horn/strobe combination that
offers dependable audible and visual alarms and the lowest current available.
GEC3/GES3
12 & 24 VDC
S E R I E S
The GE3 Series 24VDC offers tamperproof field selectable candela options of 15,
30, 60, 75, and 110 candela. The 12VDC offers tamperproof field selectable
candela options of 15, 30, 60, and 75 candela.
The Commander3 Series horn offers a continuous or synchable temporal three in
2400Hz and mechanical tone, a chime and whoop tone. All tones are easy for
the professional to change in the field by using switches.
The GE3 Series has a minimal operation current and has a minimum flash rate
of 1Hz regardless of input voltage.
The Commander3 Series is shipped with the standard 4" metal mounting plate
which incorporates the popular Super-Slide feature that allows the installer to
easily test for supervision. The product also features a locking mechanism which
secures the product to the bracket without any screws showing.
The Commander3 also features the Checkmate - Instant Voltage Verification
feature which allows the installer to check the voltage drop draw and match it to
the blueprint.
The GE3 Series appliances are ANSI/UL 464 and ANSI/UL 1971, listed for use
with fire protective systems and are warranted for three years from date of purchase.
Standard Features
Nominal voltage 12VDC and 24VDC
24VDC units have field selectable candela options of 15, 30, 60, 75 & 110
12VDC units have field selectable candela options of 15, 30, 60 & 75
GEH horn is available in 12VDC or 24VDC
Super-Slide Bracket - Ease of Supervision Testing
Unit Dimensions: 5 high x 4.5 wide x 2.5 deep
Synchronize strobe and/or horn with Gentex AVSM Control Module
Prewire entire system, then install signals
Lower installation and operating costs
Input terminals 12 to 18 AWG
Switch selection for high or low dBA
Switch for chime, whoop, mechanical and 2400Hz tone
Tamperproof re-entrant grill
Switch for continuous or temporal 3 (not available on whoop tone)
Surface mount with the GSB (Gentex Surface Mount Box)
Silence horn while strobes remain flashing
Wide voltage range 8-17.5VDC (12VDC units) 16-33VDC or FWR (24VDC units)
Faceplate available in red or off-white
Product Listings
ANSI/UL 464 & ANSI/UL 1971 Listed

FM Approved
CSFM: 7135-0569:122 (GEC3-24 & GEH-24)
7125-0569:123 (GES3-24)
7125-0569:129 (GES3-12)
7135-0569:130 (GEC3-12 & GEH-12)
MEA: 285-91-E (GEC3-24 & GES3-24)
580-06-E (GEC3-12 & GES3-12)
Product Compliance
NFPA 72
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
Quality Management System is certified
to: ISO 9001:2008
GEH 12VDC or 24VDC Low Profile Evacuation Horn

Model
Number
GEH12-R
GEH12-W
GEH24-R
GEH24-W
Part
Number
904-1239-002
904-1241-002
904-1205-002
904-1207-002
Nominal
Voltage
12VDC
12VDC
24VDC
24VDC
Reverberant dBA @
10ft., per ANSI/UL 464
62-82
62-82
62-82
62-82
In Anechoic Room
dBA @10ft.
100
100
100
100
GES3 12VDC or 24VDC Selectable Candela, Low Profile Evacuation Strobe

Model
Number
GES3-12WR
GES3-12WW
GES3-24WR
GES3-24WW
Part
Number
904-1235-002
904-1237-002
904-1321-002
904-1319-002
Nominal
Voltage
12 VDC
12 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
Candela
(ANSI/UL 1971)
15, 30, 60, 75
15, 30, 60, 75
15, 30, 60, 75, 110
15, 30, 60, 75, 110
Model Designations:
W = Wall mount
R = Red Faceplate
W = White Faceplate
All units are available in plain (no lettering).

Plain units are non-returnable.
ALERT bezel available
AGENT bezel available
GEC3 12VDC or 24VDC Selectable Candela, Low Profile Evacuation Horn/Strobe

Model
Number
GEC3-12WR
GEC3-12WW
GEC3-24WR
GEC3-24WW
Part
Number
904-1231-002
904-1233-002
904-1317-002
904-1315-002
Nominal
Voltage
12 VDC
12 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC
Candela
(ANSI/UL 1971)
15, 30, 60, 75
15, 30, 60, 75
15, 30, 60, 75, 110
15, 30, 60, 75, 110
Reverberant dBA @
10ft., per ANSI/UL 464
62-82
62-82
62-82
62-82
In Anechoic Room
dBA @ 10ft.
100
100
100
100
GE3 Product Strobe Current Ratings (mA)

12VDC (8-17.5 Volts)
24VDC (16-33 Volts)
Max1
Max1
12VDC
Candela
UL
106mA
131mA
186mA
237mA
15cd
30cd
60cd
75cd
110cd
24VDC
UL
30mA
35mA
66mA
80mA
103mA
92mA
141mA
260mA
312mA
UP TO
30%
Current
Draw
Reducti
on
42mA
60mA
97mA
116mA
157mA
GE3-12 Product Horn Current Ratings
GE3-24 Product Horn Current Ratings
Minimum dBA
@ 10ft., per
UL 464 (HIGH)
76
Minimum dBA
@ 10ft., per
UL 464 (LOW)
69*
Regulated 12VDC
Max. Operating @
High Setting (mA)
29
Temp 3 Mechanical
75
68*
26
Temp 3 Chime
Continuous 2400Hz
Continuous Chime
62*
79
78
63*
60*
74*
72*
61*
13
29
26
13
Whoop
78
71*
55
Horn Mode
Temp 3 2400Hz
Minimum dBA
@ 10ft., per
UL 464 (HIGH)
Minimum dBA
@ 10ft., per
UL 464 (LOW)
Regulated 24VDC
Max. Operating @
High Setting (mA)
Temp 3 2400Hz
78
71*
28
Temp 3 Mechanical
76
70*
25
Temp 3 Chime
Continuous 2400Hz
70*
81
80
66*
74*
72*
15
28
25
Continuous Chime
Whoop
70*
82
66*
69*
15
56
Horn Mode
NOTES:
Operating temperature: 32to 120F (0 to 49 C). The GE3 Series is not listed for outdoor use.
The sound output for the temporal 3 tone is rated lower since the time the horn is off is averaged into the sound output rating. While the horn is
producing a tone in the temporal 3 mode its sound pressure is the same as the continuous mode.
For nominal and peak current across UL regulated voltage range for filtered DC power and unfiltered (FWR [Full Wave Rectified]) power, see
installation manual. 12VDC models are DC only.
Gentex does not recommend using a coded or pulsing signaling circuit with any of our strobe products (see Technical Bulletin 014).
*Operating the horn in this mode at this voltage will result in not meeting the minimum UL reverberant sound level required for public mode fire protection service. These
settings are acceptable only for private mode fire alarm use. Use the high dBA setting for public mode application (not applicable when using the chime tone. The chime tone
is always private mode).
1
RMS current ratings are per UL average RMS method. UL max current rating is the maximum RMS current within the listed voltage range (16-33VDC for 24VDC units) (8-17VDC for
12VDC units). For strobes the UL max current is usually at the minimum listed voltage (16VDC for 24VDC units) (8VDC for 12VDC units). For audibles the max current is usually at
the maximum listed voltage. For unfiltered FWR ratings, see installation manual.
Mounting Super-Slide
Tone Switch Locations

TONE
Mechanical Temporal 3
Mechanical - Continuous
2400Hz - Temporal 3
2400Hz - Continuous
Chime - Temporal 3
Chime - Continuous
Whoop
Whoop
SWITCH POSITION
3
4
5
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Note:
- Switch Positions 1 and 2 in the OFF position to
select isolated horn and strobe power inputs
- Switch Position 6 ON = HIGH dBA
- Switch Position 6 OFF = LOW dBA
Gentex Super-Slide Mounting Bracket: Allows the installer to

pre-wire the system, test for system supervision, remove the signal
head until occupancy, switch out Gentex signals without changing
mounting brackets and has locking edge connector for snap-in-place
installation.
Die Cast Metal Mounting Plate: Mounts to single gang, double gang 4"
square boxes or GSB box.
Candela Selection
The access holes are provided in the back of the terminal

block to allow the voltage to be measured directly without
removing the device. Typically this would be done at the
end of the line to confirm design criteria. Most measurements will be taken using the S+ and S- locations although
access is provided to other locations. NOTE: Care
should be taken to not short the test probes.
Conventional Wiring Diagrams for Emergency Notification Evacuation Series
GEC3/GES3
12 & 24 VDC
S E R I E S
Wiring Diagram GE3 Series with Gentex Synchronization Module
Note: See Technical Bulletin 015 for proper synchronization module for application.
Note: When synchronizing the GE3 12VDC Series, the AVSM synchronization module MUST be used.
Architect & Engineering Specifications

The audible and/or visible signal shall be Gentex GE3 Series or approved equal and shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. per UL 1971
and/or UL 464. The notification appliance shall also be listed with Factory Mutual Listing Service (FM), the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) and the
Bureau of Standards and Appeals (NYC).
The notification appliance (combination audible/visible) shall produce a peak sound output of 100dBA or greater at 12VDC or 24VDC as measured in an
anechoic chamber. The signaling appliance shall also have the capability to silence the audible signal while leaving the visible signal energized with the
use of a single pair of power wires. Additionally, the user shall be able to select either continuous or temporal tone output with the temporal signal having
the ability to be synchronized.
Unit shall be capable of being installed so that any unauthorized attempt to change the candela setting will result in a trouble signal at the fire alarm
control panel.
The audible/visible and visible signaling appliance shall also maintain a minimum flash rate of 1Hz or up to 2Hz regardless of power input voltage. The
appliance shall have an operating current of 55mA or less at 24VDC for the 15Cd strobe circuit and 106mA or less at 12VDC for the 15Cd strobe circuit.
The appliance shall be polarized to allow for electrical supervision of the system wiring. The unit shall be provided with a mounting bracket with terminals and barriers for input/output wiring and be able to mount to a single gang or double gang box or double workbox without the use of an adapter plate.
The unit shall have an input voltage range of 16-33 volts with either direct current or full wave rectified power for 24VDC models or a voltage range of
8-17.5 volts for 12VDC models.
The appliance shall be capable of testing supervision without disconnecting wires. Also the appliance shall be capable of mounting to a surface back
box. The unit shall also be able to verify voltage at the unit without removing unit.
24 units per carton
28 pounds per carton
Important Notice:
These materials have been prepared by Gentex Corporation ("Gentex") for informational purposes only, are
necessarily summary, and are not purported to serve as legal advice and should not be used as such.
Gentex makes no representations and warranties, express or implied, that these materials are complete and
accurate, up-to-date, or in compliance with all relevant local, state and federal laws, regulations and rules.
The materials do not address all legal considerations as there is inevitable uncertainty regarding interpretation of laws, regulations and rules and the application of such laws, regulations and rules to particular fact
patterns. Each person's activities can differently affect the obligations that exist under applicable laws, regulations or rules. Therefore, these materials should be used only for informational purposes and should not
be used as a substitute for seeking professional legal advice. Gentex will not be responsible for any action
or failure to act in reliance upon the information contained in this material.
551-0050-04
Rechargeable Sealed Lead-Acid Battery
PS-12180
12 Volt 18.0 Amp. Hrs.
Features:
Absorbent Glass Mat (AGM) technology for
superior performance.
Valve regulated, spill proof construction
allows safe operation in any position.
Power/volume ratio yielding unrivaled
energy density.
Rugged plastic case and cover
Approved for transport by air. D.O.T., I.A.T.A.,
F.A.A. and C.A.B. certified.
U.L. recognized under file number MH 20845.
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Nominal Voltage....................................................................................................................................................... 12 volts (6 cells in series)
Nominal Capacity
20 hour rate (900mA to 10.50 volts) .................................................................................................................................... 18.0 A.H.
10 hour rate (1.7A to 10.50 volts) ........................................................................................................................................ 17.0 A.H.
5 hour rate
(3.2A to 10.50 volts) ........................................................................................................................................ 16.0 A.H.
1 hour rate
(11.1A to 09.00 volts) ..................................................................................................................................... 11.1 A.H.
15 min rate
(34.3A to 09.00 volts) ........................................................................................................................................ 8.6 A.H.
Approximate Weight....................................................................................................................................................... 12.6 pounds (5.7 kg)

Energy Density (20 hour rate).............................................................................................. 1.54 Watt-hours/cubic inch (94.0 Watt-hours/l)
Specific Energy (20 hour rate)................................................................................................. 16.5 Watt-hours/pound (36.6 Watt-hours/kg)
Internal Resistance (Fully Charged Battery)................................................................................................... 12 milliohms (approximately)
Maximum Discharge Current ( <_ 7 Min.).................................................................................................................................... 54 amperes
Maximum Short-Duration Discharge Current ( <_ 10 Sec.)..................................................................................................... 180 amperes
Terminal configurations ................................................................... PS-12180 NB: Tin plated brass post with 5mm nut & bolt connectors
PS-12180 F: Quick disconnect AMP, INC. Faston tabs, 0.250 x 0.032
Shelf Life % of nominal capacity at 68o F (20o C)
1 Month.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 97%
3 Months.................................................................................................................................................................................... 91%
6 Months.................................................................................................................................................................................... 83%
Operating Temperature Range
Charge.................................................................................................................................................................... -4oF (-20oC) to 122oF (50oC)
Discharge............................................................................................................................................................... -4oF (-20oC) to 140oF (60oC)
Case ............................................................................................................................................................................................... ABS Plastic
TECHNICAL DATA:
PS-12180
Discharge Characteristics
100
(V)
Charging is not
necessary unless
100% of capacity
is required.
80
Charging before
5oC
use is necessary
(41oF) to help recover
full capacity.
60
40oC
(104oF)
40
30 C
o
(86 F)
Charge may fail

to restore full
capacity. Do not
let batteries reach
this state.
20oC
(68oF)
14.0
13.0
12.0
11.0
10.0
9A
9.0
Final
Voltage
8.0
0
0
Ambient Temperature 20 C (68 F)
Terminal Voltage
Capacity Retention Ratio (%)
Shelf Life and Storage
4 6
8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Standing Period (Months)
3.6A
1.8A 0.9A
18A
36A
1.2
2.4
12
24 36 48 1
min.
4 6 8 10
hrs.
20 40
Discharge Time
20
15
10
80
60
Float Charging Voltage
2.25 - 2.30 V/Cell
40
Final
Voltage
10.5V
hrs.
20
1
Years
Life Characteristics in Cyclic Use

120
9.0V
10
80
5
Discharge
Depth 100%
Discharge
Depth 50%
9.60V
30
100
60
10.2V
1
min.
0
0
Retention Capacity (%)
Discharge Time vs. Discharge Current
Ambient Temperature 20C (68F)
100
Discharge Time
Retention Capacity (%)
Life Characteristics in Stand-By Use
Discharge
Depth 30%
1. Discharge Current 0.2C (Final Voltage 1.7V/Cell)

2. Charge Current: 0.1C
3. Ambient Temperature: 20oC to 25oC (68oF to 77oF)
0.9
1.8 3.6
9
18
Discharge Current (A)
36
Physical Dimensions: in. (mm)

Terminals:
200
400
600
800
Number of Cycles
1000
3.00 (76)
8.10V
40
20
40 C (104 F)
o
o
20 C (68 F)
o
o
0 C (32 F)
1200
4.97 (126)
Cycle Applications: Limit initial current to 5.4A. Charge until battery

voltage (under charge) reaches 14.40 to 14.70 volts at 68oF (20oC).
Hold at 14.40 to 14.70 volts until current drops to approximately 180mA.
Battery is fully charged under these conditions, and charger should
either be disconnected or switched to float voltage.
Float or Stand-By Service: Hold battery across constant voltage source of 13.50 to 13.80 volts continuously. When held at this
voltage, the battery will seek its own current level and maintain itself in
a fully charged condition.
7.13 (181)
NOTE: Due to the self-discharge characteristics of this type of battery,

it is imperative that they be charged after 6-9 months of storage, otherwise permanent loss of capacity might occur as a result of sulfation.
SALES & MARKETING

3106 Spring Street
Redwood City, CA 94063 USA
Tel: 650-364-5001 Fax: 650-366-3662
national-sales@power-sonic.com
PRINTED IN U.S.A.
PS-12180 F
6.59 (167)
CHARGING
PS-12180 NB
Tolerances are +/- 0.04 in. (+/- 1mm) and +/- 0.08 in. (+/- 2mm) for height dimensions.
All data subject to change without notice.
ISO9001-2000
FM39170
www.power-sonic.com
CUSTOMER SERVICE
7550 Panasonic Way
San Diego, CA 92154 USA
Tel: 619-661-2030 Fax: 619-661-3648
customer-service@power-sonic.com
11/04 1M
HFC-125 CLEAN AGENT

APPLICATION/DESCRIPTION
HFC-125 fire suppression agent is an environmentally acceptable replacement for Halon 1301. HFC-125 has a zero
ozone depleting potential, a low global warming potential, and a short atmospheric lifetime. It is particularly useful
where an environmentally acceptable agent is essential, where clean-up of other media presents a problem, where
weight versus suppression potential is a factor, where an electrically non-conductive medium is needed, and where
people compatibility is an overriding factor. HFC-125 can be used to protect a wide range of applications from
sensitive electrical equipment to industrial applications. Consult the current NFPA Standard 2001 and/or ISO 14520
for specific applications. HFC-125 fire suppression agent is used with Fikes total flooding systems.
HFC-125 is an odorless, colorless, liquefied compressed gas. (See Physical Properties Table for additional information).
It is stored as a liquid and dispensed into the hazard as a colorless, electrically non-conductive vapor that is clear
and does not obscure vision. It leaves no residue and has acceptable toxicity for use in occupied spaces at design
concentration. HFC-125 extinguishes a fire by a combination of chemical and physical mechanisms. HFC-125 does not
displace oxygen and therefore is safe for use in occupied spaces without fear of oxygen deprivation.
PERFORMANCE
HFC-125 is an effective fire extinguishing agent that can be used on many types of fires. It is effective for many surface
fires and most solid combustible materials.
On a weight-of-agent basis, HFC-125 is a very effective gaseous extinguishing agent. The minimum design
concentration for normal Class A combustibles protecting a total flood application is 8%, in accordance with NFPA
2001 and 8.7%, in accordance with ISO.
SPECIFICATION
HFC-125 is of high organic purity and essentially residue-free, meeting the following quality specifications:
Purity, % by weight: 99.0 Min.
Moisture, ppm by weight: 10 Max.
Acidity, ppm by weight, expressed as HCl: 0.1 Max.
Residue, % by volume: 0.01 Max.
TOXICITY
The toxicology of HFC-125 compares favorably with that of other suppression agents. The LC50 of HFC-125 is
greater than 700,000 ppm. HFC-125 has been evaluated for cardiac sensitization via test protocols approved by the
United States Environmental Protection Agency. Test results show that cardiac tolerance to HFC-125 is much higher
than that of Halon 1301 and will be acceptable for safe use in occupied space protection.
HFC-125 will decompose to form halogen acids when exposed to open flames. The formation of these acids is
minimized by using Fike early warning detection systems and proper system installation. When properly applied and
installed, the generation of these by-products by HFC-125 is minimal.
APPROVALS
HFC-125 complies with NFPA Standard 2001 - current edition. Fike ECARO-25 systems are Factory Mutual approved
and UL listed for Clean Agent Fire Suppression Systems.
UL Listed - Ex 4623
FM Approved - 3014476
Form No. C.1.12.01-2
PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
Chemical Name/Formula
Pentafluoroethane / CHF2CF3
CAS Number
354-33-6
European Classification Number
EC-No.: 206-5578
Molecular Weight
120.02
Vapor Density @ 25C (77F) and atm, kg/m3 (lb/ft3)
4.982 m3 (0.3111)
Vapor Pressure, Saturated @ 25C (77F), bar (psia)
13 bar (200.4)
Boiling Point, 1 atm, C (F)
-48.14 (-54.7)
Freezing Point, C (F)
-103 (-153)
Solubility in Water in FE-25 @ 25C (77F), ppm
700
Critical Temperature, C (F)
66.25 (151.25)
Critical Pressure, bar (psia)
36 (526.6)
Critical Volume, cc/mole
210
Critical Density, kg/m3 (lb/ft3)
571.9 (35.70)
Specific Heat, Liquid (CP) @ 25C (77F), KJ/Kg- C (Btu/lbF)
1.37 (0.327)
Specific Heat, Vapor (CP) @ 25C (77F) KJ/Kg- C (Btu/lbF) and 1 atm
0.809 (0.193)
Heat of Vaporization @ Boiling Point KJ/Kg (Btu/lb)
164.4 (70.7)
Thermal Conductivity, Liquid @ 25C (77F), W/m- C (Btu/hr-ftF)
0.0652 (0.0377)
Thermal Conductivity, Vapor @ 25C (77F), W/m- C (Btu/hr-ftF)
0.0166 (0.0096)
Viscosity, Liquid @ 25C (77F), cP (lb/ft-hr)
0.137
Viscosity, Vapor @ 25C (77F), cP (lb/ft-hr)
0.013
Ozone Depletion Potential
Global Warming Potential (based on a 100-yr horizon relative to CO2)
2800
Estimated Atmospheric Lifetime*
32.6 years
Inhalation Exposure Limit (AEL-8 and 12hr. TWA), ppm**
1000
* Second Assessment Report (1995)- Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC).

** The acceptable exposure limit (AEL) is the 8-hr time weighted average (TWA) workplace exposure limit established by DuPont.

Form No. C.1.12.01-2 February, 2008 Specifications are subject to change without notice.
AGENT STORAGE CONTAINERS WITH ECARO-25

ECARO-25 is also known by its ASHRAE designation HFC-125
DESCRIPTION
Fike Clean Agent Containers are used in fire extinguishing systems to store the
Clean Agent until a fire develops and the agent must be released. The Clean
Agent is retained in the container by a Impulse Valve assembly which contains a
fast-acting rupture disc. The disc will be ruptured, and the Clean Agent released,
through the operation of an actuator by an electric signal that is automatically,
manually or pneumatically controlled.
Fike Clean Agent Containers have passed extensive testing by Factory Mutual
and Underwriters Laboratory and are used in installations where 4 to 836 pounds
(2.0 to 379.5 kg) of HFC-125 agent is required. Clean Agent containers can be
filled in 1 pound (0.5 kg) increments to their maximum capacity.
SPECIFICATION
Fill Range:
Fill Increments:
Container Super - Pressurization Level:
Container Storage Temperature Limitation:
25 to 56 lbs/ft3 (400 to 897 kg/m3)

1.0 lbs (0.5 kg)
360 psig at 70F (24.8 bar at 21C)
after filling with dry nitrogen
32F (0C) - minimum, 120F (48.9C) - maximum
Note: If container temperatures exceeding 120F (48.0C), valve will open automatically, this also fulfills the pressure relief
valve requirements in accordance with DOT regulations
Container Construction:
Paint Options:
Container Ratings:
Actuation Methods:
Carbon Steel Alloys

Baked enamel finish white (default) or red
DOT 4BW500
TC 4BWM534
Electric/Pneumatic/Manual
APPROVALS
UL Listed
FM Approved
Part of Manual: P/N 06-431
Form No. IV.1.05.01-2 (Rev 2 / January, 2012) Page 1 of 7
CONTAINER DATA/SPECIFICATIONS
Container
Size
Lb. (L)
P/N
Fill range
Minimum
Maximum
lbs. (kg)
lbs. (kg)
Valve Size
Tare
Weight
in. (mm)
1
(25)
Dimensions (approximate)
Mounting
Position
Diameter
Height
lbs. (kg)
in. (mm)
in. (mm)
11
(5.0)
4.2
(102)
16.2
(411.5)
Upright
(Valve Up)
5
(2)
70-272
10
(4)
70-273
4
(2.0)
8
(3.5)
1
(25)
15
(6.8)
4.2
(102)
27.24
(691.9)
Upright
(Valve Up)
20
(8.5)
70-263
8
(3.5)
16
(7.5)
1
(25)
21
(9.5)
7.0
(178)
22.50
(571.5)
Upright Horizontal
35
(15)
70-264
14
(6.5)
30
(13.5)
1
(25)
31
(14.5)
7.0
(178)
33.75
(857.3)
Upright Horizontal
60
(27)
70-265
25
(11.5)
54
(24.5)
1
(25)
52
(23.6)
10.75
(273)
28.13
(714.4)
Upright Horizontal
100
(44)
70-266
39
(18.0)
87
(39.0)
1
(25)
77
(34.9)
10.75
(273)
39.63
(1006.5)
Upright
(Valve Up)
150/150i
(61)
70-267
54
(24.5)
120
(54.5)
3
(80)
150
(68.0)
20.0
(508)
24.25
(616.0)
Upright/Inverted
215
(88)
70-268
78
(35.5)
173
(78.5)
3
(80)
155
(70.3)
20.0
(508)
30.13
(765.2)
Upright
(Valve Up)
375
(153)
70-269
136
(61.5)
302
(137.0)
3
(80)
225
(102.1)
20.0
(508)
43.38
(1101.7)
Upright
(Valve Up)
650
(267)
70-270
236
(107.0)
528
(239.5)
3
(80)
385
(174.6)
24.0
(610)
50.50
(1282.7)
Upright
(Valve Up)
1000
(423)
70-271
374
(169.5)
836
(379.5)
3
(80)
550
(249.5)
24.0
(610)
71.88
(1825.6)
Upright
(Valve Up)
4 (2.0)
ITEMS SUPPLIED WITH CONTAINER ASSEMBLY

Item
Number
Description
Data
Sheet
Victaulic Coupling & Nipple
IV.1.19.01
Impulse Valve
IV.1.14.01
Pressure Gauge
IV.1.13.01
Liquid Level Indicator (LLi)
C.1.40.01
LLi Boss (see note 1)
n/a
Nameplate (see note 2)
n/a
Siphone Tube (see note 3)
n/a
Mounting Straps & Brackets
IV.1.18.01
Notes:
1) 100 thru 1000 lb. (44 thru 423 L) containers are equipped with a
LLi Boss.
2) Fike nameplate provides the information that is specific to each
container: Assembly and serial number of the container, weight
information: tare, gross and agent and installation, operation and
safety information. All containers filled either by the factory or by
an Approved Initial Fill Station are provided with a name plate
bearing the UL & FM markings.
3) Fike Clean Agent containers [except the 150i (Inverted)] are
equipped with a siphon tube. The 20, 35 & 60 lb.
containers have bent siphon tubes and the 5, 10 and 100
1000 lb. containers have straight siphon tubes. All
containers with siphon tubes can be mounted upright. The
20, 35 & 60 lb containers can also be mounted horizontally.
The 150 container can only be mounted upright and the 150i
can only be mounted inverted.
OPTIONAL ITEMS FOR CONTAINER

The following container accessory items must be ordered separately.
ACTUATION COMPONENTS
Electric / Manual Actuation Impulse Valve Operator (IVO) (For detailed information, refer to the IVO Data
Sheet IV.1.09.01)
Pneumatic Actuation Impulse Valve Pneumatic Operator (IVPO) (For detailed information, refer to the IVPO Data
Sheet IV.1.10.01)
ACTUATION METHODS
Clean Agent containers with an Impulse Valve can be actuated by the following methods:
Method 1 Electric Actuation Single Container System w/ IVO & IRM
Method 2 Electric Actuation Multi-Containers System w / IVO & IRM
Method 3 Electric & Pneumatic Actuation Two Container System w/ IVO & IVPO
Method 4 Electric & Pneumatic Actuation Multi Container System w/ IVO & IVPO
For detailed information on actuation methods, refer to the Impulse Valve Operator (IVO) data sheet IV.1.09.01.
These devices provide the force required to extend a pin that will open the rupture disc, allowing the agent to be released
from the container.
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH

The Low Pressure Switch provides a means to continuously
monitoring the container pressure for a low-pressure condition.
If the pressure inside the container drops below 288 psig (1986 kPa),
the switch contacts will transfer and invoke a trouble indication on
the control panel.
The Low Pressure Switch (P/N 02-12533) has a single pole,
double-throw switch that can be wired for normally open or
normally closed.
For detailed information, refer to the Low Pressure Switch
Data Sheet IV.1.13.01.
INSTALLATION
The system installation must comply with the requirements of this manual; NFPA 2001, latest edition; all applicable local
codes, regulations, and standards and the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ).
Warning: DO NOT start system installation until the final design of the total system has been verified using Fikes Engineered Flow Calculation.
Warning: The Actuator shall always be the last component installed on a Fike Clean Agent Fire Suppression system to avoid
accidental discharge.
Factors to Consider - Container Location
Mounting Surface:
Container brackets must be mounted securely to solid load-bearing surfaces that will support the
container load.
Some installations may require additional mounting support not supplied by Fike.
Environmental Effects:
Container(s) should be located in clean, dry, and relatively vibration-free areas.
Avoid aisle ways and other high traffic areas where physical damage or tampering is more likely.
Container(s) should never be mounted where the container could potentially be splashed with, or
submerged in any liquid.
Do not locate containers where they would be subject to physical damage, exposure to corrosive
chemicals, or harsh weather conditions.
Temperature Range:
Container locations must be between 32F (0C) to 120F (48.9C)
Temperatures outside of this range may result in the system not supplying the desired quantity of
agent or accidental discharge.
Serviceability:
In general, the larger the container, the more difficult it will be to remove it from the system for
maintenance and service.
However, smaller containers that are located in a sub-floor space, under a computer bank, or
above the ceiling over the same computer bank can be difficult as well.
Floor Space:
Consideration should be given to the space available to install the container(s).
For example, a 900 lb. (408 kg) system could be stored in (2) 650 lb. (267 L) containers located on
the floor.
However, if floor space is a problem, the system could be designed to utilize (6) 150i lb. (61 L)
Inverted Containers mounted on the wall(s).
Factors to Consider - Container Location (continued)

Floor Loading:
Floor loading must be considered when selecting a container location.
The floor must be able to support the total weight of the Fike container(s) as they are moved
into position. Consult raised floor manufacturer for floor loading limitation.
The following guidelines are recommended:
Raised floor loading is a function of the manufacturers load specification and the
positioning of the container(s) on the raised floor grid.
Note: Fike cannot assume responsibility for determining the suitability of a particular raised
floor system; the following does provide information to help determine installation
requirements.
When clean agent containers are located on a raised floor, floor integrity must be considered
to determine if the type of tile and vertical floor support can handle the increased load. If
necessary additional floor supports can be added.
Option:
To help distribute the container weight over a greater area, a steel plate can be placed under
the container(s), sized to span multiple floor supports. If container spans multiple floor tiles,
add additional floor supports (Minimum of 4 floor supports, 1 per corner, must be used).
Excessive floor loading may require relocating the container(s) to a more suitable location.
For floor loading information refer to Table 1 or to Fikes ECARO-25 Flow Calculation program
for container size and actual fill weight being supplied.
Container Floor
Loading
lbs/ft2 (kg/m2)
Container Floor
Area w/ Plate
1/4: x 2 x 2 plate
(6.4mm x 0.6m x
0.6m plate)
ft2 (m2)
Container w/
Plate Floor
Loading
lbs/ft2 (kg/m2)
see note 2
3.14 (0.29)
441 (2166)
4.0 (0.36)
352 (1773)
3.14 (0.29)
291 (1431)
4.0 (0.36)
234 (1181)
527 (239)
2.18 (0.20)
242 (1195)
4.0 (0.36)
137 (692)
215 (88)
328 (148)
2.18 (0.20)
150 (740)
4.0 (0.36)
88 (439)
150 (61)
283 (128)
2.18 (0.20)
130 (640)
4.0 (0.36)
76 (384)
100 (44)
164 (74)
0.63 (0.06)
260 (1233)
4.0 (0.36)
47 (234)
60 (27)
106 (48)
0.63 (0.06)
168 (800)
4.0 (0.36)
32 (162)
35 (15)
51 (23)
0.27 (0.03)
189 (927)
4.0 (0.36)
18 (92)
20 (8.5)
37 (17)
0.27 (0.03)
137 (685)
4.0 (0.36)
15 (76)
10 (4)
23 (11)
0.10 (0.009)
230 (1222)
4.0 (0.36)
11 (59)
5 (2)
15 (7)
0.10 (0.009)
150 (778)
4.0 (0.36)
9 (48)
Container Size
lb. (L)
Total Container
Weight
lbs. (kg)
see note 1
Container Floor
Area
ft2 (m2)
1000 (423)
1386 (628)
650 (267)
913 (41)
375 (153)
Notes:
1) Total container weight is based on container tare weight + maximum fill weight
2) Total container weight + 22.5 lbs (10.2 kg) added for 1/4 x 2 x 2 (6.4mm x 0.6m x 0.6m) plate used to calculate
container with plate floor loading
RECHARGE ITEMS 1 (25) & 3 (80) VALVE (Must Order Separate)

After a system has been discharged, the following items must be replaced before a container can be recharged. For a detailed
procedure on recharging a Fike container w/ an Impulse Valve refer to Fikes Recharge Manual (p/n 06-290).
Item
1 (25mm) Recharge Kit 3 (80mm) Recharge Kit

(p/n 85-048 includes the
(p/n 85-047) includes
following:
the following:
Description
Part Number
Part Number
Friction Ring
70-2060
70-2063
Disc Assembly
70-247
70-248
O-Ring
02-11987
02-11989
Valve Core-Fill Port (not shown)
02-4161
Reconditioning Instructions (not shown)
Note:
02-4161
06-567
1 Recharge Kit is used on 5, 10, 20, 35, 60 & 100 lb. (2, 4, 8, 15, 27 & 44 L) containers
3 Recharge Kit is used on 150, 150i, 215, 375, 650 & 1000 lb. (61, 61i, 88, 153, 267 & 423 L) containers

Form No. IV.1.05.01-2 January, 2012 Specifications are subject to change without notice.
ECARO-25 ENGINEERED NOZZLES
DESCRIPTION
The function of the Fike Engineered Discharge Nozzle in a fire extinguishing system
is to distribute the Clean Agent in a uniform, pre-determined pattern and concentration.
The nozzles are designed to complete the discharge of Clean Agent in 10 seconds or
less when installed within the design limitations of the Fike Design Manual and the Fike
Flow Calculation computer program.
Fike Engineered Discharge Nozzles are available in sizes of: 3/8 (10mm) through 2
(50mm). Each nozzle is available in 180 and 360 degree discharge patterns.
The Discharge Nozzle size refers to the size of Schedule 40 or 80 steel pipe to
which it can be connected. The nozzle discharge orifices are drilled perpendicular
to the center line of the threads and discharge on a horizontal axis.
Nozzle orifices are available in a wide range of sizes to provide accurate clean agent flow results. All nozzles have been tested
for their ability to discharge the clean agent under extreme conditions.
Nozzle orifice drilling must be done at the Fike factory only after As-Built calculations of the installed piping system(s)
have been performed, using the ECARO-25 Flow Calculation computer program.
The Fike Discharge Nozzle used shall be Factory Mutual (FM) approved and Underwriters Laboratory (UL) listed.
ARCHITECT SPECIFICATIONS
The nozzle used to disperse Clean Agent shall be a Fike Series 80 nozzle. The nozzle shall be available in 3/8 (10mm)
through 2 (50mm) sizes.. Each size shall be available in both 180 and 360 degree dispersion patterns. The nozzle used
shall have pipe threads that correspond to the nozzle size. All nozzles shall have an orifice size determined by the FM
approved and UL listed ECARO-25 Flow Calculation Program. All nozzle orifice drilling shall be performed by the
manufacturer.
APPROVALS
UL Listed - Ex4623
ULC Listed - CEx1136
Form No. IV.1.07.01

NOZZLE SIZE AND AREA COVERAGE
Nozzle Size - 3/8 (10 mm)
Nozzle Size - 1/2 - 2 (15 - 50 mm)
Nozzle Type
Radius R
Dimensions
ft. (m)
Ceiling Height Range

ft. (m)
Nozzle Type
Radius R
Dimensions
ft. (m)
Ceiling Height Range

ft. (m)
180
22.75 (6.93)
1.0 to 16.0 (0.3 to 4.9)
180
45.67 (13.92)
1.0 to 16.0 (0.3 to 4.9)
360
14.5 (4.5)
1.0 to 16.0 (0.3 to 4.9)
360
29.67 (9.04)
1.0 to 16.0 (0.3 to 4.9)
NOZZLE SIZE
180 NOZZLE
360 NOZZLE
(NPT)
(mm)
PART NUMBER
PART NUMBER
3/8
(10)
80-044
80-036
1/2
(15)
80-045
80-037
3/4
(20)
80-046
80-038
(25)
80-047
80-039
1 1/4
(32)
80-048
80-040
1 1/2
(40)
80-049
80-041
(50)
80-050
80-042
NOTES:
a. The maximum allowable area of coverage includes any area within the radius distance from the nozzle (R dimension) to
the most extreme wall or corner.
b. Nozzles should be located on center line of hazard area.
c. When working with ceiling heights exceeding the values tabulated above, the hazard volume must be broken down into
vertically stacked hazard volumes, with heights less than the maximums shown in the table. It is imperative that unusual
applications of this nature be handled by experienced design engineers and, in most cases, operational tests should be
performed before the system is put into service.
d. 180 and 360 degree nozzles may be placed a maximum of 1 foot (30.5cm) down from the ceiling, and 180 degree nozzles
may be placed a maximum of 1 foot (30.5cm) from the wall.
e. Nozzle threading is NPT.

Form No. IV.1.07.01 April, 2010 Specifications are subject to change without notice.
U.S. and Foreign Patents Pending
HFC-125 INSTRUCTIONAL SIGNS

APPLICATION
Instructional signs must be supplied in order to provide a system in which the function of all devices is easy to
understand. Fike offers several different standard signs to comply with NFPA. All signs are durable plastic and
backed with a strong adhesive for easy installation. Signs are typically installed at all entrances (CAUTION - Room
Protected by HFC-125) and near any device for which the extra explanation is helpful.
HFC-125 RELEASE SIGN
(P/N 02-10312)
HFC-125
EXTINGUISHING
SYSTEM RELEASE
02-10312-N/C
IF ACTIVE, DO NOT ENTER SIGN

(P/N 02-10313)
C AU T IO N
HFC-125 EXTINGUISHING
SYSTEM DISCHARGE ALARM
IF ACTIVE
DO NOT ENTER AREA
AREA PROTECTED BY HFC-125 SIGN

(P/N 02-10314)
CAUTION
THIS AREA IS PROTECTED BY A
HFC-125 EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
DO NOT ENTER AREA DURING
OR AFTER DISCHARGE
KEEP DOOR CLOSED AT ALL TIMES
DESCRIPTION
The purpose of the Release sign is to identify the
manual release station as the place where the HFC-125
System can be manually discharged. It also minimizes the
possibility of the manual station being mistaken for a fire
alarm device. The sign is 4 x 2.25 x 1/16 (102 x 57 x
1.6mm) and is constructed of white plastic with red
lettering. The HFC-125 Release Sign should normally
be located under each HFC-125 manual release station
for quick positive identification.
DESCRIPTION
The purpose of this sign is to alert personnel that the
room is protected with an HFC-125 system and that they
should not enter the area when the alarm sounds. This
sign measures 9 x 6 x 1/16 (229 mm x 152 mm x 1.6
mm) and is white plastic with black lettering and yellow
caution background. The sign should be placed adjacent
to each audible/visual device (typically located outside the
area) used to notify personnel that the ECARO-25 system
has discharged.
DESCRIPTION
The purpose of the Caution Sign is to alert personnel
that the room is protected by an HFC-125 System and
that all doors should be kept closed in the event of fire.
The sign is 10 x 13 x 1/16 (254 x 330 x 1.6mm) and
white plastic with black lettering and yellow caution
background. The Caution Sign should normally be located
on the entrance door(s) leading into any room where
HFC-125 protection is being provided.
Form No. IV.1.08.01

IF ACTIVE, EXIT AREA SIGN

(P/N 02-10309)
CAUTI ON
SYSTEM ALARM
IF ACTIVE
EXIT AREA IMMEDIATELY
ABORT, PUSH AND HOLD SIGN

(P/N 02-10310)
HFC-125
EXTINGUISHING
SYSTEM ABORT
PUSH AND HOLD
02-10310-N/C
MAIN/RESERVE SIGN
(P/N 02-10311)
HFC-125
EXTINGUISHING
SYSTEM
MAIN / RESERVE
DESCRIPTION
The purpose of this sign is to alert personnel that the room
is protected with an HFC-125 system and that they should
exit the area immediately when the the alarm sounds. The
sign is 9 x 6 x 1/16 (229 x 152 x 1.6mm) and is white
plastic with black lettering and yellow caution background. The
System Discharge Sign is located next to or under an audible
or visual alarm inside of the protected space. This
sign, together with the alarm device, will alert personnel when
HFC-125 agent has been discharge and allow them to take
appropriate action
DESCRIPTION
The purpose of the Abort Sign is to identify the presence of
the HFC-125 System Abort Station. The sign is 4 x 2.25 x
1/16 (102 x 57 x 1.6mm) and is constructed of white plastic
with red lettering. The System Abort Station is designed to
provide a manual means by which the HFC-125 system
actuation circuit may be interrupted. The System Abort Sign
should be located next to each HFC-125 Abort Station for
quick positive identification.
DESCRIPTION
The purpose of Main/Reserve Sign is to identify the presence
of the HFC-125 Main/Reserve Switch Station. The sign is
4 x 2.25 x 1/16 (102 x 57 x 1.6mm) and is constructed of
white plastic with red lettering. The Main/Reserve Sign should
be located under the Main/Reserve Switch for positive
identification. A Main/Reserve Switch is used with systems
that incorporate main and reserve (back up) HFC-125 Agent
storage.
02-10311-N/C

IMPULSE VALVE OPERATOR (IVO) KIT
DESCRIPTION
The Impulse Valve Operator (IVO) provides the means to electrically or
manually activate the Fike Impulse Valve clean agent containers. Upon
activation, a pin is extended with the force required to open the inverted
rupture disc, allowing the agent to be released from the container.
The IVO can be activated either manually by depressing the red button
or electrically via a signal from the fire suppression control panel. Once
activated, the IVO can be reset using the included reset tool.
Fike Clean Agent Containers with Impulse Valve use an Impulse Releasing
Module (IRM) to supervise the agent release circuit wiring (for open and
ground fault conditions) from the container to the control panel. Up to 6
IRMs may be released from a single Fike fire suppression control panel.
An IVO kit is included when ordering an Impulse Valve clean agent container
with electric actuation. The kit includes the following components:
Fike P/N
Description
02-12728
IVO
70-286
Reset Tool
02-12755
Wire Lead (3 long) with connector
10-2748
IRM
SPECIFICATIONS
Normal Supply Voltage:
Electrical Connection:
IVO Material:
Temperature Range:
Impulse Valve Operator
24VDC
0 Amps (for Battery Calculation)
DIN connector w/ Cable & NPT
for conduit connection
Stainless Steel (Body) / Brass (End Cap)
32F to 130F (0C to 54.4C)
APPROVALS
UL Listed - Ex4623
Reset Tool
IRM
Wire Lead with Connector

Form No. IV.1.09.01
ELECTRIC ACTUATION - SINGLE CONTAINER SYSTEM WITH IVO
ELECTRIC ACTUATION - MULTI-CONTAINER SYSTEM WITH IVO
Note: When utilizing electric actuation (IRM) with multiple containers with IVO, the manual strike button on each IVO
must be removed and plastic cap installed. This is to prevent a single container from being discharged in a multiple container
system.
For wiring installation details between Fike Control Panel, IRM and the IVO, reference the Impulse Release Module (IRM)
Product Manual (p/n 06-552).

IMPULSE VALVE
DESCRIPTION
The 1 & 3 Impulse Valves are a rupture disc (metal diaphragm), pressure
operated device that allows the agent to be released from the container and
into the protected enclosure via the associated piping network and discharge
nozzle(s).
Fike Impulse Valves are equipped with four ports:
Agent Discharge Port allows agent release from container and also
fulfills the pressure relief valve requirements in accordance with DOT
regulations.
Agent Fill Port used to fill (refill) and pressurize the container and also
used for the Low Pressure Switch.
Actuator Port used to connect an Impulse Valve Operator (IVO) with
Manual Strike Button for electric and manual actuation of the container
or an Impulse Valve Pneumatic Operator (IVPO) for pneumatic
operation.
Pressure Gauge Port is used to connect a Pressure Gauge that will
monitor internal container pressure, also equipped with an orifice
plug that allows the pressure gauge to be removed safely when the
container is pressurized.
SPECIFICATIONS
Valve Body:
Rupture Disc Assembly:
Brass
Hastelloy C276/316SST
APPROVALS
UL Listed - Ex4623
Form No. IV.1.14.01

(This page is left blank intentionally)

IMPULSE RELEASE MODULE
DESCRIPTION
The Impulse Releasing Module (P/N 10-2748) provides the primary interface
between the supervised releasing circuit(s) of a Fike fire suppression system
and the Impulse Valve Operator (IVO); which is used to release the fire
suppressant agent from an impulse valve container. The IRM is equipped
with three capacitors that receive a constant charging current from the
releasing circuit of the control panel. When fully charged, the module is
capable of firing a single IVO. Upon circuit activation, the output circuit
reverses its output voltage polarity, causing the energy in the capacitors to
be released to the Impulse Valve Operator. Each IRM is equipped with a
red LED to provide positive indication that the module is in the active
(release) state.
Note: The IRM is provided as part of the IVO Kit (P/N 70-279) and does
not need be ordered separately if ordering the kit.
SPECIFICATIONS
+24V Supervisory:
20.0 ma (during capacitor charging)
3.0 ma (after capacitor is charged)
-24V Activated:
-37.0 ma (LED active)
Temperature:
32F to 130F (0 to 54.4C), 93% maximum humidity
Module Wiring:
Control panel to IRM connections are supervised and power-limited
Impulse Valve Operator (IVO) connection is non-supervised and power-limited
Compatible Actuation Devices: 02-12728, Impulse Valve Operator (IVO)
Compatible Releasing Panels: SHP PRO, Cheetah Xi, Cheetah Xi 50 (Note: A maximum of six IRMs, wired in parallel,
can be connected to each panels releasing circuit.)
INSTALLATION
Each Clean Agent container shall be provided with a Fike P/N 10-2748 Impulse Release Module (IRM). The IRM shall be
located at each container and shall be securely mounted in a standard 4 square x 2-1/8 deep UL Listed electrical box.
Install conduit and releasing circuit wiring in accordance with the project drawings and appropriate wiring diagrams. All
wiring must conform to the requirements of NFPA 70 National Electric Code, NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code,
NFPA 2001 - Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems, and the requirements of the Local Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
APPROVALS
UL Listed - S3217
FM Approved
Cheetah Xi
Cheetah Xi 50
SHP PRO
CSFM - pending
MEA - pending
Form No. IV.1.15.01-1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
CLASS B (STYLE Y) WIRING
CLASS A (STYLE Z) WIRING

Form No. IV.1.15.01-1 December, 2010 Specifications are subject to change without notice.
ECARO-25 Flow Calculation Software
Fike
ECARO-25 Flow Calculation Software Version 4.14.0000

Copyright 2002-2012 Fike
UL Ex4623, FM 3014476
Licensed to Ken Baker, Westfire Coastal
Results Printed on 2/20/2014
PROJECT INFORMATION
Project Name:
Larsen Bay Power Upgrade
Project Designer:
KB
Project Location:
Larsen Bay, AK
Project Account:
1002-14 C1
Project Description:
Project Filename:
S:\Drawings\pc100\2014\1002-14 Larsen Bay AK\Calc &
Submittals\Calculations\Larsen Bay C1.125
CUSTOMER INFORMATION
Company Name:
Company Address:
Company Phone:
Company Fax:
Contact Information:
Larsen Bay C1.125
AIDEA / AEA
Larsen Bay. AK
Page 1
Fike
Agent Requirements - Enclosure 0001 (Larsen Bay)

Enclosure Area
Enclosure
Height
Volume Added
Volume
Subtracted
Protected Volume
23.42 ft L X 13.42 ft W
10.17 ft
None
None
3196.39 ft
Design
Concentration
Maximum
Concentration
Minimum
Temperature
Maximum
Temperature
Elevation
Agent Required
11.00 %
11.02 % at 70
F
70 F
70 F
0 ft
125.0 lbs
Nozzle Information - Pipe Network 0001 (Pipe Network 0001)

Nozzle Number
Type
Enclosure Name
Requested Agent
0101
180
Larsen Bay
125.0 lbs
Total Agent Distributed Through Pipe Network: 125.0 lbs
Cylinder Information - Pipe Network 0001 (Pipe Network 0001)

Cylinder Type
Agent Per
Cylinder
Manifold Type
Cylinder
Spacing
Valve to
Manifold
Cylinder to
Exit
70-268 215 lb Upright
1 X 125 lbs
No Manifold
Fill Density
Empty Weight
Floor Area
Floor Loading
40.5 lbs / ft
146 lbs
2.18 ft
124 lbs / ft
Larsen Bay C1.125
Page 2
Fike
Pipe Network Isometric
101
1
215 lb Upright
(125.0 lbs)
Larsen Bay C1.125
Page 3
Fike
Flow Calculation Input Data - Pipe Network 0001 (Pipe Network 0001)
Start
End
Length
Elevation
Select
Pipe Dia
Select
Pipe Sch
2.51 ft
2.51 ft
3 in
SCH 40 T
0.50 ft
0.50 ft
1 in
SCH 40 T
101
19.75 ft
7.25 ft
1 in
SCH 40 T
Larsen Bay C1.125
90
Thru
Side
Union
Equ
Length
Cyl
28.39 ft
Nozz
Type
Select
Agent
Select
Orifice
180
125.0 lbs
0.3480 in
Page 4
Fike
Flow Calculation Output Data - Pipe Network 0001 (Pipe Network 0001)
Start
End
Equ Length
Start Pressure
End Pressure
Flow Rate
Pipe Type
3 -SCH 40
30.90 ft
274 psia
273 psia
12.2 lbs/s
1 -SCH 40
0.50 ft
273 psia
267 psia
12.2 lbs/s
101
1 -SCH 40
30.24 ft
267 psia
197 psia
12.2 lbs/s
Agent Discharged
Orifice Diameter
125.0 lbs
0.3480 in
Flow Calculation Messages

ECARO-25 Flow Calculation Software Version 4.14.0000
Calculation based on fixed nozzle codes and pipe sizes.
Calculation performed on 2/20/2014 7:12:26 AM
System calculated within limits of Fikes UL listing and FM approval
Larsen Bay C1.125
Page 5
Fike
Bill of Materials - Pipe Network 0001 (Pipe Network 0001)

Cylinder List
Qty
Part Number
Cylinder Description
Agent Fill Amount
70-268
215 lb Upright
125 lbs
Nozzle List
Num
Part Number
101
80-047-3480
Nozzle Size
1 -SCH 40
Nozzle Type
Drill Diameter
180
0.3480 in
Pipe List
Qty
Pipe Description
0.50 ft, 1 -SCH 40
0.25 ft, 1 -SCH 40
11.00 ft, 1 -SCH 40
7.50 ft, 1 -SCH 40
1.00 ft, 1 -SCH 40
Fitting List
Qty
Fitting Description
90 Elbow, 1 -SCH 40
Larsen Bay C1.125
Page 6
Fike
System Acceptance Report

Pipe Network Discharge Time
Pipe Network
Discharge
Time
%Agent in Pipe
Network
Pipe
Temperature
0001 - Pipe Network 0001
9.44 s
13.67%
70 F
Enclosure 0001 (Larsen Bay) - Nozzle Performance

Nozzle Number
Orifice Diameter
Agent Requested
Agent Predicted
Nozzle Pressure
101
0.3480 in
125.0 lbs
125.0 lbs
197 psia
Minimum Required
Concentration
Design Concentration
Minimum Predicted
Concentration
Maximum Predicted
Concentration
11.00 %
11.00 %
11.02 % at 70 F
11.02 % at 70 F
Larsen Bay C1.125
Page 7
Larsen Bay C1.125
Fike
Page 8
FACP
RPS
ANN
2A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1E
NOZZLE DETAIL

DEVICE/TANK DETAIL

HFC-125 EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
DO NOT ENTER AREA DURING
OR AFTER DISCHARGE
KEEP DOOR CLOSED AT ALL TIMES
SYSTEM ALARM
IF ACTIVE
EXIT AREA IMMEDIATELY
HFC-125
EXTINGUISHING
SYSTEM ABORT
PUSH AND HOLD
IF ACTIVE
DO NOT ENTER
HFC-125
EXTINGUISHING
SYSTEM RELEASE
CHEETAH Xi 50 CONTROL PANEL
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
10
9 10 11 12 13 14
10
10 11 12 13 14

Larsen Bay Fire O&amp;M

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Larsen Bay Fire O&amp;M

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

22651 83rd Ave.

Ecaro Clean Agent

Operation and Maintenance Manual

O&M Table of Contents

Operations & Maintenance Manuals

Ecaro clean agent

Mini monitor module

Clean Agent Equipment

Cheetah XI 50 addressable control panel

Field / Addressable Devices

Control Panel O&M

AS-Built Shop Drawing

NAC-1 Voltage drop

Addressable Fire Suppression

This document may not be reproduced, in whole

Fike provides a one-year limited manufacturer's

Fike is a registered trademark of Fike.

Fike cannot be held liable for any damages

Cheetah Xi 50 Product Manual

Warnings, Cautions, Notes and Tips

Caution Symbol This symbol warns of possible personal injury or equipment

Cheetah Xi 50 Product Manual

SYSTEM OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................. 3

APPENDIX 1 - BATTERY CALCULATION FORM....................................................................................... 119

Cheetah Xi 50 Product Manual

Cheetah Xi 50 Product Manual

Exhibit 5-11 Supervisory Display .........................................................................................................................43

Cheetah Xi 50 Product Manual

Exhibit 6-31 IR Communication Display .............................................................................................................. 75

Cheetah Xi 50 Product Manual

Exhibit 8-3 Device LED & LOC Diagnostic Menu ................................................................................................96

Cheetah Xi 50 Product Manual

1.2 PRODUCT SUPPORT

Document Title: Cheetah Xi 50 Addressable Fire Alarm System Product Manual

Reason for Change

TERMS USED IN THIS MANUAL

Symbol for ohm. Unit of resistance.

Cheetah Xi 50 Product Manual

A system component that originates transmission of a change-of-state condition, such

A circuit or path directly connected to a notification appliance(s). This manual

Cheetah Xi 50 Product Manual

2.0 SYSTEM OVERVIEW

The Fike Cheetah Xi 50 (P/N 10-071) is a state of

Its flexibility provides you the freedom to attach

Smoke & Thermal

Audible and Visual

Waterflow & Sprinkler

Exhibit 2-1 Cheetah Xi 50 Block Diagram

LISTINGS AND APPROVALS

Cheetah Xi 50 Product Manual

AGENCY STANDARDS AND COMPLIANCE

Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes

Factory Mutual (FM) Standards:

To obtain a complete understanding of the specific

the documentation listed below. Please reference

Revision No, Date

Compatible Notification Appliances and Releasing Dev.

Cheetah Xi 50 Product Manual

SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT

Two 24V DC, Class A or B, 1.75A NAC

Address devices with Infrared (IR) tool, similar

2 configurable relays and one Trouble relay

253 user defined zones

80 character, backlit LCD display

Larsen Bay Fire O&M

Larsen Bay Fire O&M